INVITATION FOR BID - University of Central Missouri

INVITATION FOR BID 

TO: 

IFB NO.: 

DATE: 

BUYER: 

PHONE: 

EMAIL: 

9491 

March 1, 2012 

Michael E. Smith 

(660) 543-4001 

msmith@ucmo.edu 

SEALED BID MUST BE RECEIVED NO LATER THAN: 

DATE: March 27, 2012 

TIME: 2:00 p.m. CDST 

RETURN BID TO: 

UNIVERSITY OF CENTRAL MISSOURI 

PROCUREMENT OFFICE, GENERAL SERVICES BUILDING 

102 W. SOUTH STREET 

WARRENSBURG, MO 64093 

PROMPT PAYMENT TERMS: _________% ___________DAYS NET________DAYS 

NICKERSON HALL REFURBISH 


Prospective bidders are hereby invited to submit their bid to provide all labor, equipment, tools and operations 

necessary for Nickerson Hall Refurbish as per the drawings and specifications in this Invitation for Bid. 

MANDATORY PRE-BID CONFERENCE: All prospective bidders are hereby invited to attend the 

MANDATORY pre-bid conference to be held on Tuesday, 

March 13, 2012 at 10:00 a.m. in the Procurement Office 

Conference Room, 102 West South Street, Warrensburg, MO 

64093. 

COMPLETION: 

The desired completion date for this project shall be no later than 5:00 p.m. CDST 

on Friday, August 3, 2012. 

IMPORTANT: 

Bid may not be accepted if the number is not designated on the outside of the envelope. 

Buyer of Record: 

Michael E. Smith

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 

SECTION 00011 – PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 

INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 

00001 Project Manual – Table of Contents 

DIVISION 0 – BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT FORMS 

000010 Invitation To Bid 

000107 Professional Certifications 

000110 Instruction to Bidders 

000111 General Conditions 

000112 Construction Schedule – 1 page 

000850 Regulation Support Documents 

Attachment “A” Proposal Form” - 1 page 

Contractors Qualifications – 2 pages 

MBE/WBE Compliance Evaluation Form – 1page 

MBE/WBE Eligibility Determination Form – 3 pages 

MBE/WBE Eligibility Determination Form for Joint Ventures – 4 pages 

Application for Waiver – 2pages 

Affidavit for Affirmative Action – 1 page 

Affidavit of Work Authorization - 1 page 

Prevailing Wage Rates 

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

011000 SUMMARY 

012200 UNIT PRICES 

012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEEDURES 

012550 SUBSTITUTION FORM 

012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEEDURES 

013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 

Electronic Data Transfer Agreement 

013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 

014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 

014200 REFERENCES 

015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 

016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 

017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 

Gould Evans Associates, LC 

University of Central Missouri – Nickerson Hall Refurbish 

Printed Date: 02/28/2012 Project No. 0211-2170


DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 

024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 

042200 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 

DIVISION 5 - METALS 

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 

061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 

062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 

064116 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 

081213 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 

081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 

081433 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 

083313 COILING COUNTER DOORS 

087100 DOOR HARDWARE 

088000 GLAZING 

088300 MIRRORS 

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 

092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 

092900 GYPSUM BOARD 

093000 TILING 

095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 

096513 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 

096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 

096813 CARPET TILE 

099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 

099600 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS 

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 

102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 

102800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 

113100 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 

122113 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 

123530 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 

123623 PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD-COUNTERTOPS 

123661 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 





DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 

220010 GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 

220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 

220515 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 

220523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 

220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 

220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING & EQUIPMENT 

220700 PLUMBING INSULATION 

221100 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING & SPECIALTIES 

221111 MECHANICALLY JOINED PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS 

221300 SANITARY DRAINAGE & VENT PIPING & SPECIALTIES 

224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 

DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL 

230010 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 

230015 ELECTRICAL COORDINATION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 

230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 

230510 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 

230523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 

230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 

230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 

230700 HVAC INSULATION 

232113 HYDRONIC PIPING 

233113 METAL DUCTS 

233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 

233416 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 

233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS & GRILLES 

238500 ELECTRIC HEATING UNITS 

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 

260010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 

260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 

260502 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 

260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 

260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 

260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 

260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 

260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 

262416 PANELBOARDS 

262726 WIRING DEVICES 

265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETYAND SECURITY 

281111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 




PROFESSIONAL SEALS / CERTIFICATIONS 

ARCHITECTURAL: 

I hereby specify that the documents intended to be authenticated by my seal are limited to the 

Specification Sections and Drawing Sheets listed below, and I hereby disclaim any responsibility for all 

other drawings, specifications, estimates, reports or other documents or instruments relating to or 

intended to be used for any part or parts of the architectural project unless such documents bear my 

signed and dated seal. 

Specification Sections 

011000 012200 012500 012550 012600 013100 

013300 014000 014200 015000 016000 017419 

024119 042200 061053 062023 064116 081213 

081416 081433 083313 087100 088000 088300 

092216 092900 095113 096513 096519 096813 

099123 099600 102113 102800 113100 122113 

123530 123623 123661 

Drawing Sheets 

G001 A001 A002 A051 A052 A100 

A110 A111 A120 A201 A202 

Justin Roth, AIA 




VOLUME I 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

1 

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

PAGE 

Instructions to Bidders 3 thru 13 

ARTICLE: 1. . . . . . Pre-Bid Conference 

2. . . . . . Bidder’s Obligation 

3. . . . . . Interpretations/Substitutions 

4. . . . . . Bids and Bidding Procedure 

5. . . . . . Signing of Bids 

6. . . . . . Receiving Bids 

7. . . . . . Modifications and Withdrawal of Bid 

8. . . . . . Statement of Bidder’s Qualifications 

9. . . . . . Award of Contract 

10. . . . . Contract Security 

11. . . . . List of Subcontractors 

12. . . . . Minority Business Enterprise/Women Business Enterprise (MBE/WBE) 

Participation 

13. . . . . Exemption of Missouri Sales/Use Tax 

14. . . . . Statutory Preference 

General Conditions 14 thru 42 

ARTICLE: 1 .......... Definitions 

2 .......... Drawings and Specifications 

3 .......... Rights and Responsibilities of Owner and Designer 

4 .......... Inspection of Work 

5 .......... Compliance with Laws, Permits, Regulations and Inspections 

6 .......... Nondiscrimination in Employment 

7 .......... Anti-Kickback 

8 .......... Patents and Royalties 

9 .......... Duties of Contractor 

10 ........ Bonds 

11 ........ Commencement and Completion of Work 

12 ........ Liquidated Damages/Substantial Completion 

13 ........ Progress and Scheduling 

14 ........ Superintendence 

15 ........ Shop Drawings 

16 ........ Samples, Tests and Certificates 

17 ........ Materials and Workmanship 

18 ........ Insurance 

19 ........ Separate Contracts and Cooperation 

20 ........ Subcontracts 

21 ........ Assignment of Contract 

22 ........ Indemnification 

23 ........ Changes in Work 

24 ........ Payment to Contractors 

25 ........ Partial Occupancy/Substantial Completion 

26 ........ Disputes and Disagreements 

27 ........ Termination or Suspension for Cause 

28 ........ Record Drawings 

29 ........ Warranties 

30 ........ Operating Instructions and Service Manuals 

31 ........ General Guarantee 

32……..MBE/WBE Requirements 

33……..Substitution and “Or Approved Equal” 

34……...Termination or Suspension for Convenience

The following forms are to be completed and returned with the bidders sealed bid: 

2 

• Bid Bond in the amount of 5% 

• Attachment “A” Proposal Form” - 1 page 

• Contractors Qualifications – 2 pages 

The following forms are to be completed and returned with the bidder’s second submittal (within 24 hours of bid 

opening): 

• MBE/WBE Compliance Evaluation Form – 1page 

• MBE/WBE Eligibility Determination Form – 3 pages 

• MBE/WBE Eligibility Determination Form for Joint Ventures – 4 pages 

• Application for Waiver – 2pages 

• Affidavit for Affirmative Action – 1 page 

• Affidavit of Work Authorization – 1 page 

• Proof of OSHA 10 Training (each individual worker on the job) 

This is a Prevailing Wage Project. (Refer to the attached wage order) 

• Missouri Division of Labor Standards - Annual Wage Order #18 (Johnson County)

PART I 

3 

1. MANDATORY PRE-BID CONFERENCE 

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 

1.1 All prospective bidders are invited to attend the MANDATORY pre-bid conference to be held on 

Tuesday, March 13, 2012 at_10:00 a.m. in the Procurement Office Conference Room, General 

Services Buildings, 102 W. South Street, Warrensburg, MO 64093 for the purpose of clarifying 

any questions or comments pertaining to the plans and specifications. 

2. BIDDERS’ OBLIGATION 

2.1 Bidders must carefully examine the entire site of the work and shall make all reasonable and 

necessary investigations to inform themselves thoroughly as to the facilities available as well as 

to all the difficulties involved in the completion of all work in accordance with the specifications 

and the plans. Bidders are also required to examine all maps, plans and data mentioned in the 

specifications. No plea of ignorance concerning observable existing conditions or difficulties that 

may be encountered in the execution of the work under this contract will be accepted as a excuse 

for any failure or omission on the part of the contractor to fulfill in every detail all of the 

requirements of the contract, nor accepted as a basis for any claims for extra compensation. 

2.2 Under no circumstances will a contractor give his plans and specifications to another contractor. 

Any bid received from a contractor whose name does not appear on the list of bidders having 

been mailed and/or paid for the plans and specifications will be subject to rejection. 

3. INTERPRETATIONS/SUBSTITUTIONS 

3.1 No oral interpretations will be made to any bidder as to the meaning of the plans and 

specifications or the acceptability of alternate products, materials, form or type of construction. 

Every request for interpretation or substitution shall be made in writing and submitted 

with all supporting documents by no later than 2:00 p.m. CDST on Tuesday, March 20, 

1012. The request shall be sent directly to the Buyer of Record (whose name appears on the first 

page of this Invitation for Bid), University of Central Missouri, Procurement Office, 

Warrensburg, MO, 64093 or it may be faxed to the Buyer’s attention at 660-543-8345. Every 

interpretation made to a bidder will be in the form of an addendum and will be sent as promptly 

as practicable to all persons to whom plans and specifications have been issued. All such 

addenda shall become part of the contract documents. 

4. BIDS AND BIDDING PROCEDURE 

4.1 The bid procedure is a two-step submittal process over a 24 hour period. Bidders shall submit all 

first submission forms and accompanying documents by the stated time or their bid will be 

rejected for being non-responsive. If the second submission is not received within the 24 hours of 

bid opening, the entire bid will be rejected for being non-responsive. See the list below and the 

“Table of Contents” for when bid forms are to be submitted. 

4.1.1 Depending on the specific project requirements, the following lists of bid forms and 

times when they are due:

4 

4.1.1.1 First Submittal – due before stated date and time of bid opening. 

4.1.1.1.1 Attachment “A” Bid Form 

4.1.1.1.2 Contractor’s Qualifications 

4.1.1.1.3 Bid Bond 

4.1.1.2 Second Submittal – due within 24 hours of stated date and time of bid 

opening: 

4.1.1.2.1 MBE/WBE Compliance Evaluation Form 

4.1.1.2.2 MBE/WBE Eligibility Determination Form 

4.1.1.2.3 MBE/WBE Eligibility Determination of Joint Ventures 

4.1.1.2.4 MBE/WBE Application of Waiver 

4.1.1.2.5 Affidavit of Work Authorization 

4.1.1.2.6 Affidavit for Affirmative Action 

4.1.1.2.7 Proof of OSHA 10 Training (each individual worker) 

4.1.1.2.8 List of Subcontractors 

4.1 All bids shall be submitted without modification or reservation on the bid form with each space 

properly filled. Bids not on this form will be rejected. 

4.2 All bids shall be accompanied by a bid bond, executed by the bidder and a duly authorized surety 

company, certified check, cashier’s check or bank draft made payable to University of Central 

Missouri, in the amount of five percent (5%) of the greatest amount bid including all alternates. 

Failure of the bidder to submit the full amount required shall be sufficient cause to reject his bid. 

The bidder agrees that the proceeds of the check, draft or bond shall become the property of the 

Owner if for any reason the bidder withdraws his bid after closing or if on notification of award 

refuses or is unable to execute tendered contract, provide an acceptable performance and payment 

bond, provide evidence of required insurance coverage and provide required copies of affirmative 

action plans within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days after such tender. 

4.3 The check or draft submitted by the successful bidder will be returned after the receipt of an 

acceptable performance and payment bond and execution of formal contract. Checks or drafts of 

all other bidders will be returned within a reasonable time after it is determined that the bid 

represented by same will receive no further consideration by Owner. Bid bonds will only be 

returned upon request. 

5. SIGNING OF BIDS

5 

5.1 Bids from a partnership shall be signed in the firm name by at least one partner, or in the firm 

name by Attorney-in-fact. If signed by Attorney-in-fact there shall be attached to the bid a Power 

of Attorney evidencing authority to sign the bid, dated and executed by all partners of the firm. 

5.2 Bids from a corporation shall have the correct corporate name thereon and the signature of an 

authorized officer of the corporation manually written. Title of office held by the person signing 

for the corporation shall appear, along with typed name of said individual. Corporate license 

number shall be provided and, if a corporation organized in a state other than Missouri, a 

certificate of Authority to do business in the State of Missouri shall be attached. 

5.3 The Contractor understands and agrees that by signing the (IFB/RFP/RFQ or Contract), they 

certify the following: 

5.3.1 The contractor shall only utilize personnel authorized to work in the United States in 

accordance with applicable federal and state laws. This includes but is not limited to the 

Illegal Immigration Reform and Immigrant Responsibility Act (IIRIRA) and INA Section 

274A. 

5.3.2 If the contractor is found to be in violation of this requirement or the applicable laws of 

the state, federal and local laws regulations, and if the State of Missouri has reasonable 

cause to believe that the contractor has knowingly employed individuals who are not 

eligible to work in the United States, the state shall have the right to cancel the contract 

immediately without penalty or recourse and suspend or debar the contractor from doing 

business with the state. 

5.3.3 The contractor agrees to fully cooperate with any audit or investigation from federal, state 

or local law enforcement agencies. 

6. RECEIVING BIDS 

6.1 Bids are to be presented in sealed envelopes, which shall be plainly marked with project title, bid 

number, bid date and bid time and delivered to the place specified on the first page of this 

Invitation for Bid. Bidders shall be responsible for actual delivery of bids during business hours, 

and it shall not be sufficient to show that a bid was dispatched in time to be received before 

scheduled closing time for receipt of bid. 

6.2 Bidders are cautioned to allow ample time for transmittal of bids by mail or otherwise. If bid is 

mailed, bidder should secure correct information relative to the probable time of arrival and 

distribution of mail at the place where bid is to be received, and make due allowance for possible 

delays. 

6.3 Bidder’s attention is directed to the fact that no bid will be accepted or considered if delivered 

after the specified time for receiving bids. 

6.4 No telephonic, telegraphic, electronic mail, facsimile (FAX), or similar bid transmissions will be 

accepted or allowed. 

6.5 The Owner reserves the right to waive informalities in bids and reject any or all bids. 

7. MODIFICATIONS AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID

7.1 Bidder may withdraw his bid at any time prior to scheduled closing time for receipt of bid, but no 

bidder may withdraw his bid after the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids. 

7.2 Modifications or corrections of previously submitted bids may only be submitted by letter or 

telegram. Modifications or corrections must be clearly marked with bid date, project name and 

bid number and received by the Owner prior to scheduled closing time for receipt of bids in 

accordance with the following provisions: 

7.2.1 To maintain bid confidentiality and insure assignment to the proper bid, any such 

written request must be contained in a sealed envelope which is plainly marked 

“Modification of bid on (project title, bid number and bid date)”. 

7.2.2 Telegrams must be received in written form prior to the bid opening time. Since 

telegrams cannot be marked as in item 7.2.1, the modification or correction instructions 

should be written to protect the confidential nature of the bid. For example: “Decrease 

Base Bid amount by $5,250", not “Change Base Bid to $104,750". The telegram must 

identify the project name and bid number and the bidder. 

7.2.3 No request for modifications or correction of previously submitted bids will be accepted 

by facsimile (FAX) transmission. 

8. STATEMENT OF BIDDER’S QUALIFICATIONS 

8.1 Each bidder must submit as part of his bid, the Contractor’s Qualifications form which is a part 

of this Invitation for Bid. The Owner shall have the right to take such steps as it deems 

necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish 

to the Owner such additional information and data for this purpose as he may request. The right 

is reserved to reject any bid where an investigation or consideration of the information submitted 

by such bidder does not satisfy the Owner that the bidder is qualified to carry out properly the 

terms of the contract documents. 

9. AWARD OF CONTRACT 

9.1 The Owner reserves the right to reject any and/or all bids and further to waive all informalities in 

bidding when deemed in the best interest of the Owner. 

9.1.1 All awards are contingent upon the availability of sufficient funding to complete the 

project, and/or Board of Governor’s approval. 

9.2 The Owner reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with the work, including but 

not by way of limitation, contracts for the furnishing and installation of furniture, equipment, 

machines, appliances and other apparatus. 

9.3 In awarding the contract the Owner may take into consideration the bidder’s skill, facilities, 

capacity, experience, responsibility, previous work record, financial standing, success in 

achieving the MBE/WBE participation goal, where applicable; and, the necessity of prompt and 

efficient completion of work herein described. Inability of any bidder to meet the requirements 

mentioned above may be cause for rejection of his bid. However, no contract will be awarded to 

6

any individual, partnership or corporation, who has had a contract with the State of Missouri 

declared in default within the preceding twelve months. 

7 

9.4 No bid shall be considered binding upon the Owner until the written contract has been properly 

executed, a satisfactory bond has been furnished, evidence of required insurance coverage has 

been received and appropriate affirmative action plan submitted. Failure to execute and return 

the contract and associated documents within the prescribed period of time shall be treated, at 

the option of the Owner, as a breach of bidder’s obligation and the Owner shall be under no 

further obligation to bidder. 

9.5 If the successful bidder is doing business in the State of Missouri under a fictitious name, he 

shall furnish to Owner, attached to the Bid Form, a properly certified copy of the certificate of 

Registration of Fictitious Name from the State of Missouri, and such certificate shall remain on 

file with the Owner. No contract will be awarded by the Owner until such certificate is 

furnished by the bidder. 

9.6 Any successful bidder which is a corporation organized in a state other than Missouri shall 

furnish to the Owner, attached to the Bid Form, a properly certified copy of its current 

Certificate of Authority to do business in the State of Missouri, such certificate to remain on file 

with the Owner. No contract will be awarded by the Owner unless such certificate is furnished 

by the bidder. 

9.7 Any successful bidder which is a corporation organized in the State of Missouri shall furnish at 

its own cost to the Owner, if requested, a Certificate of Good Standing issued by the Secretary of 

State, such certificate to remain on file with the Owner. 

9.8 Section 285-230-234 RSMO 1994, transient employers (out-of-state employers who temporarily 

transact any business in the State of Missouri) may be required to file a bond with the Missouri 

Department of Revenue. No contract will be awarded by the Owner unless the successful bidder 

certifies that he/she has complied with all applicable provisions of Section 285.230-234. 

9.9 RSMo 285.525 and 285.530 require business entities to enroll and participate in a federal work 

authorization program in order to be eligible to receive award of any state contract in excess of 

$5,000. Bidders should submit with their bid an Affidavit of Work Authorization (Section 

004541) along with appropriate documentation evidencing such enrollment and participation. 

Section-004541, Affidavit of Work Authorization is located at, 

http://oa.mo.gov/fmdc/dc/contractorforms.htm Information regarding a Memorandum of 

Understanding which is one form of appropriate documentation located at https://everify.uscis.gov/enroll/.Submittal 

of this form and appropriate documentation is required before 

the award of any contract. In addition the contractor shall be responsible for compliance of these 

requirements by all subcontractors and suppliers at any tier associated with this contract 

10. CONTRACT SECURITY 

10.1 The successful bidder shall furnish a performance/payment bond as set forth in General 

Conditions Article 10 on a condition prior to the Owner executing the contract and issuing a 

notice to proceed. 

11. LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS

8 

11.1 Each bidder should submit as part of his bid, (or within 24 hours of bid opening) a list of 

subcontractors to be used in performing the work. The list must specify the name and address of 

the single designated subcontractor for each category of work listed in the Bid Form. If work 

within a category will be performed by more than one subcontractor, the bidder must provide the 

name and address of each subcontractor and specify the exact portion of the work to be done by 

each. If acceptance/non-acceptance of alternates will affect the designation of a subcontractor, 

the bidder must provide that information for each affected category. 

11.2 Failure to list the bidder’s firm, or a subcontractor for each category of work identified on the 

Bid Form or the listing of more than one subcontractor for any category without designating the 

portion of work to be performed by each may result in rejection of the bid. If the bidder intends 

to perform any of the designated subcontract work with the use of his own employees, the bid 

shall make the fact clear, by listing his own firm for the subject category. 

12. MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE/WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (MBE/WBE) 

PARTICIPATION 

12.1 For bids in amounts greater than or equal to one hundred thousand dollars ($100,000), the 

following provisions shall apply: 

12.1.1 MBE/WBE Percentage Goal: 

a. The bidder shall have as a goal subcontracting not less than five percent 

(5%) of the awarded contract price for work to be performed of 

MBE/WBE(s). 

12.1.2 Computation of MBE/WBE Percent Goal Participation: 

a. The total dollar value of the work granted to the MBE/WBE by the successful 

bidder is counted towards the applicable goal of the entire contract. 

b. A bidder may count toward his/her MBE/WBE goal only expenditures to 

MBE/WBEs that perform a commercially useful function in the work of a 

contract. A MBE/WBE is considered to perform a commercially useful 

function when it is responsible for executing a distinct element of the work 

contract and carrying out its responsibilities by actually performing, managing 

and supervising the work involved. A bidder who is a MBE or WBE may 

count 100% of the contract amount towards the MBE/WBE goal. 

c. A bidder may count toward its MBE/WBE goals expenditures for materials and 

supplies obtained from MBE/WBE suppliers and manufacturers, provided that 

the MBE/WBE assumes the actual and contractual responsibility for the 

provision of the materials and supplies. 

(1) The bidder may count its entire expenditure to a MBE/WBE 

manufacturer. A manufacturer shall be defined as an individual or firm 

that produces goods from raw materials or substantially alters them before 

resale.

9 

(2) The bidder may count sixty percent (60%) of its expenditures to 

MBE/WBE suppliers that are not manufacturers provided that the 

MBE/WBE supplier performs a commercially useful function as defined 

above in the supply process. 

d. A bidder may count towards his/her MBE/WBE goals that portion 

of the total dollar value granted to a certified joint venture equal to 

the percentage of the ownership and control of the MBE/WBE 

partner in the joint venture. 

12.1.3 Certification by bidder of MBE/WBE Subcontractors: 

a. The bidder shall submit his/her bid the information requested in the 

MBE/WBE Compliance Evaluation Form for every MBE/WBE 

subcontractor the bidder intends to use on the contract work. 

b. If the MBE/WBE subcontractor that the bidder proposed to use on 

the project is not certified, the bidder shall submit with his/her bid 

the information requested in the MBE/WBE Eligibility 

Determination Form. The bidder may determine the status of 

certification by referring to the State of Missouri Division of Design 

and Construction's Minority/Women Business Enterprise Directory. 

Additional information, clarifications, etc., regarding the listings in 

the Directory may be obtained by calling the Buyer of Record. 

Also, if the proposed subcontractor is certified as a MBE/WBE firm 

by the federal government, any other state or government agencies 

or any State of Missouri city or county government agencies, the 

bidder shall so note and provide particulars. 

c. If the MBE/WBE subcontractor that the bidder intends to use is a 

joint venture, and one (1) or more co-venturers is not certified as a 

MBE/WBE, the bidder shall submit with his/her bid the information 

requested in the MBE/WBE Eligibility Determination Form for 

Joint Ventures. 

12.1.4 The following information is provided to assist bidders in obtaining 

certification of subcontractors as MBE/WBE(s). 

a. The Commissioner, State of Missouri, Office of Administration, 

shall use, but shall not be limited to the following standards in 

determining whether a firm is owned and controlled by one (1) or 

more minority/woman and is therefore eligible to be certified as a 

MBE/WBE. 

(1) Bona fide membership in a minority group shall be established 

on the basis of the individual's claim that he or she is a 

member of such a minority group and is so regarded by the 

particular minority community. However, the Commissioner 

is not required to accept this claim if he/she determines the 

claim to be invalid.

(2) An eligible MBE/WBE under these regulations shall be an 

independent business. The ownership and control by the 

minority/woman shall be real, substantial, and continuing and 

shall go beyond the pro forma ownership of the firm as 

reflected in its ownership documents. The minority/woman 

shall enjoy the customary incidents of ownership and shall 

share in the risks and profits commensurate with ownership 

interests, as demonstrated by examination of the substance 

rather than form of the arrangement. Recognition of other 

business as a separate entity for tax or corporate purposes is 

not necessarily sufficient for recognition as a MBE/WBE. In 

determining whether a potential MBE/WBE is an independent 

business, the Commissioner shall consider all relevant factors, 

including the date the business was established, the adequacy 

of its resources for the work of the construction contract, and 

the degree to which financial, equipment leasing and other 

relationships with non-minority firms vary from industry 

practices. 

(3) The MBE/WBE owners shall also possess the power to direct 

or cause the direction of the management and policies of the 

firm and to make the day-to-day as well as major decisions on 

matters of management, policy and operation. The firm shall 

not be subject to any formal or informal restrictions which 

limit the customary discretions of the minority/woman 

owner(s). There shall be no restriction through, for example, 

bylaw provisions, partnership agreements, or charter 

requirements for cumulative voting rights or otherwise that 

prevent the minority/woman owner(s) from making a business 

decision of the firm without the cooperation or vote of any 

owner who is not a minority/woman. 

(4) If the owners of the firm who are not minorities/women are 

disproportionately responsible for the operation of the firm, 

then the firm is not controlled by minorities/women and shall 

not be considered MBE/WBE within the meaning of these 

regulations. Where the actual management of the firm is 

contracted out to individuals other than the owner, those 

persons who have the ultimate power to hire and fire the 

managers can, for the purposes of these regulations, be 

considered as controlling the business. 

(5) All securities which constitute ownership and/or control of a 

corporation for purposes of establishing it as a MBE/WBE 

under these regulations shall be held directly by 

minorities/women. No securities held in trust, or by any 

guardian for a minor, shall be considered as held by 

minority/women in determining the ownership or control of a 

corporation. 

10

(6) The contributions of capital or expertise by the 

minorities/women to acquire their interests in the firm shall be 

real and substantial. Examples of insufficient contributions 

include a promise to contribute capital, a note payable to the 

firm or its owners who are not minorities/ women, or the mere 

participation as an employee rather than as a manager. 

(7) In addition to the standards set out in this section, the 

Commissioner shall give special consideration to the following 

circumstances in determining eligibility: 

a. A joint venture is eligible under these regulations if the 

minority/woman partner of the joint venture meets the 

standards for eligible minorities/women set forth above 

and the minority/woman partner is responsible for a 

clearly defined portion of the work to be performed and 

shares in the ownership, control, management 

responsibilities, risks and profits of the joint venture. 

b. Once certified, a MBE/WBE shall update its 

submission annually. Anytime there is a change in 

ownership or control of the firm, the MBE/WBE shall 

update the previously filed information requested in the 

MBE/WBE Eligibility Determination Form. 

c. Failure of a certified MBE/WBE to update or submit 

this information shall disqualify the firm or individual 

from further participation as a MBE/WBE until such 

time that the information is filed by the firm or 

individual and approved by the Commissioner. 

d. If an appeal has been made and the Commissioner has 

denied certification, that decision shall be final for that 

contract and other contracts being let by the 

Commissioner at the time of the denial of certification. 

MBE/WBE and joint venture denied certification may 

correct deficiencies in their ownership and control and 

apply for certification only for future contracts. 

12.1.5 Waiver of MBE/WBE Participation: 

a. The bidder is required to make a good faith effort to locate and 

contract with MBE/WBEs. If a bidder has made a good faith effort 

to secure the required MBE/WBEs and has failed, he/she may submit 

with his/her bid the information requested in Application for 

MBE/WBE Participation Waiver. The Owner will review the 

bidder's actions as set forth in the bidder's Application for Waiver, 

and any other factors deemed relevant by the Owner, to determine if 

a good faith effort has been made to meet the applicable percentage 

11

12 

goal. If the bidder is judged not to have made a good faith effort, the 

bid shall be rejected. 

Bidders who demonstrate that they have made a good faith effort to 

include MBE/WBE participation will be awarded the contract 

regardless of the percent of MBE/WBE participation, provided the 

bid is otherwise acceptable. 

b. In reaching a determination of good faith, the Owner may evaluate, 

but is not limited to, the following factors: 

(1) Attendance at pre-bid meetings to inform bidders and 

MBE/WBEs of contracting and subcontracting opportunities 

and responsibilities associated with MBE/WBE participation; 

(2) Attempts by the bidder to advertise in general circulation trade 

association and minority focus medial concerning 

subcontracting opportunities; 

(3) Attempts to provide written notice to specific MBE/WBEs that 

their services were being solicited, in sufficient time to allow 

for their effective participation; 

(4) Follow-up attempts by the bidder to the initial solicitations(s) 

to determine with certainty whether MBE/WBEs were 

interested. 

(5) The extent to which the bidder divided work into projects 

suitable for subcontracting to MBE/WBEs; 

(6) Whether the bidder provided interested MBE/WBEs with 

sufficiently detailed information about the plans, specifications 

and requirements about the contract. 

(7) Efforts by the bidder to negotiate in good faith with 

MBE/WBEs for specific sub-bids. Documentation should 

include names, addresses, and telephone numbers of firms 

contacted, a description of all information provided the 

MBE/WBEs, and an explanation as to why agreements were 

not reached; 

(8) Reasons for rejecting MBE/WBE's bid; 

(9) The bidder's efforts to locate MBE/WBEs not on the directory 

list and assist MBE/WBEs in becoming certified as such; 

(10) The bidder's initiatives to encourage and develop MBE/WBEs;

13. EXEMPTION OF MISSOURI SALES/USE TAX 

13 

(11) The efforts of the bidder to help the MBE/WBE overcome any 

legal or other barriers impeding the participation of 

MBE/WBEs in the construction contract; 

(12) The availability of MBE/WBEs and the adequacy of the 

bidder's efforts to increase the participation of such businesses 

provided by the persons and organizations consulted by the 

bidder. 

c. The Owner reserves the right to provide bidders the opportunity to 

correct or amplify information concerning MBE/WBE goals. 

13.1 This project shall be bid without State sales and/or use tax included in the bid price. The 

Owner is a political subdivision of the State of Missouri and is exempt from the sales tax on 

purchases paid for out of its funds pursuant to Section 144.062 RSMO. 

13.2 The Owner will provide a Missouri Project Exemption Certificate and a Missouri Tax 

Exemption Letter to the Contractor who will be purchasing tangible personal property for use in 

this project. 

13.2.1 The Contractor shall furnish a completed copy of the exemption certificate, along with 

a copy of the Missouri Tax Exemption Letter, to all subcontractors, and any 

contractors or subcontractors purchasing materials shall present copies of such 

documents to all material suppliers as authorization to purchase, on behalf of the 

Owner, all tangible personal property and materials to be incorporated or consumed in 

the construction of this project and no other on a tax exempt basis. A copy of each 

certificate must be retained by the purchaser for a period of five years. 

14. STATUTORY PREFERENCE 

14.1 By virtue of statutory authority a preference will be given to Missouri labor and to products of 

mines, forests and quarries of the State of Missouri when they are found in marketable 

quantities in the state, and all such materials shall be of the best quality and suitable character 

that can be obtained at reasonable market prices, all as provided for in Section 8.280, Missouri 

Revised Statutes 1978 and Cumulative Supplements. 

14.2 Furthermore, pursuant to Section 34.076 RSMo 1984 Cumulative Supplements, a preference 

shall be given to those persons doing business as Missouri firms, corporations, or individuals, 

or which maintain Missouri offices or places of business, when the quality of performance 

promised is equal or better and the price quoted is the same or less. In addition, in order for a 

nondomiciliary bidder to be successful, his bid must be that same percentage lower than a 

domiciliary Missouri bidder's bid, as would be required for a Missouri bidder to successfully 

bid in the nondomiciliary's state. 

END OF SECTION

PART II 

14 

GENERAL CONDITIONS 

These General Conditions apply to each section of these specifications and must be carefully read by each 

contractor, as all contractors are subject to the provisions contained herein. 

1. DEFINITIONS 

1.1 The term "Contract Administrator" shall refer to the Owner's representative at the work site. 

1.2 The term "Contractor" shall refer to the person, persons, or company who or which enters 

into a contract with the Owner to furnish work under these specifications and drawings. 

1.3 The term "Designer" shall refer to the Architect, Engineer or Consultant of Record. 

1.4 The term "MBE" shall refer to Minority Business Enterprise. 

1.5 The term "Minority" shall refer to the following: 

1.5.1 "Black Americans," which includes persons having origins in any of the black racial 

groups of Africa. 

1.5.2 Hispanic Americans," which includes persons of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Cuban, 

Central or South American or other Spanish culture or origin regardless of race. 

1.5.3 "Native Americans," which includes persons who are American Indians, Eskimos, 

Aleuts or Native Hawaiians. 

1.5.4 "Asian-Pacific Americans," which includes persons whose origins are from Japan, 

China, Taiwan, Korea, Vietnam, Laos, Cambodia, the Philippines, Samoa, Guam, the 

U.S. Trust Territories of the Pacific or the Northern Marianas. 

1.5.5 "Asian-Indian Americans," which includes persons whose origins are from India, 

Pakistan or Bangladesh. 

1.6 The term "Minority Business Enterprise" shall refer to a business concern which is at least 

fifty-one percent (51%) owned by one (1) or more minority as defined in 1.5 above or in the 

case of any publicly-owned fifty-one percent (51%) of the stock of which is owned by one (1) 

or more minority as defined in 1.5 above AND whose management and daily business 

operations are controlled by one (1) or more minority as defined herein. 

1.7 The term "Owner" shall refer to University of Central Missouri. 

1.8 The term "Subcontractor" shall refer to the person, persons or company who contract under, 

or for the performance of part or all of, the contract between the Owner and Contractor. The 

subcontract may or may not be direct with the Contractor. 

1.9 The term "WBE" shall refer to Women Business Enterprise.

1.10 The term "Women Business Enterprise" shall refer to a business concern which is at least 

fifty-one (51%) owned by one (1) or more women or in the case of any publicly-owned 

business at least fifty-one percent (51%) of the stock of which is owned by one (1) or more 

women AND whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one (1) or 

more women. 

1.11 The term "work" shall refer to the labor, material, supplies, plant and equipment required to 

perform and complete the service agreed to by the Contractor in safe, expeditious, orderly and 

workmanlike manner so that the project shall be complete and finished in the best manner 

known to each respective trade. 

2. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 

2.1 Drawings are intended to show general arrangements, design and extent of work and are partly 

diagrammatic. As such, they are not intended to be scaled for roughing-in measurements or to 

serve as shop drawings. 

2.2 Specifications are separated into titled divisions for convenience of reference only and to 

facilitate letting of contracts and subcontracts. The Contractor is responsible for establishing 

the scope of work for subcontractors, which may cross titled divisions. Neither the Owner or 

Designer will establish limits and jurisdiction of subcontracts. 

2.3 Figured dimensions take precedence over scaled measurements and details over smaller scale 

general drawings. 

2.4 In case of discrepancy between drawings and specifications, specifications shall govern. 

Should discrepancies in architectural drawings, structural drawings and mechanical drawings 

occur, architectural drawings shall govern and, in case of conflict between structural and 

mechanical drawings, structural drawings shall govern. 

2.5 Anything shown on drawings and not mentioned in these specifications or vice versa, as well as 

any incidental work which is obviously necessary to complete the project within the limits 

established by the drawings and specifications, although not shown on or described therein, 

shall be performed by the Contractor as a part of his contract. 

2.6 Data concerning lot size, ground elevations, present obstructions on or near the site, locations 

and depth of sewers, conduits, pipes, wires, etc., position of sidewalks, curbs, pavements, etc., 

and nature of ground and subsurface conditions have been obtained from sources the Designer 

and/or Owner believe reliable, although accuracy of such data is not guaranteed. 

2.7 Upon encountering conditions differing materially from those indicated in the contract 

documents, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Designer and/or Contract Administrator 

before such conditions are disturbed. The Designer and/or Contract Administrator shall 

promptly investigate said conditions and report to the Owner, with a recommended course of 

action. If conditions do materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in contract cost or 

time required for completion of any portion of the work, a change order will be initiated as 

outlined in Article 24 of these General Conditions. 

15

2.8 Only work included in the contract documents is authorized, and the Contractor shall do no 

work other than that described therein or in accordance with appropriately authorized and 

approved change orders. 

16 

3. RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF OWNER AND DESIGNER 

3.1 The Owner and/or the Designer acting for the Owner shall give all orders and directions 

contemplated under the contract relative to the execution of the work. The Owner, normally 

represented by the Designer, shall determine the amount, quality, acceptability and fitness of 

kind of work and materials which are to be paid for under this contract. In the event any 

questions shall arise between the parties hereto, relative to the contract or specifications, 

determination or decision of the Owner or his representative shall be a condition precedent to 

the right of the Contractor to receive any money or payment for work under the contract 

affected in any manner or to any extent by such question. 

3.2 The Owner may file a written notice to the Contractor to dismiss forthwith any of his 

subcontractors, superintendents, foremen, workmen, watchmen or other employees whom the 

Owner may deem incompetent, careless or a hindrance to proper or timely execution of the 

work, and Contractor shall comply with such notice as promptly as practicable without 

detriment to the work or its progress. 

3.3 If Contractors refuse to cooperate with the instructions and reasonable requests of other 

Contractors in the overall coordinating of the work, the Owner may take such appropriate 

action and issue such instructions as in his judgment may be required to avoid unnecessary and 

unwarranted delay. 

3.4 If in the judgment of the Owner it becomes necessary at any time to accelerate work, the 

Contractor, when ordered by the Owner in writing, shall cease work at any point and transfer 

his men to such point or points and execute such portions of his work as may be required to 

enable others to hasten and properly engage and carry out their work, all as directed by the 

Owner. 

4. INSPECTION OF THE WORK 

4.1 The Owner's representative's shall at all times have access to the work whenever it is in 

preparation or progress, and Contractors shall provide proper facilities for such access and for 

inspection and supervision. 

4.2 During progress of work the Owner will be represented at the project by the Contract 

Administrator and Designer, whose duty it will be to see that the contract is properly fulfilled. 

4.3 The Contract Administrator's and Designer's inspections are for the purpose of assuring the 

Owner that the drawings and specifications are being properly executed. Although the Contract 

Administrator and the Designer are instructed to confer with the Contractor regarding 

interpretation of drawings and specifications, such assistance shall not relieve Contractor of any 

responsibility for the work. 

4.4 The fact that the Contractor Administrator, Designer or Owner has failed to observe faulty 

work, or work done which is not in accordance with the drawings and specifications, shall not

elieve the Contractor from responsibility for correcting such work without additional 

compensation. 

17 

4.5 The Owner shall have the right to direct the Contractor to uncover any completed work. 

4.5.1 If the Contractor fails to adequately notify the Owner's representatives, as required by 

the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall upon written request uncover the work. 

The Contractor shall bear all costs associated with uncovering and again covering the 

work exposed. 

4.5.2 If the Owner's representatives direct work to be uncovered, which was not otherwise 

required to be inspected, and the work is found to be defective in any respect, no 

compensation shall be allowed for this work. If, however, such work is found to meet 

the requirements of the contract, the actual cost of labor and material necessarily 

involved in the examination and replacement plus 10% shall be allowed the 

Contractor. 

4.6 If the Contractor fails to proceed at once with the correction of rejected defective materials or 

workmanship, the Owner may by contract or otherwise have the defects remedied or rejected, 

materials removed from the site and charge the cost of the same against any monies which may 

be due the Contractor without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner on the 

premises. 

4.7 The Contractor must notify the Owner's representative at least two working days before placing 

concrete or burying underground utilities, pipelines, etc. 

5. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS, PERMITS, REGULATIONS AND INSPECTIONS 

5.1 Since the Owner is the State of Missouri, municipal or political subdivision ordinances, zoning 

ordinances, construction codes and other like ordinances are not applicable to construction on 

Owner's property, and Contractor will not be required to submit drawings and specifications to 

any municipal or political subdivision authority, obtain construction permits or any other 

licenses or permits from or relating to the construction of this project. All permits or licenses 

required by municipality or political subdivision for operation on property not belonging to 

Owner shall be obtained by and paid for by Contractor. Each Contractor shall comply with all 

applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations as it is not the intent of the Owner to 

arbitrarily dismiss the authorities identified above. 

5.2 The Contractor shall submit to the Owner a list of hazardous materials and/or chemicals which 

will be brought on the Owner’s property while performing the work associated with this 

project. The list must include the following: 

a. the name of the product 

b. the name of the manufacturer/distributor 

A Materials Safety Data Sheet for each hazardous material/chemical shall be readily available 

and submitted to the Owner’s Hazardous Materials Coordinator upon request. 

5.2.1 The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all hazardous waste generated in 

accordance with all Federal and State regulations.

18 

6. NONDISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT 

6.1 The Contractor and his subcontractors will not discriminate based on affected group status 

unless with respect to sex, age, or handicapped status such restrictions relate to the bona fide 

occupational qualifications. Specifically, the Contractor and his subcontractors shall not 

discriminate: 

6.1.1 Against recipients of service on the basis of race, color, religion, national origin, sex, 

handicap or age. 

6.1.2 Against any employee or applicant, for employment on the basis of race, color, 

religion, national origin, sex or otherwise qualified handicapped status. 

6.1.3 Against any applicant for employment or employee on the basis of age, where such 

applicant or employee is between ages 40 and 70 and where such contractor employs 

at least 20 persons. 

6.1.4 Against any applicant for employment or employee on the basis of that person's status 

as a disabled or Vietnam-era veteran. 

6.2 The Contractor and subcontractors will take affirmative action to insure applicants are 

employed and employees are treated fairly during employment without regard to the above 

considerations. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, 

upgrading, demotion and transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; and selection for 

training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor and Subcontractors will give written notice 

of their commitments under this clause to any labor union with which they have bargaining or 

other agreements. 

6.3 The Contractor and his subcontractors shall develop, implement, maintain and submit in writing 

to the Owner an affirmative action program if at least fifty (50) persons in the aggregate are 

employed under this contract. If less than fifty (50) persons in the aggregate are to be 

employed under this contract, the Contractor shall submit, in lieu of the written affirmative 

action program, a properly executed Affidavit for Affirmative Action. The Affidavit for 

Affirmative Action will be provided to the Contractor upon award of contract. For the purpose 

of this section, an "affirmative action program" means positive action to influence all 

employment practices (including, but not limited to, recruiting, hiring, promoting and training) 

in providing equal employment opportunity regardless of race, color, sex, national origin, 

religion, age (where the person affected is between age 40 and 70), disabled and Vietnam-era 

veteran status, and handicapped otherwise qualified status. Such "affirmative action program" 

shall include: 

6.3.1 A written policy statement committing the total organization to affirmative action and 

assigning management responsibilities and procedures for evaluation and 

dissemination; 

6.3.2 The identification of a person designated to handle affirmative action;

19 

6.3.3 The establishment of non-discriminatory selection standards, objective measures to 

analyze recruitment, an upward mobility system, a wage and salary structure, and 

standards applicable to lay-off, recall, discharge, demotion and discipline; 

6.3.4 The exclusion of discrimination from all collective bargaining agreements; and 

6.3.5 Performance of an internal audit of the reporting system to monitor execution and to 

provide for future planning. 

6.4 In the enforcement of this non-discrimination clause, the Owner may use any reasonable 

procedures available, including, but not limited to: requests, reports, site visits and inspection 

of relevant documents of contractors and subcontractors. 

6.5 In the event of the Contractor's or a Subcontractor's noncompliance with any provisions of this 

section of the contract, the Owner may cancel this contract in whole or in part or require the 

Contractor to terminate his contract with the subcontractor. 

7. ANTI-KICKBACK 

7.1 No official or employee of the Owner or its governing body who is authorized in such capacity 

and on behalf of the Owner to negotiate, make, accept or approve, or to take part in negotiating, 

making, accepting, or approving any architectural, engineering, inspection, construction or 

material supply contract or any subcontract in connection with the construction of the project, 

shall become directly or indirectly interested personally in this contract or in any part hereof. 

No officer, employee, architect, attorney, engineer or inspector of or for the Owner who is 

authorized in such capacity and on behalf of the Owner to exercise any legislative, executive, 

supervisory or other similar functions in connection with the construction of the project, shall 

become directly or indirectly interested personally in this contract, any material supply contract, 

subcontract, insurance contract, or any other contract pertaining to the project. 

8. PATENTS AND ROYALTIES 

8.1 The Contractor shall hold and save the Owner and its officers, agents, servants and employees 

harmless from liabilities of any nature or kind, including cost and expenses, for, or on account 

of, any patented or unpatented invention, process, article or appliance manufactured or used in 

the performance of the contract, including its use by the Owner, unless otherwise specifically 

stipulated in the contract documents. 

8.2 If the Contractor uses any design, device or materials covered by letters, patent or copyright, he 

shall provide for such use by suitable agreement with the owner of such patented or 

copyrighted design, device or material. It is mutually agreed and understood, without 

exception, that the contract prices shall include all royalties or costs arising from the use of 

such design, device or materials, in any way involved in the work. The Contractor and/or his 

sureties shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner of the project from any and all claims for 

infringement by reason of the use of such patented or copyrighted design, device or materials or 

any trademark or copyright in connection with work agreed to be performed under this contract 

and shall indemnify the Owner for any cost, expense or damage it may be obliged to pay by 

reason of such infringement at any time during the prosecution of the work or after completion 

of the work.

9. DUTIES OF CONTRACTOR 

20 

9.1 The Contractor shall supply sufficient labor, material, plant and equipment and pay when 

due any laborer, subcontractor or supplier for supplies furnished and otherwise prosecute the 

work with diligence to prevent work stoppage and insure completion thereof within the time 

specified. When applicable, the Contractor shall pay not less than the prevailing hourly rate 

of wages for work of a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed, as 

determined by the Department of Labor and Industrial Relations of the State of Missouri and 

as set out in the contract specifications. A copy of the wage determination issued for the 

project and included as a part of the contract documents shall be posted in a prominent and 

easily accessible location at the site of construction. The Wage Rate notice shall remain 

posted during the full time that any workman shall be performing work included in this 

construction contract. 

9.1.1 The Contractor and each of his subcontractors shall submit certified copies of their 

payroll records concerning work performed under the contract to the Office of 

Purchasing prior to contract acceptance. 

9.2 The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall forfeit as a penalty to the state, 

county, city and county, city, town, district or other political subdivision on whose 

behalf the contract is made or awarded ten dollars for each workman employed, for 

each calendar day, or portion thereof, such workman is paid less than the said 

stipulated rates for any work done under said contract, by him or by any 

subcontractor under him. 

9.3 Each Contractor shall be responsible for laying out his own work and for any damage which 

may occur to work of any other contractor because of errors or inaccuracies, as well as be 

responsible for unloading, uncrating and handling of all materials and equipment to be 

erected or placed by him, whether furnished by Contractor or others. Layout of mechanical 

and electrical work shall be coordinated with layouts of Contractor for general construction 

work. Unless otherwise directed by the Owner or Designer, salvage materials, waste and 

scrap resulting from such work shall be promptly removed from the site by the responsible 

Contractor. 

9.4 Contractors shall limit operations and storage of materials to the area within the project, 

except as necessary to connect to existing utilities, and shall not encroach on neighboring 

property. 

9.4.1 The Contractor shall purchase a Service Vehicle permit for each vehicle that is 

parked in a lot requiring a parking permit or if parked at a Service Vehicle parking 

space. Permits are purchased at Public Safety located at 306 Broad Street. 

9.5 Contractors shall prearrange time with the Contract Administrator in case it becomes 

necessary for the interruption of any service to make connections, alterations or relocations 

and shall fully cooperate with Owner in doing work so as to cause the least annoyance and 

interference with the continuous operation of the facility. Unless otherwise specified in 

these documents, all connections, alterations or relocations as well as all other portions of 

the work will be performed during normal working hours.

21 

9.6 Each Contractor shall coordinate all work so there shall be no prolonged interruption of 

existing equipment operation. Any existing plumbing, heating, ventilating, air conditioning 

or electrical disconnections necessary which affect portions of this construction or building 

or any other building must be scheduled with the Contract Administrator to minimize or 

avoid any disruption of facility operations. In no case, unless previously approved in writing 

by the Construction Inspector, shall utilities be left disconnected at the end of a work day or 

over a weekend. Any interruption of utilities either intentionally or accidentally shall not 

relieve the Contractor responsible for the interruption from repairing and restoring the utility 

to normal service. Repairs and restoration shall be made before the workmen responsible 

for the repair and restoration leave the job. 

9.7 Each Contractor shall be responsible for repair of his damage to property on or off the 

project occurring during construction of project, and all such repairs shall be made to the 

satisfaction of the property owner. 

9.8 Contractors shall not overload, or permit others to overload, any part of any structure during 

the performance of this contract. 

9.9 Each Contractor shall be responsible for shoring required to protect his work or adjacent 

property and improvements of Owner and shall be responsible for shoring or for giving any 

required notice to adjacent property owners and shall pay for any damage caused by failure 

to shore or by improper shoring or by failure to give proper notice. Shoring shall be 

removed only after completion of permanent supports. 

9.10 During the performance of work the Contractor shall be responsible for providing and 

maintaining warning signs, lights, signal devices, barricades, guard rails, fences and other 

devices appropriately located on site which will give proper and understandable warning to 

all persons of danger of entry onto land, structure or equipment. Such warning and 

protective devices shall be removed only when approved by the Contract Administrator or 

Designer. 

9.11 The Contractor shall be responsible for protection, including weather protection, and proper 

maintenance of all equipment and materials installed or to be installed by him. 

9.12 The Contractor shall be responsible for care of his finished work and shall protect same from 

damage or defacement until final acceptance by the Owner. If the work is damaged by any 

cause, the Contractor shall immediately begin to make repairs in accordance with the 

drawings and specifications. Contractor shall be liable for all damage or loss unless 

attributable to the acts or omissions of the Owner or Designer. Any claim for 

reimbursement shall be submitted in accordance with Article 23. 

9.13 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety 

precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. 

9.13.1 In the event the Contractor encounters on the site material reasonably believed to 

be asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) which has not been rendered 

harmless, the Contractor shall immediately stop work in the area affected and 

report the condition to the Owner. The work in the affected area shall not 

thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor if 

in fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has not been

22 

rendered harmless. The work in the affected area shall be resumed in the absence 

of asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), or when it has been rendered 

harmless, by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor, or in accordance 

with final determination by the Designer. 

9.13.2 The Contractor shall not be required pursuant to Article 23 to perform, without the 

Contractor's consent, any work relating to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl 

(PCB). 

9.13.3 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for the safety of, and shall 

provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 

9.13.3.1 Employees on the work site and other persons who may be affected 

thereby. 

9.13.3.2 The work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, 

whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control 

of the Contractor or the Contractor's subcontractors or subsubcontractors. 

9.13.3.3 Other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, 

lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not 

designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of 

construction. 

9.13.4 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable State and Federal 

laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders bearing on safety of persons or 

property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 

9.13.4.1 The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall be responsible for 

contacting the Facilities, Planning and Operations Office at (660) 

543-4331 and Missouri One Call as per RSMO Chapter 319.015- 

319.50 Missouri State Law Underground Facility and Damage 

Prevention. 

9.13.4.2 The Contractor shall comply with requirements contained in 

RSMO Chapter 292.675 Health and Safety of Employees which 

requires that any contractor for any public body for the 

purposes of construction of public works and any subcontractor 

to such contractor shall provide a ten-hour Occupational Safety 

and Health Administration (OSHA) construction safety 

program for their on-site employees which includes a course in 

construction safety and health approved by OSHA or a similar 

program approved by the department which is at least as 

stringent as the approved OSHA program, unless such 

employees have previously completed the required program. 

All employees who have not previously completed the program 

are required to complete the program within sixty days of 

beginning work on such construction project.

10. BOND 

9.13.5 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or 

unusual methods are approved by the Owner for execution of the work, the 

Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision 

of properly qualified personnel. 

9.13.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's 

organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person 

shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the 

Contractor in writing to the Owner and his representatives. 

9.13.7 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at 

the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional 

compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an 

emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 23. 

9.14 The Contractor, at his own option, may employ a person or persons for watch service at all 

times outside of regular working hours, and at such times during working hours when work 

is not in progress at the building, from the time the excavation work is started until the entire 

work is complete. This watchman service will in no way relieve the Contractor of his 

responsibility for replacing or making good any theft or damage. 

9.15 Contractor shall verify all measurements. No extra charges or compensation will be allowed 

as a result of failure to verify dimensions before ordering materials or fabricating items. 

9.16 The Contractor shall provide at the proper time such material as is required for support of his 

work. If openings or chases are required, whether shown on drawings or not, he shall see 

that they are properly constructed by the Contractor or subcontractor whose duty it is to 

construct the same. 

9.17 All rubbish, debris and dirt resulting from the Contractor's work shall be cleaned up as 

required, and removed from the building. The premises shall at all times be kept in a clean, 

safe and workmanlike manner. 

9.18 The Contractor shall, prior to requesting final inspection, remove manufacturer's advertising 

labels from windows, fixtures, equipment and shall leave his work "broom clean" or its 

equivalent, unless more exactly specified in the contract documents. Prior to receiving final 

payment, the Contractor shall remove all rubbish, tools, scaffold, etc., from the site. 

9.19 If any work is required to be specially tested or approved, Contractor shall give the Contract 

Administrator and Designer timely notice of date for such inspection. 

9.20 The Contractor shall attend on-site progress and coordination meetings, at the discretion of 

the Owner, no less than once a month. 

9.21 Contractors and/or any subcontractors working under them will incur the total cost of 

replacing lost or stolen keys or the cost of re-keying an area or building when it is unable to 

surrender University keys that have been issued to it through proper University procedures. 

23

10.1 Contractor shall furnish a performance/payment bond in an amount at least equal to 100% of 

the contract price as security for the faithful performance of his contract and for the payment 

of all persons performing labor on the project and furnishing materials in connection 

therewith under this contract. The surety on such bond shall be issued by a surety company 

authorized by the Missouri Department of Insurance to do business in the state of Missouri. 

10.2 All performance/payment bonds furnished in response to this provision shall be provided by 

a bonding company with a rating of B+ or higher as established by A.M. Best Company, Inc. 

in their most recent publication. This requirement may only be waived upon written 

approval of the Owner. 

10.3 Contractor’s bonds shall include such provisions as will guarantee the faithful 

performance of the prevailing hourly wage clause as provided by this contract. 

11. COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION OF WORK 

11.1 Before a "Notice to Proceed" with the work will be issued, the Contractor must submit to the 

Owner the following properly executed instruments: 

11.1.1 Contract 

11.1.2 Performance/payment bond as described in Article 10. 

11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance, or the actual policies themselves, showing that the 

Contractor has obtained the insurance coverage required by Article 18. If provided, 

the certificate of insurance shall comply with the requirements of Article 18. 

11.1.4 Written Affirmative Action Plans as required in Article 6. 

11.1.5 List of hazardous materials/chemicals as set forth in Article 5. 

11.2 These items must be received by the Procurement Office within fourteen (14) consecutive 

calendar days after the effective date of the contract. If not, the Owner may, at his option, 

treat the failure to timely submit them as a refusal by the Contractor to accept a contract for 

this work and may retain as liquidated damages the Contractor's bid bond, cashier's check or 

certified check as provided in Instructions to Bidders, Article 4.2. 

11.3 Within ten (10) days following receipt of the "Notice to Proceed," the Contractor shall 

submit to the Designer and Contract Administrator for the Owner's approval of the 

following: 

11.3.1 A progress and payment schedule as described in Article 13; and 

11.3.2 A complete breakdown of the contractor's bid as described in Article 24. 

11.4 No payments to the Contractor will be made until the Contractor has submitted these items 

and the Owner approves these items as recommended by the Designer and Contract 

Administrator; provided, however, that should the Contractor not receive written notification 

from the Owner of the disapproval of any of these items within twenty-one (21) calendar 

24

days may consider them approved for the purposes of the first monthly Application and 

Certification for Payment and may proceed accordingly. 

25 

11.5 Contractor shall commence work upon a date to be specified by the Owner in the "Notice to 

Proceed." Contractor shall prosecute the work with faithfulness and energy, and shall 

complete the entire work on or before the completion time stated in the contract documents 

or pay to the Owner the damages resulting from the failure to timely complete the work as 

set out in Article 12. 

11.6 Extension of time stipulated in the Contract for completion of the work will be made when 

changes in the work occur, as provided in Article 23, when the work is suspended as 

provided in Article 11 (11.8); or when the work of the Contractor is delayed on account of 

conditions which could not have been foreseen, or which were beyond the control of the 

Contractor, his subcontractors or suppliers, and which were not the result of their fault or 

negligence. Extension of time for completion shall also be allowed for any delays in the 

progress of the work caused by any act (except as provided elsewhere in these General 

Conditions) or neglect of the Owner or his employees or by other Contractors employed by 

the Owner, or for any delay in the furnishing of drawings and necessary information by the 

Designer, or delay in return of shop drawings, or for any other cause which in the opinion of 

the Owner entitles the Contractor to an extension of time, including but not restricted to 

fires, floods, unusually severe weather, or labor strikes. 

11.7 The Contractor shall notify the Owner promptly of any occurrence or conditions which in 

the Contractor's opinion entitle him to an extension of time. The notice shall be in writing 

and shall include all necessary supporting materials with details of any resultant costs and be 

submitted in ample time to permit full investigation and evaluation of the Contractor's claim. 

The Owner shall promptly acknowledge the Contractor's notice and, after recommendation 

from the Contract Administrator and/or Designer, shall provide a decision to the Contractor. 

Failure on the part of the Contractor to provide such notice and to detail the costs shall 

constitute a waiver by the Contractor of any claim. 

11.8 When conditions at the site of the proposed work are considered by the Owner to be 

unsatisfactory for prosecution of the work, Contractor may be ordered in writing to suspend 

the work or any part thereof until reasonable conditions exist. When such suspension is not 

due to fault or negligence of the Contractor, time allowed for completion of such suspended 

work will be extended by a period of time equal to that lost due to delay occasioned by 

ordered suspension. 

12. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES/SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 

12.1 DELETED 

13. PROGRESS AND SCHEDULING 

13.1 Each Contractor shall submit for the Owner's approval, in reproducible form, a progress 

schedule showing the rate of progress he agrees to maintain and the order in which he 

proposed to carry on various phases of work. Schedule shall show percentage of work 

completed at any time, anticipated monthly payments by Owner, as well as significant dates 

(such as completion of excavation, concrete foundation work, underground lines, 

superstructure, roughing-in, enclosure, hanging of fixtures, etc.) which shall serve as check

points to determine compliance with approved schedule. Progress schedule of the 

Contractor shall be submitted to subcontractors to permit coordinating their progress 

schedules to the general construction work. 

26 

13.2 Values employed in preparation of any schedules will be used only for determining the basis 

for partial payments and will not be considered as a basis for additions to or deductions from 

the contract price. 

13.3 There will be no payments until the progress schedule has been approved by the Owner, and 

subsequent payments will be suspended if the project schedule has not been adequately 

updated to reflect actual conditions. 

13.4 Contractor shall employ and supply a sufficient force of workmen, material, and equipment 

and shall pay when due, any workman, subcontractor or supplier and otherwise prosecute 

the work with such diligence so as to maintain the rate of progress indicated on the progress 

schedule, prevent work stoppage, and insure completion of the project within the time 

specified. 

14. SUPERINTENDENCE 

14.1 The Contractor shall keep on site, during progress of the work, a competent superintendent 

satisfactory to the Owner. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence 

and all directions given to him shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. He shall 

carefully study and compare all drawings, specifications and other instruction and shall, at 

once, report to the Owner and his representatives any error, inconsistency or omission which 

he may discover. The superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the 

Owner. 

15. SHOP DRAWINGS 

15.1 The Contractor shall submit, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his work or in 

that of any other contractors, all shop and setting drawings. Such drawings shall be 

submitted to the Owner in four (4) copies for the Owner's use and additional copies as 

required for the Contractors, subcontractors, material suppliers, and to meet the requirements 

for maintenance manuals, etc., as described in Article 30. 

15.2 Each drawing and/or series of drawings submitted must be accompanied by a letter of 

transmittal giving a list of the titles and numbers of the drawings. Each series shall be 

numbered consecutively for ready reference and each drawing shall be marked with the 

following information. 

15.2.1 Date of Submission 

15.2.2 Name of Project 

15.2.3 Location 

15.2.4 Division of Work 

15.2.5 Name of Submitting Contractor

27 

15.2.6 Name of Subcontractor 

15.2.7 Identify as either a base bid item or an alternate number. 

15.3 All subcontractors' shop drawings and schedules shall be submitted by the Contractor and 

shall bear the stamp of the Contractor as evidence that he has received and approved them. 

Any shop drawings and schedules submitted without this stamp will be returned to him for 

resubmission and the drawings and schedules will be considered as never having been 

submitted. 

15.4 The Contractor shall include with the shop drawing a letter indicating all deviations from the 

drawings and/or specifications. Failure to so notify of such deviations will be grounds for 

subsequent rejection of the related work or materials. If, in the opinion of the Designer, the 

deviations are not acceptable, the Contractor will be required to furnish the item as specified 

and indicated on the drawings. 

15.5 It is the Contractor's obligation and responsibility to check all of his shop drawings and 

schedules to be fully responsible for them and for their coordination with connecting work. 

Shop drawings and schedules shall indicate in detail all parts of an item of work, including 

erection and setting instructions and engagements with the work of other trades. 

15.6 The Designer shall check shop drawings and schedules with reasonable promptness and 

approve them only if they conform to the design concept of the project and compliance with 

the information given in the contract documents. The approval shall not relieve the 

Contractor from the responsibility for deviations from the drawings and specifications, 

unless he has called the Designer's attention to the deviation, in writing, at the time of 

submission. An approval of any such modification will be given only if it is in the interest 

of the Owner, to affect an improvement in the work, does not increase the contract sum 

and/or completion time, is subject generally to all contract stipulations and covenants, and is 

without prejudice to any and all rights under the surety bond. 

15.7 No extension of time will be granted the Contractor because of his failure to submit shop 

drawings and schedules in ample time to allow for review, possible resubmittals and 

approval. Fabrication of work shall not commence until the Contractor has received 

approval. He shall furnish prints of his approved shop drawings and schedules to all 

contractors whose work is in any way related to the work under the contract. Only prints 

bearing this approval will be allowed on the site of construction. 

15.8 On completion of the work, and as a condition precedent to receiving final payment, all shop 

drawings and schedules of all work for all trades shall be corrected to a true and actual 

representation of the work actually performed, erected and installed. Drawings showing the 

actual installation of all underground services, utilities and structures of every description 

shall be furnished the Contract Administrator upon completion of the work as set out in 

Article 28. 

16. SAMPLES, TESTS AND CERTIFICATES 

16.1 The Contractor shall prepare samples of all items requested or required by the specification. 

Samples shall be properly identified and submitted with such promptness as to cause no

delay in his work or in that of any other Contractor and to allow for consideration by the 

Owner and Designer. 

28 

16.2 Each set of samples submitted must be accompanied by a letter of transmittal containing the 

following information: 

16.2.1 Date of Submission 

16.2.2 Name of Project 

16.2.3 Location 

16.2.4 Section Number of Specification 

16.2.5 Name of Submitting Contractor 

16.2.6 Name of Subcontractor 

16.3 No materials shall be delivered to the site of construction or incorporated into the work until 

the Contractor has received approval. Any materials installed prior to receipt of such 

approval shall be subject to rejection by the Owner or his representative. 

16.4 Samples shall be labeled to designate material or product represented, grade, place of origin, 

name of producer and name of Contractor. 

16.5 Approval of material is general and shall not constitute waiver of Owner's right to demand 

full compliance with contract requirements. 

16.6 Rejected samples will be destroyed unless the Contractor authorizes the Designer at the time 

of submittal, to return samples at the Contractor's expense. 

16.7 After delivery of materials the Designer may, with concurrence of the Owner, make such 

tests as he deems necessary. The Contractor shall furnish test samples at no cost to the 

Owner. If the material, equipment or accessory fails to meet the contract requirements, all 

costs of testing shall be paid by the Contractor. If the item meets the contract requirements, 

costs of testing will be paid by Owner. 

16.8 On the basis of test results, materials, workmanship, equipment or accessories may be 

rejected even though general approval has been given. If the rejected items have been 

incorporated in work, the Owner or his representative may require the Contractor to remove 

and replace the item with one meeting contract requirements or to demand and secure such 

reparation to the Owner from the Contractor as is equitable. 

16.9 The Owner reserves the right to require Contractor to furnish a certificate guaranteeing that 

material or equipment as submitted complies with contract requirements. Certificates shall 

be in notarized affidavit form. If statement originates with manufacturer, Contractor shall 

endorse all claims and submit the statement in his own name. 

16.10 When directed by the Owner's representative, and unless otherwise required within the 

technical specification, samples of finished masonry and field applied paints and finishes

shall be located as directed and shall include sample panels constructed at site size as 

required. 

29 

16.11 All tests required by the specifications shall be paid for by the Contractor and performed by 

testing laboratories approved by the Owner. 

17. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 

17.1 Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials 

shall be of the best quality. If required by the Owner, satisfactory evidence shall be 

furnished as to the kind and quality of the materials and workmanship. 

17.2 All materials and workmanship used in the work shall be subject to the inspection of the 

Designer and Contract Administrator, and any work which is deemed defective shall be 

removed, rebuilt or made good. The cost of such correction shall be borne by the 

Contractor. All condemned materials shall be immediately removed from the site of the 

work. 

17.3 Failure or neglect on the part of the Owner to condemn or reject bad or inferior materials or 

workmanship shall not be construed to imply an acceptance of any work. The work herein 

specified to be done is not to be considered as finally accepted until it is so stated in writing 

by the Owner. 

17.4 Unless otherwise provided and stipulated within these specifications, the Contractor shall 

furnish, construct, and/or install and pay for materials, devices, mechanisms, equipment, all 

necessary personnel, utilities including, but not limited to water, heat, light and electric 

power, transportation services, applicable taxes of every nature, and all other facilities 

necessary for the proper execution and completion of the work. 

17.5 All temporary shoring, bracing, etc., required for the removal of existing work and/or for the 

installation of new work shall be included in this contract. This must be done to the entire 

satisfaction of the Owner but the Contractor must assume full responsibility for the work. 

The Contractor shall make good, at no cost to the Owner, any damage caused by improper 

support or failure of shoring in any respect. 

17.6 Contractor shall, at all times, enforce strict discipline and good order among his employees, 

and shall not employ on the work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the work 

assigned to him. 

17.7 Contractor shall carefully examine the plans and drawings and shall be responsible for the 

proper fitting of his material, equipment and apparatus into the building. 

17.8 Contractor shall base his bid only on materials, method of construction and equipment as 

indicated. 

17.9 Contractor shall promptly remove at his own expense all rejected materials from site of 

work. 

17.10 When a material has been approved, no change in brand or make will be permitted unless:

18. INSURANCE 

17.10.1 Written verification is received from the manufacturer stating they cannot make 

delivery on the date previously agreed, or 

17.10.2 Material delivered fails to comply with contract requirements. 

18.1 The Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the contract issued a policy or 

policies of insurance for the protection both the Contractor and the Owner and their 

respective officers, officials, agents, consultants and employees. The Owner requires 

certification of insurance coverage from the Contractor prior to commencing work. 

18.2 Contractor shall provide and maintain during the life of the contract and until final 

acceptance of the work, insurance acceptable to the Owner which will afford protection and 

coverage in accordance with the requirements set forth below. 

18.2.1 Workmen's Compensation Insurance: Workmen's Compensation Insurance for all 

of his employees at the site of the project, and, in case any work is sublet, 

Contractor shall require any and/or all subcontractor(s) similarly to provide 

Workmen's Compensation Insurance for all his employees unless such employees 

are covered by the protection afforded by Contractor. In case any class of 

employees engaged in hazardous work under this contract at the site of the project 

is not covered under the Workmen's Compensation Statute, the Contractor shall 

provide and shall cause each subcontractor to provide Employer's Liability 

Insurance. Contractors shall provide coverage under the "Occupational Disease 

Act" of the State of Missouri, in addition to the above requirements, if the 

operations of the Contractor or any subcontractor are applicable thereunder. 

Workmen's Compensation Insurance shall comply in all respects with the 

requirements of the Statutes of the State of Missouri. 

18.2.2 Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance: Public Liability and Property 

Damage Insurance in comprehensive general liability form as shall protect 

Contractor and any subcontractor performing work covered by this contract from 

claims for damages for personal injury, including wrongful death, and from claims 

for property damage which may arise from the operations under the contract 

including all trucks and automobiles used, whether owned or not, and whether such 

operations be by the Contractor or any subcontractor or by anyone directly 

employed by either of them. The amount of insurance shall not be less than the 

following: 

1. Public Liability and Property Damage - 

Bodily injury: 

each person $300,000 

aggregate $2,000,000 

Property damage: 

each accident $2,000,000 


30

2. Automobile Public Liability and Property Damage - 

31 

Bodily injury: 

each person $300,000 


Property damage: 

each accident $1,000,000 

Such policy or policies shall by proper endorsement cover any liability of 

Contractor under the indemnification provision, Article 22 of these General 

Conditions. 

18.2.3 Insurance Covering Special Hazards: The Public Liability and Property Damage 

Insurance policy or policies of the Contractor shall provide coverage for special 

hazards such as operation of material hoists, blasting or other use of explosives, 

and damage to underground property. 

18.2.4 Owner's Protective Liability Insurance: Owner's Protective Liability Insurance for 

protection of the Owner and the Designer protecting them against the standard 

hazards, except liability from operation of trucks and automobiles, and with the 

amount of coverage provided in the Public Liability and Property Damage 

Insurance of Contractor. 

18.2.5 Builder's Risk or Installation Floater Insurance: Insurance upon the work and all 

materials, equipment, supplies, temporary structures and similar items which may 

be incident to the performance of the work and located at or adjacent to the site, 

against loss or damage from fire and such other casualties as are included in 

extended coverage in broad “All Risk” form, including coverage for Flood and 

Earthquake, in an amount not less than the replacement cost of the work or the 

contract price, whichever is greater, with loss payable to Contractor and Owner as 

their respective interest may appear. Contractor shall maintain sufficient insurance 

to cover the full value of the work and materials as the work progresses, and shall 

furnish Owner copies of all endorsements. If Builder’s Risk Reporting-Form of 

Endorsement is used, Contractor shall make all reports as required therein so as to 

keep in force an amount of insurance which will equal the replacement cost of the 

work, materials, equipment, supplies, temporary structures, and other property 

covered thereby; and if, as a result of Contractor’s failure to make any such report, 

the amount of insurance so recoverable shall be less than such replacement cost, 

Contractor’s interest in the proceeds of such insurance, if any, shall be subordinated 

to Owner’s interest to the end that Owner may receive full reimbursement for its 

loss. 

18.3 All insurance shall be procured through agencies and be written by insurance companies 

which are acceptable to and approved by the Owner and shall be obtained and paid for by 

Contractor. 

18.4 Within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days after receipt of the purchase order directing 

him to do so, the Contractor shall furnish the Office of Purchasing with certificates showing

32 

that the Owner is covered by the required insurance and showing the type, amount, class of 

operations covered, effective dates and dates of expiration of the policies. 

18.5 Upon receipt of any notice of cancellation or alteration, Contractor shall within five (5) days 

procure other policies of insurance similar in all respects to the policy or policies about to be 

canceled or altered. Neither the Contractor nor the Contractor's agents shall perform work 

on the Owner's property without the minimum insurance set forth herein being fully in force. 

There shall be no time extension granted for the Contractor's failure to maintain required 

insurance coverage. 

19. SEPARATE CONTRACTS AND COOPERATION 

19.1 The Owner reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with this work. The 

Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and 

storage of their materials and the execution of their work and shall properly connect and 

coordinate his work with theirs. 

19.2 The Contractor shall consult the drawings for all other contractors in connection with this 

work. Any work conflicting with the above shall be brought to the attention of the Owner 

before the work is performed. If the Contractor fails to do this, and constructs any work 

which interferes with the work of another contractor, he shall remove any part so conflicting 

and rebuild same, as directed by the Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. 

19.3 Each Contractor shall be required to coordinate his work with other Contractors so as to 

afford others reasonable opportunity for execution of their work. No Contractor shall delay 

any other Contractor by neglecting to perform his work at the proper time. If any Contractor 

causes delay to another, he shall be liable directly to that Contractor for such delay in 

addition to any liquidated damages which might be due the Owner. 

19.4 Each Contractor shall be responsible for damage done to Owner's or other Contractor's 

property by him or his employees through his or their fault or negligence. 

19.5 Should a contractor sustain any damage through any act or omission of any other contractor 

having a contract with the Owner, the Contractor so damaged shall have no claim or cause 

of action against the Owner for such damage, but shall have a claim or cause of action 

against the other Contractor to recover any and all damages sustained by reason of the acts 

or omissions of such contractor. The phrase "acts or omissions" as used in this section shall 

be defined to include, but not be limited to, any unreasonable delay on the part of any such 

contractors. 

20. SUBCONTRACTS 

20.1 Subcontractor assignments as identified by the Contractor shall not be changed without 

written approval of the Owner. The Owner will not approve changes of a listed 

Subcontractor unless the Subcontractor cannot or will not perform the work as specified. 

20.2 Contractor agrees that he is as fully responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of 

his subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them as he is for 

the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him.

33 

20.3 Every subcontractor shall be bound by the applicable terms and provisions of the contract 

documents, but no contractual relationship shall exist between any subcontractor and the 

Owner unless the right of the Contractor to proceed with the work is suspended or the 

contract is terminated as herein provided, and the Owner in writing elects to assume the 

subcontract. 

21. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT 

21.1 No assignment by Contractor of any amount or any part of the contract or of the funds to be 

received thereunder will be recognized unless such assignment has had the written approval 

of the Owner and the surety has been given due notice of such assignment and has furnished 

written consent thereto. In addition to the usual recitals in assignment contracts, the 

following language must be set forth: "It is agreed that the funds to be paid to the assignee 

under this assignment are subject to performance by the Contractor of the contract and to 

claims or liens for services rendered or materials supplied for the performance of the work 

called for in said contract in favor of all persons, firms or corporations rendering such 

services or supplying such materials." 

22. INDEMNIFICATION 

22.1 Contractor agrees to indemnify and save harmless Owner and Designer, their agents, 

servants and employees, from and against any and all liability for damage arising from 

injuries to persons or damage to property occasioned by any acts or omissions of Contractor, 

any subcontractors, agents, servants or employees, including any and all expense, legal or 

otherwise, which may be incurred by Owner or Designer, its agents, servants or employees, 

in defense of any claim, action or suit, irrespective of any claims that an act, omission or 

negligence of Owner or Designer, its agents, servants or employees contributed to such 

injury or damage. 

22.2 The obligations of the Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of the 

Designer, his agents or employees, arising out of (1) the preparation or approval of maps, 

drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders, design or specifications, or (2) giving of 

or the failure to give directions or instructions by the Designer, his agents or employees as 

required by the contract documents provided such giving or failure to give is the primary 

cause of the injury or damage. 

23. CHANGES IN THE WORK 

23.1 The Owner and no other, without giving notice to the surety and without invalidating the 

contract, may order extra work or make changes by altering, adding to or deducting from the 

work, the contract sum being adjusted accordingly. All such work shall be executed under 

the conditions of the original contract except that any claim for extension of time caused 

thereby shall be adjusted at the time of ordering such change. 

23.2 The amount of any adjustment in the contract price for authorized changes or the use of 

contract allowances shall be agreed upon before such changes or authorizations become 

effective and shall be determined, through submission of a request for bid prepared by the 

Designer, as follows:

34 

23.2.1 By an acceptable unit price or lump sum bid from Contractor and subcontractor. 

Bid shall include all takeoff sheets of each Contractor and subcontractor. 

Breakdown shall include a listing of each item of material with unit prices and 

number of hours of labor for each task. Labor costs per hour shall be included 

with labor burden identified, which shall be not less than the prevailing wage rate, 

etc. Overhead and profit shall be shown separately for each subcontractor and the 

Contractor. 

23.2.2 By a cost-plus-fixed fee (percentage) basis with maximum price, total cost not to 

exceed said maximum. Breakdown shall include a listing of each item of material 

with unit prices and number of hours of labor for each task. Labor costs per hour 

shall be included with labor burden identified, which shall be not less than the 

prevailing wage rate, etc. Overhead and profit shall be shown separately for each 

subcontractor and the Contractor. 

23.2.3 By unit prices contained in Contractor's original bid and incorporated in the 

construction contract. 

23.3 Overhead and Profit on Change Orders, Work Authorizations and Field Work 

Authorizations shall be applied as follows: 

23.3.1 The overhead and profit charge by the Contractor shall be considered to include, 

but is not limited to: performance bond, job site office expense, incidental job 

burdens, truck expense including mileage, small hand tools, project supervision 

including field supervision, company benefits and general office overhead. The 

percentages for overhead and profit charged on Change Orders and Work 

Authorizations shall be negotiated and may vary according to the nature, extent and 

complexity of the work involved, but in no case shall exceed Twenty-two percent 

(22%) regardless of the number of tiered subcontractors. 

23.3.2 On bids covering both increases and decreases in the amount of the contract, the 

application of overhead and profit shall be on the net change in the cost of the 

work. 

23.3.3 The percentages for overhead and profit credit to the Owner on Change Orders that 

are strictly decreases in the quantity of work or materials shall be negotiated, and 

may vary according to the nature, extent and complexity of the work involved, but 

in no case shall be less than fifteen percent (15%). Change Orders that are strictly 

decreased in the contract amount for credit of unused allowance money, will not 

include a credit for overhead and profit. 

23.3.4 No claim for an addition to the contract sum shall be valid unless authorized as 

aforesaid in writing by the Owner. In the event that none of the foregoing methods 

are agreed upon, the Owner may order work performed by force account or 

accounts. The cost of such work shall be determined by the Contractor's actual 

labor and material cost to perform the work plus overhead and profit as outlined in 

paragraph 23.3.3 above. The Designer and Contract Administrator shall approve 

the Contractor's daily time and material invoices for the work involved.

35 

23.3.5 If the Contractor claims that any instructions involve extra cost under this contract, 

he shall give the Owner written notice thereof within a reasonable time after the 

receipt of such instructions, and in any event before proceeding to execute the 

work. No such claim shall be valid unless so made and authorized by the Owner in 

writing. 

23.3.6 In an emergency affecting the safety of life or of the structure or of adjoining 

property, the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from the 

Owner, is hereby permitted to act at his discretion to prevent such threatened loss 

or injury. Any compensation claimed by the Contractor on account of such 

emergency work shall be submitted in writing and determined by agreement with 

the Owner. 

24. PAYMENT TO CONTRACTORS 

24.1 Payments 

24.1.1 The Designer will, within a reasonable time after receipt of the Contractor's 

Request for Payment, either issue a Certificate for Payment to the Owner, for such 

amount as the Designer determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor in 

writing of reasons for withholding a Certificate. Payments on account of this 

contract will be made monthly in proportion to the work which has been 

completed. The Owner shall make payment within (30) days after the "Application 

and Certification for Payment" is received by the Owner's fiscal officer. The 

Owner reserves the right to reduce the amount of the payment, as requested, if the 

Owner determines that the work has not progressed to the level claimed by the 

Contractor. The Owner shall retain ten (10) percent of the amount of each such 

payment application until final completion and acceptance of all work covered by 

the contract. Upon completion of fifty (50) percent of the contract work, the 

Contractor may at his option request a reduction in retainage to five (5) percent. 

The request for a reduction must be in the form of a written request to the Owner 

and shall be submitted through the Designer and Contract Administrator for their 

concurrence. The Owner must approve reduction of the retainage before the 

Contractor may submit a pay application showing the reduced retainage. The 

request shall be accompanied by a complete file of releases from subcontractors 

and material suppliers evidencing satisfactory payment for work performed and 

materials provided on date. The releases shall be on the "Partial Receipt of 

Payment and Release Form" included in the contract specifications. If in the 

opinion of the Owner the work has progressed satisfactorily and there is no reason 

to believe the Contractor may default in the execution of the balance of the work, 

the Contractor will be notified that retainage on his subsequent pay applications 

may be reduced to five (5) percent. 

24.1.2 Each payment made to Contractor shall be on account of the total amount payable 

to Contractor and all material and work covered by paid partial payment shall 

thereupon become the sole property of Owner. No such payment shall be deemed 

to be approval for any item or items for which such payment is made, and this 

provision shall not be construed as relieving Contractor from sole responsibility for 

care and protection of materials and work upon which payments have been made or

estoration of any damaged work or as a waiver of the right of Owner to require 

fulfillment of all terms of the contract. 

24.1.3 Materials delivered on site of work and not incorporated in work if suitably stored 

on the site or in a bonded warehouse in accordance with the requirements of 

Section 8.310 RSMo, will be allowed in the Application and Certification for 

Payment on the basis of one hundred (100%) percent of value, subject to the 5% or 

10% retainage in effect, providing: 

a. Material has previously been approved through submittal and 

acceptance of shop drawings conforming to requirements of Article 

15 of General Conditions. 

b. Delivery is made in accordance with the timeframe on the approved 

schedule. 

c. Materials, equipment, etc., are properly stored and protected from 

damage and deterioration and remain so - if not, previously approved 

amounts will be deleted from subsequent pay applications. 

d. The payment request is accompanied by a breakdown identifying the 

material, equipment, etc. in sufficient detail to establish quantity and 

value. 

24.2 Payments Withheld: The Owner may withhold or nullify in whole or part any certificate to 

such extent as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account of: 

24.2.1 Defective work not remedied. 

24.2.2 Failure of the Contractor to make payment properly to subcontractor for material or 

labor. 

24.2.3 Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims. 

24.2.4 A reasonable doubt that the contract can be completed for the balance then unpaid. 

24.2.5 Damage to another Contractor. 

24.2.6 Failure of the Contractor to monthly update (redline) as-built drawings for review 

by the Owner's Representative (Article 28). 

24.2.7 When the Owner is satisfied the Contractor has remedied above grounds, payment 

shall be made for amounts withheld. 

24.3 Final Payment 

24.3.1 Final payment shall be due at such time as the work is fully completed and all 

provisions of the contract have been satisfactorily fulfilled. 

24.3.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Contractor to the Owner that the work is 

ready for final inspection and acceptance, the Designer and Contract Administrator 

36

37 

with the Contractor shall promptly make such inspection. If the work is acceptable 

and the contract fully performed, the Contractor will be directed to submit a final 

Application and Certification for Payment. If the Owner approves the same, the 

entire balance shall be due and payable. 

24.3.3 Where the specifications provide for the performance by the Contractor of certain 

tests for the purpose of balancing and checking the air conditioning and heating 

equipment and the Contractor shall have furnished and installed all such equipment 

in accordance with the specifications, but said test cannot then be made because of 

weather conditions, such test shall be considered as required under the provisions 

of the specifications, Article 16 of General Conditions, and the contract may be 

certified as satisfactorily completed and the work accepted. However, full payment 

will not be made until the tests have been made. 

24.3.4 Neither the final payment nor any part of the retained percentage shall become due 

until the Contractor delivers to the Owner: 1) a complete file of releases, on a 

standard form prescribed by the Owner and included in the contract documents as 

"Final Receipt of Payment and Release Form," from subcontractors and material 

suppliers evidencing payment in full for services, equipment and materials, as the 

case may require or a release from the bond company accepting liability for any 

unpaid amounts, 2) an Affidavit of Compliance with Prevailing Wage Law, in the 

form as included in the contract specifications, properly executed by each 

subcontractor, and the Contractor, 3) certified copies of all payrolls, consisting of 

name, occupation and craft, date and number of hours worked and actual wages 

paid for each individual, of the Contractor and all subcontractors working on the 

project, and 4) as-builts documents (redlines) (Article 28). 

24.3.5 If any lien or claim remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor 

shall refund to the Owner all monies that the latter may be compelled to pay in 

discharging such a lien or claim including all costs and a reasonable attorney's fee. 

24.3.6 Missouri statute requires prompt payment from the Owner to the Contractor within 

thirty days and from the Contractor to his subcontractors within fifteen days. 

Failure to make payments within the required timeframe entitles the receiving party 

to charge interest at the rate of one and one half percent per month calculated from 

the expiration of the statutory time period until paid. 

25. PARTIAL OCCUPANCY/SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 

25.1 The Owner may fully occupy the facility as soon as it is substantially completed. No 

provision in this document shall be construed to prevent partial occupancy by the Owner so 

long as the partial occupancy does not materially affect the construction process. 

25.2 Contractor agrees that Owner upon advance notification to Contractor in writing will be 

permitted to occupy and use any completed or partially completed portions of the project 

when such occupancy and use is to the Owner's best interest. 

25.3 If such prior occupancy increases the cost of the work or delays its completion, provided that 

the same occur prior to the completion date fixed by the "Notice to Proceed," and as 

amended by contract change orders, and provided the contractor submits written notification

38 

of such cost increase or time delay, the Contractor shall be entitled to extra compensation or 

extension of time, or both. 

26. DISPUTES AND DISAGREEMENTS 

26.1 In order to prevent disputes or disagreements between the parties aforesaid in relation to the 

performance hereof on the part of this Contractor, it is hereby expressly agreed and 

understood that in case any controversy or difference of opinion shall arise as to the quantity 

or value of the work, or material, the interpretation of plans, specifications and provisions of 

the contract documents, or any other matter connected wit the work, or the performance of 

the covenants and agreements herein contained, the decision of the Owner shall be final and 

binding on all parties. 

27. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION FOR CAUSE 

27.1 If the Contractor shall file for bankruptcy, or if he should make a general assignment for the 

benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed on account of his insolvency, or 

if he should persistently or repeatedly refuse or fail to supply enough properly skilled 

workmen or proper materials, or if he should fail to make prompt payment to subcontractors 

or for material or labor, or persistently disregard laws, ordinances or the instructions of the 

Owner, or otherwise be guilty of a substantial violation of any provision of the contract, then 

the Owner may serve notice on the Contractor and his surety setting forth the violations and 

demanding compliance with the contract. Unless within ten (10) consecutive calendar days 

after serving such notice, such violations shall cease and satisfactory arrangements for 

correction be made, the Owner may suspend the Contractor's right to proceed with the work 

or terminate the contract. 

27.2 In the event the Owner suspends Contractor's right to proceed with the work or terminates 

the contract, the Owner may demand that the Contractor's surety take over and complete the 

work on the contract, after the surety submits a written bid to the Owner and receives written 

approval and upon the surety's failure or refusal to do so within ten (10) consecutive 

calendar days after demand therefore, the Owner may take over the work and prosecute the 

same to completion by bid or negotiated contract, or the Owner may elect to take possession 

of and utilize in completing the work such materials, supplies, appliances and plant as may 

be on the site of the work, and all subcontractors, if the Owner elects, shall be bound to 

perform their contracts. 

27.3 The Contractor and his surety shall be and remain liable to the Owner for any excess cost or 

damages occasioned to the Owner as a result of the actions above set forth. 

27.4 The Contractor in the event of such suspension or termination shall not be entitled to receive 

any further payments under the contract until the work is wholly finished. Then if the 

unpaid balance under the contract shall exceed all expenses of the Owner, such excess shall 

be paid to the Contractor; but, if such expenses shall exceed the unpaid balance, the 

Contractor and his surety shall be liable for and shall pay the difference and any damages to 

the Owner. 

27.5 The rights of the Owner to suspend or terminate as herein provided shall be cumulative and 

not exclusive and shall be in addition to any other remedy provided by law.

27.6 The Contractor in the event of such suspension or termination may be declared ineligible for 

Owner contracts for a minimal period of twelve (12) months. Further, no contract will be 

awarded to any Contractor who lists in his bid any subcontractor whose prior performance 

has contributed, as determined by the Owner, to a breach of a contract. In order to be 

considered for Owner-awarded contracts after this period, the contractor/subcontractor will 

be required to forward acceptance reports to the Owner regarding successful completion of 

non-state projects during the intervening twelve (12) months from the date of default. No 

contracts will be awarded to a subcontractor/contractor until the ability to perform 

responsibly in the private sector has been proven to the Owner. 

28. RECORD DRAWINGS 

28.1 Contractors shall update monthly and, at the completion of their work and "prior" to 

submission of request for final payment, complete and turn over to the Contract 

Administrator a marked up set of the drawings provided for construction. The corrections 

shall show any addenda, all field changes that were made to adopt to field conditions, 

changes resulting from contract change orders and all buried installations of piping, conduit, 

and utility services. All buried and concealed items both inside and outside shall be 

accurately located as to depth and referenced to two permanent features such as interior or 

exterior wall faces and dimensions shall be given in a neat and legible manner in a 

contrasting colored pencil or ink. 

29. WARRANTIES 

29.1 Warranties of various items shall be delivered in four (4) copies to the Owner's 

Representative at the completion of the Project and at least two weeks prior to Contractor's 

request for final punch list. 

30. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND SERVICE MANUALS 

30.1 General - At least two (2) weeks prior to the Contractor's request for final punch list, the 

Contractor shall provide to the Owner's Representative three (3) volumes of operating 

instructions and service manuals, containing the following: 

39 

(a) 

(b) 

(c) 

(d) 

Start-up and Shut-down Procedures: Provide a step-by-step write up of all major 

equipment. When manufacturer's printed start-up, trouble shooting and shut-down 

procedures are available, they may be incorporated into the operating manual for 

reference. 

Operating Instructions: Written operating instructions shall be included for the 

efficient and safe operation of all equipment. 

Equipment List: List of all major equipment as installed shall include model number, 

capacities, flow rate, name plate data, shop drawings and air and water balance 

reports. 

Service Instructions: Each Contractor shall be required to provide the following 

information for all pieces of equipment.

1. Recommended spare parts including catalog number and name of local 

suppliers or factory representative. 

40 

2. Belt sizes, types, and lengths. 

3. Wiring diagrams. 

(e) 

(f) 

Manufacturer's Certificate of Warranty: Manufacturer's certificates of warranty 

shall be obtained for all major equipment. Warranty shall be obtained for at least 

one year as defined in Article 31 of these General Conditions. Where longer period 

is called for in the specific equipment specifications, the longer period shall govern. 

Prior to the final payment, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner's representative 

three (3) copies of parts catalogs for each piece of equipment furnished by him on 

the project with the components identified by number for replacement ordering. 

30.2 Submission 

(a) 

(b) 

(c) 

(d) 

Manuals shall be in triplicate, and all materials shall be bound into volumes of 

standard 8 ½" x 11" hard binders. Large drawings too bulky to be folded into 8 ½" x 

11" shall be separately bound or folded and in brown envelopes, cross referenced and 

indexed with the manuals. 

The manuals shall identify project, project number, and include the name and address 

of the Contractor and major Subcontractors of any tier who were involved with the 

activity described in that particular manual. 

Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically 

organized with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. 

Contents: Prepare a Table of contents for each volume, with each product or system 

description identified. 

31. GENERAL GUARANTEE 

31.1 Neither the final certificate of payment nor any provision in the contract documents nor 

partial use or occupancy of the premises by the Owner shall constitute an acceptance of 

work not done in accordance with the contract documents or relieve the Contractor or his 

sureties of liability in respect to any express warranties or responsibility for faulty materials, 

workmanship or liquidated damages. 

31.2 The Contractor or his sureties shall remedy any defects in the work and pay for any damage 

to other work resulting therefrom which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the 

date of final acceptance unless a longer period is otherwise specified or a differing warranty 

period has been established in the substantial completion certification. The Owner will give 

notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. 

31.3 In case of default on the part of the Contractor in fulfilling this part of the contract, the 

Owner may correct the work or repair the damage and the cost and expense incurred in such 

event shall be paid by or recoverable from the Contractor.

41 

31.4 Should Contractor be required to perform tests that due to climatic conditions must be 

delayed, it is understood that such tests will be accomplished by Contractor at the earliest 

possible date with the provisions of the General Guarantee beginning upon satisfactory 

completion of said test. 

32. MBE/WBE REQUIREMENTS 

32.1 For contracts in an amount greater than or equal to one hundred thousand dollars ($100,000), 

the following provisions shall apply: 

32.1.1 The Contractor is bound to subcontracting not less than the percent indicated in the 

awarded contract to MBE/WBE(s). 

32.1.2 If the Contractor fails to meet or maintain stated percent, he/she must satisfactorily 

explain to the Owner why the requirement cannot be achieved and why meeting the 

requirement was beyond the Contractor's control. 

32.1.3 If a MBE/WBE is replaced during the course of the contract, the Contractor shall 

make a good faith effort to replace it with another MBE/WBE. All substitutions 

shall be approved by the Owner. 

32.1.4 The Contractor shall provide the Owner with regular reports on its progress in 

meeting its MBE/WBE obligations. As a minimum, the dollar-value of work 

completed by each MBE/WBE subcontractor during the preceding month and as a 

cumulative total shall be reported with each monthly application for payment. A 

final report shall include the total dollar-value of work completed by each minority 

subcontractor during the total contract. 

33. SUBSTITUTIONS AND “OR APPROVED EQUAL” 

33.1 Whenever in any of the contract documents any article, appliance, device or material is 

designated by the name of the manufacturer or vendor or by any proprietary or trade name 

and such name is followed by the words “or approved equal”, “or as approved” or preceded 

by the words “similar and equal to”, the standard products of manufacturer other than those 

specified will be accepted when, prior to ordering or use thereof, it is proven to the 

satisfaction of the Contract Administrator and Designer that they are equal in design, 

strength, durability, usefulness and convenience for the purpose intended. 

33.2 The Contractor may request at his option use of any article, device, product, material, 

fixture, form or type of construction which in the judgement of the Contract Administrator 

and Designer is equal in all respects to that named. Any changes required in the details and 

dimensions indicated on the drawings for the substitution of projects other than those called 

for shall be properly made as approved by the Contract Administrator and Designer at the 

expense of the contractor requesting the substitution or change. 

33.3 In the event the Contractor desires to substitute any article, device, product, material, fixture, 

form or type of construction for that specified, he shall submit a request for such 

substitutions in writing to the Contract Administrator and Designer within thirty (30) days 

after the date of the “Notice to Proceed.” Thereafter no consideration will be given to

42 

alternate forms of accomplishing the work. This article does not preclude the Owner from 

exercising the provisions of Article 23 hereof. 

34. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION FOR CONVENIENCE 

34.1 The Owner may terminate or suspend the contract or any portion of the work without cause 

at any time, and at the Owner’s convenience. Notification of a termination or suspension 

shall be in writing and shall be given to the Contractor and his surety. If the contract is 

suspended, the notice will contain the anticipated duration of the suspension or the 

conditions under which work will be permitted to resume. 

34.2 Upon receipt of notification, the Contractor shall: 

a. Cease operations when directed. 

b. Take actions to protect the work and any stored materials. 

c. Place no further subcontracts or orders for material, supplies, services or facilities 

except as may be necessary to complete the portion of the contract that has not 

been terminated. No claim for payment of materials or supplies ordered after the 

termination date shall be considered. 

d. Terminate all existing subcontracts, rentals, material, and equipment orders. 

e. Settle all outstanding liabilities arising from termination with subcontractors and 

suppliers. 

f. Transfer title and deliver to the Owner, work in progress, completed work, supplies 

and other material produced or acquired for the work terminated, and completed or 

partially completed plans, drawing information and other property that, if the 

contract had been completed, would be required to be furnished to the Owner. 

34.3 For termination without cause and at the Owner’s convenience, in addition to payment for 

work completed prior to date of termination, the Contractor may be entitled to payment of 

other documented costs directly associated with the early termination of the contract. 

Payment for anticipated profit and unapplied overhead will not be allowed. 

END OF SECTION

ID Task Name Duration Start Finish 

1 Furniture Move 4th floor 1 day Mon 5/7/12 Mon 5/7/12 

2 Abatement 4th floor 4 days Mon 5/7/12 Thu 5/10/12 

3 Furniture Move 3rd Floor 1 day Tue 5/8/12 Tue 5/8/12 

4 Abatement 3rd Floor 4 days Wed 5/9/12 Mon 5/14/12 

5 Furniture Move 2nd Floor 1 day Wed 5/9/12 Wed 5/9/12 

6 Contractor 4th & 3rd 54 days Tue 5/15/12 Fri 7/27/12 

7 Abatement 2nd Floor 6 days Thu 5/10/12 Thu 5/17/12 

8 Contractor 2nd Floor 51 days Fri 5/18/12 Fri 7/27/12 

9 Furniture Move 1st Floor 2 days Thu 5/10/12 Fri 5/11/12 

10 Abatement 1st Floor 6 days Mon 5/14/12 Mon 5/21/12 

11 Contarctor 1st Floor 51 days Tue 5/22/12 Tue 7/31/12 

May 6, '12 May 27, '12 Jun 17, '12 Jul 8, '12 Jul 29, '12 Aug 

S S M T W T F S S M T W T F 

UCM 

B&R 

UCM 

B&R 

UCM 

B&R 

UCM 

Contractor,renovation contractor 

B&R 



12 UCM Custodial 4th floor 5 days Mon 7/30/12 Fri 8/3/12 

13 UCM Custodial 3rd floor 3 days Wed 8/1/12 Fri 8/3/12 

14 UCM Custodial 2nd floor 3 days Mon 8/6/12 Wed 8/8/12 

15 UCM Custodial 1st floor 3 days Wed 8/8/12 Fri 8/10/12 

16 UCM furniture load in 5 days Mon 8/13/12 Fri 8/17/12 

Task 

External Milestone 

Manual Summary Rollup 

Split 

Inactive Task 

Manual Summary 

Project: Nickerson lr 

Date: Fri 2/24/12 

Milestone 

Summary 

Inactive Milestone 

Inactive Summary 

Start‐only 

Finish‐only 

Project Summary 

Manual Task 

Deadline 

External Tasks 

Duration‐only 

Progress 

Page 1

ATTACHMENT A 

BID FORM 

IFB #9491 

BID FOR NICKERSON HALL REFURBISH 


WARRENSBURG, MO 64093 

I (we) propose to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools and operations necessary for Nickerson Hall Refurbish at 

University of Central Missouri as specified by the Owner. 

Bidder certifies they are capable of completing work by 5:00 p.m. CDST on Friday, August 3, 2012 Deadline: 

Yes____ NO____ If no, give best possible completion date: _______________________ 

(Check One) 

Lump sum price for Improvements per Plans and Specs 

As specified below: 

Number of calendar days for completion: 

$____________________________ 

_____________________________ 

Unit Cost #1 – Replacement Water Closet 


$____________________________ 

_____________________________ 

Unit Cost #2 – Replacement Lavatory 


$____________________________ 

_____________________________ 


_____________________________ 

MBE/WBE PERCENTAGE OF PARTICIPATION: MBE % WBE % 

The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive informalities. Bid shall remain valid for one hundred 

twenty (120) days after openings. 

I (we) received Amendment number 

____ (fill in number received-- if none, write none.) 

_____________________________________ 

COMPANY NAME 

____________________________________ 

TELEPHONE NUMBER 

______________________________________ 

AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE 

______________________________________ 

DATE

CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATIONS 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

Name of firm and address with zip code 

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 

____________ __________________________________ ___________________________________________ 

Date Area Code and Telephone Number Area Code and Fax Number 

CONSTRUCTION CAPABILITIES: General, Electrical, Plumbing, Heating, Air-Conditioning, Ventilation and Demolition 

Other: _______________________________________________________________________________________ 

FOR CORPORATION ONLY 

Federal I.D. Number _____________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

Date of Incorporation Name of State(s) in which incorporated 

_____________________________________________________________________________________ 

If not incorporated in Missouri: give Certificate of Authority to do business in Missouri Certificate No. Date 

___________________________________________________ 

President’s Name 

__________________________________________ 

Secretary’s Name 

________________________________________________ 

Vice President’s Name 

_______________________________________ 

Treasurer’s Name 

FOR PARTNERSHIP ONLY 

Is the Partnership: GENERAL LIMITED ASSOCIATION 

Date of Organization: ___________________________ 

1. _____________________________________________________________________________ 

Names and addresses of all partners with zip codes 

2. _____________________________________________________________________________________ 

3. _____________________________________________________________________________________ 

Use additional sheet if necessary 

GENERAL INFORMATION Federal I.D. #__________ or Social Security # _________________ 

____________________________________________________________________________________ 

% of work done by contractor No. of permanent employees Geographical limits of operation 

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 

No. of years in business If you have done business under a different name, please give name and location 

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Has firm ever failed to complete project or defaulted on a contract? If so, state where and why. 

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Has firm ever been engaged in litigation over any contract? If so, state where and why.

LIST COMPLETED PROJECTS WITHIN LAST FIVE YEARS THAT ARE SIMILAR IN 

SCOPE TO THE ONE BEING BID, INCLUDING COST OF EACH, NAME, TELEPHONE 

NUMBER AND ADDRESS OF OWNER CONTACT. 

LIST PROJECTS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING COST OF EACH, 

NAME, TELEPHONE NUMBER AND ADDRESS OF OWNER CONTACT:

MBE/WBE COMPLIANCE EVALUATION FORM 

(For Projects for $100,000 or More) 

This form is to be completed by bidders and submitted with the bid proposal. A condition for remaining in 

competition for award is the satisfactory completion of this form for each minority/woman-owned firm that 

will perform a commercially useful function on the contract. The undersigned submits the following data 

with respect to this firm’s assurance to meet the goal for MBE/WBE participation. 

1. Project: ___________________________________________________________________ 

2. Name of General Contractor: __________________________________________________ 

3. MBE/WBE Firm: ___________________________________________________________ 

(Name) 

___________________________________________________________ 

(Address) 

(City, State, Zip Code) 

___________________________________________________________ 

(Phone Number) 

(Fax Number) 

Type of Business: ___________________________________________________________ 

Officer Name & Title: ________________________________________________________ 

4. Describe the subcontract work to be performed (List BASE BID work and any ALTERNATE 

work separately): 

BASE BID: ________________________________________________________________ 

ALTERNATE(S), (identify separately): 

$ _______________________________________________________________ 

$ _______________________________________________________________ 

5. Indicate the dollar amount of contract to be subcontracted to the MBE/WBE Firm: 

BASE BID: _________________________________________________________________ 

ALTERNATE(S), (identify separately): 

$_________________________________________________________________ 

$_________________________________________________________________ 

6. Is the proposed subcontrctor listed in the Minority/Women Business Enterprise Directory 

maintained by the Missouri State Division of Design and Construction? Yes _____ No ____ 

7. Is the proposed subcontractor certified as a MBE/WBE firm by any of the following: federal 

government agencies, non-Missouri state agencies, State of Missouri agencies or city and county 

government agencies? 

Yes ______ No _____ If Yes, provide details (i.e., certification letter from certifying 

agency): 

_____________________________________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________________ 

8. If the answer if NO to questions 6 and 7 above, please complete the information requested in the 

attached MBE/WBE Eligibility Determination Form. 

Name of General Contractor: ______________________________________________________ 

Signature: _____________________________________________________________________ 

Title: _________________________________________________________________________ 

Date: _________________________________________________________________________ 

Page 1 of 1

MBE/WBE ELIGIBILITY DETERMINATION FORM 

(For Projects of $100,000 or More) 

1. Name of firm _______________________________________________________________ 

2. Address of firm _____________________________________________________________ 

3. Phone number of firm ______________________ Fax number _______________________ 

4. Indicate whether firm is sole proprietorship, partnership, joint venture, corporation or other 

business entity (please specify)_________________________________________________ 

5. Nature of firm’s business _____________________________________________________ 

6. Number of years firm has been in business _______________________________________ 

7. Ownership of firm: Identify those who own 5 percent of more of the firm. Columns E and F 

need be filled out only if the firm is less than 100 percent minority/woman-owned. 

A – Name B – Race C – Sex D – Years of Ownership E – Ownership % F – Voting % 

For firms less than 100 percent minority/woman owned, list the contributions of money, 

equipment, real estate, or expertise of each of the owners. 

Name Money Equipment Real Estate Expertise 

8. Control of firm: Identify by name, race, sex, and title those individuals (including owners and 

non-owners) who are responsible for day-to-day management and policy decision making, 

including, but not limited to, those with prime responsibility for: 

[]Financial Decisions []Management Decisions []Estimating []Marketing []Sale 

[]Hiring []Firing []Field Operations Purchasing []Supervision of Field Operations 

9. For each of those listed in question 8, provide a brief summary of the person’s experience and 

number of years with the firm, indicating the person’s qualifications for the responsibilities given 

him or her. 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 



10. Describe or attach a copy of any stock options or other ownership options that are outstanding, 

and any agreements between owners, or between owners and third parties, which restrict 

ownership or control of minority owners. 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

11. Identify any owner (see Item 7) or management official (see Item 8) of the named firm who is or 

has been an employee of another firm that has an ownership interest in, or a present business 

relationship with, the named firm. Present business relationships include shared space, 

equipment, financing, or employees as well as both firms having some of the same owners. 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

12. What are the gross receipts of the firm for each of the last two years? 

Year Ending: __________ 

Year Ending: __________ 

Gross Receipts: _______________________________________ 

Gross Receipts: _______________________________________ 

13. Name, address and telephone number of bonding company, if any: 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

(Name) 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

(Address) 

(City, State, Zip Code) 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

(Phone Number) 

(Fax Number) 

Bonding limits:__________________________________________________________________ 

Sources of letters of credit, if any ___________________________________________________ 

14. Are you authorized to do business in the State of Missouri, as well as locally, including all 

necessary business licenses?_______________________________________________________ 

15. Indicate if this firm, or other firms with any of the same officers, have previously received or 

been denied certification or participation as an MBE/WBE and describe the circumstances. 

Indicate the name of the certifying authority and the date of such certification or denial. 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 



AFFIDAVIT 

“The undersigned swears that the foregoing statements are true and correct and include 

all material information necessary to identify and explain the operation of 

___________________ (name of firm) as well as the ownership thereof. Further, the 

undersigned agrees to provide through the prime contractor or directly to the Owner 

current, complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed on the 

project, the payment therefore and any proposed changes, if any, of the foregoing 

arrangements and to permit the audit and examination of books, records and files of the 

named firm. Any material misrepresentation will be grounds for terminating any contract 

which may be awarded and for initiating action under federal or state laws concerning 

false statements.” 

Note: If, after filing this information and before the work of this firm is completed on 

the contract covered by this regulation, there is any significant change in the 

information submitted, you must inform the Owner of the change either through 

the prime contractor or directly. 

Signature ____________________________________________________________________________ 

Name _______________________________________________________________________________ 

Date ________________________________________________________________________________ 

Corporate Seal (where appropriate) 

Date ________________________________________________________________________________ 

State of______________________________________________________________________________ 

County of ____________________________________________________________________________ 

On this _______ day of ______, ______, before me appeared (name) ________________________ to me 

Personally known, who, being duly sworn, did execute the foregoing affidavit, and did state that he or 

she was properly authorized by (name of firm)____________________________ to execute the affidavit 

and did so as his or her own free act and deed. 

(seal) 

Notary Public _______________________________________________________________________ 

Commission expires __________________________________________________________________ 



MBE/WBE ELIGIBILITY DETERMINATION FORM FOR JOINT VENTURES 


This form does not need to be filled in if each of the firms in the joint venture are 

minority/woman-owned. 

1. Name of joint venture: 

2. Address of firm: 

3. Phone number of joint venture: Fax number: 

4. Identify the firms which comprise the joint venture. (The MBE/WBE partner must 

complete the MBE/WBE Eligibility Determination Form) 

_________________________________________________________________ 

_________________________________________________________________ 

_________________________________________________________________ 

_________________________________________________________________ 

(a) 

(b) 

Describe the role of the MBE/WBE firm in the joint venture: 

___________________________________________________________ 

___________________________________________________________ 

___________________________________________________________ 

Describe briefly the experience and business qualifications of each non- 

MBE/WBE co-venture: 

___________________________________________________________ 

___________________________________________________________ 

___________________________________________________________ 

5. Nature of the joint venture’s business aimed percentage of MBE/WBE ownership? 

_________________________________________________________________ 

_________________________________________________________________ 

_________________________________________________________________ 

_________________________________________________________________ 

6. What is the claimed percentage of MBE/WBE ownership? __________________ 

7. Ownership of joint venture. Attach a copy of the joint venture agreement. (The 

following need not be filled in if described in the joint venture agreement) 

(a) 

Description of profit and loss sharing: _____________________________ 

____________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________ 



(b) 

(c) 

Description of capital contributions, including equipment: _____________ 

____________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________ 

Description of other applicable ownership interests: __________________ 

____________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________ 

____________________________________________________________ 

8. Control of, and participation in, this contract. Identify by name, race, sex, and “firm” 

those individuals (and their titles) who are responsible for day-to-day management and 

policy decision making including, but not limited to, those with prime responsibility for: 

[] Financial Decisions [] Management Decisions [] Estimating [] Marketing 

[] Sales [] Hiring (of management) [] Firing (of management) 

[] Purchase of major items or supplies 

Name Race Sex Firm & Title Responsibility Management Decisions 

NOTE: 

If, after filing this information and before completion of the joint venture’s work 

on the contract covered by this regulation, there is any significant change in the 

information submitted, the joint venture must inform the Owner either directly or 

through the prime contractor. 



AFFIDAVIT 

“The undersigned swear that the foregoing statements are correct and include all 

material and information necessary to identify and explain the terms and 

operation of our joint venture and the intended participation b each joint venturer 

in the undertaking. Further, the undersigned covenant and agree to provide the 

Owner current, complete and accurate information regarding actual joint venture 

work and the payment therefore and any proposed changes in any of the joint 

venture arrangements and to permit the audit and examination of the books, 

records, and files of the joint venture, or those of each joint venturer relevant to 

the joint venture, by authorized representatives of the Owner. Any material 

misrepresentation will be grounds for terminating any contract which may be 

awarded and for initiating action under Federal or State laws concerning false 

statements.” 

________________________________ 

Name of Firm 

________________________________ 

Signature 

______________________________ 

Name of Firm 

______________________________ 

Signature 

________________________________ ______________________________ 

Name Name 

________________________________ ______________________________ 

Title Title 

________________________________ ______________________________ 

Date Date 

Date ____________________________________________________________________ 

State of __________________________________________________________________ 

County of ________________________________________________________________ 

On this ______day of ______, _____, before me appeared (name) ___________________ to me 

personally known, who, being duly sworn, did execute the foregoing affidavit, and did state that 

he or she was properly authorized by (name of firm) ____________________________ to 

execute the affidavit and did so as his or her free act and deed. 

Notary Public _____________________________________________________________ 

My commission expires: _____________________________________________________ 

(seal) 



Date ____________________________________________________________________ 

State of __________________________________________________________________ 

County of ________________________________________________________________ 

On this ______day of ______, _____, before me appeared (name) ___________________ to me 

personally known, who, being duly sworn, did execute the foregoing affidavit, and did state that 

he or she was properly authorized by (name of firm) ____________________________ to 

execute the affidavit and did so as his or her free act and deed. 

Notary Public _____________________________________________________________ 

My commission expires: _____________________________________________________ 

(seal) 



MBE/WBE APPLICATION FOR WAIVER FORM 


When the bidder fails to meet the MBE or WBE project participation goals, this form shall be completed 

and submitted with the bid proposal. Firms wishing to be considered for award are required to 

demonstrate that a good faith effort has been made to include minority/women-owned enterprises as 

subcontractors. This form will be used to evaluate the extent to which a good faith effort has been made. 

The undersigned submits the following data with respect to the firm’s efforts to meet the goal for 

MBE/WBE participation. 

Indicate which participation requirement the bidder is requesting a waiver for: MBE _____ WBE ____ 

1. List pre-bid conferences you firm attended where MBE/WBE requirements were discussed: 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

2. Identify advertising efforts undertaken by your firm which were intended to recruit potential 

minority/women subcontractors for various aspects of this project. Provide names of newspapers, 

dates of advertisements and copies or affidavits of ads that were run: 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

3. Note specific efforts to contact in writing those MBE/WBEs capable of and likely to participate 

as subcontractors for this project: 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

4. Describe steps taken by your firm to divide work into areas in which MBE/WBE would be 

capable of performing: 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

5. What efforts were taken to negotiate with prospective MBE/WBEs for specific sub-bids? Include 

the names, addresses and telephone numbers of MBE/WBEs contacted, a description of the 

information given to MBE/WBEs regarding plans and specifications for the assigned work, and a 

statement as to why additional agreements were not made with MBE/WBEs: 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

APPLICATION FOR WAIVER 


6. List reasons for rejecting a MBE/WBE that indicated a desire to participate and/or submitted bids: 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

7. Describe efforts your firm may have taken to assist a MBE/WBE in overcoming legal or other 

requirements that needed to be met: 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

8. Describe follow-up contacts with MBE/WBEs made by your firm after the initial solicitation: 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

9. Describe the efforts made by your firm to provide interested MBE/WBEs with sufficiently 

detailed information about plans, specifications and requirements of the contract: 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

10. Describe your firm’s efforts to locate MBE/WBEs not on the directory list and assist MBE/WBEs 

in becoming certified as such: 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________________________________ 

Based on the above stated good faith efforts made to locate and supply MBE/WBEs, the bidder hereby 

requests that the MBE/WBE percentage goal set by this regulation be waived and that the percentage goal 

for this project be set at: MBE ________% WBE ________% 

The undersigned hereby certifies, having read the answers contained in the foregoing Application for 

Waiver, that they are true and correct to the best of his/her knowledge, information and belief. 

Name of General Contractor:_____________________________________________________________ 

Signature: ____________________________________________________________________________ 

Title: ________________________________________________________________________________ 

Date: ________________________________________________________________________________ 

APPLICATION FOR WAIVER 


AFFIDAVIT FOR AFFIRMATIVE ACTION 

State of Missouri ) 

) ss. 

County of ) 

first being duly sworn on his/her oath states: that he/she is the 

(sole proprietor, partner or officer) of 

a (sole proprietorship, 

partnership or corporation), and as such ( sole proprietor, partner or officer) is duly 

authorized to make this affidavit on behalf of said (sole proprietorship, partnership or 

corporation); that under the contract known as " " 

Project (Bid) Number 

less than 50 persons in the aggregate will be 

employed and therefore, the applicable Affirmative Action requirements as set forth in the 

General Conditions of the University of Central Missouri have been met. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 19 

My commission expires , 19

AFFIDAVIT OF WORK AUTHORIZATION 

Comes now ____________________________________ as _________________________ first being duly 

(Contractor Representative Name) 

(Title) 

sworn on my oath, affirm ________________________________________ is enrolled and will continue to 

(Company Name) 

participate in a federal work authorization program in respect to employees that will work in connection with 

the services related to the University of Central Missouri for the duration of the contract, if awarded in 

accordance with RSMo Chapter 285.530 (2). 

I also affirm that_____________________________________ shall only use personnel who are authorized to 

work in the United States in accordance with applicable federal and state laws with the contracted services 

related to the University of Central Missouri for the duration of the contract, if awarded. 

In Affirmation thereof, the facts stated above are true and correct (The undersigned understands that 

false statements made in this filing are subject to the penalties provided under Section 575.040, 

RSMo). 

Signature (person with authority) 

Printed Name 

Title 

Date 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this _____________________ of _________________________. I am 

(Day) 

(Month, Year) 

commissioned as a notary public within the County of ____________________________________, State of 

(Name of County) 

________________________________, and my commission expires on _________________________. 

(Name of State) 

(Date) 

___________________________________________ 

(Signature of Notary) 

(Date) 

FEDERAL WORK AUTHORIZATION PROGRAM 

E-Verify is a federal work authorization program. Information regarding E-Verify is available at 

http://www.dhs.gov/xprevprot/programs/gc_1185221678150.shtm. A copy of the E-Verify Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) 

can be viewed at http://www.uscis.gov/files/nativedocuments/MOU.pdf.

PREVAILING WAGE NOTICE OF EXCESSIVE UNEMPLOYMENT 

*** NOW IN EFFECT *** 

Only Missouri laborers and laborers from nonrestrictive states are allowed by law to be 

employed on Missouri’s public works projects when the unemployment rate exceeds 5% for 

two consecutive months. (See Sections 290.550 through 290.580 RSMo.) The 

unemployment rate has exceeded 5% for the past two months. Therefore, this statute is in 

effect and will remain in effect as long as this notice is posted. For questions call (573) 

751-3403. View the Frequently Asked Questions at 

http://www.labor.mo.gov/ls/faq/faq_PublicWorksEmployment.asp or view the 

statute 290.550 – 290.580 RSMo, at http://www.moga.mo.gov/statutes/C290.HTM. 

Restrictive states are as follows: Alaska, Arizona, California, Colorado, Connecticut, 

Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Idaho, Illinois, Iowa, Maine, Massachusetts, 

Mississippi, Montana, Nevada, New Jersey, North Dakota, Oklahoma, South Dakota, U.S. 

Virgin Islands, West Virginia and Wyoming.

NICKERSON HALL - REFURBISH 

P R O J E C T 

M A N U A L 

VOLUME 1: 

FRONT END, ARCHITECTURAL, 

MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING 

February 24, 2012 

OWNER: UNIVERSITY OF CENTRAL MISSOURI 

ARCHITECT: 

GOULD EVANS ASSOCIATES, LC 

MEP ENGINEER: 

HENDERSON ENGINEERS INC. 

4041 MILL STREET 8325 Lenexa Drive 

KANSAS CITY, MO 64111 Lenexa, KS 66214 

816 . 931 . 6655 (913) 742-5000 

FAX: 816 . 931 . 9640 FAX: (913) 742-5001 

www.gouldevans.com 

www.hei-eng.com 

GOULD EVANS PROJECT NUMBER: 

0211-2170

SUMMARY 0110001 

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY 

PART 1 - GENERAL 

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: 

1. Project information. 

2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 

3. Phased construction. 

4. Work by Owner. 

5. Work under separate contracts. 

6. Future work. 

7. Purchase contracts. 

8. Owner-furnished products. 

9. Contractor-furnished, Owner-installed products. 

10. Access to site. 

11. Coordination with occupants. 

12. Work restrictions. 

13. Specification and drawing conventions. 

14. Miscellaneous provisions. 

B. Related Requirements: 

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures 

governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION 

A. Project Identification: University of Central Missouri, Nickerson Residence Hall. 

1. Project Location: Warrensburg, Missouri. 

B. Owner: University of Central Missouri 

1. Owner's Representative: 

a. Larry Ray, Manager of Capital Development 

General Services Building 

116 West South Street 

Warrensburg, Missouri 64093 

Telephone Number: (660-543-4331) 

Email Address: lray@ucmo.edu 

C. Architect: 

1. Gould Evans, 4041 Mill Street, Kansas City, MO 64111 (816) 701-5433 





a. Justin Roth, Project Architect (construction administrator) 

Email Address: justin.roth@gouldevans.com 

D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have 

prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: 

1. MEP Engineering: 

a. Henderson Engineers, 8325 Lenexa Dr., Lenexa, KS (913) 742-5397 

Doug Everhart (electrical design) 

Email Address: Doug.Everhart@hei-eng.com 

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 

1. Interior Renovation of a 4 story residence hall with a walk-out basement level, consisting 

of 17 apartment and 34 student semi-suites on levels 1-4. Rooms will receive cosmetic 

upgrades consisting of flooring, painting and general refreshing along with masonry work 

on the corridor wall. The apartments will receive additional upgrades to the kitchen area 

with new cabinets and kitchen equipment. Corridors and lounge spaces will also be 

updated with finishes. The first floor lobby area will be renovated more extensively with 

modifications to the front desk area and complete demo and construction of new 

restrooms and common kitchen area. 

B. Type of Contract: 

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 

1.5 WORK BY OWNER 

A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering 

with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this 

Contract with work performed by Owner. 

B. Preceding Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. 

Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract 

begins. 

1. Asbestos Flooring Abatement 

2. Furniture move-out. 

C. Subsequent Work: Owner will perform the following additional work at site after Substantial 

Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work 

under this Contract. 

1. Furniture move-in. 

1.6 ACCESS TO SITE 

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during 

construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform 

work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. 





B. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as 

indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section. 

C. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb 

portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 

1. Limits: Confine construction operations to remain within the construction limits. 

Construction limits will be coordinated with the Owner and will be maintained by the 

Contractor. Lay down, parking and construction staging will be coordinated by the 

Contractor and Owner. 

2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas, and entrances 

serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency 

vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. 

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction 

operations. 

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of 

materials and equipment on-site. 

D. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction 

operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused 

by construction operations. 

1.7 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS 

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, 

with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction 

operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to 

interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used 

facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used 

facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 

2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's 

operations. 

B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to 

occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to 

Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with 

completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not 

constitute acceptance of the total Work. 

1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of 

the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work. 

2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited 

Owner occupancy. 

3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully 

operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On 

occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving 

occupied portions of Work. 

4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service 

for occupied portions of Work. 





1.8 WORK RESTRICTIONS 

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities 

having jurisdiction. 

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7 

a.m. to 4 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Weekend Hours: As approved by the Owner. 

2. Early Morning Hours: As approved by the Owner. 

3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: To be coordinated with the Owner to not affect Operations 

of adjacent buildings. If shut-downs will affect adjacent buildings the shutdowns must be 

done while buildings are not in use. 

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or 

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary 

utility services according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Owner not less than three days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. 

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and 

vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 

1. Notify Owner not less than three days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. 

E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted on campus. 

F. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project 

site is not permitted. 

1.9 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS 

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and 

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. 

These conventions are as follows: 

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The 

words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied 

where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated 

otherwise. 

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work 

of all Sections in the Specifications. 

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are 

described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to 

identify materials and products: 





1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in 

the individual Specifications Sections. 

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on 

Drawings. 

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing 

Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 

END OF SECTION 011000 




UNIT PRICES 0122001 

SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. 


1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and 

handling Change Orders. 

2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for general testing and inspecting requirements. 

1.3 DEFINITIONS 

A. Unit price is an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the 

Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of 

the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope 

of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or 

decreased. 

1.4 PROCEDURES 

A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, 

insurance,overhead, and profit. 

B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires 

establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are 

specified in those Sections. 

C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use 

of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an 

independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. 

D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections 

referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. 




UNIT PRICES 0122002 


PART 3 - EXECUTION 

3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES 

A. Unit Price No. 1 – Replacement Water Closets 

1. Description: Replacement of existing water closets according to 1 & 2/MP201. 

2. Unit of Measurement: Each. 

3. Quantity Allowance: Coordinate unit price with Owner and Architect, after building is 

open for inventory. 

B. Unit Price No. 2 – Replacement Lavatory 

1. Description: Replacement of existing lavatory according to 1 & 2/MP201. 

2. Unit of Measurement: Each. 

3. Quantity Allowance: Coordinate unit price with Owner and Architect, after building is 

open for inventory. 





SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 016351 

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. 

B. Related Sections: 

1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 

2. Division 1 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 

3. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable 

product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 

4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations for substitutions. 


A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from 

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to 

changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or 

unavailability of required warranty terms. 

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not 

required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to 

Contractor or Owner. 

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS 

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product 

or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and 

title and Drawing numbers and titles. 

1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided in the Project Manual. 

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, 

as applicable: 

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be 

provided, if applicable. 

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to 

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate 

contractors, which will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. 





c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of 

the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section. 

Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, 

durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific 

features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work 

specified. 

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and 

installation procedures. 

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. 

f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. 

g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and 

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. 

h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test 

results for compliance with requirements indicated. 

i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, 

from ICC-ES. 

j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed 

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall 

Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided 

within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's 

letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in 

delivery. 

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. 

l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in 

the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible 

with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. 

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently 

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce 

indicated results. 

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or 

documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. 

Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 

15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or 

documentation, whichever is later. 

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or 

Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. 

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed 

substitution within time allocated. 

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution 

with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform compatibility 

tests recommended by manufacturers. 

1.6 PROCEDURES 

A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved 

substitutions. 





PART 2 - PRODUCTS 

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need 

for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related 

submittals. 

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the 

following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect 

will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these 

requirements: 

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce 

indicated results. 

b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 

c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. 

d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 

f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 

g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 

h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution 

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is 

compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. 

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed. 







THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 




PRODUCT APPROVAL REQUEST FORM 

(BIDDING PHASE) 

TO: Gould Evans Associates DATE: 

PROJECT: Nickerson Hall Refurbish 

LOCATION: Universtiy of Central Missouri, Warrensburg, MO 

We hereby submit for your consideration the following product as an approved equal to or substitution for 

the specified item on the project referenced above: 

SECTION PARAGRAPH SPECIFIED ITEM 

PROPOSED PRODUCT: ____________________________________________ 

PROPOSED CREDIT (if applicable): ___________________________________ 

The attached data includes product description, specifications,drawings, photographs, performance and 

test data adequate for evaluation of this request. Applicable portions of this data should be clearly 

identified. 

The attached data should also include changes to the Construction Documents that this product will 

require for proper installation. 

The undersigned certifies that the following statements, unless modified by attachments, are correct: 

1. The proposed product does not affect dimensions shown on drawings. 

2. The proposed product will have no adverse affect on other trades, specified products / 

components, the construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 

3. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed product. 

The undersigned further states that the function, appearance, and quality of the proposed product are 

equivalent or superior to the specified item. 

SUBMITTED BY: 

COMPANY NAME: 

ADDRESS: 

TELEPHONE: 

FAX: 

SIGNATURE: 

FOR USE BY Gould Evans Associates 

APPROVED ______ 

APPROVED AS NOTED _______ 

REMARKS: 

BY: 

DATE: 




CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 0126001 

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing 

Contract modifications. 


1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling 

requests for substitutions made after the Contract award. 

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not 

involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on form included in Project 

Manual. 

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS 

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed 

changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If 

necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop 

work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a 

quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time 

necessary to execute the change. 

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with 

total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey 

data to substantiate quantities. 

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of 

trade discounts. 

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 

d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of 

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and 

finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an 

extension of the Contract Time. 

e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect. 





B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the 

Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the 

Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the 

proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total 

amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to 

substantiate quantities. 

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade 

discounts. 

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 

5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the 

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, 

and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the 

Contract Time. 

6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed 

change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 

7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect. 

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS 

A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for 

preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of 

allowances. 

B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for 

preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured 

scope of unit-price work. 

1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change 

Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 

1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE 

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on 

AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a 

change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It 

also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the 

Contract Time. 

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the 

Construction Change Directive. 

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary 

to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. 











PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013101 

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project 

including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. General project coordination procedures. 

2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 

3. Coordination drawings. 

4. Requests for Information (RFIs). 

5. Project meetings. 

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility 

are assigned to a specific contractor. 

C. Related Sections: 

1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting 

Contractor's construction schedule. 

2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general 

installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and 

control points. 

3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 

4. Division 1 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for coordinating the Work 

with Owner's commissioning authority. 


A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information from each other during 

construction. 

1.4 COORDINATION 

A. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other 

contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. 

Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections, 

that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where 

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before 

or after its own installation. 





2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum 

performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures 

required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees 

at meetings. 

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their 

Work is required. 

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative 

procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts 

and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not 

limited to, the following: 

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 

2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 

4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 

5. Progress meetings. 

6. Preinstallation conferences. 

7. Project closeout activities. 

8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 

9. Project closeout activities. 

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with 

consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of 

temporary utilities to minimize waste. 

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually 

incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials 

that are designated as Owner's property. 

1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS 

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with 

requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop 

Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is 

required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than 

one entity. 

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to 

indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed 

data. Include the following information, as applicable: 

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. 

Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of 

various systems and components. 

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings 

by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the 

information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before 

submitting for review. 





c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, 

structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. 

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated 

replacement of components during the life of the installation. 

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, 

valves, and other controls. 

f. Indicate required installation sequences. 

g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that 

appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance 

requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed 

resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will 

not be considered changes to the Contract. 

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and 

mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of 

visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan 

drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical 

and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to 

accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict 

between light fixtures and other components. 

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans 

and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical 

equipment. 

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 

5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of 

embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, 

door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and 

similar items. 

6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: 

a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including 

insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems. 

b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access 

doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. 

c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork. 

7. Electrical Work: Show the following: 

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inch diameter and larger. 

b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire 

alarm locations. 

c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor 

control center locations. 

d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. 

8. Fire Protection System: Show the following: 

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler 

heads. 

9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being 

coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are the Contractor's 

responsibility. If the Architect determines that the coordination drawings are not being 





prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, the Architect will so 

inform the Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. 

10. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints in accordance with 

requirements of Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." 

C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files in accordance with the 

following requirements: 

1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating 

system as the original Drawings. 

2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File 

(PDF) format. 

3. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Drawings for use in 

preparing coordination digital data files. 

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital 

data files as they relate to the Drawings. 

b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement 

included in this Project Manual. 

1.6 KEY PERSONNEL 

A. Key Personnel Names: Within 7 calendar days of winning bid, submit a list of key personnel 

assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. 

Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, 

including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and email addresses. Provide names, 

addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of 

individuals assigned to Project. 

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) 

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the 

Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor 

with no response. 

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's 

work or work of subcontractors. 

B. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, 

acceptable to Architect. 

C. Architect's and Action: Architect and will review each RFI, determine action required, and 

respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by 

Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: 

a. Requests for approval of submittals. 

b. Requests for approval of substitutions. 

c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract 

Documents. 

d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. 





e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. 

f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case 

Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the 

Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to 

Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." 

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or 

the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI 

response. 

D. On receipt of Architect's action, immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. 

Review response and notify Architect and Construction Manager within seven days if Contractor 

disagrees with response. 

1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS 

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

1. Attendees: Inform participants and other involved, and individuals whose presence is 

required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled 

meeting dates and times. 

2. Agenda: prepare and distribute the meeting agenda to all invited attendees. 

3. Minutes: record significant discussions and agreements achieved and distribute the 

meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three 

days of the meeting. 

B. Preconstruction Conference: schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before 

starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days 

after execution of the Agreement. 

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Prime 

Contractors and their superintendents; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other 

concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be 

familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: 

a. Tentative construction schedule. 

b. Phasing. 

c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. 

d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. 

e. Lines of communications. 

f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. 

g. Procedures for RFIs. 

h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. 

i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 

j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. 

k. Submittal procedures. 

l. Preparation of record documents. 

m. Use of the premises and existing building. 





n. Work restrictions. 

o. Working hours. 

p. Owner's occupancy requirements. 

q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. 

r. Procedures for moisture and mold control. 

s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. 

t. Construction waste management and recycling. 

u. Parking availability. 

v. Office, work, and storage areas. 

w. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 

x. First aid. 

y. Security. 

z. Progress cleaning. 

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting 

minutes. 

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each 

construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or 

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and 

installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise 

Architect, and Owner, of scheduled meeting dates. 

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the 

particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: 

a. Contract Documents. 

b. Options. 

c. Related RFIs. 

d. Related Change Orders. 

e. Purchases. 

f. Deliveries. 

g. Submittals. 

h. Review of mockups. 

i. Possible conflicts. 

j. Compatibility problems. 

k. Time schedules. 

l. Weather limitations. 

m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. 

n. Warranty requirements. 

o. Compatibility of materials. 

p. Acceptability of substrates. 

q. Temporary facilities and controls. 

r. Space and access limitations. 

s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 

t. Testing and inspecting requirements. 

u. Installation procedures. 

v. Coordination with other work. 

w. Required performance results. 

x. Protection of adjacent work. 

y. Protection of construction and personnel. 

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including 

required corrective measures and actions. 





4. Reporting: distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties 

requiring information. 

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. 

Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the 

Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. 

D. Project Closeout Conference: schedule and conduct a Project closeout conference, at a time 

convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of 

Substantial Completion. 

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project 

closeout. 

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Prime 

Contractors and their superintendents; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other 

concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar 

with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, 

including the following: 

a. Preparation of record documents. 

b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final 

inspection for acceptance. 

c. Submittal of written warranties. 

d. Requirements for preparing sustainable design documentation. 

e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. 

f. Requirements for demonstration and training. 

g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. 

h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and 

for final payment. 

i. Submittal procedures. 

j. Coordination of separate contracts. 

k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. 

l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. 

m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 

4. Minutes: record and distribute meeting minutes. 

E. Progress Meetings: conduct progress meetings at regular intervals. 

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, and Architect, each contractor, 

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in 

planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these 

meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to 

conclude matters relating to the Work. 

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review 

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as 

appropriate to status of Project. 

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. 

Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind 

schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how 

construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties 

involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that 

current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 

1) Review schedule for next period. 





b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 

1) Interface requirements. 

2) Sequence of operations. 

3) Status of submittals. 

4) Deliveries. 

5) Off-site fabrication. 

6) Access. 

7) Site utilization. 

8) Temporary facilities and controls. 

9) Progress cleaning. 

10) Quality and work standards. 

11) Status of correction of deficient items. 

12) Field observations. 

13) Status of RFIs. 

14) Status of proposal requests. 

15) Pending changes. 

16) Status of Change Orders. 

17) Pending claims and disputes. 

18) Documentation of information for payment requests. 

3. Minutes: record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties 

requiring information. 

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each 

progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. 

Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 












Project Name: University of Central Missouri – Nickerson Hall Refurbish 

Project Number: 0211-2170 

Electronic Data Transfer Agreement 

This Electronic Data Transfer Agreement (“Agreement”) is made as of the 

in the year . 

day of 

BETWEEN the Party transmitting the Electronic Data (“Transmitting Party”): 

(Name, address and contact information, including electronic addresses) 

AND the Party receiving the Electronic Data (“Receiving Party”): 

(Name, address and contact information, including electronic addresses) 

SECTION 1 

GENERAL 

1.1 This Agreement establishes the protocols and authorized uses of the electronic information, 

which may include building information modeling, computer aided drafting documents, digital modeling, 

audio, video and/or other graphic images, communications, drawings or designs created or stored in 

digital form (hereafter “Electronic Data”) being provided the Receiving Party by the Transmitting Party. 

1.2 The purpose of this Agreement is to grant a license from the Transmitting Party to the Receiving 

Party for the Receiving Party’s use of the Electronic Data, and to set forth the license terms. 

1.3 This Agreement is the entire and integrated agreement between the parties. Except as 

specifically set forth herein, this Agreement does not create any other contractual relationship between 

the parties. 

1.4 Due to the potential that the electronic data may be modified by the Receiving Party or others, the 

Transmitting Party may, at its option, remove references to its identity in order to differentiate the 

transmitted document from the original document. 

SECTION 2 

TRANSMISSION OF THE ELECTRONIC DATA 

2.1 The transmission of the Electronic Data constitutes a representation by the Transmitting Party to 

the Receiving Party that the Transmitting Party (1) is the copyright owner of the Electronic Data or (2) has 

permission from the copyright owner to transmit the Electronic Data and grant a license for its use. 

2.2 The Transmitting Party retains its rights in the Electronic Data. By transmitting the Electronic 

Data, the Transmitting Party does not grant to the Receiving Party an assignment of those rights; nor

does the Transmitting Party convey to the Receiving Party any right in the software used to generate the 

Electronic Data. 

2.3 The Receiving Party agrees to keep all information contained in the Electronic Data strictly 

confidential and not to disclose it to any other person except to (1) its employees, (2) those who need to 

know the content of the Electronic Data in order to perform their respective services or construction, or (3) 

its consultants and contractors whose contracts include similar restrictions on the use of the Electronic 

Data. However, Receiving party agrees before forwarding Transmitting Party's Electronic Data to anyone, 

Receiving Party will obtain a signed Electronic Data Transfer Agreement similar to this Agreement from 

such party desiring Transmitting Party's Electronic Data. If Receiving Party's fails to obtain a signed 

Electronic Data Transfer Agreement similar to this Agreement, then Receiving Party will not forward any 

Electronic Data received from Transmitting Party to those parties. 

2.4 The Transmitting Party makes no warranty, express or implied, that the Electronic Data is free of 

errors. 

SECTION 3 

OWNERSHIP AND LICENSE CONDITIONS 

3.1 The Transmitting Party shall be deemed the author and owner of the Electronic Data and shall 

retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, including copyrights. Upon execution of this 

Agreement, the Transmitting Party grants to the Receiving Party a nonexclusive limited license in the 

Electronic Data, provided that the Receiving Party shall comply with all obligations under this Agreement. 

The Receiving Party shall obtain similar nonexclusive licenses from the Receiving Party’s consultants 

consistent with this Agreement. 

3.2 Upon termination of this Agreement by the Transmitting Party, with or without cause, the license 

granted in Section 3.1 shall be deemed terminated. Upon such termination, the Receiving Party shall not 

make further reproductions of the Electronic Data and shall destroy or return to the Transmitting Party, 

within three (3) days of termination, all originals and reproductions of the Electronic Data in the Receiving 

Party’s possession or control. Licenses to use the Electronic Data that the Receiving Party may have 

granted to third parties will terminate and use of the Electronic Data by third parties shall cease. 

3.3 Except for the licenses granted in this Section 3, no other license or right shall be deemed 

granted or implied under this Agreement. The Receiving Party shall not assign, delegate, sublicense, 

pledge or otherwise transfer any license granted herein to another party without the prior written 

agreement of the Transmitting Party. 

3.4 Receiving Party acknowledges that the Electronic Data, transferred in any manner or translated 

from the system and format used by the Transmitting Party to another system or format, is subject to 

errors that may affect the accuracy and reliability of the Electronic Data and the Electronic Data may be 

altered, whether inadvertently or otherwise. Additionally, the Electronic Data may represent only a portion 

of the construction document information and, as such, may be incomplete. Accordingly, Transmitting 

Party makes no representation or warranty, express or implied, as to the accuracy or completeness of the 

information transferred and shall not be responsible to advise Receiving Party of any changes which may 

hereafter be made to the Electronic Data. 

3.5 Under no circumstances shall the transfer of the Electronic Data be deemed to be a sale of 

tangible goods and the Transmitting Party makes no warranties, express or implied, of merchantability or 

of fitness for a particular purpose. 

3.6 Receiving Party’s use of the Electronic Data shall be at the Receiving Party’s sole risk and 

without any liability, risk or legal exposure to the Transmitting Party. The Receiving Party agrees to 

indemnify, defend, waive and release all claims or potential claims against the Transmitting Party, its 

Project owner, and its subconsultants, and their respective officers, directors, employees, agents and 

servants relating to, or arising out of, the use of the Electronic Data and the information contained in it.

3.7 The Electronic Data and the information contained in it, provided by the Transmitting Party under 

the terms of this Agreement, are the proprietary information of Transmitting Party. The Electronic Data 

shall be treated as confidential and is not to be disclosed to or shared with others without Transmitting 

Party’s express, written consent. 

SECTION 4 

LICENSING FEE 

4.1 The Receiving Party agrees to pay the Transmitting Party the following, or other compensation, 

for the Receiving Party’s use of the Electronic Data. 

(State the fee or other method by which the Receiving Party will compensate the Transmitting Party for 

the Receiving Party’s use of the Electronic Data.) 

“Not Applicable” 

SECTION 5 

MISCELLANEOUS 

5.1 This Agreement shall be construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Missouri. 

Transmitting Party 

Receiving Party 

By 

By 

Name 

Name 

Title 

Title (must be a company officer) 

Date 

Date

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013301 

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural 

requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 


1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the 

schedule of values. 

2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and 

reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 

3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record 

Specifications, and record Product Data. 

4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and 

maintenance manuals. 

5. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of 

demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 


A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require 

Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual 

Specification Sections as action submittals. 

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not 

require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with 

requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification 

Sections as informational submittals. 

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from 

another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. 

An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal 

and external users are able to access files. 

D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems 

used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent 

fixed-layout document format. 






A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates 

required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, 

fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making 

corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the Architect and additional time for handling 

and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and 

Contractor's construction schedule. 

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with start-up construction schedule. Include 

submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required 

to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead 

time for manufacture or fabrication. 

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's 

construction schedule. 

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing 

for submittals. 

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. 

b. Specification Section number and title. 

c. Submittal category: Action, informational. 

d. Name of subcontractor. 

e. Description of the Work covered. 

f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. 

g. Scheduled dates for purchasing. 

h. Scheduled dates for installation. 

i. Activity or event number. 

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of 

construction activities. 

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, 

and related activities that require sequential activity. 

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless 

partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification 

Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so 

processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for 

coordination. 

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination 

with other submittals until related submittals are received. 

B. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. 

Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the 

Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of 

the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 





1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if 

coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor 

when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner 

as initial submittal. 

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 

4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, 

Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 

a. All Civil, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing submittals. 

C. Identification and Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each paper copy 

submittal item for identification. 

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 

2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record 

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 

3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: 

a. Project name. 

b. Date. 

c. Name of Architect. 

d. Name of Contractor. 

e. Name of subcontractor. 

f. Name of supplier. 

g. Name of manufacturer. 

h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a 

decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). 

Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point 

(e.g., 061000.01.A). 

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 

j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 

k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 

l. Other necessary identification. 

D. Identification and Information: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal 

file as follows: 

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file with links enabling 

navigation to each item. 

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by 

a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., UCM-061000.01). 

Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 

UCM-061000.01.A). 

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval 

markings and action taken by Architect. 

4. Include the following information on an inserted cover sheet: 






b. Date. 

c. Name and address of Architect. 

d. Name of Contractor. 

e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 

f. Name of subcontractor. 

g. Name of supplier. 

h. Name of manufacturer. 

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 


k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 

l. Related physical samples submitted directly. 

m. Other necessary identification. 

5. Include the following information as keywords in the electronic file metadata: 


b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 

c. Manufacturer name. 

d. Product name. 

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Architect. 

F. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. 

G. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless 

Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal 

may serve as final submittal. 

H. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and 

handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, 

without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 

1. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: 


b. Date. 

c. Destination (To:). 

d. Source (From:). 

e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 

f. Category and type of submittal. 

g. Submittal purpose and description. 

h. Specification Section number and title. 

i. Indication of full or partial submittal. 


k. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. 

l. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 

m. Remarks. 

n. Signature of transmitter. 

2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant 

information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on 

previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, 

including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as 

related submittal. 





I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of 

revision. 

3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action 

stamp. 

J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, 

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of 

construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 

K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation from 

Architect's action stamp. 


2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by 

individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification 

Sections. 

1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. 

a. Architect, will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an 

electronic Project record document file. 

2. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements 

specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." 

3. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of 

entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be 

signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that 

entity. 

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted 

certificates and certifications where indicated. 

4. Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in 

Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." 

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and 

type of product or equipment. 

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data 

are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 

3. Include the following information, as applicable: 

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. 

b. Manufacturer's product specifications. 

c. Standard color charts. 

d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. 

e. Testing by recognized testing agency. 





f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. 

g. Notation of coordination requirements. 

h. Availability and delivery time information. 

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: 

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. 

b. Printed performance curves. 

c. Operational range diagrams. 

d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop 

Drawings. 

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 

6. Submit Product Data in the following format: 

a. PDF electronic file. 

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base 

Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the 

following information, as applicable: 

a. Identification of products. 

b. Schedules. 

c. Compliance with specified standards. 

d. Notation of coordination requirements. 

e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 

f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. 

g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop 

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 

42 inches (750 by 1067 mm). 

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: 


D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these 

characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between 

submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories 

together in one submittal package. 

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: 

a. Generic description of Sample. 

b. Product name and name of manufacturer. 

c. Sample source. 

d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. 

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol 

comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be 

used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. 





a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual 

Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time 

of use. 

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's 

property, are the property of Contractor. 

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or 

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 

a. Number of Samples: Submit 3 full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, 

texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's 

product line. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return submittal with 

options selected. 

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared 

from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and 

physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of 

color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the 

following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or 

containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing 

color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent 

testing and inspection. 

a. Number of Samples: Submit 3 sets of Samples. Architect and Construction 

Manager will retain 2 Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain 

one returned Sample set as a Project record sample. 

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication 

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to 

be demonstrated. 

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in 

material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least 3 sets of 

paired units that show approximate limits of variations. 

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary 

indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the 

following information in tabular form: 

1. Type of product. 

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 

3. Number and name of room or space. 

4. Location within room or space. 

5. Submit product schedule in the following format: 


F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section 

"Construction Progress Documentation." 

G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment 

Procedures." 

H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment 

Procedures." 





I. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each 

portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a 

special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying 

products. 

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 

3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 

4. Submit subcontract list in the following format: 


J. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project 

Management and Coordination." 

K. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of 

firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact 

information of architects and owners, and other information specified. 

L. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel 

comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure 

Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on American Welding Society (AWS) forms. 

Include names of firms and personnel certified. 

M. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that 

Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is 

authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. 

N. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying 

that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of 

manufacturing experience where required. 

O. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that 

product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 

P. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that 

material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 

Q. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's 

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with 

requirements in the Contract Documents. 

R. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by 

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on 

evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or 

on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 

S. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. 

Include the following information: 

1. Name of evaluation organization. 

2. Date of evaluation. 

3. Time period when report is in effect. 

4. Product and manufacturers' names. 





5. Description of product. 

6. Test procedures and results. 

7. Limitations of use. 

T. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section 

"Quality Requirements." 

U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing 

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation 

of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. 

V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing 

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed 

before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate 

preparation needed for adhesion. 

W. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed 

either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for 

compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 

X. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and 

Maintenance Data." 

Y. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, 

performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. 

Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. 

Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for 

calculations. Include page numbers. 

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES 

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a 

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide 

products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a 

written request for additional information to Architect. 

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other 

required submittals, submit digitally-signed PDF electronic files by the responsible design 

professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or 

certified by a design professional. 

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the 

Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing 

these services. 






3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW 

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with 

other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections 

and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. 

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Division 1 

Section "Closeout Procedures." 

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name 

and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date 

of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, 

and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION 

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and 

will return them without action. 

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or 

modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp 

and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. 

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return 

it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate 

party. 

D. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be 

returned without review. 

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be 

discarded. 










QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014001 

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality 

control. 

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or 

indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the 

Contract Document requirements. 

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities 

are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those 

Sections may also cover production of standard products. 

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance 

and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document 

requirements. 

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required 

by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this 

Section. 

C. Related Sections: 

1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for testing and inspecting allowances. 

2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of 

required tests and inspections. 

3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 


A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during 

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed 

construction will comply with requirements. 

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after 

execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and 

completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract 

enforcement activities performed by Architect. 

C. Mockups: Full size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed 

to verify selections made under sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where 

indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to 

show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified 





installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved 

mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 

1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from 

the building but on the project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies and 

subassemblies. 

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for the Project before 

products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with 

specified criteria. 

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing 

agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to 

establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. 

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., 

plant, mill, factory, or shop. 

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation 

of the Work and for completed Work. 

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing 

laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. 

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an 

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, 

including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that 

certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that 

requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade or trades. 

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully 

completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; 

being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of 

authorities having jurisdiction. 

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS 

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the 

standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, 

comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, 

but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be 

the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the 

minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. 

To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as 

appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision 

before proceeding. 






A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, 

indicating materials and size of mockup construction. 

1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. 

2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions. 

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 

A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and 

responsibilities. 

B. Contractor's Quality-Control Manager Qualifications: For supervisory personnel. 

C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, 

submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before 

starting work on the following systems. 

1. Main wind-force resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-forceresisting 

system quality assurance plan prepared by the Architect. 

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to 

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a 

recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 

1. Specification Section number and title. 

2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 

3. Description of test and inspection. 

4. Identification of applicable standards. 

5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 

6. Number of tests and inspections required. 

7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 

8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 

9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. 

1.7 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN 

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, 

and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to 

Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be 

used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate 

with Contractor's construction schedule. 

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and 

experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures 

similar in nature and extent to those required for Project. 

1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent. 





C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through 

review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible 

for submittal review. 

D. Testing and Inspection: Include in quality-control plan a comprehensive schedule of Work 

requiring testing or inspection, including the following: 

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and 

inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and 

inspections. 

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the 

"Statement of Special Inspections." 

3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents. 

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during 

construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and 

inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into 

compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved 

mockups. 

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of 

approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or 

defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with 

requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS 

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other 

Sections. Include the following: 

1. Date of issue. 

2. Project title and number. 

3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 

4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 

5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 

6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 

7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 

8. Complete test or inspection data. 

9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 

10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and 

inspecting. 

11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with 

the Contract Document requirements. 

12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 

13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. 

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information 

documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other 

Sections. Include the following: 

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 

3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 





4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with 

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 

5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance 

complies with requirements. 

6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 

7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. 

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting 

manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in 

other Sections. Include the following: 

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative 

making report. 

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 

3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance 

complies with requirements. 

4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 

5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. 

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, 

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee 

payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for 

compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels 

required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. 

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar 

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as 

well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated 

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient 

production capacity to produce required units. 

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling 

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has 

resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to 

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering 

services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for 

installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this 

Project in material, design, and extent. 

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be 

performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy 

qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for 

specialists. 





G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the 

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according 

to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where 

required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory 

Accreditation Program. 

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of 

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation 

of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for 

this Project. 

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of 

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of 

manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for 

this Project. 

J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing 

for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the 

following: 

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: 

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. 

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing 

results to prevent delaying the Work. 

c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies and mockups to adequately 

demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. 

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will 

perform same tasks for Project. 

e. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies and mockups; do 

not reuse products on Project. 

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, 

and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests 

and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies 

with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 

K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each 

form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using 

materials indicated for the completed Work: 

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by 

Architect. 

2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be 

constructed. 

3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers 

that will be employed during the construction at the Project. 

4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 

5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 





6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for 

judging the completed Work. 

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. 

L. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup in accordance with 

approved Shop Drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products 

for which mockups are required in individual specification sections, along with supporting 

materials. 

1.10 QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, 

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing 

agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged 

to perform. 

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work 

that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the 

Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. 

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are 

Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the 

Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required 

by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor 

by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing 

agency to perform these quality-control services. 

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in 

writing by Owner. 

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires 

testing or inspecting will be performed. 

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a 

certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract 

Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, 

when they so direct. 

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service 

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including 

service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal 

Procedures." 

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical 

representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's 

services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and 

conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed 

portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. 





E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's 

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for 

construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. 

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of 

duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the 

Work during performance of its services. 

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests 

are conducted. 

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and 

inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol 

service through Contractor. 

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or 

approve or accept any portion of the Work. 

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. 

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and 

similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify 

agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the 

following: 

1. Access to the Work. 

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and 

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 

6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing 

agency. 

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project 

site. 

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance 

and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing 

construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar 

quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of the Contractor's 

quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction 

schedule. Update as the Work progresses. 

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Construction Manager, testing 

agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests 

and inspections are required. 





1.11 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to conduct 

special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of 

Owner, and as follows: 

B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified special inspector as required by 

authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures 

and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in 

the Work during performance of its services. 

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control 

service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which 

includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected 

work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. 



3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG 

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 

3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 

4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. 

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to 

test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION 

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair 

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other 

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched 

areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible 

as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching 

in Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements." 

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. 





C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of 

responsibility for quality-control services. 





REFERENCES 014201 

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES 






A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. 

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, 

and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the 

Conditions of the Contract. 

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," 

"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." 

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on 

Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," 

"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." 

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having 

jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control 

performance of the Work. 

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, 

installation, and similar operations. 

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, 

assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, 

protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. 

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site 

is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which 

Project is to be built. 

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS 

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent 

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if 

bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards 

are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. 

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents 

unless otherwise indicated. 





C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with 

industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not 

bound with the Contract Documents. 

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain 

copies directly from publication source. 

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS 

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other 

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson 

Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional 

Associations of the U.S." 

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other 

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. 

Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be 

accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 

PRIVATE tbl1 

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960 

www.aluminum.org 

AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 

www.aaadm.com 

AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 

www.aabchq.com 

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 

www.aamanet.org 

AASHTO 

American Association of State Highway and Transportation 

Officials 

www.transportation.org 

(202) 624-5800 

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (919) 549-8141 

www.aatcc.org 

ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888 

www.airbarrier.org 

ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 

www.abma-dc.org 

ACI American Concrete Institute (248) 848-3700 

www.concrete.org 

ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 

www.concrete-pipe.org 

AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 

www.aeic.org 

AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 

www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 





AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 

www.aga.org 

AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 

www.agc.org 

AHA 

American Hardboard Association 

(Now part of CPA) 

AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 

www.aham.org 

AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 

www.asphaltinstitute.org 

AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 

www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 

www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 

www.steel.org 

AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 

www.aitc-glulam.org 

ALCA 

Associated Landscape Contractors of America 

(Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) 

ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 

www.alsc.org 

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 

www.amca.org 

ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 

www.ansi.org 

AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (405) 780-7372 

www.aosaseed.com 

APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 

www.archprecast.org 

APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 

www.apawood.org 

APA EWS 

APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood 

Systems 

(See APA - The Engineered Wood Association) 

API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 

www.api.org 





ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 

www.ari.org 

ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 

www.asphaltroofing.org 

ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 

www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 

ASCE/SEI 

ASHRAE 

American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering 

Institute 

(See ASCE) 

American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning (800) 527-4723 

Engineers 

www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 

ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 

(American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170 

www.asme.org 

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 

www.asse-plumbing.org 

ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9500 

(American Society for Testing and Materials International) 

www.astm.org 

AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry (703) 534-8300 

www.awci.org 

AWCMA 

American Window Covering Manufacturers Association 

(Now WCMA) 

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) 323-3636 

www.awinet.org 

AWPA American Wood Protection Association (205) 733-4077 

(Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association) 

www.awpa.com 

AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 

www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 

AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 

www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 

BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 

www.buildershardware.com 

BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 

www.bia.org 

BICSI BICSI, Inc. (800) 242-7405 

www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 





BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 

(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association 

International) 

www.bifma.com 

BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 

www.bissc.org 

BWF Badminton World Federation 6-03-9283 7155 

(Formerly: IBF - International Badminton Federation) 

www.internationalbadminton.org 

CCC Carpet Cushion Council (610) 527-3880 

www.carpetcushion.org 

CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 

www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 

CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263 

www.canelect.ca 

CEA Consumer Electronics Association (866) 858-1555 

www.ce.org (703) 907-7600 

CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 

www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com 

CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 

www.cganet.com 

CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 

www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 

CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 

www.cisca.org 

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 

www.cispi.org 

CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 

www.chainlinkinfo.org 

CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465-2523 

www.coolroofs.org (510) 485-7175 

CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 

www.pbmdf.com 

CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 

www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 

CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 

www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 

www.crsi.org 





CSA Canadian Standards Association (800) 463-6727 

(416) 747-4000 

CSA CSA International (866) 797-4272 

(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 

www.csa-international.org 

CSI Cast Stone Institute (717) 272-3744 

www.caststone.org 

CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 

www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 

CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 

www.cedarbureau.org 

CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 

(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) 

www.cti.org 

DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 

www.dhi.org 

EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 

www.eia.org 

EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 

www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 

EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 

www.ejdc.org 

EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 

www.ejma.org 

ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 

(Electrostatic Discharge Association) 

www.esda.org 

ETL SEMCO Intertek ETL SEMCO (800) 967-5352 

(Formerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA) 

www.intertek.com 

FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball 41 22 545 00 00 

(The International Basketball Federation) 

www.fiba.com 

FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 35 

(The International Volleyball Federation) 

www.fivb.ch 

FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC (781) 762-4300 

www.fmglobal.com 

FM Global FM Global (401) 275-3000 





(Formerly: FMG - FM Global) 

www.fmglobal.com 

FMRC 

FRSA 

Factory Mutual Research 

(Now FM Global) 

Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors 

Association, Inc. 

www.floridaroof.com 

(407) 671-3772 

FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 

www.fluidsealing.com 

FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 

www.fsc.org 

GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 

www.gypsum.org 

GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 

www.glasswebsite.com 

GRI 

(Part of GSI) 

GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 

www.greenseal.org 

GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 

www.geosynthetic-institute.org 

HI Hydraulic Institute (973) 267-9700 

www.pumps.org 

HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 

www.gamanet.org 

HMMA 

Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association 

(Part of NAAMM) 

HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 

www.hpva.org 

HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 

www.hpwhite.com 

IAS 

IBF 

International Approval Services 

(Now CSA International) 

International Badminton Federation 

(Now BWF) 

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 

www.icea.net 

ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 

www.icri.org 





IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 

www.iec.ch 

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 

www.ieee.org 

IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 

www.iesna.org 

IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561 

www.iest.org 

IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 

www.igcc.org 

IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 

www.igmaonline.org 

ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 

www.iliai.com 

ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 

www.iso.ch 

Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020 

www.ansi.org 

ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 

www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 

ITS 

Intertek Testing Service NA 

(Now ETL SEMCO) 

ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 

www.itu.int/home 

KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 

www.kcma.org 

LMA 

Laminating Materials Association 

(Now part of CPA) 

LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 

www.lightning.org 

MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 

www.mbma.com 

MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (888) 480-9138 

www.maplefloor.org 

MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644-6610 

www.metalframingmfg.org 

MH 

Material Handling 





(Now MHIA) 

MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 

www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 

MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 

www.marble-institute.com 

MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 

www.paintinfo.com (604) 298-7578 

MSS 

Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings 

Industry Inc. 

www.mss-hq.com 

(703) 281-6613 

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (630) 942-6591 

www.naamm.org 

NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623 

(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 

www.nace.org 

NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 

www.nadca.com 

NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213-7193, 

ext. 453 

www.aahperd.org/nagws/ 

NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 

www.naima.org 

NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 

www.nbgqa.com 

NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 

www.ncaa.org 

NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 

www.ncma.org 

NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 

www.ncpi.org 

NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-2300 

www.ncta.com 

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 

www.nebb.org 

NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 

www.necanet.org 

NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 

www.nelma.org 





NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 

www.nema.org 

NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 

www.netaworld.org (269) 488-6382 

NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 

www.nfhs.org 

NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 

(National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 

www.nfpa.org 

NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 

www.nfrc.org 

NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 

www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 

NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 

www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 

NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 

www.nlga.org 

NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 

(Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) 

www.nofma.com 

NOMMA National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association (888) 516-8585 

www.nomma.org 

NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 

www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 

NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 

www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 

NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 

(National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 

www.nsf.org 

NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 

www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 

NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 

www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 

NTRMA 

NWWDA 

OPL 

National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association 

(Now TRI) 

National Wood Window and Door Association 

(Now WDMA) 

Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. 

(Now ITS) 





PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 

www.pci.org 

PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 

www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 

PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 

www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 

PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 

http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu 

PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522 

(Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of (703) 736-9666 

America) 

www.landcarenetwork.org 

PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 

www.post-tensioning.org 

RCSC 

Research Council on Structural Connections 

www.boltcouncil.org 

RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580 

www.rfci.com 

RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 

www.redwoodinspection.com (415) 382-0662 

SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 

www.sae.org (724) 776-4841 

SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 

www.sdi.org 

SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 

www.steeldoor.org 

SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (877) 294-5424 

www.sefalabs.com (516) 294-5424 

SEI/ASCE 

Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil 

Engineers 

(See ASCE) 

SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 

www.sgcc.org 

SIA Security Industry Association (866) 817-8888 

www.siaonline.org (703) 683-2075 

SIGMA 

Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 

(Now IGMA) 

SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 





www.steeljoist.org 

SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 

www.smacentral.org 

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 

National Association 

www.smacna.org 

SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 

www.smpte.org 

SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 

(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; 

Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) 

www.sprayfoam.org 

SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 

www.spib.org 

SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 

www.spri.org 

SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 

www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 

SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 

www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 

STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 

www.steeltank.com 

SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 

www.steelwindows.com 

SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 

www.swrionline.org 

TCA 

Tile Council of America, Inc. 

(Now TCNA) 

TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 

www.tileusa.com 

TIA/EIA 

Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries 

Alliance 

www.tiaonline.org 

(703) 907-7700 

TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 

www.masonrysociety.org 

TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 

www.tpinst.org 

TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 

www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 649-5555 





TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 

www.tileroofing.org 

UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 

www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 

UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 

www.uni-bell.org 

USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539 

www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800 

USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (800) 795-1747 

www.usgbc.org 

USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488 

www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463 

WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 

www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 

WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 

www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 

WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 

www.wcmanet.org 

WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 

(Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers 

(212) 297-2109 

Association) 

www.windowcoverings.org 

WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 

(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door (847) 299-5200 

Association) 

www.wdma.com 

WI 

WIC 

Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of 

California) 

www.wicnet.org 

Woodwork Institute of California 

(Now WI) 

(916) 372-9943 

WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 

www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 

WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 

www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441 

WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 

www.wwpa.org 

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other 

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. 





Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be 


PRIVATE tbl2 

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 

www.iapmo.org 

ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 

www.iccsafe.org 

ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 

www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543 

UBC 

Uniform Building Code 

(See ICC) 

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications 

or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the 

following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are 

believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 

PRIVATE tbl3 

CE Army Corps of Engineers (202) 761-0011 

www.usace.army.mil 

CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 

www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923 

DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 

www.commerce.gov 

DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 

http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil 

DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 

www.energy.gov 

EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 

www.epa.gov 

FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 

www.faa.gov 

FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 

www.fcc.gov 

FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 

www.fda.gov 

GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 

www.gsa.gov 

HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 

www.hud.gov 

LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 

www.lbl.gov 





NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program 

(See TRB) 

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 

www.nist.gov 

OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 

www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 

PBS 

Public Buildings Service 

(See GSA) 

PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 

www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs 

RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 

(See USDA) 

SD State Department (202) 647-4000 

www.state.gov 

TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 

http://gulliver.trb.org 

USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 

www.usda.gov 

USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 

www.usps.com 

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or 

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and 

regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to 

change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract 

Documents. 

PRIVATE tbl4 

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 

Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080 

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities 

Available from U.S. Access Board 

www.access-board.gov 

CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 

Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 

www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html 

DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-2664 

Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point 

http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil 

DSCC 

FED-STD 

Defense Supply Center Columbus 

(See FS) 

Federal Standard 

(See FS) 





FS Federal Specification (215) 697-2664 



Available from Defense Standardization Program 

www.dps.dla.mil 

Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 

www.gsa.gov 

Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 

www.wbdg.org/ccb 

FTMS 

MIL 

MIL-STD 

Federal Test Method Standard 

(See FS) 

(See MILSPEC) 

(See MILSPEC) 

MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-2664 



UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 

Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 

www.access-board.gov 

F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or 

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following 

list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be 


PRIVATE tbl5 

CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home (800) 952-5210 

Furnishings and Thermal Insulation 

www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti (916) 574-2041 

CCR California Code of Regulations (916) 323-6815 

www.calregs.com 

CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (415) 703-2782 

www.cpuc.ca.gov 

TFS Texas Forest Service (979) 458-6650 

Forest Resource Development 

http://txforestservice.tamu.edu 







TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 0150001 

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and 

protection facilities. 


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 

2. Section 312319 "Dewatering" for disposal of ground water at Project site. 

3. Section 321216 "Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt pavement 

for temporary roads and paved areas. 

4. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for construction and maintenance of cement concrete 

pavement for temporary roads and paved areas. 

1.3 USE CHARGES 

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included 

in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services 

and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to,[ Owner's construction forces,] 

Architect,[ occupants of Project,] testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Sewer Service: [Pay] [Owner will pay] sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all 

entities for construction operations. 

C. Water Service: [Pay] [Owner will pay] water-service use charges for water used by all entities 

for construction operations. 

D. Electric Power Service: [Pay] [Owner will pay] electric-power-service use charges for 

electricity used by all entities for construction operations. 

E. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is 

available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections 

and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 

F. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is 

available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections 

and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 

G. Sewer, Water, and Electric Power Service: Use charges are specified in Section 011200 

"Multiple Contract Summary." 






A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for 

construction personnel. 

B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA 

Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. 

C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having 

jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention 

program. 

D. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and 

construction from water absorption and damage. 

1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water 

absorption or water damage. 

2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating 

water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work. 

3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, 

plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these 

operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to 

permit installation of finish materials. 

E. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the 

dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time 

frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to 

be inadequate. Include the following: 

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 

2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 

3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 

4. Waste handling procedures. 

5. Other dust-control measures. 


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary 

electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. 

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each 

temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 

C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in [the U.S. Architectural & 

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines] [and] 

[ICC/ANSI A117.1]. 

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume 

responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its 

use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned 

responsibilities. 






2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, 

chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 

2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts[, with 1- 

5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails] [, with galvanized barbed-wire top strand]. 

B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, 

galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel 

pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner 

and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide [concrete] 

[galvanized-steel] bases for supporting posts. 

C. Wood Enclosure Fence: Plywood, [6 feet (1.8 m)] [8 feet (2.4 m)] high, framed with four 2-by- 

4-inch (50-by-100-mm) rails, with preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet 

(2.4 m) apart. 

D. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil (0.25-mm) minimum thickness, with 

flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2. 

E. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches (914 by 

1624 mm). 

F. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; 

with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. 

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature 

controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. 

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, 

Architect[, Construction Manager], and construction personnel office activities and to 

accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and 

orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 

1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan 

racks, and bookcases. 

2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of [10] 

individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no 

fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 

4-foot- (1.2-m-) square tack and marker boards. 

3. Drinking water and private toilet. 

4. Coffee machine and supplies. 

5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 

to 72 deg F (20 to 22 deg C). 

6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk 

height. 

C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to 

accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 





1. Store combustible materials apart from building. 

2.3 EQUIPMENT 

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by 

locations and classes of fire exposures. 

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, 

self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating 

units is prohibited. 

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing 

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location 

and application. 

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for 

temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of [8] at 

each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction[ and clean HVAC 

system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures"]. 

C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage 

filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously. 


3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference 

with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the 

Work. 

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary." 

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities 

are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be 

interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 

1. Connect temporary sewers to [municipal system] [private system indicated] as 

directed by authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for 

construction. 





D. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water 

service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these 

facilities to condition existing before initial use. 

E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of 

construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, 

number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 

1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are 

cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, 

restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. 

F. Heating[ and Cooling]: Provide temporary heating[ and cooling] required by construction 

activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction 

from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have 

a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 

G. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering 

occupied areas. 

1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be 

performed according to coordination drawings. 

a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing 

occupied areas. 

b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration 

units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and 

continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete. 

2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dustproducing 

equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dustcontainment 

devices. 

3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filterequipped 

vacuum equipment. 

H. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction 

activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction 

from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on 

completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to 

produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. 

1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to 

level required to allow installation or application of finishes. 

I. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain 

equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. 

J. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, 

capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 

1. Install electric power service [overhead] [underground] unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. 

K. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for 

construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 





1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements 

without operating entire system. 

2. Install lighting for Project identification sign. 

L. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all 

construction personnel. Install [one] telephone line(s) for each field office. 

1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: 

a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office. 

b. Provide [one] telephone line(s) for Owner's use. 

2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. 

a. Police and fire departments. 

b. Ambulance service. 

c. Contractor's home office. 

d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. 

e. Architect's office. 

f. Engineers' offices. 

g. Owner's office. 

h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 

3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when 

away from field office. 

M. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office 

adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintain 

electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the following: 

1. Processor: Intel Pentium D or Intel CoreDuo, [3.0] GHz processing 

speed. 

2. Memory: [4] gigabyte. 

3. Disk Storage: [300] gigabyte hard-disk drive and combination DVD- 

RW/CD-RW drive. 

4. Display: 22-inch (560-mm) LCD monitor with 256-Mb dedicated video RAM. 

5. Full-size keyboard and mouse. 

6. Network Connectivity: 10/100BaseT Ethernet. 

7. Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Microsoft Windows Vista 

Business. 

8. Productivity Software: 

a. Microsoft Office Professional, XP or higher, including Word, Excel, and Outlook. 

b. Adobe Reader 7.0 or higher. 

c. WinZip 7.0 or higher. 

9. Printer: "All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing, 

photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions. 

10. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall, 

providing minimum [384] Kbps upload and [1] Mbps 

download speeds at each computer. 

11. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware, 

phishing, and spam protection in a combined application. 

12. Backup: External hard drive, minimum [40] gigabyte, with automated 

backup software providing daily backups. 





3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION 

A. General: Comply with the following: 

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction 

area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to 

ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 

2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. 

Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial 

Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to 

Owner. 

B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas 

adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas [as indicated] 

[within construction limits indicated] on Drawings. 

1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment 

as required to minimize dust. 

C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved 

areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain 

temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary 

roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction 

operations. 

1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and 

paved areas. 

2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas 

according to Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 

3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, 

regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. 

4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until 

immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course 

pavement before installation of final course according to Section 321216 "Asphalt 

Paving." 

D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. 

E. Parking: [Provide temporary] [Use designated areas of Owner's existing] parking areas for 

construction personnel. 

F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining 

properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. 

G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 

1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 





2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and 

individuals seeking entrance to Project. 

a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 

3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. 

H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction 

Waste Management and Disposal." 

I. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle 

waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution." 

J. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and 

equipment" and not temporary facilities. 

K. Temporary Elevator Use: [Use of elevators is not permitted] [See Section 142100 "Electric 

Traction Elevators," Section 142113 "Electric Traction Freight Elevators," Section 142400 

"Hydraulic Elevators," Section 142413 "Hydraulic Freight Elevators," and Section 142600 

"Limited-Use/Limited-Application Elevators" for temporary use of new elevators]. 

L. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators 

are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, 

restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide 

shoes, and similar items of limited life. 

1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 

2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect 

elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become 

damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of 

correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make 

required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. 

M. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders 

are not adequate. 

N. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are 

cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore 

stairs to condition existing before initial use. 

1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect 

stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged 

areas so no evidence remains of correction work. 

O. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, 

provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial 

Completion. 





3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION 

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and 

other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be 

removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. 

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct 

construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible 

air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary." 

C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with[ requirements of 2003 EPA 

Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more 

stringent and] requirements specified in Section 311000 "Site Clearing." 

D. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and 

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent 

properties and walkways, according to [erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings] 

[requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having 

jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent]. 

1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction 

activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones. 

2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during 

construction until permanent vegetation has been established. 

3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and 

sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project. 

4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed 

during removal. 

E. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide 

barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of 

stormwater from heavy rains. 

F. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Section 015639 "Temporary 

Tree and Plant Protection." 

G. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line 

of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root 

systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. 

H. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and 

harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control 

procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial 

Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. 

I. Site Enclosure Fence: [Before construction operations begin] [Prior to commencing 

earthwork], furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and 

animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 

1. Extent of Fence: [As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined 

sufficient to accommodate construction operations] [As indicated on Drawings]. 

2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized 

personnel.[ Furnish one set of keys to Owner.] 





J. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas 

of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, 

and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. 

K. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having 

jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. 

L. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated 

and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 

M. Covered Walkway: Erect protective, covered walkway for passage of individuals through or 

adjacent to Project site. Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. 

Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction[ and requirements indicated on 

Drawings]. 

1. Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing. 

2. Provide overhead decking, protective enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning 

signs, exit signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions for 

protection and safe passage. 

3. Paint and maintain appearance of walkway for duration of the Work. 

N. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in 

progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and 

similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate 

temporary enclosures. 

O. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration 

and to separate areas occupied by [Owner] [and] [tenants] from fumes and noise. 

1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, 

and fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side. 

2. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet on 

each side. Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet, extending 

sheets 18 inches (460 mm) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. 

Cover floor with fire-retardant-treated plywood. 

a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with 

not less than 48 inches (1219 mm) between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot 

mats in vestibule. 

3. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by 

authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies. 

4. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 

5. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security 

locks where openings are required. 

6. Protect air-handling equipment. 

7. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. 

P. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types 

needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with 

NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program. 

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 





2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar 

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel 

at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be 

followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 

4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning 

sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. 

Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL 

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible 

signs of mold that may appear during construction. 

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are 

subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 

1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 

2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 

3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 

4. Remove standing water from decks. 

5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed. 

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full 

enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of 

moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high 

organic content, into partially enclosed building. 

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 

3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 

4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 

5. Do not install material that is wet. 

6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 

7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before 

enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. 

D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building 

enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 

2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 

3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and 

exposure to water limits. 

a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsumbased 

products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet 

for [48] hours are considered defective. 

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during 

construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of 

exposure and continuing daily for [48] hours. Identify 

materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing 

to Architect. 





c. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured 

moisture level within [48] hours. 

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL 

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and 

abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. 

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, 

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated 

results and to avoid possibility of damage. 

C. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight. 

D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and 

protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. 

E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has 

ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than 

Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may 

have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, 

clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. 

Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 

2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration 

into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, 

remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. 

Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical 

compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. 

Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as 

required by authorities having jurisdiction. 

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during 

construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 

"Closeout Procedures." 





PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016001 

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in 

Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on 

products; special warranties; and comparable products. 


1. Division 1 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 

2. Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 

3. Division 1 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 


A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or 

taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," 

"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or 

model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product 

literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or 

facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new 

products. 

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal 

process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service 

performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or 

exceed those of specified product. 

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's 

product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or 

model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, 

dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics 

for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the 

specification. 


A. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 

Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 






A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more 

products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if 

previously selected products were also options. 

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods 

compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible 

products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, 

deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

B. Delivery and Handling: 

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent 

overcrowding of construction spaces. 

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that 

are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other 

losses. 

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original 

sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for 

handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and 

to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. 

C. Storage: 

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 

3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight 

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 

4. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of 

installation and concealment. 

5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, 

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 

6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES 

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other 

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on 

product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract 

Documents. 

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a 

particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide 

specific rights for Owner. 





B. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." 


2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES 

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, 

are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items 

needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are 

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used 

successfully in similar situations on other projects. 

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with 

requirements of the Contract Documents. 

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make 

selection. 

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications 

establish salient characteristics of products. 

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or 

"or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable 

Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 

B. Product Selection Procedures: 

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the 

named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions 

for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, 

provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 

Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be 

considered. 

3. Products: 

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both 

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with 

requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience 

will not be considered, unless approved by the architect prior to bidding using 

substitution prior to bid form. 

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available 

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed 

product, that complies with requirements. 

4. Manufacturers: 

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, 

provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with 

requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience 

will not be considered, unless approved by the architect prior to bidding using 

substitution prior to bid form. 





b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, 

provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed 

manufacturer, that complies with requirements. 

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product 

indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or 

indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. 

Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other 

characteristics that are based on the product named. 

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", 

provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's 

decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other 

specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Substitution 

Procedures" for proposal of product. 

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by 

Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with 

requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's 

product line that includes both standard and premium items. 






CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 0174191 

SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 

1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition waste. 

2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 

3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 


1. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial 

demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements, and for disposition of 

hazardous waste. 

2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste. 


A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting 

from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes 

packaging. 

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or 

selective demolition operations. 

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, 

recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in 

preparation for reuse. 

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in 

another facility. 

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent 

incorporation into the Work. 


A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for commencement 

of the Work. 






A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with 

requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and 

procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste 

management coordinator. 

2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its 

disposition. 

3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of 

containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 

4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and 

disposal facilities. 

5. Review waste management requirements for each trade. 

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN 

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in 

this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and 

cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure 

throughout waste management plan. 

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition construction waste 

generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates. 

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, 

or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each 

type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation 

procedures. 

1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this 

Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the 

Work. 

2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and 

organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 

3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and 

organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 

4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled 

materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 

5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include 

name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 

6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating 

recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated 

location where materials separation will be performed. 

D. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste 

management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste 

management plan. Include the following: 

1. Total quantity of waste. 





2. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of 

collection containers for each type of waste. 

3. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management). 

4. Revenue from salvaged materials. 

5. Revenue from recycled materials. 

6. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials. 

7. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided. 

8. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of 

waste. 

9. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan. 



3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION 

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, 

signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan 

during the entire duration of the Contract. 

1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 015000 

"Temporary Facilities and Controls." 

B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management 

procedures, as appropriate for the Work. 

1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal 

return. 

2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review 

plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. 

C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure 

minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and 

used facilities. 

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that 

are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 

2. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and 

dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 

D. Waste Management in Historic Zones or Areas: Hauling equipment and other materials shall be 

of sizes that clear surfaces within historic spaces, areas, rooms, and openings, by 12 inches 

(300 mm) or more. 

3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE 

A. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: Salvage items for Owner's use and handle as follows: 

1. Clean salvaged items. 





2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating 

elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed. 

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 

4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 

5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 

B. Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave 

door hardware attached to doors. 

C. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect 

equipment from exposure to weather. 

D. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size. 

E. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage. 

F. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters, 

panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type. 

3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL 

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. 

B. Recycling Receivers and Processors: List below is provided for information only; available 

recycling receivers and processors include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Coordinate with Owner. 

C. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for 

recycling waste materials shall be shared equally by Owner and Contractor. 

D. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling 

or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum 

contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process. 

E. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. 

Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to 

approved construction waste management plan. 

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until 

removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each 

container and bin. 

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials 

if found. 

2. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or 

processor. 

3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE 

A. Metals: Separate metals by type. 





1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length. 

2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware. 

B. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry 

location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners. 

C. Carpet: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and tack strips. 

1. Store clean, dry carpet in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation 

Agency or carpet recycler. 

D. Ceiling Tiles: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry 

location for pick-up by Ceiling Tile Reclamation Agency or ceiling tile recycler. 

3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE 

A. Wood Materials: 

1. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. 

3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE 

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove 

waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of 

accumulate on-site. 

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces 

and areas. 

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. 

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 





SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 0241191 

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 




Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy 

requirements, and phasing requirements. 

2. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 

3. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade 

improvements. 


A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless 

indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. 

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent 

damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. 

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall 

where indicated. 

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and 

that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and 

reinstalled. 

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP 

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and 

their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to 

Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. 





1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS 

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 

2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 

3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, 

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid 

delays. 

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed 

by selective demolition operations. 

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 


A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician. 

B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending 

dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's and other tenants' on-site 

operations are uninterrupted. 

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 

4. Use of elevator and stairs. 

5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of 

Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. 

C. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for 

recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that 

recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician 

and date refrigerant was recovered. 

D. Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after completion 

of selective demolition. 

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 

A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 

B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility 

licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 


A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification 

program. 

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS 





A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far 

as practical. 

1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: 

a. Furniture 

b. Flooring products in conjunction with abatement, including but not limited to 

existing VCT and carpet at levels 1-4. 

B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding 

with selective demolition. 

C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the 

Work. 

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 

2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify 

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate 

contract. 

D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. 

E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against 

damage during selective demolition operations. 

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 


2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before 

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities 

having jurisdiction. 

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. 


3.1 EXAMINATION 

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition 

operations. 

B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not 

guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. 

C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of 

selective demolition required. 





D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended 

function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. 

Promptly submit a written report to Architect. 

E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings, 

preconstruction photographs, preconstruction videotapes and templates. 

1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide 

photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by 

salvage operations. 

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and 

protect them against damage. 

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in 

Section 011000 "Summary." 

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, 

disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems 

serving areas to be selectively demolished. 

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 

2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide 

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain 

continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 

3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC 

systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap 

or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 

b. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and 

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and 

make equipment operational. 

C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished 

according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 

3.3 PREPARATION 

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal 

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other 

adjacent occupied and used facilities. 

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 

"Temporary Facilities and Controls." 

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL 





A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new 

construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of 

governing regulations and as follows: 

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete 

selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting 

members on the next lower level. 

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use 

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. 

Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and 

chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to 

remain. 

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring 

existing finished surfaces. 

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At 

concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of 

hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable 

fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 

6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and 

promptly dispose of off-site. 

7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid 

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 

8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to 

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 

9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. 

B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling 

during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, 

protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their 

original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS 

A. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, 

using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. 

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS 

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, 

or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project 

site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces 

and areas. 

3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will 

convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 





3.7 CLEANING 

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective 

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition 

operations began. 





CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 0422001 

SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Concrete masonry units. 

2. Mortar and grout. 

3. Steel reinforcing bars. 

4. Masonry joint reinforcement. 

5. Ties and anchors. 

6. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 


A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). 

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 

1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. 

Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show 

elevations of reinforced walls. 


A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: 

1. Masonry units. 

a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. 

2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 

3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 

4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 

5. Reinforcing bars. 





6. Joint reinforcement. 

7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. 

B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of 

ingredients. 


A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and 

color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single 

source from single manufacturer for each product required. 

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, 

including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious 

component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. 

C. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements 

in the Contract Documents. 

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in 

Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." 

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an 

enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If 

units become wet, do not install until they are dry. 

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not 

use cementitious materials that have become damp. 

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and 

contamination avoided. 

D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt 

and oil. 


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with 

waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when 

construction is not in progress. 

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold cover 

securely in place. 

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 

three days after building masonry walls or columns. 

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left 

exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such 

masonry. 





1. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and 

integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in 

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 


2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL 

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to 

contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units 

where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. 

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fireresistance 

ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent 

masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed 

faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, 

bonding, and other special conditions. 

2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 

B. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 

1. Density Classification: Lightweight unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 

3. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions: 

a. 8 inch by 16 inch nominal 

2.3 MASONRY LINTELS 

A. General: Provide one of the following: 

B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs 

with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before 

handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured. 

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS 

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather 

construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color 

indicated. 

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 





C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing 

no other ingredients. 

D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or 

crushed stone. 

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent 

passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. 

E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. 

F. Water: Potable. 

2.5 REINFORCEMENT 

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 

(Grade 420). 

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 

2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter. 

3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter. 

4. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m). 

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single 

pair of side rods. 

2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS 

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that 

comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, 

Class B-2 coating. 

B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or 

horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 

1. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of 

masonry face, made from 0.187-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS 

A. Postinstalled Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors. 

1. Load Capacity: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load 

imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed 

in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified 

independent testing agency. 





2. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with 

ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 unless otherwise 

indicated. 

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES 

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; 

compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene. 

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying 

with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to 

maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, 

Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). 

D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry 

unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch (3.77- 

mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars 

indicated. 

2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES 

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, 

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise 

indicated. 

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 

2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 

3. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar. 

B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the 

following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 

1. For reinforced masonry, use Type N. 

2. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N. 

C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will 

comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces 

and pour height. 

2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (203 to 279 mm) as measured according to 

ASTM C 143/C 143M. 



A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation 

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 





1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental 

to performance of work. 

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual 

locations of piping connections. 

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. 

B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing 

equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. 

C. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous 

pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, 

unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut 

units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. 

3.3 TOLERANCES 

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 

mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 

2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or 

minus 1/2 inch (12 mm). 

3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or 

minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total. 

B. Lines and Levels: 

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 

inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary 

from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 

m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 

mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and 

expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 

mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 

3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 

inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 

C. Joints: 

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch 

(3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). 





2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more 

than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 

3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 

inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 

1/8 inch (3 mm). 

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS 

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint 

thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. 

Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at 

other locations. 

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in 

running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face 

dimensions at corners or jambs. 

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less 

than 4-inches (100-mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use 

units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in 

course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive 

mortar before laying fresh masonry. 

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. 

Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 

F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. 

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of 

metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 

H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, 

posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. 

I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof 

structure above unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure 

above. 

2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells 

of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to 

provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space 

anchors 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, 

or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches 

final position. 

4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure 

above to comply with Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems." 

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING 





A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 

2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 

3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on 

footings. 

4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on 

footings where cells are not grouted. 

B. Set cast-stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and 

similar holes. 

1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear 

water. 

2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting. 

3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar. 

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint 

thickness unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than 

paint) unless otherwise indicated. 

3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT 

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 

inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a 

minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. 

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. 

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, 

offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 

3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE 

A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel 

or concrete to comply with the following: 

1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide between masonry and 

structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar 

and other rigid materials. 

2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 

inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally. 





3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS 

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. 

Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for inplane 

wall or partition movement. 

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods: 

1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint. 

Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of 

sealant. 

2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 

3. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is 

complete for application of sealant. 

3.9 LINTELS 

A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for 

brick-size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block-size units are shown without structural steel 

or other supporting lintels. 

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 

3.10 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION 

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support 

reinforced masonry elements during construction. 

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as 

indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, 

tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of 

reinforced masonry. 

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened 

sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during 

construction. 

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough 

strength to resist grout pressure. 

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout 

placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm). 

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections 

and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to 

perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements 

shall be done at Contractor's expense. 





B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code." 

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of siteprepared 

mortar. 

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, 

sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. 

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests. 

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion 

thereof. 

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for 

compressive strength. 

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to 

ASTM C 780. 

G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test 

mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength. 

H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019. 

3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING 

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise 

damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install 

in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. 

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and 

completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent 

construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, 

where indicated. 

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove 

mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape 

hoes or chisels. 

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for 

comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding 

with cleaning of masonry. 

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering 

them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking 

tape. 

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by 

rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 

5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to 

type of stain on exposed surfaces. 





3.13 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL 

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's 

property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. 

B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soilcontaminated 

sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill 

material as fill is placed. 

1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension. 

2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of 

masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 

3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade. 

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as 

described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. 





MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 0610531 

SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Wood blocking and nailers. 


A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 

inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension. 

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 

1. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component 

materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant 

treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that 

periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is 

representative of the material tested. 


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. 

Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide 

for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. 


2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL 





A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency 

is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency 

certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the 

ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 

2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on 

end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade 

compliance issued by grading agency. 

3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for 

moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed 

sizes for dry lumber. 

4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness 

or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness unless otherwise 

indicated. 

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER 

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other 

construction, including the following: 

1. Blocking. 

2. Nailers. 

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species. 

C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber 

of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will 

interfere with its attachment and purpose. 

D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to 

eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. 



A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame 

Construction," unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, 

specialty items, and trim. 

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where 

framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips 

not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 





D. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated 

and as follows: 

1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 

inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately 

fitted to close furred spaces. 

2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at 

ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. Where fire 

blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks 

of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness. 

3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to 

limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space 

below partitions. 

4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more 

than 20 feet (6 m) o.c. 

E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with 

fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with 

function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or 

optimum joint arrangement. 

F. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying 

with the following: 

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 

2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), 

"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family 

Dwellings. 

3.2 PROTECTION 

A. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous 

rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by 

spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. 





INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 0620231 

SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Interior trim, including non-fire-rated interior door[ and sidelight] frames. 


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not 

exposed to view. 

2. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for priming and backpriming of interior finish carpentry. 


A. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard. 

B. MDO: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face. 


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component 

materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application 

details. 

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and 

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate 

type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemicaltreatment 

manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material. 

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and 

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 

3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content 

of treated materials was reduced before shipment to Project site to levels specified. 

4. Include copies of warranties from chemical-treatment manufacturers for each type of 

treatment. 

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product involving selection of colors, profiles, or 

textures. 






A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty. 


A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air 

circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely 

anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. 

B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet 

requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored 

in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements 

specified for installation areas. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until 

building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and 

HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy 

levels during the remainder of the construction period. 

B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 

1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, 

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 

2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or 

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. 


2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and the following grading rules: 

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association, "Standard Grading Rules for 

Northeastern Lumber." 

2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association, "Rules for the Measurement and 

Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress." 

3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority, "Standard Grading Rules for Canadian 

Lumber." 

4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, "Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine 

Lumber." 

5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, Standard No. 17, "Grading Rules for 

West Coast Lumber." 

6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association, "Western Lumber Grading Rules." 

B. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, 

species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 

1. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade 

stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. 





2.2 INTERIOR TRIM 

A. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): 

1. Species and Grade: White maple; Clear; NHLA. 

2. Maximum Moisture Content: 10 percent. 

3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 

4. Gluing for Width: Use for lumber trim wider than 6 inches (150 mm). 

5. Veneered Material: Use for lumber trim wider than 6 inches (150 mm). 

6. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth). 

7. Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color. 

B. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted Finish): 

1. Species and Grade: Eastern white pine, D Select; NeLMA or NLGA. 

2. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent with at least 85 percent of shipment at 12 

percent or less. 

3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 

4. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth). 

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 

A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, 

size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, 

concealed where possible. 

B. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is 

recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer. 

2.4 FABRICATION 

A. Back out or kerf backs of the following members except those with ends exposed in finished 

work: 

1. Interior standing and running trim except shoe and crown molds. 

B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) 

radius and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch (3-mm) 

radius. 



A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation 

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 

B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture 

damaged, and mold damaged. 







A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 

B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in 

installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by 

manufacturer. 


A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately 

seasoned, too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements, or with defective surfaces, 

sizes, or patterns. 

B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use 

concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 

1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as 

recommended by manufacturer. 

2. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand 


3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. 

Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush 

installation and 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation. 

4. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. 

Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish 

carpentry. 

3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION 

A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths 

of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except where 

necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns, 

miter at outside corners, and cope at inside corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface 

contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings 

to provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for alignment. 

1. Match color and grain pattern of trim for transparent finish (stain or clear finish) across 

joints. 

2. Install trim after gypsum-board joint finishing operations are completed. 

3. Install without splitting; drill pilot holes before fastening where necessary to prevent 

splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on 

exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 

3.5 ADJUSTING 

A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior 

finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no 

evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 

3.6 CLEANING 





A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Restore damaged or 

soiled areas and touch up factory-applied finishes, if any. 


A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction. 

B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold 

damaged. 

1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, 


2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or 






PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 0641161 

SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets. 

2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced 

architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet 

installation. 


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips 

required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet 

installation. 


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products high-pressure decorative 

laminate and cabinet hardware and accessories. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale 

details, attachment devices, and other components. 

1. Show details full size. 

2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed 

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 

3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and 

other items installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets. 

4. Apply AWI Certified Compliance Program label to Shop Drawings. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: 

1. Plastic laminates. 





2. PVC edge material. 


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. 


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products 

similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice 

performance. 

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant-treated 

material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction 

that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification 

marking is representative of the material tested. 


A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have 

been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, 

store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field 

Conditions" Article. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work 

is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity 

at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 

B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify 

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate 

measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress 

to avoid delaying the Work. 

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field 

measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 

C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish 

dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and 

coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 


A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related 

units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed 

as indicated. 





B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in 

Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" to fabricator of architectural 

woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. 


2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork 

Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, 

finishes, installation, and other requirements. 

1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork 

complies with requirements of grades specified. 

B. Grade: Custom. 

C. Type of Construction: Face frame. 

D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay. 

E. Reveal Dimension: As indicated. 

F. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as 

required by woodwork quality standard. 

1. Manufacturers: Basis of Design refer to finish schedule or approved equal from the 

following: 

a. Nevamar 

b. Formica Corporation. 

c. Pionite. 

d. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. 

G. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 

1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 

2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 

3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. 

4. Edges: Grade VGS. 

5. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. 

H. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, 

Grade VGS. 

a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC T-mold matching laminate in color, 

pattern, and finish. 

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. 

3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. 





I. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws 

from interior of body. 

1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical 

fasteners. 

J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures 

of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 

1. Match Architect's sample as indicated on the Finish Schedule 

2.2 WOOD MATERIALS 

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard 

for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES 

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural 

cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive 

Specification)." 

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of 

opening, self-closing. 

C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter. 

D. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. 

E. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 

1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer; fullextension 

type; epoxy-coated steel with polymer rollers. 

2. For drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) 

wide, provide Grade 2. 

3. For drawers more than 3 inches (75 mm) high but not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high 

and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1. 

4. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1. 

F. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. 

G. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. 

H. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011. 

I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with 

BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 

1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. 

J. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product 

class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 





K. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 

L. 2-inch OD, selected by the architect from a full line of standard colors, molded-plastic grommets 

and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.Counter Support Brackets: 

1. 18-1/8 inch work support for maximum 24 inch deep counter; color metallic silver 

a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "SWS2" by Doug 

Mockett & Company, Inc. 

b. Approved equal 

M. Counter Support Post Leg: 

1. 3 inch diameter support post leg, 40 ½ inch tall, coordinate with final counter height; finish 

stainless steel 

a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "CTL-Round" Custom 

Round Leg by Doug Mockett & Company, Inc. 

b. Approved equal 


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less 

than 15 percent moisture content. 

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure 

anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. 

Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls 

and at floors. 

C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement. 

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive. 


A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. 

B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent 

possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for 

shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for 

scribing, trimming, and fitting. 

C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical 

work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams 

to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters 

and burrs. 







A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation 

areas. 

B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as 

required. 

3.2 INSTALLATION 

A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed. 

B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not 

completed in the shop. 

C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install 

level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). 

D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at 

cuts. 

E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with 

countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed 

fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 

1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed. 

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are 

accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide 

unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or 

other variation from a straight line. 

2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 

inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch 

(38-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking. 

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 

A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual 

defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. 

C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. 





HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 0812131 

SECTION 081213 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes hollow-metal frames. 


1. Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in hollow-metal frames. 


A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM- 

HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 


A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, 

and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and 

items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 




A. Product Data: For each type of product. 

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 

1. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 

2. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 

3. Details of each different wall opening condition. 

4. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 

5. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 





C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of 

supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. 

Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule. 


A. Product Test Reports: For each type of frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified 

testing agency. 


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit 

and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units. 

B. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 

4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each 

unit to permit air circulation. 


2.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing 

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based 

on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and 

labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities 

having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance 

with NFPA 105. 

2.2 INTERIOR FRAMES 

A. Construct interior frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, 

hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. 

B. Heavy-Duty Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2.. 

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 

2. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm). 

3. Construction: Knocked down. 

4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 

2.3 FRAME ANCHORS 

A. Jamb Anchors: 





1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 

inch (1.0 mm) thick. 

2. Post-installed Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- 

(9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from 

frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. 

a. All post-installed anchors to be dimpled and filled with bondo for a smooth finish to 

receive final paint. 

2.4 MATERIALS 

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for 

exposed applications. 

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, 

pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. 

C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; 

mill phosphatized. 

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M 

or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, 

Class B. 

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. 

E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting 

of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. (96- to 192-kg/cu. m) 

density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; 

passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 


A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form 

metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, 

fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, 

clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. 

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling 

limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal 

as frames. 

1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners 


2. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: 

a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and 

bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as 

follows: 

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 

2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 

3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. 





4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 

inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high. 

b. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) 

from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) 

o.c. 

3. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (1067 mm) wide 

and mounted in metal-stud partitions. 

a. Or as recommended by the manufacturer for frame spans indicated in drawings. 

4. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers 

as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. 

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. 

b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. 

C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised 

hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to 

SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 

1. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted hardware. 

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation 

of hollow-metal work for hardware. 

D. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where 

indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollowmetal 

work. 

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each 

glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 

3. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation 

types indicated. 

2.6 STEEL FINISHES 

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer 

complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; 

compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 





B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame 

installation. 



A. Drill and tap frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted hardware. 


A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in 

place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with 

SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent 

anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving 

surfaces smooth and undamaged. 

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. 

b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. 

c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. 

d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been 

properly set and secured. 

e. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as 

necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 

2. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 

3. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled 

expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible 

on exposed faces. 

4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, 

twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: 

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 

90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal 

line parallel to plane of wall. 

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of 

jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. 

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollowmetal 

manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not 

more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. from each 

corner. 






A. Final Adjustments: Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is 

warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. 

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation. 

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of 

prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. 

D. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in 

painting Sections. 





FLUSH WOOD DOORS 0814161 

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 

2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 

3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. 


1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 




A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for 

openings. Include factory-finishing specifications. 

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; 

construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 

2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 

3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 

4. Undercuts. 

5. Requirements for veneer matching. 

6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 

7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors. 


A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 

B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 






A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is a certified participant in AWI's 

Quality Certification Program. 

B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited 

certification body. 


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. 

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and 

weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and 

maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder 

of construction period. 

1.9 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or 

workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067- 

by-2134-mm) section. 

b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch 

(0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span. 

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or 

replacement of defective doors. 

3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. 


2.1 MANUFACTURERS 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,: 

1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 

2. Eggers Industries. 

3. Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company. 

4. Mohawk Doors; a Masonite company. 

5. VT Industries, Inc. 





B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors indicated to be blueprint matched with paneling 

from single manufacturer. 

2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL 

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's 

"Architectural Woodwork Standards." 

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements 

of grades specified. 

B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a 

qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive 

pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 

1. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating 

indicated. 

2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated 

without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent 

seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 

C. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors: 

1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10. 

a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N). 

b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf (1780 N). 

D. Mineral-Core Doors: 

1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced 

quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated. 

2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved 

for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting 

hardware. 

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved 

screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for 

exposed edges. 

a. Screw-Holding Capability: 550 lbf (2440 N) per WDMA T.M.-10. 

2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH 

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: 

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 

2. Species: Select white birch. 

3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). 

4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 

5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. 

6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by 

mullions. 

7. Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as faces - edge Type A. 

8. Core: structural composite lumber. 





9. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive 

planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. 

2.4 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS 

A. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard woodveneered 

noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use 

in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required 

for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated. 


A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of 

referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors. 

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply 

with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA- 

156.115-W, and hardware templates. 

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment 

before factory machining. 

C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed 

surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top 

edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. 

D. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 

2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with 

applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING 

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, 

including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, 

before finishing. 

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be 

omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. 

B. Factory finish doors. 

C. Transparent Finish: 

1. Grade: Premium. 

2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 11, 

catalyzed polyurethane. 

3. Staining: Match color of existing doors in building. 

4. Sheen: Satin. 







A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, 

and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 

2. Reject doors with defects. 

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware." 

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and 

referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 

1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. 

C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 

D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at 

Project site. 

3.3 ADJUSTING 

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. 

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. 

Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence 

of repair or refinishing. 





STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 0814331 

SECTION 081433 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Interior fire-rated, stile and rail wood doors. 

2. Finishing stile and rail wood doors. 

3. Fitting stile and rail wood doors to frames and machining for hardware. 



1. Include details of construction and glazing. 

2. Include factory-finishing specifications. 

B. Shop Drawings: For stile and rail wood doors. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; 

elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data, including those 

for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings (sticking); and other pertinent data, including the following: 

1. Dimensions of doors for factory fitting. 

2. Locations and dimensions of mortises and holes for hardware. 

3. Undercuts. 

4. Requirements for veneer matching. 

5. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 

6. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors. 


A. Product Certificates: For each type of door, from manufacturer. 

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 

C. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 






A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is a certified participant in AWI's 

Quality Certification Program. 


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Package doors individually in opaque plastic bags or cardboard cartons. 

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and 

weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and 

maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder 

of construction period. 

1.8 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or 

workmanship, or have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84- 

inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section, within specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or 

replacement of defective doors. 

2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial 

Completion: 

a. Interior Doors: Life of installation. 



A. Source Limitations: Obtain stile and rail wood doors from single manufacturer. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced standards and other requirements 

specified. 

1. Assemble exterior doors and sidelites, including components, with wet-use adhesives 

complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and with ASTM D 5751 for joints other than 

finger joints. 

2. Assemble interior doors, including components, with either dry-use or wet-use adhesives 

complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and with ASTM D 5751 for joints other than 

finger joints. 





B. Panel Products: Any of the following unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Particleboard made from wood particles, complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 

2. Medium-density fiberboard made from wood fiber, complying with ANSI A208.2, 

Grade 130. 

3. Hardboard complying with ANSI A135.4. 

4. Veneer-core plywood. 

C. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201, for 

Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted. 

2.3 INTERIOR FIRE-RATED, STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 

A. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a 

qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive 

pressure according to NFPA 252. 

1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by 

outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 

B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, 

based on testing according to UL 1784. 

C. Interior Fire-Rated Stile and Rail Wood Doors: Fire-rated (20-minute rating) doors complying 

with the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards," and with other 

requirements specified. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,: 

a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 

b. Eggers Industries. 

c. VT Industries Inc. 


3. Finish: Transparent. 

4. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: match Section 081416 flush wood doors. 

5. Door Construction for Transparent Finish: 1-3/4-inch- (44-mm-) thick stiles and rails and 

veneered. 

a. Stile and Rail Construction: Veneered, structural composite lumber. Select 

veneers for similarity of grain and color, and arrange for optimum match between 

adjacent pieces. 

6. Stile and Rail Widths: As indicated. 

7. Molding Profile (Sticking): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

8. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements 

of grades specified. 

9. Mark, label, or otherwise identify stile and rail wood doors as complying with 

WDMA I.S.6A and grade specified. 

2.4 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOOR FABRICATION 





A. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply 

with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA- 

156.115-W, and hardware templates. 

1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and 

alignment before factory machining. 

B. Glazed Openings: Factory install glazing in doors, complying with Section 088000 "Glazing." 

Install glass using manufacturer's standard elastomeric glazing sealant complying with 

ASTM C 920. Secure glass in place with removable wood moldings. Miter wood moldings at 

corner joints. 

C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and 

quality of construction. 

2.5 FINISHING 

A. Finish wood doors at factory. 

B. For doors indicated to be factory finished, comply with the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's 

"Architectural Woodwork Standards," and with other requirements specified. 

1. Finish faces and all four edges of doors, including mortises and cutouts. Stains and 

fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. 

C. Transparent Finish: 


2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 11, 

catalyzed polyurethane. 

3. Sheen: Satin. 



A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, 

and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 

2. Reject doors with defects. 



A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware." 

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and 

referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 





1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. 

2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105. 

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated 

below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with firerated 

doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises 

after fitting and machining. 

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. 

Provide 1/4 inch (6 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering 

unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6 

mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. 

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 

2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. 

3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) on lock edge; trim stiles and 

rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. 

D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at 

Project site. 

3.3 ADJUSTING 

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. 

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors 

may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of 

repair or refinishing. 





COILING COUNTER DOORS 0833131 

SECTION 083313 - COILING COUNTER DOORS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Counter doors. 

2. Fire-rated counter doors. 


C. Retain Sections in subparagraphs below to cross-reference requirements Contractor might 

expect to find in this Section but are specified in other Sections. 

1. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for finish painting of factory-primed doors. 


A. Product Data: For each type and size of coiling counter door and accessory. 

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, 

profiles for slats, and finishes. 

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and 

furnished accessories. 

3. Include description of automatic closing device and testing and resetting instructions. 

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed 

in manufacturer's product data. 

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 

2. Include details of equipment assemblies, and indicate dimensions, required clearances, 

method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 

3. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed 

on structure. 

4. Show locations of controls, locking devices, detectors or replaceable fusible links, and 

other accessories. 

5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and 

textures available for units with factory-applied finishes. 

1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. 






A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 

B. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and that 

exceed size limitations of labeled assemblies. 


A. Maintenance Data: For coiling counter doors to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and 

approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this 

Project. 

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than 4 hours' normal travel time from Installer's place 

of business to Project site. 

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled 

by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to 

neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B. 

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, 

provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard 

construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for 

size. 

2. Temperature-Rise Limit: At exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that 

have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 

deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. 

3. Smoke Control: In corridors and smoke barriers, provide doors that are listed and 

labeled with the letter "S" on the fire-rating label by a qualified testing agency for smokeand 

draft-control based on testing according to UL 1784; with maximum air-leakage rate 

of 3.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.01524 cu. m/s x sq. m) of door opening at 0.10-inch wg (24.9 Pa) for 

both ambient and elevated temperature tests. 

C. Sound-Control Doors: Assemblies tested in a laboratory for sound-transmission-loss 

performance according to ASTM E 90, calculated according to ASTM E 413, and rated for not 

less than the STC value indicated. 


2.1 MANUFACTURERS, GENERAL 

A. Source Limitations: Obtain coiling counter doors from single source from single manufacturer. 

1. Obtain operators and controls from coiling counter door manufacturer. 

2.2 FIRE-RATED COUNTER DOOR ASSEMBLY 





A. Fire-Rated Counter Door: Overhead fire-rated coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking 

metal slats. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers 

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, 

the following: 

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Cornell Iron 

Works ESC20 or comparable product by one of the following: 

a. Clopay Building Products. 

b. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. 

c. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc. 

d. Overhead Door Corporation. 

B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 

20,000. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the 

fully open position and returned to the closed position. 

1. Include tamperproof cycle counter. 

C. Fire Rating: 1 hour. 

D. Door Curtain Material: Stainless steel. 

E. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) center-to-center height. 

F. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats. 

G. Hood: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats. 

1. Shape: Square. 

2. Mounting: As shown on Drawings. 

H. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly. 

1. Locking Device Assembly: Cremone type, both jamb sides locking bars, operable from 

inside and outside with cylinders. 

I. Manual Door Operator: Awning-crank operator. 

1. Provide operator with through-wall shaft operation. 

J. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with smoke seals, astragal, automatic closing device. 

K. Door Finish: 

1. Stainless-Steel Finish: No. 4 (polished directional satin). 

2. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match finish of exterior curtain-slat face. 

2.3 MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 





2.4 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION 

A. Door Curtains: Fabricate coiling counter-door curtain of interlocking metal slats in a continuous 

length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness 

and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type 

of door indicated, and as follows: 

1. Stainless-Steel Door Curtain Slats: ASTM A 666, Type 304; sheet thickness of 0.025 

inch (0.64 mm); and as required. 

2. Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face. 

B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same 

material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength 

to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes 

for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain. 

2.5 HOODS 

A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at 

opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and 

bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any 

portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate 

support brackets as required to prevent sagging. 

1. Galvanized Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch- (0.71-mm-) thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet 

with G90 (Z275) zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 

2. Stainless Steel: 0.025-inch- (0.64-mm-) thick stainless-steel sheet, Type 304, complying 

with ASTM A 666. 

3. Include automatic drop baffle on fire-rated doors to guard against passage of smoke or 

flame. 

2.6 LOCKING DEVICES 

A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by 

padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side. 

B. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating 

handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks. 

1. Lock Cylinders: Cylinders standard with manufacturer and keyed to building keying 

system. 

2. Owner to provide cylinders. 

2.7 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES 

A. Smoke Seals: Equip each fire-rated door with replaceable smoke-seal perimeter gaskets or 

brushes for smoke and draft control as required for door listing and labeling by a qualified 


B. Astragal: Equip each door bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible 

gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper. 





C. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up-operated or emergency-operated door with lifting 

handles on each side of door, finished to match door. 

D. Poll Hooks: Provide pole hooks and poles for doors more than 84 inches (2130 mm) high. 

E. Automatic-Closing Device: Equip each fire-rated door with an automatic-closing device or 

holder-release mechanism and governor unit complying with NFPA 80 and an easily tested and 

reset release mechanism. Testing for manually operated doors shall allow resetting by opening 

the door without retensioning the counterbalancing mechanism. Automatic-closing device shall 

be designed for activation by the following: 

1. Manufacturer's standard UL-labeled smoke detector and door-holder-release devices. 

2.8 COUNTER DOOR ACCESSORIES 

2.9 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM 

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an 

adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a 

spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or selflubricating 

graphite bearings for rotating members. 

B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed, 

structural-quality, welded carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support 

rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 

in./ft. (2.5 mm/m) of span under full load. 

C. Counterbalance Spring: One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. 

Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from 

outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-steel barrel plugs. 

1. Fire-Rated Doors: Equip with auxiliary counterbalance spring and prevent tension 

release from main counterbalance spring when automatic closing device operates. 

D. Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold-rolled steel, 

sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load. 

E. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel 

plate. 

2.10 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS 

A. General: Equip door with manual door operator by door manufacturer. 

B. Crank Operator: Consisting of crank and crank gearbox, steel crank drive shaft, and gearreduction 

unit, of type indicated. Size gears to require not more than 25-lbf (111-N) force to turn 

crank. Fabricate gearbox to be oil tight and to completely enclose operating mechanism. 

Provide manufacturer's standard crank-locking device. 

2.11 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS 





A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products 

(AMP 500-06)" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. 

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of 

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 

2.12 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES 

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. 

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 

1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 

2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign 

matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 

3. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. 



A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Examine locations of electrical connections. 



A. Install coiling counter doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, 

anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written 

instructions and as specified. 

B. Install coiling counter doors, hoods, controls, and operators at the mounting locations indicated 

for each door. 

C. Fire-Rated Doors: Install according to NFPA 80. 

D. Smoke-Control Doors: Install according to NFPA 80 and NFPA 105. 

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE 

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 

1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning 

controls and equipment. 





3. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm-connected fire-release system. 

Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test. 

3.4 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of 

warp, twist, or distortion. 

B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. 

C. Adjust seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter. 

3.5 DEMONSTRATION 

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to 

adjust, operate, and maintain coiling counter doors. 





DOOR HARDWARE 0871001 

SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Intent: The intent of this Section is to provide finish hardware for the proper operation and 

control of all wood, hollow metal and aluminum doors in the project. Prior to bidding, notify the 

Architect of any doors that does not have hardware meeting this intention. 

B. The hardware supplier will be responsible to furnish correct hardware on labeled doors to satisfy 

State and Local Building Codes. 

C. Should items of hardware, not definitely specified, be required for completion of work, furnish 

such items of type and quality suitable to the services required and comparable to the adjacent 

hardware. 

D. This Section includes known commercially, as finish or door hardware that are required for 

swing, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same 

sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed. This Section includes, but is 

not necessarily limited to furnishing and installing complete, the following: 

1. Finish hardware for proper operation, function, control and protection of all doors, as 

required. 

E. Related Sections: 

1. Section 064023 "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for cabinet door hardware provided as 

part of architectural woodwork. 

2. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames". 

3. Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors" for provided as part of labeled fire-rated assemblies. 

4. Section 081433 "Stile and Rail Wood Doors" for provided as part of labeled fire-rated 

assemblies. 

5. Section 083323 "Overhead Coiling Doors" for door hardware provided as part of 

overhead door assemblies. 

6. Coordinate Electrical: Division 26. 

7. Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" for connections to building firealarm 

system. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, 

material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 

1. Provide catalog cut-sheets of each type of exposed hardware unit, highlighted in color to 

indicate compliance with the Hardware Schedule. 





B. Other Action Submittals: 

1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing 

fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and 

diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work 

to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 

a. Submittal Sequence: Submit schedule at earliest possible date particularly where 

acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e.g., 

hollow metal frames), which is critical in the project construction schedule. Include 

with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by 

finish hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of 

hardware schedule. 

b. Format: Vertical format, use same scheduling sequence designations for door 

numbers and hardware sets in the schedule shall match those used in the 

Construction Documents. 

c. Content: Include the following information: 

1) Hardware Schedule shall be coordinated with doors, frames, and related 

work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand function, and finish of door 

hardware. Provide index at end of submittal listing door and-specified 

hardware. In addition, indicate page on submittal where door is found. 

2) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each 

door and frame. 

3) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor 

plans and to door and frame schedule. 

4) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, 

function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. 

5) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 

6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 

7) Mounting locations for door hardware. 

8) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and 

frame. 

9) Deviations from Specifications shall be noted in cover letter. 


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. 

B. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on evaluation of 

comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, 

for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes. 

C. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work. To 

be factory-prepared for the installation of hardware: Upon request check shop drawings of such 

other work, to confirm that adequate provisions are made for proper location and installation of 

hardware. 

D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 






A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. 

Include final hardware schedule. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved 

by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the 

course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and 

keying. 

1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 

2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 

B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized Architectural Finish Hardware Supplier, with warehousing 

facilities, who has been furnishing hardware in the Project's vicinity for a period of not less than 

two (2) years. Supplier shall be or employ an experienced Architectural Hardware Consultant 

(AHC) who is certified by and member of the Door and Hardware Institute. The Architectural 

hardware Consultant shall be available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for 

consultation about Project's hardware requirements, to Owner, Architect and Contractor. 

Authorized Distributor and Service 

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer. 

1.7 Standards: Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the following standards, unless 

indicated otherwise: 

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications: 

1. A115 Series - Door and Frame Preparation 

2. A156 Series -Hardware 

B. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) Publications: 

1. 1201- Auxiliary Hardware 

2. 1301 - Materials and Finishes 

C. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) Publications: 

1. Keying - Procedures, Systems, and Nomenclature 

2. Abbreviations and Symbols 

3. Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors 

4. Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware for Standard and Custom Steel Doors 

and Frames 

5. Wood Door Standards W1, W2, WDHS-2 WDHS-3 

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications: 

1. NFPA Pamphlet No. 80 - Standards for Fire Doors and Windows. 

2. NFPA Pamphlet No. 101. 

E. International Building Code - 2003 Edition. 

F. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 





G. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with NFPA 

Standard No. 80, No. 101 and local building code requirements, . Provide only hardware, which 

has been tested and listed, by UL, FM or Warnock Hersey for types and sizes of doors required 

and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels. 

1. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, (with supplementary 

marking on doors' UL or FM labels indicating "Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit 

Hardware") provide UL or FM label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". 

H. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies 

are required, provide door hardware that meet requirements of assemblies tested according to 

UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 

1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) at 

the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa) of water. 

I. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. 

Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. 

J. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with 

the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility 

Guidelines, ICC/ANSI A117.1 and HUD's "Fair Housing Accessibility Guidelines". 

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the 

wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N). 

2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: 

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to 

door. 

b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 

3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more 

than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. 

4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door 

will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured 

to the leading edge of the door. 


A. Package each hardware item in separate containers with all screws, wrenches, installation 

instructions and installation templates. Mark each box with hardware heading and door number 

according to approved hardware schedule. 

B. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations (shop or 

project site) for installation: Provide a complete packing list showing items, door numbers and 

hardware headings with each shipment. 

C. Store hardware in shipping cartons above ground and under cover to prevent damage. Provide 

secure lockup for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling 

and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable -so that completion of the 

Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. 






A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast 

anchoring inserts into concrete. 

B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory 

prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made 

for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 

C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's 

security consultant. 

D. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing 

construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing 

conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide 

proper door operation. 

1.10 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or 

replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified 

warranty period. 

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 

b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. 

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal 

weathering and use. 

2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise 

indicated. 


2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE 

A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article 

to comply with requirements in this Section. 

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named 

manufacturers' products. 

2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of 

operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. 

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive 

qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" 

Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for 

each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. 

Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. 





2. Provide manufacturer's standard products meeting the design intent of this Specification, 

free of imperfections affecting appearance or serviceability. 

a. Provide hardware complete with all fasteners, anchors, instructions, layout 

templates, and any specialized tools as required for satisfactory installation and 

adjustment. 

b. Hand of door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing or hand of each door leaf. 

Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door 

movement as shown. 

c. Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head 

screws except as otherwise indicated or approved. Finish screws exposed under 

any condition to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to 

match finish of such other work as closely as possible. Use machine screws for 

metal connections and wood screws for connections to wood. Use manufacturer's 

screws to secure hardware. 

d. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is 

closed, except to extent no standard units of type specified are available with 

concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt, head or nut 

on opposite face is exposed in other work, except where indicated otherwise or 

where it is not feasible to adequately reinforce the work. In such cases, provide 

sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. 

e. Special Tools: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance 

instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and 

removal and replacement of finish hardware. 

f. Hardware is specified in the hardware schedule by set, type, and functions, which 

have been selected as best meeting the application requirements. Acceptable 

products for each category are specified in Paragraph 2.3, "Hardware Products". 

C. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS 

1. Hinges: Provide non-removable pins for all exterior doors. Use nonrising pins for all other 

doors. Provide continuous hinge at exterior doors where specified. 

2. Locksets: All locksets to be grade 1 heavy duty cylindrical. 

3. Closers: 

a. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for unit size based on door size, 

weather exposure and usage. 

b. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, except as otherwise indicated. 

c. All Closers UL Certified to be in compliance with UBC 7.2 and UL 10C. 

d. Closers with Pressure Relief Values will not be acceptable. 

e. Supplier to provide any brackets or plates required for proper installation of door 

closers. 

4. Exit Devices: 

a. All latchbolts to be deadlatching type. 

b. All touchbars to be stainless steel. 

5. Special Notes 

a. All doors to have operable hardware. 

b. Provide stop that is required for the application. A wall stop is preferred. If an 

overhead stop or floor stop is a better application, it is to be provided. 

c. Smoke seal and intumescent seal is to be provided as required on fire labeled 

openings. 

d. Provide drop plates and mounting brackets for closers if required. 

2.2 KEYING 

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. 

Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 





1. Existing System: 

a. All Locks shall be keyed to the existing master key system. Keying Schedule must 

be approved by the Owner prior to ordering any locks. The owner shall provide the 

cores and do the pinning and key cutting. 

b. All locks/panics to have construction cores. 

c. All locks and cylinders to be removable core type. Permanent cores and keying of 

cores by the owner 

2.3 HARDWARE PRODUCTS 

ITEM SPECIFIED APPROVED EQUAL 

Hinges Ives Bommer, Hager 

Locksets Schlage Approved Equal 

Cylinders 

All cylinders or locks provided shall be capable of 

Accepting a Schlage Primus Removable Core 

Cores 

Schlage Primus by the owner 

Exit Device Von Duprin Approved Equal 

Closers LCN Approved Equal 

Flatgoods Ives Burns, Trimco 

Stops Ives Burns, Trimco 

Overhead Stops Glynn Johnson Rixson 

Thresholds National Guard Reese 

Weatherstrip National Guard Reese 


A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming 

method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and 

hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware 

units and BHMA A156.18. 

B. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared 

for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially 

recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not 

permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door 

hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Fire-Rated Applications: 

a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following: 

1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames[; use threaded-to-the-head wood 

screws for wood doors and frames]. 

2) Strike plates to frames. 

3) Closers to doors and frames. 

b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided: 

1) Surface hinges to doors. 

2) Closers to doors and frames. 

3) Surface-mounted exit devices. 

2. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 





3. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended 

Fasteners for Wood Doors." 

4. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and 

elsewhere as indicated. 

2.5 FINISHES 

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. 

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, 

temporary protective covering before shipping. 

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are 

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations 

in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are 

acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to 

minimize contrast. 



A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor 

construction, and other conditions affecting performance. 



A. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations 

for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors." 

B. Carefully inspect doors, and conditions under which hardware will be installed. Notify the 

Architect of any conditions that would adversely affect the installation or subsequent door 

operation. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 

C. Carefully inspect all wiring paths, cabling, and product provided in Division 22 for continuity, 

scraps, and proper installation. Provide a dated, written document to General Contractor and 

do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 

D. Refer to Section 08123, 08416 and 081433 for installation requirements. 

1. Prior to hardware installation, the General Contractor shall setup a meeting with the 

Hardware Supplier and the Hardware installer to ensure the installer has and 

understands the manufacturers installation requirements for all hardware items. 

2. The Supplier shall observe the installation of the first lockset,closer, and exit device. 






A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights unless otherwise indicated or required 

to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be other wise directed by the 

Architect.. 

1. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for 

Wood Flush Doors." 

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where 

cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be 

painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface 

protective trim units with finishing. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been 

completed on substrates involved. 

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment 

substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 

2. Provide fasteners and anchoring devices of suitable size, quantity and type to secure 

hardware in proper position for heavy use and long life. 

3. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space 

fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. 

C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than 

the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 

inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of 

support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. 

D. Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate offset pivots 

in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than one intermediate offset 

pivot per door and one additional intermediate offset pivot for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door 

height greater than 90 inches (2286 mm). 

E. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction 

period. 

1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying schedule 

directed by Owner. 

2. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. 

F. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system 

cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. 

G. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant 

complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 

H. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door 

hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. 

I. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 

J. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 

K. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 

L. Adjust door closers immediately upon installation. Adjust in exact conformance with 

manufacturer’s printed instructions. Advance backcheck to eliminate shock at dead stop. Set 

closer latching speed to assure unassisted positive latching. 

1. Degree of swing of door for self-limiting closers shall be maximum available. 





M. Adjust all exit devices immediately upon installation. Adjust in exact conformance with 

manufacturers’ printed instructions. 

3.4 Install each protection plate with a thinly spread of mastic at its center to assure even contact 

before fastening with screws. Install all such plates on visual center of closed doors. Set bottom 

edges of all such plates flush with door bottom. 

3.5 Seal weather protection components attached to the exterior sides of doors and frames, such 

as drip caps and weather-stripping, in place with clear silicone caulk in such a manner as to 

ensure a continuously filled seam throughout the joinery. 

3.6 Cut and fit weatherstripping accurately to provide the greatest possible continuity of the contact 

element. Adjust closer template as required. 

3.7 ADJUSTING 

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to 

ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to 

operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating 

and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 

1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and 

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to 

acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to 

acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such 

space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of 

hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating 

and ventilating equipment 

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 

A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. 

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. 

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without 

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

3.9 INSTRUCTIONS AND INSPECTION 

A. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware 

finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware. 

B. After hardware is installed and adjusted, the Supplier shall inspect the job with the Architect and 

the General contractor to determine if the hardware is functioning properly. 

1. Maintain the instruction sheets, layout templates, and any supplementary literature 

regarding hardware in a readable condition. Transmit all such items to the Owner's 





Representative, together with all spare parts, specialized tools, other accessories 

supplied with the hardware, and a copy of the approved hardware schedule at the time of 

instruction. 

3.10 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 

HW SET: 01 

DOOR NUMBER: 

S1-G 

EACH TO HAVE: 

3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 

1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE 99L-F-BE W/ 06 LEVER 626 VON 

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 EDA 689 LCN 

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 

1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE 

1 EA MAGNETIC HOLD-OPEN SEM 7850 AL LCN 

1 SET SEALS 2525B ( 9500 IF REQUIRED ) BRN NGP 

THE HARDWARE PROVIDER SHALL VERIFY THAT THERE ARE NO OBSTRUCTIONS AND DOOR 

WILL SWING 180' 

PROVIDE WIDE THROW HINGES AS REQUIRED 

HW SET: 02 

DOOR NUMBER: 

120 

EACH TO HAVE: 


1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70TD RHO 626 SCH 

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 689 LCN 



1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 420NA CL NGP 

1 EA THRESHOLD 425 AL NGP 


HW SET: 03 

DOOR NUMBER: 

121 

EACH TO HAVE: 


1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80TD RHO 626 SCH 


1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 90S 680 GLY 







HW SET: 04 

DOOR NUMBER: 

121M 121W 

EACH TO HAVE: 


1 EA PUSH/PULL LATCH HL6-9070 W/ SCHLAGE REMOVABLE CORE 626 GLY 





HW SET: 05 

DOOR NUMBER: 

122 122A 

EACH TO HAVE: 


1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK ND53TD RHO 626 SCH 





PROVIDE EDA CLOSER ON 122A 

HW SET: 06 

DOOR NUMBER: 

122B 122C 122D 

EACH TO HAVE: 

1 EA NOTE ALL HARDWARE BY THE DOOR SUPPLIER SCH 

HW SET: 07 

DOOR NUMBER: 

S1-1A S1-1B 

EACH TO HAVE: 



REMAINDER OF HARDWARE IS EXISTING. THE HARDWARE DISTRIBUTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY 

THE HINGES REQUIRED. THE HINGES SPECIFIED WILL SWING 180' IF THERE ARE NO 

OBSTRUCTIONS. PROVIDE WIDE THROW HINGES AS REQUIRED. 

THE HARDWARE PROVIDER SHALL ALSO CONFIRM THE EXIT DEVICE IS OPERATING 

PROPERLY AND THE SMOKE SEAL IS INSTALLED AND WORKING PROPERLY. 





HW SET: 08 

DOOR NUMBER: 

S1-2 S1-3 S1-4 130 230 330 

430 S2-1 S2-2 S2-3 S2-4 

EACH TO HAVE: 


REMAINDER OF HARDWARE IS EXISTING. THE HARDWARE PROVIDER SHALL CONFIRM THE 

EXIT DEVICE IS OPERATING PROPERLY AND THE SMOKE SEAL IS INSTALLED AND WORKING 

PROPERLY. 

HW SET: 09 

DOOR NUMBER: 

131 231 331 431 

EACH TO HAVE: 


REMAINDER OF HARDWARE IS EXISTING. THE HARDWARE PROVIDER SHALL CONFIRM THE 

EXIT DEVICE IS OPERATING PROPERLY AND THE SMOKE SEAL IS INSTALLED AND WORKING 

PROPERLY. 





GLAZING 0880001 

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in 

other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 

1. Doors. 

2. Interior borrowed lites. 


1. Section 08 11 00 “Metal Doors and Frames” for vision panels in interior doors and interior 

vision panel (borrowed lites) frames. 

2. Section 08 14 16 “Flush Wood Doors” for vision panels in interior doors. 

3. Section 08 14 33 “Stile and Rail Wood Doors” for vision panels in interior doors. 

4. Section 088300 "Mirrors." 

1.3 REFERENCES 

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 

1. ASTM E2074-00: Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Including 

Positive Pressure Testing of Side-Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies. 

2. ASTM E2010-01: Standard Test Method for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Window 

Assemblies. 

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 

1. ANSI Z97.1: Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings 

C. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): 

1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201: Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials 

D. Glass Association of North America (GANA): 

1. GANA – Glazing Manual. 

2. FGMA – Sealant Manual. 

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 

1. NFPA 80: Fire Doors and Windows. 

2. NFPA 252 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 

3. NFPA 257 – Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. 

F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 

1. UL 9 – Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. 

2. UL 10B – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 





3. UL 10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 


A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in 

referenced glazing publications. 

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to 

ASTM C 1036. 

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit. 

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Fire-rated glass ceramic clear and wireless glazing material with surface-applied film listed for 

use in impact safety-rated locations such as doors, transoms and borrowed lites with fire rating 

requirements ranging from 20 minutes to 3 hours with required hose stream test. 

1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING 

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape 

sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility 

with elastomeric glazing sealants. 

1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current 

sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 

2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation 

techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, 

tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates. 

3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, 

shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 

4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 

5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective 

measures including the use of specially formulated primers. 


A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. 

B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches (300 mm) square. 

1. Fire-resistive glazing products. 


A. Qualification Data: For installers glass testing agency and sealant testing agency. 

B. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer. 





C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified 

testing agency, for coated glass glazing sealants. 

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations 

within previous 36-month period. 

D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. 

E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are 

certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. 

B. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited 

according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. 

C. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to 

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 

D. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain coated float glass from single source from single 

manufacturer for each glass type. 

E. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single 

manufacturer for each product and installation method. 

F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers 

and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these 

publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's 

"Glazing Manual." 

2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR- 

A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 

3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing." 

4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing 

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." 

G. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing 

with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities 

having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and 

safety glazing standard with which glass complies. 

H. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with 

certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall 

indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other 

openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a 

temperature rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C), and the fire-resistance rating in minutes. 

I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's 

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 





2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation. 


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to 

glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or 

other causes. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate 

temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when 

glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are 

outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 

1.12 WARRANTY 

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in 

which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within 

specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from 

normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass 

contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other 

indications of deterioration in coating. 

1. Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS 

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise 

indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion 

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 

2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 

3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass). 

2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING 

A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to 

NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies. 





B. Film-Faced Ceramic Glazing: Clear, ceramic flat glass; 3/16-inch (5-mm) nominal thickness; 

faced on one surface with a clear glazing film; complying with testing requirements in 

16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product 

indicated on Drawings Manufactures Representative: Steve Sweetin, Interface Flor, 

13009 West 128 th Place, Overland Park, KS 66213, (913) 681-2800 or comparable 

product by one of the following: 

a. or approved equal. 

2. Properties: 

a. Thickness: 3/16 inch, 5 mm 

b. Film: Fire-rated surface film as approved by manufacturer. 

c. Weight: 2.4 lbs./sq. ft. 

d. Approximate Visible Transmission: 88 percent. 

e. Approximate Visible Reflection: 9 percent. 

f. Hardness (Vicker’s Scale): 700. 

g. Fire-rating: 20 minutes min. for doors; 20 minutes to 90 minutes for other 

applications. 

h. Impact Safety Resistance: ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR1201 (Cat. I and II). 

i. Positive Pressure Test: UL 10C, UBC 7-2 and 7-4; passes. 

j. Surface Finish: 

1) Premium Grade-Ground and polished on both sides 

2) Standard Grade-Comparable to alternative fire-rated products marketed as 

“Premium” 

2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS 

A. General: 

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with 

other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, 

and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as 

demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for 

selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at 

time of installation. 

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full 

range. 

B. Silicone Sealant: One-part neutral curing silicone, medium modulus sealant, Type S; Grade 

NS; Class 25 with additional movement capability of 50 percent in both extension and 

compression (total 100 percent); Use (Exposure) NT; Uses (Substrates) G, A, and O as 

applicable. Available Products: 

1. Dow Corning 795 - Dow Corning Corp. 

2. Silglaze-II 2800 - General Electric Co. 

3. Spectrem 2 - Tremco Inc. 

C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing 

agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for 

applications and fire-protection ratings indicated. 





2.4 GLAZING TAPES 

A. Glazing Tape: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride (PVC) foam, coiled on release paper over 

adhesive on two sides, maximum water absorption by volume of 2 percent. Glass panels that 

exceed 1,393 sq. inches for 90-minute ratings must be glazed with fire-rated glazing tape 

supplied by manufacturer. 

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing 

standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application 

indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. 

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. 

C. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM, or silicone; tested for compatibility with glazing compound; of 

70 to 90 Shore A hardness. 

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass 

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. 

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side 

walking). 

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and 

density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant 

performance. 

G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that 

listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fireprotection 

rating indicated. 

2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS 

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face 

clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product 

manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance 

requirements. 

2.7 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING TYPES 

A. Glass Type GL-01: 20-minute fire-rated glazing with hose-stream test. 

1. Locations - Doors 

2. Provide safety glazing labeling. 

B. Glass Type GL-02: 45-minute fire-rated glazing with hose-stream test. 

1. Locations – Interior Sidelights & Windows. 

2. Provide safety glazing labeling. 







A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the 

following: 

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and 

offsets at corners. 

2. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 

3. Observable edge damage or face imperfections. 

4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. 



A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. 

Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so 

that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave 

visible marks in the completed work. 

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL 

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and 

other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in 

referenced glazing publications. 

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to 

provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant 

thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. 

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass 

from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge 

damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair 

performance and appearance. 

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by 

preconstruction testing. 

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing 

publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of 

compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. Place setting blocks located at quarter points of 

glass with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. 

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm). 





1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. 

Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and 

glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face 

clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 

2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to 

sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed 

thickness of tape. 

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways 

in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to 

requirements in referenced glazing publications. 

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 

J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. 

K. Install in vision panels in fire-rated doors to requirements of NFPA 80. 

L. Install so that appropriate UL and manufacturer markings remain permanently visible. 

3.4 TAPE GLAZING 

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush 

with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. 

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to 

make them fit opening. 

C. Glaze vertically into labeled fire-rated metal frames or partition walls with same fire rating as 

glass and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. 

D. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover 

horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. 

E. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. 

Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. 

F. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. 

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense 

compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. 

Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. 

3.5 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) 

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass 

lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding 

into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers 

and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge 

clearance for optimum sealant performance. 

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond 

of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. 





C. Use specified glazing compound, without adulteration; bed glazing material in glazing 

compound; entirely fill all recess and spaces. Provide visible glazing compound with smooth 

and straight edges. 

D. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed 

streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove 

nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. 

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction 

operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with 

glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at 

frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, 

alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from 

natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. 

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before 

date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as 

recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 





MIRRORS 0883001 

SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS 

PART 1 - GENERALRELATED DOCUMENTS 



1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors: 

1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors. 


1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass with reflective coatings used for vision and spandrel 

lites. 

2. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for metal-framed mirrors. 



1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of 

silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating 

components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to 

other work. 


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. 

B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 


A. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are 

certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. 

B. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single manufacturer. 





C. Source Limitations for Mirror Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from single 

source. 

D. Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations: 

1. GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to 

this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this 

Section or in referenced standards. 

2. GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on 

the Care and Handling of Mirrors." 


A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent 

damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, 

or other causes. 

B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors 

as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass 

surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity 

conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy. 

1.9 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which mirror manufacturer agrees to replace 

mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as 

defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining 

and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include 

discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film. 

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of manufacture. 


2.1 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS 

A. Glass Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503. 

B. Clear Glass: Mirror Select Quality. 

1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm. 






A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or 

minus 5. 

B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for 

use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges. 

2.3 MIRROR HARDWARE 

A. Top Channel/Cleat and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep 

enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in 

lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece. 

1. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/16 and 3/4 

inch (7.9 and 19 mm) in height, respectively. 

2. Top Trim: Formed with front leg with a height of 5/16 inch (7.9 mm) and back leg 

designed to fit into the pocket created by wall-mounted aluminum cleat. 

3. Finish: Clear Gold bright anodized. 

B. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in 

finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed. 

C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide 

toothed or lead-shield expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized 

anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated. 


A. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished. 

1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or 

atmospheric penetration of glass coating. 

2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory 

immediately after cutting to final sizes. 



A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for 

compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting 

performance of the Work. 

B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror mastic with 

existing finishes or primers. 

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces 

are dry. 






A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with 

referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids 

distorting reflected images. 

B. Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrors and mounting surface 

for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. 

C. Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware 

securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as 

applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors. 

1. Top Channel/Cleat and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Fasten J-channel directly to wall 

and attach top trim to continuous cleat fastened directly to wall. 


A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction 

operations. 

B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water. 

C. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from 

condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time. 

D. Wash exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections 

that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash mirrors as recommended in writing by 

mirror manufacturer. 





NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 0922161 

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 


1. Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and 

exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof 

trusses. 




A. Evaluation Reports: For firestop tracks, from ICC-ES. 



A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate nonload-bearing 

steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in 

assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. 

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction 

identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified 

according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS 

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 





1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless 

otherwise indicated. 

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized unless 


B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 

1. Steel Studs and Runners: 

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm). 

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 

2. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: 

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.025 inch (0.64 mm). 


C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following: 

1. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) 

deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and 

outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. 

D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with 

movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly 

indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of 

studs. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be 

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System. 

b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System. 

c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System. 

E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width 

indicated. 

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm). 

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding 

power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following: 

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), 

nonperforated. 

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener 

penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud 

size. 







A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal 

frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other 

conditions affecting performance of the Work. 



A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to 

framing installation. 

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, 

grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. 

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. 

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing 

members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 

3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES 

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than 

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior 

walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. 

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. 

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural 

supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to 

terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above 

ceiling. 

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to 

produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished 

assemblies. 

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; 

install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 

b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of 

overhead structure. 





3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as 

required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of 

openings to match framing required above door heads. 

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated 

assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to 

underside of solid structure. 

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistancerated 

assembly indicated. 

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 

E. Direct Furring: 

1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, 

or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. 

F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 

1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 





GYPSUM BOARD 0929001 

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Interior gypsum board. 

2. Tile backing panels. 


1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and 

suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 

2. Section 093000 "Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic 

tile. 



1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, 

condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack 

panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board 

manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. 

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. 

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold 

damaged. 

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, 


2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or 








A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and 

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an 

independent testing agency. 

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL 

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and 

that correspond with support system indicated. 

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD 

A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 

2. Long Edges: Tapered. 

B. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and 

mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. 

1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 

2. Long Edges: Tapered. 

3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 

2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS 

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: 

1. Complying with ASTM C 1178/C 1178M. 

a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensShield Tile 

Guard" by G-P Gypsum. 

2. Core: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type. 

B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 

a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. 

b. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. 

c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 


2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES 





A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 

2. Shapes: 

a. Cornerbead. 

b. LC-Bead 

c. Expansion (control) joint. 

d. V-control Joint 

B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following: 

a. Fry Reglet Corp. 

b. Gordon, Inc. 

c. Pittcon Industries. 

2. Shapes: 

a. F-Reveal Bead: F-shaped, exposed long flange receives joint compound 

b. X-outside corner molding. 

c. Zee-Reveal: Z-shape; 5/8 inch reveal for gypsum termination. 

3. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of 

ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5. 

4. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials 

specified. 

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. 

B. Joint Tape: 

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 

2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 

3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. 

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible 

with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, 

use setting-type taping compound. 

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and 

trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 





D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 

1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and settingtype, 

sandable topping compound. 

2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel 

manufacturer. 

3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 

2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and 

manufacturer's written recommendations. 

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 

0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by 

panel manufacturer. 

C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) 

produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag 

wool, or rock wool. 

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 



A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer 

present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold 

damaged. 


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL 

A. Comply with ASTM C 840. 

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid 

abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent 

panels not less than one framing member. 

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with 

not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. 

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate 

supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered 





edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not 

make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. 

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. 

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, 

etc.), except in chases braced internally. 

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke 

ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) 

in area. 

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 

3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof 

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 

1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant. 

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural 

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these 

locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints 

between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. 

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached 

to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. 

I. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily 

installed after panels have been installed on one side. 

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD 

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 

1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings. 

2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings. 

3. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. 

B. Single-Layer Application: 

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest 

extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise 

indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. 

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses 

of panels. 

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise 

indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end 

joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS 





A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation 

instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap 

where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a 

uniform plane across panel surfaces. 

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES 

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same 

fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 

2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 

3. V-bead control joint: Use as indicated on drawings. 

4. F-Reveal Bead: Use as indicated on drawings. 

5. X-outside corner molding: Use as indicated on drawings. 

6. Zee-Reveal: Use as indicated on drawings. 

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD 

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, 

fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces 

for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. 

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. 

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not 

intended to receive tape. 

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to 

ASTM C 840: 

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile Where indicated on Drawings. 

3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. 

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior 

Painting." 


A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other 

non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall 

application. 

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, 

construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. 





C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, 


2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or 






TILING 0930001 

SECTION 093000 - TILING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Ceramic tile. 

2. Crack isolation membrane. 

3. Tile backing panels. 

4. Metal edge strips. 


1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and 

isolation joints in tile surfaces. 

2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units glass-mat, water-resistant 

backer board. 


A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 

apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. 

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, 

ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, 

ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, 

ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard 

Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." 

C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. 

D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. 


A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the 

following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 

1. Level Surfaces: Minimum to meet all codes and ADA. 

2. Step Treads: Minimum to meet all codes and ADA. 

3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum to meet all codes and ADA. 







B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and 

locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile 

surfaces. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of 

accessories involving color selection. 



1.7 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS 

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and 

that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing 

contents. 

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount 

installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 

2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, 

composition, and color indicated. 


A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source or 

producer. 

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent 

quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. 

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality 

for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate 

from one source or producer. 

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this 

Section from a single manufacturer for each product: 

1. Crack isolation membrane. 

2. Joint sealants. 

3. Metal edge strips. 

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades. 






A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels 

intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. 

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. 

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and 

contamination can be avoided. 

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. 

E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated 

surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding 

surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and 

ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in 

referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. 


2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL 

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, 

compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated. 

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, 

ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA 

installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. 

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and 

package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from 

other packages and match approved Samples. 

D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard 

with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile 

assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is 

suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance. 

E. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect 

exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous 

film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces. 

2.2 TILE PRODUCTS 

A. Tile Type FT-01 & WT-01: 





1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product 

indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following. 

2. Composition: Porcelain. 

3. Module Size: As indicated on finish schedule. 


5. Face: Plain with rectified edges. 

6. Surface: As indicated on finish schedule. 

7. Tile Color and Pattern: As indicated on finish schedule. 

8. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

9. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where 

applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, 

selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: 

a. Base Cove: Cove, module size as indicated on the finish schedule. 

b. Base Cap for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bead (bullnose), module size 

as indicated on the finish schedule. 

c. Base Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size as 

indicated on the finish schedule. 

d. Wainscot Cap for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bead (bullnose), module 

size as indicated on the drawings. 

e. Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size as 

indicated on the drawings. 

f. Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Regular flat tile for conditions where tile 

wainscot is shown flush with wall surface above it, same size as adjoining flat tile. 

g. External Corners for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bead (bullnose), 

module size as indicated on the drawings. 

h. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 

as indicated on the drawings. 

i. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap, use angle 

pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes. 

2.3 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE 

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for standard 

performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include 

reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. 

B. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or 

elastomeric polymer and fabric reinforcement. 

a. Bostik, Inc.; Durabond D-222 Duraguard Membrane. 

b. C-Cure; CureLastic 949. 

c. Custom Building Products; FractureFree Crack Prevention Membrane. 

d. Jamo Inc.; Waterproof. 

e. Mer-Kote Products, Inc.; Fracture-Guard 5000. 

f. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1100 Crack Suppression and 

Waterproofing. 

g. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; HydraFlex - Waterproofing Crack 

Isolation Membrane. 

C. Locations: 

1. As required by the tile manufacturer at cracks in the existing and new concrete and at all 

control joints. This is a renovation so site visits to determine exact needs is strongly 

recommended. 





2.4 SETTING MATERIALS 

A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 




a. Laticrete International, Inc. 

b. MAPEI Corporation. 

c. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 

2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic 

additive to which only water must be added at Project site. 

3. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadienerubber 

liquid-latex additive at Project site. 

4. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging 

mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. 

B. Medium-Bed, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: Comply with requirements in ANSI A118.4. 

Provide product that is approved by manufacturer for application thickness as required. 







2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic 

additive to which only water must be added at Project site. 

3. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadienerubber 

liquid-latex additive at Project site. 

A. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated 

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 







2.5 GROUT MATERIALS 

A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3. 

1. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to 

temperatures of up to 140 deg F (60 deg C) and 212 deg F (100 deg C), respectively, 

and certified by manufacturer for intended use. 





B. Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same product used in factory to pregrout tile sheets. 

2.6 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS 

A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply 

with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint 

Sealants." 

1. Use primers, backer rods, and sealant accessories recommended by sealant 

manufacturer. 

B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed 

joints unless otherwise indicated. 

C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; 

Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with 

fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that 

are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 

D. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; 

Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based 

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations 

indicated. 

B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or 

combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; 

stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material. 

C. Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect 

exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and 

grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 

1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with 

a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F (49 to 60 deg C) per ASTM D 87. 

2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is 

specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile. 

D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and 

grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout 

manufacturers. 

E. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints and that does 

not change color or appearance of grout. 

2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT 

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout 

manufacturers' written instructions. 





B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. 

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and 

other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance 

characteristics for installations indicated. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for 

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting 

performance of installed tile. 

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are 

incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances 

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by 

ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives bonded mortar bed 

or thin-set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for 

installations indicated. 

a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically 

scarified. 

b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or 

grinding. 

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical 

units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 

4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if 

not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. 



A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives 

or thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by 

tile-setting material manufacturer. 

B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar 

bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains. 

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and 

packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from 

other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to 

manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 

D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent 

grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of 

temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. 





3.3 TILE INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods 

specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series 

"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, 

specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile 

installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: 

a. Tile floors in wet areas. 

b. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger. 

c. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles. 

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete 

covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at 

obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. 

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring 

visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight 

aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so 

plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. 

D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center 

tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize 

the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise 

indicated. 

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within 

tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 

2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same 

size, align joints. 

3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on 

floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 

1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 

2. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm). 

3. Paver Tile: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm). 

4. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 

5. Decorative Thin Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 

F. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. 

G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, 

contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting 

materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above 

them. 

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint 

Sealants." 

H. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other 

flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated. 





I. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to groutsealer 

manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, 

remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 

3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION 

A. Install cementitious backer units and fiber-cement underlayment and treat joints according to 

ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use 

latex-portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's 

written instructions. 

3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION 

A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written 

instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. 

B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured. 

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING 

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are 

free of foreign matter. 

1. Remove epoxy and latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 

2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written 

instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners 

recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners 

are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect 

metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean 

water before and after cleaning. 

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer 

and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to 

prevent drain clogging. 

B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to 

prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of 

neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. 

C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is 

completed. 

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from 

tile surfaces. 





ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0951131 

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 

B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling 

attachment devices to be cast in concrete. 





B. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes. 


A. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified 



A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS 

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective 

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 

2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 

percent of quantity installed. 






A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in 

original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they 

will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct 

sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. 

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized 

moisture content. 

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed 

and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, 

and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for 

Project when occupied for its intended use. 

1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before 

beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation. 



A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. 

Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 

1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL 

A. Source Limitations: 

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. 

2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. 

B. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 

C. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated 

that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical 

ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of 

test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface according to 

ASTM E 795. 

D. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each 

product type. 





1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing 

pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product 

designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range 

that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, 

acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. 

E. Antimicrobial Fungicide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels with face and back surfaces 

coated with antimicrobial treatment consisting of manufacturer's standard formulation with 

fungicide added to inhibit growth of mold and mildew and showing no mold or mildew growth 

when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or 

ASTM G 21. 

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated 

on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 

2. CertainTeed Corp. 

3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. 

B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as 

follows: 

1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 1, nodular. 

2. Pattern: As indicated on finish legend. 

C. Color: As indicated on finish legend. 

D. LR: Not less than 0.85. 

E. NRC: Not less than the Basis-of-Design indicated on the finish schedule and legend for each 

space and type. 

F. CAC: Not less than the Basis-of-Design indicated on the finish schedule and legend for each 


G. AC: Not less than the Basis-of-Design indicated on the finish schedule and legend for each 


H. Edge/Joint Detail: to match the Basis-of-Design indicated on the finish schedule and legend for 

each space and type. 

I. Thickness: As indicated on finish schedule and legend. 

J. Modular Size: As indicated on Drawings. 

K. Antimicrobial Treatment: Fungicide based. 

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL 





A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal 

suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with 

applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. 

1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for "Coating 

Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are 

indicated. 

B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, 

Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 

1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops 

for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a 

load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing 

according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified 

testing and inspecting agency. 

a. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with 

ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition. 

b. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 

and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; Alloy 304 or 316 for anchor. 

c. Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel-copper-alloy rods 

complying with ASTM B 164 for UNS No. N04400 alloy. 

2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application 

indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory 

devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without 

failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by 

testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting 

agency. 

C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft 

temper. 

2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. 

3. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400. 

4. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load 

(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but 

provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire. 

D. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. 

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR RECONFIGURED CEILINGS 



1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 


3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. 

B. Narrow-Face, Steel-Capped, Double-Web: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled 

steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to 





ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation; with prefinished, cold-rolled, 

9/16-inch- (15-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges. 

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 

2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 

3. Cap Finish: Painted white. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical 

panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified 

in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements 

for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel 

ceilings. 

B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture 

damaged, or mold damaged. 



A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at 

opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply 

with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 


A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic 

design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's 

"Ceiling Systems Handbook." 

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling 

plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces 

by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger 

spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard 

suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in 

form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a 

minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, 

eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will 

not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 

5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing 

members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and 

appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger 





involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to 

age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 

6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten 

hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or 

power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 

7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, 

install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 

8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 

9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 

10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported 

directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches 

(200 mm) from ends of each member. 

11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within 

performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four 

tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, 

without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing 

wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. 

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and 

where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 

1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. 

and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system 

to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and 

connect securely. 

2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. 

E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one 

another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. 

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system 

runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a 

neat, precise fit. 

1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: 

a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 

2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of 

suspension-system runners and moldings. 

3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of 

reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 

4. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped flanges, 

install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and 

panel faces flush with bottom face of runners. 

5. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed 

panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel 

manufacturer. 

6. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fireresistance-rated 

assembly. 






A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections 

and prepare test reports. 

B. Acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners will be considered defective if they 

do not pass tests and inspections. 

C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 

3.5 CLEANING 

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and 

suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and 

touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be 

successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. 





RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 0965131 

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Resilient base. 


1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Floor Tile for resilient floor tile." 

2. Division 9 Section "Carpet Tile." 



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 

inches (300 mm) long. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. 

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and 

pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) 

long. 

E. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations 

indicated on Drawings. 




1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or 

fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 






A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with 

ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less 

than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). 


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 

70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive resilient products 

during the following time periods: 

1. 48 hours before installation. 

2. During installation. 

3. 48 hours after installation. 

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range 

recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F 

(35 deg C). 

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been 

completed. 


2.1 RESILIENT BASE (RB-1) 

A. Resilient Base: 




a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 

b. Flexco, Inc. 

c. Johnsonite. 

d. Roppe Corporation, USA. 

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 

1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber, 

thermoplastic). 

2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 

3. Style: Cove. 

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). 

D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm 

E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches (1219 mm) long or coils in manufacturer's standard length. 

F. Outside Corners: Preformed. 

G. Inside Corners: Preformed. 





H. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

I. Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's sample as indicated in the drawings. 

2.2 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering 

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Roppe Corporation, USA. 

2. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division. 

3. or Approved Equal. 

B. Description: Rubber reducer strip for resilient flooring and transition strips. 

C. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated on drawings. 

D. Locations: As indicated on drawings. 

E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS 

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or 

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product 

manufacturer for applications indicated. 

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient 

products and substrate conditions indicated. 

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. 

C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to 

protect exposed edges of flooring, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. 



A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum 

moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified 

in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and 

foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 


1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 






A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of 

resilient products. 

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching 

compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. 

C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they 

are to be installed. 

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation 

materials into spaces where they will be installed. 

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient 

products. 

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. 

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and 

other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. 

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of 

adjacent pieces aligned. 

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in 

continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient 

base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. 

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. 

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates 

throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would 

otherwise be exposed. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. 

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation: 

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 





C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction 

operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. 

D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. 





RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 0965191 

SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 





B. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and 

other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings. 

1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Vinyl composition floor tile. 



B. LEED Submittals: 

C. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, 

doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 

1. Show details of special patterns. 

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated. 

E. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. 




A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals. 




1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, 

and pattern of floor tile installed. 






A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are 

competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method 

indicated. 

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to 

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 

1. Build mockups for floor tile including resilient base and accessories. 

a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) for each type, color, and pattern in locations 

directed by Architect. 

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract 

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations 

in writing. 

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the 

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 


A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient 

temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 

deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. 


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 

70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the 

following time periods: 

1. 48 hours before installation. 

2. During installation. 

3. 48 hours after installation. 

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range 

recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F 

(35 deg C). 

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. 

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. 

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 







A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical 

products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 

2.2 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE (VCT-01) 

A. Basis-of-Design Product:: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that 

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Mannington Mills, Inc. Through Pattern Vinyl Composition Tile 


B. Tile Standard: 

1. ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile. 

2. Exceed HUD / FHA Requirements. 

3. Flooring Radiant Panel Test (ASTM-E-648) >.45 watts / cm², Passes – Class 1. 

4. N.B.S. Smoke Chamber Test (ASTM-E-662)


1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified 

in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and 

foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. 



A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion 

of resilient products. 

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives 

and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by 

floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed 

with installation only after substrates pass testing. 

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according 

to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the 

following: 

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with 

installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 

lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours. 

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. 

Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative 

humidity level. 

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching 

compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. 

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be 

installed. 

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation 

materials into spaces where they will be installed. 

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient 

floor tile. 

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. 

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, 

so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut 

widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 

1. Lay tiles square with room axis or pattern indicated on drawings. 





C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as 

manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed 

tiles. 

1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction. 

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures 

including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. 

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles 

to center of door openings. 

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting 

by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking 

device. 

G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, 

and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern 

between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to 

substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. 

H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to 

produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, 

telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile. 

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 

3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. 

C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction 

operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. 

D. Joint Sealant: Apply sealant to resilient terrazzo floor tile perimeter and around columns, at 

door frames, 

E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. 





TILE CARPETING 0968131 

SECTION 096813 – CARPET TILE 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes modular, carpet tile and installation. 


1. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings. 

2. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" Section 096519 "Resilient Tile 

Flooring" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 



1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not 


a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. 

b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. 

c. Review subfloor preparation procedures. 



1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade 

resistance. 

2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. 

B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label 

each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation 

indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 

2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long 

Samples. 







B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 


A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and 

procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are 

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, 

but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m). 


A. Comply with CRI 104. 


A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. 

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and 

weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity 

conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to 

bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile 

manufacturer. 

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, 

install carpet tiles before installing these items. 

1.10 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of 

carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, 

failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 

2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, 

dimensional stability, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, and delamination. 

3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 






2.1 CARPET TILE (CPT-01) 


on Drawings Manufactures Representative: Steve Sweetin, Interface Flor, 13009 West 128 th 

Place, Overland Park, KS 66213, (913) 681-2800 or comparable product by one of the 

following: 

1. or approved equal. 

a. Pattern: As indicated on drawings. 

b. Color: As indicated on drawings. 

c. Size: 19.69 inch by 19.69-inch (50 cm by 50 cm) tiles. 

d. Carpet Type: Tile 

B. Face Construction: 

1. Construction: Tufted Textured Loop 

2. Gauge: 1/12-inch (47.2 ends/10 cm). 

3. Pile Thickness: .126 

4. Stitches: 7 per inch 

5. Pile Density: 4000 

6. Tufted Medium Average Pile Height: 0.18-inch (4.6 mm) 

7. Pile Yarn Weight: 14 oz/sq yd (475 g/sq m) 

8. Yarn System: Post-Consumer Type 6, 6 Nylon 

9. Soil/Stain Protection: Protekt 

10. Antimicrobial: Intersept 

C. Backing System: 

1. Standard backing: GlasBac RE Tile 

D. Product Testing: 

1. Flooring Radiant Panel: Class 1 (Mean average CRF: 0.45 w/sq m or higher) (ASTM E- 

648). 

2. Electrostatic Property: 3.0 kV or lower Permanent Conductive Fiber AATCC 134. 

3. Lightfastness: ≥ 4.0 after 60 AFU’s (AATCC 16 – E) 

4. Smoke Density: ASTM E – 662≤ 450 

5. Indoor Air Quality: Green Label Plus Certified #GLP0820 

6. Sustainable Carpet Assessment Standard: (NSF-140) Sustainable Choice 

Platinum/EPP California Platinum 

2.2 CARPET TILE (CPT-02) 


on Drawings Manufactures Representative: Steve Sweetin, Interface Flor, 13009 West 128 th 

Place, Overland Park, KS 66213, (913) 681-2800 or comparable product by one of the 

following: 

1. or approved equal. 





a. Pattern: As indicated on drawings. 

b. Color: As indicated on drawings. 

c. Size: 19.69 inch by 19.69-inch (50 cm by 50 cm) tiles. 

d. Carpet Type: Tile 

B. Face Construction: 

1. Construction: Tufted Textured Loop 

2. Gauge: 1/12-inch (47.2 ends/10 cm). 

3. Pile Thickness: .08 

4. Stitches: 8 per inch 


6. Tufted Medium Average Pile Height: 0.13-inch (3.3 mm) 

7. Pile Yarn Weight: 18 oz/sq yd (475 g/sq m) 

8. Yarn System: Prost-Consumer 6, 6 Nylon 

9. Soil/Stain Protection: Protekt 

10. Antimicrobial: Intersept 


1. Standard backing: GlasBac Tile 

D. Product Testing: 

1. Flooring Radiant Panel: Class 1 (Mean average CRF: 0.45 w/sq m or higher) (ASTM E- 

648). 

2. Electrostatic Property: 3.0 kV or lower Permanent Conductive Fiber AATCC 134. 

3. Lightfastness: ≥ 4.0 after 60 AFU’s (AATCC 16 – E) 

4. Smoke Density: ASTM E – 662≤ 450 

5. Indoor Air Quality: Green Label Plus Certified #GLP0820 

6. Sustainable Carpet Assessment Standard: (NSF-140) Sustainable Choice Gold. 

2.3 CARPET TILE MAT (CPT-03, Walk-off mat) 

A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or approved equal: 

1. Manufacturer’s Representative: Steve Sweetin, Interface Flor, 13009 West 128 th Place, 

Overland Park, KS 66213, (913) 681-2800 

a. Product Number: 6090002504 

b. Pattern: 60900 Super Flor. 

c. Color: 609009. 

d. Size: 19.69 inch by 19.69-inch (50 cm by 50 cm) tiles. 

e. Carpet Type: Tile 

B. Product Specifications: 

1. Product Construction: Hair Tile (Needlepunch) 

2. Yarn System: 82.5% Nylon; 17.5% Polyester 

3. Tufted Yarn Weight: 41 oz/yd2 

4. Pile Height: 0.165 inches 

5. Pile Thickness: 0.165 

6. Stitches: 0/in 


8. Total Thickness: 0.325 inches 






1. Standard backing: Graphlar Tile 

D. Product Specifications: 

1. Radiant Panel: (ASTM E-648) Class 1. 

2. Static: (AATCC 134) 3.0 kV or lower . 

3. Lightfastness: (AATCC 16 – E) 

4. Smoke Density: (ASTM E – 662) 

2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES 

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based 

formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit 

products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for 

installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 




requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other 

conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and 

potential defects. 

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other 

materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness 

characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile 

manufacturer. 

2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place 

Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile. 

3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. 



A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with 

carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to 

receive carpet tile installation. 

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written 

instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, 

holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 

mm) unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. 





C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with 

adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical 

methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. 

D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive 

manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum 

surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive. 

E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 


A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile 

manufacturer's written installation instructions. 

B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer 

C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. 

D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture 

including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as 

recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 

E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, 

removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. 

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting 

by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking 

device. 

G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner 

recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 

3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. 

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." 

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment 

and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or 

recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. 





INTERIOR PAINTING 0991231 

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following 

interior substrates: 

1. Concrete. 

2. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 

3. Steel. 

4. Galvanized metal. 

5. Wood. 

6. Gypsum board. 

7. Plaster. 


1. Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings" for high-performance and special-use 

coatings. 


A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to 

ASTM D 523. 

B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, 

according to ASTM D 523. 

C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to 

ASTM D 523. 

D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according 

to ASTM D 523. 

E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 

G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 






A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application 

instructions. 

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 

2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 

3. Label each coat of each Sample. 

4. Label each Sample for location and application area. 




1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied. 


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient 

temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are 

between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). 

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 

deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 





1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 

2. ICI Paints. 

3. Kwal Paint. 

4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 

5. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other 

Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated. 





2.2 PAINT, GENERAL 

A. Material Compatibility: 

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another 

and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by 

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by 

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. 

B. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule. 

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS 

A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: 

1. Sherwin-Williams interior millwork – SHER-WOOD 2400 Millwork Primer. 

B. Primer Sealer, Alkyd, Interior: 

1. Sherwin-Williams OPEX Lacquer Primer-Surfacer. 

C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint 

systems indicated. 

1. Sherwin-Williams Interior millwork – SHER-WOOD Wood Surface and Flat Lacquer. 

2.4 METAL PRIMERS 

A. Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive, for Metal: 

1. Sherwin-Williams KEM Flash Ultra-Bond Primer 

B. Primer, Alkyd, Quick Dry, for Metal: 

1. Sherwin-Williams KEM 400 Primer. 

C. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: 

1. Sherwin-Williams KEM Flash Ultra-Bond Primer. 

2.5 WATER-BASED PAINTS 

A. Latex, Interior, Flat, (Gloss Level 1): 

1. Sherwin-Williams KEM Aqua Enamel. 

B. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 2): 


C. Latex, Interior, Gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 degrees): 






2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. 

Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If 

paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at 

Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials 

being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove 

noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces 

painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials 

from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints 

are incompatible. 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements 

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter 

as follows: 

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 

2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 

3. Wood: 15 percent. 

4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 

5. Plaster: 12 percent. 

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. 

D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. 

E. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry. 

F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing 

finishes and primers. 

G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" 

applicable to substrates indicated. 





B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and 

are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, 

provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall 

items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, 

and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie 

coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. 

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. 

Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that 

permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture 

content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods 

recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. 

G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of 

shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply 

with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. 

H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal 

fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that 

promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. 

I. Wood Substrates: 

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 

3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 

4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood 

filler. Sand smooth when dried. 

3.3 APPLICATION 

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI 

Manual." 

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 

2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed 

surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or 

furniture with prime coat only. 

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar 

hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, 

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 





5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed 

or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. 

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of 

same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide 

sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film 

has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. 

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, 

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color 

breaks. 

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety 

and Security Work: 

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms: 

a. Equipment, including panelboards. 

b. Uninsulated metal piping. 

c. Metal conduit. 

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: 

a. Uninsulated metal piping. 

b. Metal conduit. 

c. Other items as directed by Architect. 

3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and 

outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and 

inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint 

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply 

additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint 

manufacturer's written recommendations. 


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from 

Project site. 

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by 

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 





C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of 

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and 

leave in an undamaged condition. 

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or 

defaced painted surfaces. 

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE 

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 

1. Latex System: 

B. CMU Substrates: 

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior. 

b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2). 


C. Steel Substrates: 

a. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. 


1. Latex over Alkyd Primer System: 

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal or primer, alkyd, quick dry, for 

metal. 


D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 

1. Latex over Waterborne Primer System: 

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based. 


E. Wood Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 

1. Latex Floor Paint System: 

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, alkyd, interior. 

b. Intermediate Coat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum Gloss Level 3). 

c. Topcoat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum Gloss Level 3). 

2. Alkyd Floor Enamel System: 

a. Prime Coat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6). 

b. Intermediate Coat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6). 

c. Topcoat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6). 

F. Gypsum Board / Plaster Substrates: 






a. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. 






HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 0996001 

SECTION 099600 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems on 

the following substrates: 

1. Interior Substrates: 

a. Steel (unit heater surround). 


A. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 

B. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and 

application instructions. 

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. 




1. Coatings: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied. 


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections 

made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards 

for materials and execution. 

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of 

each coating system specified in Part 3. 





a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). 

b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. 

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of 

additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract 

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations 

in writing. 

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the 

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient 

temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 


A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air 

temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). 

B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 

deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 

C. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist. 





1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 

2. ICI Paints. 

3. Kwal Paint. 

4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 

5. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be 

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles 

for the paint category indicated. 

2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL 





A. Material Compatibility: 

1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one 

another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as 

demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 

2. For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing by 

manufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate indicated. 

3. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. 

B. Colors: As indicated in color schedule. 

2.3 POLYURETHANE COATINGS 

A. Polyurethane, Two-Component, Pigmented, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): 

1. Sherwin-Williams - POLANE SP Polyurethane enamel system. 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements 

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing 

finishes and primers. 

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and 

conditions. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural 

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. 

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and 

are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, 

provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall 

items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection. 

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, 

grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie 

coat as required to produce coating systems indicated. 





D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods 

recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. 

E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of 

shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply 

with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. 


A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and 

recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 

2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed 

surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or 

furniture with prime coat only. 

3. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items 

to match exposed surfaces. 

4. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, 

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the 

same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide 

sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film 

has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. 

D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush 

marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and 

color breaks. 


A. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by 

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 

B. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by 

cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an 

undamaged condition. 

C. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or 

defaced coated surfaces. 

3.5 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE 

A. Steel Substrates: 

1. Pigmented Polyurethane System: 

a. Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. 





b. Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss (Gloss 

Level 6). 

c. Topcoat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss (Gloss Level 4). 





TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1021131 

SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Solid-polymer toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures. 


1. Section 061035 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for blocking. 

2. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab 

bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material 

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 

B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and 

attachments to other work. 

1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 

2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars. 

3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. 

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless 

otherwise indicated: 

1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for units, prepared on 6-inch- (152-mm-) 

square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. 

2. Each type of hardware and accessory. 


A. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment, from manufacturer. 


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals. 






A. Comply with requirements in GSA's CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete." 

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to 

ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified 

testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & 

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and 

Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and 

ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other 

construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M. 

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 

C. Brass Castings: ASTM B 584. 

D. Brass Extrusions: ASTM B 455. 

E. Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet for exposed applications; mill phosphatized and selected 

for smoothness. 

1. Electrolytically Zinc Coated: ASTM A 879/A 879M, 01Z (03G). 

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized: ASTM A 653/A 653M, either hot-dip galvanized or galvannealed. 

F. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. 

G. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M. 

H. Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings. 

I. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, general-purpose HGS grade, 0.048-inch (1.2-mm) nominal 

thickness. 

2.2 SOLID-POLYMER UNITS 







1. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. 

2. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. 

3. Santana Products, Inc. 

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced. 

C. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) or 

polypropylene (PP) panel material, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick, seamless, with eased 

edges, no-sightline system, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of 

material. 

1. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum or stainlesssteel 

strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent 

burning. 

2. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Architect from 

manufacturer's full range. 

D. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. 

E. Brackets (Fittings): 

1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. 

F. Overhead Cross Bracing for Ceiling-Hung Units: As recommended by manufacturer and 

fabricated from solid polymer. 

2.3 ACCESSORIES 

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware 

and accessories. 

1. Material: Stainless steel. 

2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard continuous, cam type that swings to a closed or 

partially open position. 

3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for 

emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide 

units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments 

designated as accessible. 

4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized 

to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 

5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors and 

entrance-screen doors. 

6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with 

regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at 

compartments designated as accessible. 

B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with 

antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. 

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or 

chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant- 





type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use 

stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel. 


A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling 

mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to 

conceal supports and leveling mechanism. 

B. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide, inswinging 

doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide, out-swinging 

doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide, clear opening for compartments designated as 

accessible. 



A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, 

level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring 

devices. 

1. Maximum Clearances: 

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm). 

b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm). 

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters 

with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) into structural floor unless 

otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each 

pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, 

and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. 

3.2 ADJUSTING 

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's 

written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open 

approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging 

doors and doors in entrance screens to return doors to fully closed position. 





TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 1028001 

SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Public-use washroom accessories. 

2. Warm-air dryers. 

3. Custodial accessories. 


1. Section 088300 "Mirrors" for frameless mirrors. 

2. Section 093000 "Tiling" for ceramic toilet and bath accessories. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 

1. Construction details and dimensions. 

2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work 

and substrate preparation. 

3. Material and finish descriptions. 

4. Features that will be included for Project. 

5. Manufacturer's warranty. 

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each 

accessory required. 

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 

2. Identify products using designations indicated. 


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products 

from single source from single manufacturer. 





B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 


A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required 

for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, 

cleaning, and servicing of accessories. 

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent 

delaying the Work. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness 


B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products 

with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings. 

C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036- 

inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness. 

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180) hot-dip zinc coating. 

E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 

F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamperand-theft 

resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. 

G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). 

H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. 

I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation. 

2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES 



1. American Specialties, Inc. 

2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 

3. Bradley Corporation. 

B. Grab Bar (GB-18, GB-36 & GB-42): 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley. 

2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 





3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick. 

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area. 

4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 

5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings. 

C. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit (SN-DP): 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley Corp; Model 4722-15 for two-sided compartments and 

Model 4722-1015 for one-sided compartments. 

2. Mounting: Recessed or Partition mounted, dual access where possible. 

3. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover. 

4. Receptacle: Removable. 

5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 

2.3 WARM-AIR DRYERS 



1. American Dryer, Inc. 

2. Bradley Corporation. 

3. Excel Dryer Corporation. 

4. World Dryer Corporation. 

B. Warm-Air Dryer (HD01): 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Excel Dryer Inc; Xlerator XL-SB. 

2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 

3. Operation: Electronic-sensor activated with timed power cut-off switch. 

a. Operation Time: 10 to 15 seconds. 

4. Cover Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 

5. Electrical Requirements: 115 V, 20 A, 2300 W. 


A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors 

and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage 

and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. 

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. 

Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. 







A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate 

to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and 

firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested 

according to ASTM F 446. 


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. 

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. 

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 





RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 1131001 

SECTION 113100 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Cooking appliances. 

2. Kitchen exhaust ventilation. 

3. Refrigeration appliances. 


1. Section 12530 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK, kitchen units that include residential 

appliances. 

2. Section 64116 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS, kitchen 

units that include residential appliances. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating 

characteristics, dimensions, furnished accessories, and finishes for each appliance. 

B. Product Schedule: For appliances. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 



B. Product Certificates: For each type of appliance, from manufacturer. 

C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each residential appliance to include in operation and 







A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintains, within 500 miles of Project site, a service center 

capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs. 

B. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for 

installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. 

C. Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances from single source and each type of 

residential appliance from single manufacturer. 

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 

1. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a 

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 

E. Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility 

requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's 

ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or 

replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within 

specified warranty period except as qualified below: 

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Electric Range: Limited warranty including parts and labor for first year and parts thereafter for 

on-site service on surface-burner elements. 

C. Microwave Oven: Limited warranty including parts and labor for first year and parts thereafter 

for on-site service. 

D. Refrigerator/Freezer, Sealed System: Limited warranty including parts and labor for first year 

and parts thereafter for on-site service on the product. 


2.1 RANGES 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or 

comparable product by one of the following: 

1. General Electric Company (GE). 

2. General Electric Company (Hotpoint). 


B. Electric Range: Freestanding range with one oven(s) and complying with AHAM ER-1. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product (Type 1): Common Kitchen & Cafe 

a. GE 30” Free-standing Electric Range, JBP15DM. 

2. Basis-of-Design Product (Type 2): Apartments 





a. GE Hotpoint 20” Free-standing Electric Range, RA720K. 

3. Width: As indicated on drawings. 

4. Electric Burner Elements: Four. 

a. Coil Type: Manufacturer's standard. 

b. Controls: Manual controls, located on front or splash panel at rear of rangetop. 

5. Oven Features: 

a. Capacity: Refer to basis of design. 

b. Operation: Baking self-cleaning. 

c. Broiler: Located in separate roll-out drawer on bottom. 

d. Oven Door(s): Counterbalanced, removable, with observation window (Type 1), 

and full-width of handle handle. 

e. Electric Power Rating: 

1) Oven: Manufacturer's standard. 

2) Broiler: Manufacturer's standard. 

f. Controls: Manual controls, located on front splash panel at rear of rangetop. 

6. Anti-Tip Device: Manufacturer's standard. 

7. Electric Power Supply: 240 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase, 30 A. 

8. Material: Porcelain-enameled steel with manufacturer's standard cooktop. 

a. Color/Finish: 

1) Type 1: Black 

2) Type 2: White. 

2.2 MICROWAVE OVENS 






B. Microwave Oven: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: 

a. GE Spacemaker Over-the-Range Microwave, JVM1540DMWW/CC/BB. 

2. Mounting: Undercabinet. 

3. Type: Conventional. 

4. Dimensions: 

a. Width: 30 inches (762 mm). 


c. Height: As indicated on Drawings. 

5. Capacity: 1.5 cu. ft. (0.04 cu. m). 

6. Oven Door: Door with observation window and pull handle or push-button latch release. 





7. Microwave Power Rating: Manufacturer's standard. 

8. Electric Power Supply: As indicated on Drawings. 

9. Controls: Digital panel controls and timer display. 

10. Other Features: Turntable. 

11. Material: Porcelain-enameled steel. 

a. Color/Finish: White. 

12. Accessories: Recirculation Charcoal Filter Kit-JX81C. 

2.3 KITCHEN EXHAUST VENTILATION 





3. Broan. 


B. Basis-of-Design Product Overhead Exhaust Hood: 

1. Type 1: Common Kitchen & Cafe 

a. GE 30” Standard Range Hood, JN327H. 

2. Type 2: Apartments 

a. Broan 41000 Series Non-Ducted Range Hood. 

3. Type: Wall-mounted, exhaust-hood system. 


a. Width: As indicated on Drawings. 


5. Exhaust Fan: Two-speed fan built into hood and with manufacturer's standard capacity. 

a. Venting: Nonvented, recirculating type with charcoal filter. 

b. Fan Control: Hood-mounted fan switch, with separate hood-light control switch. 

6. Duct Type: Manufacturer's standard. 

7. Finish: Baked enamel. 

8. Accessories: 

a. Type 1: Cord Kit, JXHC1. 

b. Color: 



9. Features: 

a. Permanent, washable aluminum mesh, stainless-steel mesh or charcoal filter(s). 

b. Built-in lighting. 





2.4 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZERS 



a. General Electric Company (GE). 

b. Whirlpool Corporation. 

c. or Approved Equal 

B. Refrigerator/Freezer: Two-door refrigerator/freezer with freezer on top and complying with 

AHAM HRF-1. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: 

a. Type 1: Large Capacity (Common Kitchen & Café) 

1) GE Top Freezer Refrigerator, 16.5 cubic feet, GTH17JBD. 

b. Type 2: Small Capacity (Apartment) 

1) GE Top Freezer Refrigerator, 15.5 cubic feet, GTH16BBX 

2. Type: Freestanding Undercounter. 


a. Width: 28” 


c. Height: As indicated on Drawings. 

4. Storage Capacity: 

a. Refrigeration Compartment Volume: 

1) Type 1: 16.5 cubic feet. 

2) Type 2: 15.5 cubic feet. 

b. Freezer Volume: Manufactures Standard. 

c. Shelf Area: Three adjustable wire and/or glass shelves. 

5. Refrigerator Features: 

a. Interior light in refrigeration compartment. 

6. Freezer Features: One freezer compartment(s) with door(s). 

a. Automatic defrost. 

7. Front Panel(s): Manufacturer's standard porcelain enamel. 

a. Panel Color: 



8. Appliance Color/Finish: 







2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS 

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, 

temporary protective covering before shipping. 

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. 

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of 

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation and 

performance of residential appliances. 

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before 

appliance installation. 

C. Examine walls, ceilings, and roofs for suitable conditions where overhead exhaust hoods 

microwave ovens with vented exhaust fans will be installed. 

D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the 

Work. 

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed 

fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough openings 

are completely concealed. 

C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in 

each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. 

D. Range Anti-Tip Device: Install at each range according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

E. Utilities: Comply with plumbing and electrical requirements. 


A. Perform tests and inspections. 





1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to 

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and 

to assist in testing. 

B. Tests and Inspections: 

1. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each appliance 

according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify compliance with each 

manufacturer's appliance-performance parameters. 

2. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 

3. Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation. 

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls 

and components. 

C. An appliance will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 

D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 


A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to 

adjust, operate, and maintain residential appliances. 





HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 1221131 

SECTION 122113 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Horizontal louver blinds with aluminum slats. 


1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for 

mounting horizontal louver blinds and accessories. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver blinds. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind. 

1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. 

D. Window-Treatment Schedule: For horizontal louver blinds. Use same designations indicated 

on Drawings. 


A. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals. 




1. Horizontal Louver Blinds: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each 

size, color, texture, pattern, and gloss indicated, but no fewer than 4 units. 






A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, 

and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and 

finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and 

humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its 

intended use. 

B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, 

verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate 

measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed 

units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from 

Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the 

Work. 



A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds from single source from single 

manufacturer. 

2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS 



1. Hunter Douglas Contract. 

2. Levolor Contract; a Newell Rubbermaid company. 

3. Springs Window Fashions. 

B. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish 

indicated; with crowned profile and radius corners. 

1. Width: 1 inch (25 mm). 

2. Thickness: Not less than 0.008 inch (0.20 mm). 

3. Spacing: Manufacturer's standard. 

4. Finish: Ionized antistatic, dust-repellent, baked polyester finish. 

C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled. Headrails fully 

enclose operating mechanisms on three sides. 

1. Capacity: One blind per headrail unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Ends: Capped or plugged. 

3. Manual Lift Mechanism: 

a. Lift-Cord Lock: Variable; stops lift cord at user-selected position within blind full 

operating range. 





b. Operator: Extension of lift cord(s) through lift-cord lock mechanism to form cord 

pull. 

4. Manual Tilt Mechanism: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism and linkage rod that adjusts 

ladders. 

a. Tilt: Full. 

b. Operator: Clear-plastic wand. 

5. Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Lengths: Full length of blind when blind is fully 

closed. 

6. Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Locations: Right side and left side of headrail, 

respectively unless otherwise indicated. 

7. Integrated Headrail/Valance: Manufactures Standard. 

D. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube that secures and protects ends of 

ladders and lift cords and has plastic- or metal-capped ends. 

1. Type: Manufacturer's standard. 

E. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard braided cord. 

F. Ladders: Evenly spaced across headrail at spacing that prevents long-term slat sag. 

1. Type: Braided cord. 

G. Mounting Brackets: With spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment 

indicated. 

1. Type: Overhead or End, field verify. 

2. Intermediate Support: Provide intermediate support brackets to produce support spacing 

recommended by blind manufacturer for weight and size of blind. 

H. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: 

1. Slats: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

2. Components: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and materials exposed to view matching or 

coordinating with slat color unless otherwise indicated. 

2.3 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION 

A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate horizontal louver blinds to comply with WCMA A 100.1 

including requirements for corded, flexible, looped devices; lead content of components; and 

warning labels. 

B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 

deg F (23 deg C): 

1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in 

which blind is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm) per side or 1/2 inch (13 mm) total, plus or 

minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm). Length equal to head-to-sill dimension of opening in which 

blind is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm). 





2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between 

blinds of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical 

separations between openings. 

C. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 

1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts. 

D. Mounting and Intermediate Brackets: Designed for removal and reinstallation of blind without 

damaging blind and adjacent surfaces, for supporting blind components, and for bracket 

positions and blind placement indicated. 

E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal 

noncorrosive to brackets and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting 

substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use. 

F. Color-Coated Finish: 

1. Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish 

complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including 

pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. 




requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting 

performance. 

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb, aligned and centered on openings, and aligned 

with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Locate so exterior slat edges are not closer than 2 inches (51 mm) from interior faces of 

glass and not closer than 1/2 inch (13 mm) from interior faces of glazing frames through 

full operating ranges of blinds. Coordinate with existing window hardware latches. 

2. Install mounting and intermediate brackets to prevent deflection of headrails. 

3. Install with clearances that prevent interference with adjacent blinds, adjacent 

construction, and operating hardware of glazed openings, other window treatments, and 

similar building components and furnishings. 

3.3 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate free of binding or malfunction through full operating 

ranges. 






A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and 

Installer and that ensures that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at 

time of Substantial Completion. 

C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired in a manner approved by 

Architect before time of Substantial Completion. 





RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 1235301 

SECTION 123530 - RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes kitchen cabinets. 


1. Section 123623.13 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops." 

2. Section 123640 "Stone Countertops." 

3. Section 123661 "Simulated Stone Countertops." 


A. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard. 

B. Exposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including 

visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors. 

C. Semiexposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including 

interior faces of doors, interiors and sides of drawers, and bottoms of wall cabinets. 

D. Concealed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including 

sleepers, web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, ends of cabinets installed directly 

against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets, and tops of wall cabinets and 

utility cabinets. 


A. Product Data: For the following: 

1. Cabinets. 

2. Cabinet hardware. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show 

materials, finishes, filler panels, and hardware. 

C. Samples: For cabinet finishes. 

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For cabinet finishes. 






A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. 

B. Product Certificates: For casework. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install casework until building is enclosed, wet 

work is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining 

temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the 

construction period. 

B. Established Dimensions: Where casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish 

dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual 

dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for 

trimming and fitting. 

C. Field Measurements: Where casework is indicated to fit to existing construction, verify 

dimensions of existing construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate 

measurements on Shop Drawings. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of 

casework. 


2.1 CABINETS 

A. Quality Standard: Provide cabinets that comply with KCMA A161.1. 

1. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a 

semiexposed location of each unit and showing compliance with the above standard. 

B. Face Style: Reveal overlay; door and drawer faces partially cover cabinet fronts. 

C. Cabinet Style: Face frame. 

D. Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid-wood stiles and rails, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick, with 1/4-inch- (6.4- 

mm-) thick, veneer-faced plywood center panels. 

E. Door and Drawer Fronts: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, veneer-faced plywood. 

F. Face Frames: 3/4-by-1-5/8-inch (19-by-41-mm) solid wood with glued mortise and tenon or 

doweled joints. 

G. Exposed Cabinet End Finish: Wood veneer. 

H. Factory Finishing: Finish cabinets at factory. Defer only final touchup until after installation. 





2.2 CABINET MATERIALS 

A. General: 

1. Hardwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content. 

2. Softwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 10 percent moisture content. 

3. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1. 

4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 

5. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 

6. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, Class 1 Tempered. 

B. Exposed Materials: 

1. Exposed Wood Species: Birch. 

a. Select materials for compatible color and grain. Do not use two adjacent exposed 

surfaces that are noticeably dissimilar in color, grain, figure, or natural character 

markings. 

b. Staining and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to 

match existing interior hallway doors. 

2. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of defects. 

3. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with face veneer of species indicated, with Grade A faces 

and Grade C backs of same species as faces. 

a. Edge band exposed edges with a minimum of 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, solid-wood 

veneer edging of same species as face veneer. 

C. Semiexposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 

1. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or MDF finished with thermally fused, 

melamine-impregnated decorative paper. 

a. Provide material finished on both sides for shelves, dividers, drawer bodies, and 

other components with two semiexposed surfaces. 

b. Provide material finished on one side for boards exposed to the exterior, such as 

cabinet ends. 

c. Provide PVC or polyester edgebanding on components with semiexposed edges. 

d. Colors: As selected by Architect from cabinet manufacturer's full range. 

D. Concealed Materials: Solid wood or plywood, of any hardwood or softwood species, with no 

defects affecting strength or utility; particleboard; MDF; or hardboard. 

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE 

A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, size, style, 

material, and finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

B. Pulls: Wire pulls. Solid metal, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter. Satin 

Stainless Steel: BHMA 630 

C. Hinges: Concealed European-style, self-closing hinges. 

D. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. 





E. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. 

F. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent rebound 

when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying with 

BHMA A156.9, Type B05011 or Type B05091. 



A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation 

tolerances, location of framing and reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance 

of casework. 



A. Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. 

Where cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, 

scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match cabinet face. 

B. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit the openings, are aligned, and are 

uniformly spaced. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated. 

C. Install cabinets level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m). 

D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing. 

1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 

inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch 

(38-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. 


A. Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate 

smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by 

manufacturer. 

B. Clean casework on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to 

restore damaged or soiled areas. 





PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623131 

SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes plastic-laminate countertops. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products high-pressure decorative 

laminate adhesive for bonding plastic laminate. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale 

details, attachment devices, and other components. 

1. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures faucets installed in 

plastic-laminate countertops. 

2. Apply WI Certified Compliance Program label to Shop Drawings. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: 

1. Plastic laminates. 


A. Product Certificates: For each type of product including but not limited to the following. 

1. Composite wood and agrifiber products. 

2. High-pressure decorative laminate. 

3. Adhesives. 


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products 

similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice 

performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. 

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 





C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant-treated 

material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction 

that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification 

marking is representative of the material tested. 


A. Do not deliver countertops until painting and similar operations that could damage countertops 

have been completed in installation areas. If countertops must be stored in other than 

installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements 

specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet 

work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative 

humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet 

work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 

90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the 

remainder of the construction period. 

C. Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify 

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate 

measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress 

to avoid delaying the Work. 

D. Established Dimensions: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, establish 

dimensions for areas where countertops are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and 

coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 


2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS 

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork 

Standards" for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements. 

1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that 

countertops, including installation, comply with requirements of grades specified. 

2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard 

and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those 

selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. 

B. Grade: Economy. 

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGP. 

D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures 

of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 





1. Match Architects sample, refer to finish schedule. 

E. Edge Treatment: Postformed contoured front edge of, same as laminate cladding on horizontal 

surfaces. Side edge shall be flush and constructed of the same as laminate cladding on 

horizontal surfaces 

F. Backsplashes: Postformed contoured cove base and top edge, of same as laminate cladding on 

horizontal surfaces. 

G. Core Material: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard. 

H. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard made with exterior glue. 

I. Core Thickness: 1-1/8 inch (29 mm). 

1. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) at front, back, and ends with 

additional layers of core material laminated to top. 

J. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, on underside of 

countertop substrate. 

2.2 WOOD MATERIALS 

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard 


1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. 

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of 

referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless 


1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. 


A. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement. 

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. 


A. Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end 

overhang of 1 inch (25 mm) over base cabinets. Ease edges to radius indicated for the 

following: 

1. Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to 

Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where 

necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 





1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will 

be complete. 

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. 

Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be 

removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check 

measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for 

shipment. 

C. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures, 

electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in 

diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove 

splinters and burrs. 

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 



A. Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation 

areas. 

B. Before installing countertops, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work 

as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 


A. Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed. 

B. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not 

completed in the shop. 

1. Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. 

2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. 

C. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels, 

splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined 

in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints 

where shown on Shop Drawings. 

1. Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices 

located within 6 inches (150 mm) of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 

24 inches (600 mm). Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a 

constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints. 

D. Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. 

Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). 

E. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish 

at cuts. 





F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other 

supports into underside of countertop. 

1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or 

other variation from a straight line. 

2. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive. 

3. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or 

another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material 

manufacturer. 


A. Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual 

defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 

B. Clean countertops on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to 

restore damaged or soiled areas. 

END OF SECTION 123623.13 




SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 1236611 

SECTION 123661 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Quartz agglomerate countertops and backsplashes. 


1. Section 064116 – “PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS” 

2. Section 224100 "Residential Plumbing Fixtures" for nonintegral sinks plumbing fittings. 


A. Product Data: For countertop materials. 

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, 

methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base 

cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete. 


A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. 


2.1 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS 

A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style: 

1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top. 

2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. 




SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 1236612 

B. Countertops: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, quartz agglomerate with front edge built up with same 

material. 

C. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, quartz agglomerate. 

D. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges and backsplashes unless 

otherwise indicated. Comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions for 

adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 

2.2 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS 

A. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix 

of filled plastic resin and complying with the "Physical Characteristics of Materials" Article of 

ANSI SS1. 

1. Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's samples As indicated on Finish Schedule. 



A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m). 

B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of 

countertop. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent 

surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with 

manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, 

and clean entire surface. 

1. Install backsplashes to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, 

sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 





GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS Section 220010 – Page 1 

SECTION 220010 - GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 

PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 

A. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of complete functioning systems, and each 

element thereof, as specified or indicated on the Drawings and Specifications or reasonably 

inferred; including every article, device or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) 

reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the 

equipment specified. Elements of the work include materials, labor, supervision, supplies, 

equipment, transportation, and utilities. 

B. Division 22 of the Specifications and Drawings numbered with prefixes P, MP and EP generally 

describe these systems, but the scope of the Plumbing work includes all such work indicated in 

the Contract Documents: Instructions to Bidders; Proposal Form; General Conditions; 

Supplementary General Conditions; Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical 

Drawings and Specifications; and Addenda. 

C. The Drawings have been prepared diagrammatically intended to convey the scope of work, 

indicating the intended general arrangement of the equipment, fixtures, piping, etc. without 

showing all the exact details as to elevations, offsets, control lines, and other installation 

requirements. The Contractor shall use the Drawings as a guide when laying out the work and 

shall verify that materials and equipment will fit into the designated spaces, and which, when 

installed per manufacturers requirements, will ensure a complete, coordinated, satisfactory and 

properly operating system. 


A. All work under this division shall be executed in a thorough professional manner by competent 

and experienced workmen licensed to perform the Work specified. 

B. All work shall be installed in strict conformance with manufacturers requirements and 

recommendations. Equipment and materials shall be installed in a neat and professional manner 

and shall be aligned, leveled, and adjusted for satisfactory operation. 

C. Material and equipment shall be new, shall be of the best quality and design, shall be current 

model of the manufacturer, shall be free from defects and imperfections and shall have markings 

or a nameplate identifying the manufacturer and providing sufficient reference to establish quality, 

size and capacity. Material and equipment of the same type shall be made by the same 

manufacturer whenever practicable. 

D. Unless specified otherwise, manufactured items shall have been installed and used, without 

modification, renovation, or repair for not less than one year prior to date of bidding for this 

project. 

1.3 CODES, REFERENCES AND STANDARDS 

A. Execute Work in accordance with the National Fire Protection Association and all Local, State, 

and National codes, ordinances and regulations in force governing the particular class of Work 

involved. Obtain timely inspections by the constituted authorities, and upon final completion of the 

Work obtain and deliver to the Owner executed final certificates of acceptance from the Authority 

Having Jurisdiction. 

B. Any conflict between these Specifications and accompanying Drawings and the applicable Local, 





State and Federal codes, ordinances and regulations shall be reported to the Architect in sufficient 

time, prior to the opening of Bids, to prepare the Supplementary Drawings and Specification 

Addenda required to resolve the conflict. 

C. The governing codes are minimum requirements. Where these Drawings and Specifications 

exceed the code requirements, these Drawings and Specification shall prevail. 

D. All material, manufacturing methods, handling, dimensions, method or installation and test 

procedure shall conform to but not be limited to the following industry standards and codes: 

IBC 

IMC 

IPC 

IFGC 

ADA 

AIA 

AMCA 

ANSI 

ASHRAE 

ASME 

ASSE 

ASTM 

AWS 

AWWA 

CISPI 

MSS 

NBFU 

NEC 

NFPA 

NEMA 

OSHA 

PDI 

UL 

International Building Code 

International Mechanical Code 

International Plumbing Code 

International Fuel Gas Code 

American Disabilities Act 

Guidelines for Design and Construction of Hospital and Healthcare Facilities 

Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. 

American National Standards Institute 

American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers 

American Society of Mechanical Engineers 

American Society of Sanitary Engineering 

American Society of Testing Materials 

American Welding Society 

American Water Works Association 

Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 

Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry 

National Board of Fire Underwriters 

National Electrical Code 

National Fire Protection Association 

National Electrical Manufactures' Association 

Occupational Safety and Health Act 

Plumbing and Drainage Institute 

Underwriter's Laboratories 

E. Contractor shall comply with rules and regulations of public utilities and municipal departments 

affected by connections of services. 

F. All Plumbing work shall be performed in compliance with applicable safety regulations, including 

OSHA regulations. Safety lights, guards, shoring and warning signs required for the performance 

of the Plumbing work shall be provided by the Contractor. 


A. General: 

1. Furnish: The term “furnish” is used to mean “supply and deliver to the project site, ready 

for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar operations.” 

2. Install: The term “install” is used to describe operations at the project site including the 

actual “unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to 

dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.” 

3. Provide: The term “provide” means “to furnish and install, complete and ready for the 

intended use.” 

4. Furnished by Owner or Furnished by Others: The item will be furnished by the Owner or 

Others. It is to be installed and connected under the requirements of this Division, 

complete and ready for operation, including items incidental to the Work, including 

services necessary for proper installation and operation. The installation shall be included 

under the guarantee required by this Division. 

5. Engineer: Where referenced in this Division, “Engineer” is the Engineer of Record and the 

Design Professional for the Work under this Division, and is a Consultant to, and an 

authorized representative of, the Architect, as defined in the General and/or 

Supplementary Conditions. When used in this Division, it means increased involvement 





by, and obligations to, the Engineer, in addition to involvement by, and obligations to, the 

“Architect”. 

6. AHJ: The local code and/or inspection agency (Authority) Having Jurisdiction over the 

Work. 

7. NRTL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory, as defined and listed by OSHA in 

29 CFR 1910.7 (e.g., UL, ETL, CSA, etc.), and acceptable to the Authority having 

Jurisdiction (AHJ) over this project. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories and 

standards listed are used only to represent the characteristics required and are not 

intended to restrict the use of other listed Manufacturers and models that meet the 


B. The terms "approved equal", “equivalent”, or "equal" are used synonymously and shall mean 

“accepted by or acceptable to the Engineer as equivalent to the item or manufacturer specified”. 

The term "approved" shall mean labeled, listed, or both, by an NRTL, and acceptable to the AHJ 

over this project. 

C. The following definitions apply to excavation operations: 

1. Additional Excavation: Where excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, if 

unsuitable bearing materials are encountered, continue excavation until suitable bearing 

materials are reached. The Contract Sum may be adjusted by an appropriate Contract 

Modification. 

2. Subbase: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil layer used in pavement 

systems between the subgrade and the pavement base course material. 

3. Subgrade: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil immediately below the slab 

or pavement system. 

4. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade 

elevations or dimensions without specific direction from the Architect. 


A. The Contractor shall visit the site and ascertain the conditions to be encountered while installing 

the Work under this Division, verify all dimensions and locations before purchasing equipment or 

commencing work, and make due provision for same in the bid. Failure to comply with this 

requirement shall not be considered justification for omission, alteration, incorrect or faulty 

installation of Work under this Division or for additional compensation for Work covered by this 

Division. 

B. The Contractor shall refer to Drawings of the other disciplines and to relevant equipment drawings 

and shop drawings to determine the extent of clear spaces. The Contractor shall make offsets 

required to clear equipment, beams and other structural members; and to facilitate concealing 

piping and ductwork in the manner anticipated in the design. 

C. The contractor shall provide materials with trim which will fit properly the types of ceiling, wall, or 

floor finishes actually installed. 

D. The Contractor shall maintain a foreman on the jobsite at all times to coordinate his work with 

other contractors and subcontractors so that various components of the Plumbing systems will be 

installed at the proper time, will fit the available space, and will allow proper service access to the 

equipment. Carry on the Work in such a manner that the Work of the other contractors and trades 

will not be handicapped, hindered, or delayed at any time. 

E. Work of this Division shall progress according to the "Construction Schedule" as established by 

the Prime Contractor and his subcontractors and as approved by the Architect. Cooperate in 

establishing these schedules and perform the Work under this Division, in a timely manner in 

conformance with the construction schedule so as to ensure successful achievement of schedule 

dates. 





1.6 MEASUREMENTS AND LAYOUTS 

A. The drawings are schematic in nature, but show the various components of the systems 

approximately to scale and attempt to indicate how they are to be integrated with other parts of the 

building. Figured dimensions shall be taken in preference to scale dimensions. Determine exact 

locations by job measurements, by checking the requirements of other trades, and by reviewing 

the Contract Documents. The Contractor will be held responsible for errors which could have 

been avoided by proper checking and inspection. 

1.7 SUBMITTALS 

A. Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for submittal requirements. 

B. Assemble and submit for review, manufacturers product literature for material and equipment to 

be furnished and/or installed under this Division, to include shop drawings, manufacturer's product 

data and performance sheets and submittals required by this Division. A minimum of seven (7) 

sets shall be submitted. 

C. Submittals and shop drawings shall not contain HEI’s firm name or logo, nor shall it contain the 

HEI’s engineers’ seal and signature. They shall not be copies of HEI’s work product. If the 

contractor desires to use elements of such product, the license agreement for transfer of 

information at the end of this section must be used 

D. Shop Drawings shall be submitted for systems as listed in Table 1 in sufficient detail so as to 

demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents and design concept. Highlight, mark, list or 

indicate the materials, performance criteria and accessories that are being proposed. 

E. Refer to individual Sections for additional submittal requirements. 

F. Submit Shop Drawings as early as required to support the project schedule. Allow for two weeks 

Engineer review time plus mailing time plus a duplication of this time for resubmittal if required. 

Submittal of Shop Drawings as soon as possible before construction starts is preferred. 

G. Before submitting Shop Drawings and material lists, the Contractor shall verify that the equipment 

submitted is mutually compatible and suitable for the intended use. He shall verify that the 

equipment will fit the available space and allow ample room for maintenance. If the size of 

equipment furnished makes necessary any change in location, or configuration, submit a shop 

drawing showing the proposed layout. 

H. Shop Drawings submitted by the Contractor shall contain the following information. Submittals not 

so identified will be returned to the Contractor without action: 

1. The project name. 

2. The applicable specification section and paragraph. 

3. Equipment identification acronym as used on the drawings. 

4. The submittal date. 

5. The Contractor's stamp which shall certify that the stamped drawings have been checked 

by the Contractor, comply with the Drawings and Specifications and have been 

coordinated with other trades. 

I. Refer to Division 1 for acceptance of electronic submittals for this project. For electronic 

submittals, Contractor shall submit the documents in accordance with the procedures specified in 

Division 1. Contractor shall notify the Architect and Engineer that the shop drawings have been 

posted. If electronic submittal procedures are not defined in Division 1, Contractor shall include 

the website, user name and password information needed to access the submittals. For 

submittals sent by e-mail, Contractor shall copy the Architect and Engineer’s designated 

representatives. Contractor shall allow the Engineer review time as specified above in the 

construction schedule. Contractor shall submit only the documents required to purchase the 

materials and/or equipment in the electronic submittal and shall clearly indicate the materials, 

performance criteria and accessories being proposed. General product catalog data not 





specifically noted to be part of the specified product will be rejected and returned without review. 

J. The Architect and/or Engineer’s checking and subsequent acceptance of such drawings, 

schedules, literature, or illustrations shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for 

deviations from Drawings or Specifications unless he has, in writing, called the Engineer’s 

attention to such deviations at the time of submission, and secured his written acceptance; nor 

shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors in dimensions, details, size of members, or 

quantities; or omissions of components or fittings; or for coordinating items with actual building 

conditions and adjacent work. 

1.8 ELECTRONIC DRAWING FILES 

A. In preparation of shop or record drawings, Contractor may, at his option, obtain electronic drawing 

files in AutoCAD or DXF format from the Engineer for a shipping and handling fee of $200 for a 

drawing set up to 12 sheets and $15 per sheet for each additional sheet. Contact the Architect for 

Architect’s written authorization. Contractor shall complete and send the form attached at the end 

of this section along with a check made payable to Henderson Engineers, Inc. Contractor shall 

indicate the desired shipping method and drawing format on the attached form. In addition to 

payment, Architect’s written authorization and Engineer’s release agreement form must be 

received before electronic drawing files will be sent. 


A. Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Substitutions 

B. Materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of 

required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by the proposed substitution. 

C. No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval to bid 

has been received by the Engineer at least ten calendar days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. 

Each such request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be 

substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute including drawings, cuts, 

performance and test data and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting 

forth changes in other materials, equipment or other Work that incorporation of the substitute 

would require shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitute is 

upon the proposer. The Engineer's decision of approval or disapproval to bid of a proposed 

substitution shall be final. 

D. If the proposed substitution is approved prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be stated in an 

Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. Verbal approval 

will not be given. 

E. No substitutions will be considered after the Contract is awarded unless specifically provided in 

the Contract Documents. 

1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 

A. Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Operational and Maintenance Manuals. 

B. Submit manuals prior to requesting the final punch list. 

C. Instruct the Owner's permanent personnel in the proper operation of, startup and shutdown 

procedures and maintenance of the equipment and components of the systems installed under 

this Division. 

D. At the completion of the project furnish to the Architect for the Owner, four (4) copies of brochures 

in three-ring, loose-leaf, hard-back notebook form, divided and tabbed, containing equipment 





data, approved shop drawings, diagrams, capacities, spare part numbers, manufacturer’s service 

and maintenance data, warranties, guarantees, etc. Include local contacts complete with address 

and telephone number, for equipment, apparatus, and system components furnished and installed 

under this Division of the specifications. 

1.11 SPARE PARTS 

A. Provide to the Owner the spare parts specified in the individual sections in Division 22 of this 

specification. Refer to Table 2 at the end of this section for a list of specification sections in 

Division 22 that contain spare parts requirements. 

B. Owner or Owner’s representative shall initial and date each section line in Table 2 when the 

specified spare parts for that section are received and shall sign at the bottom when all spare 

parts have been received. 

1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS 

A. A set of blueline prints shall be kept on the jobsite during construction for the purpose of noting 

changes. During the course of construction, the Contractor shall indicate on these drawings, 

changes made from the Contract Drawings. Particular attention shall be made to those items 

which need to be located for servicing. Underground piping shall be located, by dimension, from 

column lines. 

B. Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Record Drawings 

1.13 TRAINING 

A. Provide training as indicated in each specific section. Schedule training with the Owner at least 7 

days in advance. Video tape the training sessions in format as agreed to with the Owner. Provide 

three copies of each session to the Owner and obtain written receipt from the Owner. 

1.14 PAINTING 

A. Exposed ferrous surfaces, including pipe, pipe hangers, equipment stands and supports and 

exposed insulated piping shall be painted by the Plumbing Contractor using materials and 

methods as specified under Division 9 of the Specifications; colors shall be as selected by the 

Architect. 

B. Factory finishes, shop priming and special finishes are specified in the individual equipment 

specification sections. 

C. Where factory finishes are provided and no additional field painting is specified, marred or 

damaged surfaces shall be touched up or refinished so as to leave a smooth, uniform finish. 


A. Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Delivery, Storage and Handling. 

B. Equipment and material shall be delivered to the job site in their original containers with labels 

intact, fully identified with manufacturer's name, model, model number, type, size, capacity and 

Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. labels and other pertinent information necessary to identify the 

item. 

C. Deliver, receive, handle and store equipment and materials at the job site in the designated area 





and in such a manner as to prevent equipment and materials from damage and loss. Store 

equipment and materials delivered to the site on pallets and cover with waterproof, tear resistant 

tarp or plastic or as required to keep equipment and materials dry. Follow manufacturer's 

recommendations, and at all times, take every precaution to properly protect equipment and 

material from damage, to include the erection of temporary shelters to adequately protect 

equipment and material stored at the Site. Equipment and/or material which become rusted or 

damaged shall be replaced or restored by the Contractor to a condition acceptable to the 

Architect. 

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe storage of his own tools, material and equipment. 

1.16 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES 

A. Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Guarantees and Warranties. 

B. Each system and element thereof shall be warranted against defects due to faulty workmanship, 

design or material for a period of 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, unless specific 

items are noted to carry a longer warranty in the Construction Documents or manufacturer's 

standard warranty. The Contractor shall remedy defects occurring within a period of one year 

from the date of Substantial Completion or as stated in the General Conditions. 

C. The following additional items shall be guaranteed: 

1. Piping shall be free from obstructions, holes or breaks of any nature. 

2. Insulation shall be effective. 

3. Proper circulation of fluid in each piping system. 

D. The above guarantees shall include both labor and material; and repairs or replacements shall be 

made without additional cost to the Owner. 

E. The remedial work shall be performed promptly, upon written notice from the Architect or Owner. 

F. At the time of Substantial Completion, deliver to the Owner warranties with terms extending 

beyond the one year guarantee period, each warranty instrument being addressed to the Owner 

and stating the commencement date and term. Refer to Table 3 at the end of this section for a list 

of specification sections in Division 22 that contain special warranties. 


A. Refer to Division 1 and General Conditions for Temporary Facilities requirements. 

B. Temporary Utilities: The types of services required include, but are not limited to, water, 

sewerage, surface drainage and gas. When connecting to existing franchised utilities for required 

services, comply with service companies’ recommendations on materials and methods, or engage 

service companies to install services. Locate and relocate services (as necessary) to minimize 

interference with construction operations. 

1. Water: Premises are supplied with water services which may be used in this work: 

Contractor shall make his own arrangements for water services. 

2. Sewer Sediment: Maintain sewers and temporary connecting sewers in a clean, 

nonclogged condition during construction period. 

C. Construction Facilities: Provide facilities reasonably required to perform construction operations 

properly and adequately. 

1. Enclosures: When temporary enclosures are required to ensure adequate workmanship, 

weather protection and ambient conditions required for the work, provide fire-retardant 





treated lumber and plywood; provide tarpaulins with UL label and flame spread of 15 or 

less; provide translucent type (nylon reinforced polyethylene) where daylighting of 

enclosed space would be beneficial for workmanship, and reduce use of temporary 

lighting. 

2. Heating: Provide heat, as necessary, to protect work, materials and equipment from 

damage due to dampness and cold. In areas where building is occupied, maintain a 

temperature not less than 65 degrees Fahrenheit. Use steam, hot water, or gas from piped 

distribution system where available. Where steam, hot water or piped gas are not 

available, heat with self-contained LP gas or fuel oil heaters, bearing UL, FM or other 

approval labels appropriate for application. Vent fuel-burning heaters, and equip units with 

individual-space thermostatic controls. Use electric-resistance space heaters only where 

no other, more energy-efficient, type of heater is available and allowable. 


A. Conditions Affecting Work In Existing Buildings: The following project conditions apply: 

1. The Drawings describe the general nature of remodeling to the existing building. 

However, the Contractor shall visit the Site prior to submitting His bid to determine the 

nature and extent of work involved. 

2. Work in the existing building shall be scheduled with the Owner. 

3. Certain demolition work must be performed prior to the remodeling. The Plumbing 

Contractor shall perform the demolition which involves Plumbing and Plumbing systems, 

fixtures, equipment, piping, equipment supports or foundations and materials. 

4. Plumbing Contractor shall remove articles which are not required for the new Work. 

Unless otherwise indicated, each item removed by the Plumbing Contractor during this 

demolition shall become his property and shall be removed by the Plumbing Contractor 

from the premises and dispose of them in accordance with applicable federal, state and 

local regulations. 

5. Plumbing Contractor shall relocate and reconnect Plumbing facilities that must be 

relocated in order to accomplish the remodeling shown in the Drawings or indicated in the 

Specifications. Where Plumbing equipment or materials are removed, the Plumbing 

Contractor shall cap unused piping beyond the floor line or wall line to facilitate restoration 

of finish. 

6. General Contractor shall install finish material. 

7. Obtain permission from the Architect for channeling of floors or walls not specifically noted 

on the Drawings. 

8. Protect adjacent materials indicated to remain. Install and maintain dust and noise 

barriers to keep dirt, dust, and noise from being transmitted to adjacent areas. Remove 

protection and barriers after demolition operations are complete. 

9. Locate, identify, and protect Plumbing services passing through demolition area and 

serving other areas outside the demolition limits. Maintain services to areas outside 

demolition limits. When services must be interrupted, install temporary services for 

affected areas. 

B. Environmental Conditions: Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity conditions within 

the limits permitted by the joint sealer manufacturer. Do not apply joint sealers to wet substrates. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS 

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS 

A. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed 

stone, crushed slag, or natural or crushed sand. 

B. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, 

with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve, and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. 





C. Backfill and Fill Materials: Materials complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, 

GP, GM, SM, SW, and SP; free of clay, rock, or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension; 

debris; waste; frozen materials; and vegetable and other deleterious matter. 


3.1 PERMITS 

A. Secure and pay for permits required in connection with the installation of the Plumbing Work. 

Arrange with the various utility companies for the installation and connection of required utilities 

for this facility and pay charges associated therewith including connection charges and inspection 

fees, except where these services or fees are designated to be provided by others. 

3.2 EXISTING UTILITIES 

A. Schedule and coordinate with the Utility Company, Owner and with the Engineer connection to, or 

relocation of, or discontinuation of normal utility services from existing utility lines. Premium time 

required for any such work shall be included in the bid. 

B. Existing utilities damaged due to the operations of utility work for this project shall be repaired to 

the satisfaction of the Owner or Utility Company without additional cost. 

C. Utilities shall not be left disconnected at the end of a work day or over a weekend unless 

authorized by representatives of the Owner or Engineer. 

D. Repairs and restoration of utilities shall be made before workmen leave the project at the end of 

the workday in which the interruption takes place. 

E. Contractor shall include in his bid the cost of furnishing temporary facilities to provide services 

during interruption of normal utility service. 

3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 

A. Refer to Division 1, Division 2 and General Conditions for Selective Demolition requirements. 

B. General: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect abandoned Plumbing materials and 

equipment indicated to be removed and not indicated to be salvaged or saved. 

C. Materials and Equipment To Be Salvaged: Remove, demount, and disconnect existing Plumbing 

materials and equipment indicated to be removed and salvaged, and deliver materials and 

equipment to the location designated for storage. 

D. Disposal and Cleanup: Remove from the site and legally dispose of demolished materials and 

equipment not indicated to be salvaged. 

E. Plumbing Materials and Equipment: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect the following 

items: 

1. Inactive and obsolete piping, fittings and specialties, equipment, controls, fixtures and 

insulation. 

a. Piping embedded in floors, walls, and ceilings may remain if such materials do not 

interfere with new installations. Remove exposed materials and materials above 

accessible ceilings. Drain and cap piping and ducts allowed to remain. 

b. Perform cutting and patching required for demolition in accordance with Division 1, 





General Conditions and "Cutting and Patching" portion of this Section in Division 

22. 

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. The Contractor shall do necessary cutting of walls, floors, ceilings and roofs. 

B. No structural member shall be cut without permission from Architect. 

C. Patch around openings to match adjacent construction. 

D. After the final waterproofing membrane has been installed, roofs may be cut only with written 

permission by the Architect. 

3.5 CLEANING 

A. Dirt and refuse resulting from the performance of the work shall be removed from the premises as 

required to prevent accumulation. The Plumbing Contractor shall cooperate in maintaining 

reasonably clean premises at all times. 

B. Immediately prior to the final inspection, the Plumbing Contractor shall clean material and 

equipment installed under the Plumbing Contract. Dirt, dust, plaster, stains, and foreign matter 

shall be removed from surfaces including components internal to equipment. Damaged finishes 

shall be touched-up and restored to their original condition. 

3.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION REVIEW 

A. Prior to requesting inspection for "CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION", the 

Contractor shall complete the following items: 

1. Submit complete Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 

2. Submit complete Record Drawings. 

3. Perform special inspections. Refer to Table 4 at the end of this section for a list of 

specification sections in Division 22 that contain special inspection requirements. 

4. Start-up testing of systems. 

5. Removal of temporary facilities from the site. 

6. Comply with requirements for Substantial Completion in the "General Conditions". 

B. The Contractor shall request in writing a review for Substantial Completion. The Contractor shall 

give the Architect/Engineer at least seven (7) days notice prior to the review. 

C. The Contractor's written request shall state that the Contractor has complied with the 

requirements for Substantial Completion. 

D. Upon receipt of a request for review, the Architect/Engineer will either proceed with the review or 

advise the Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. 

E. If the Contractor requests a site visit for Substantial Completion review prior to completing the 

above mentioned items, He shall reimburse the Architect/Engineer for time and expenses incurred 

for the visit. 

F. Upon completion of the review, the Architect/Engineer will prepare a "final list" of outstanding 

items to be completed or corrected for final acceptance. 

G. Omissions on the "final list" shall not relieve the Contractor from the requirements of the Contract 

Documents. 





H. Prior to requesting a final review, the Contractor shall submit a copy of the final list of items to be 

completed or corrected. He shall state in writing that each item has been completed, resolved for 

acceptance or the reason it has not been completed. 






TABLE 5: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUBMITTAL 

REQUIREMENTS 

SPECIFICATION NUMBER/TITLE 

CODE DESIGNATION 

220500 Common Work Results For Plumbing B 

220515 Basic Piping Materials And Methods B 

220519 Meters And Gauges For Plumbing Piping B, G, I 

220523 General-Duty Valves For Plumbing Piping B, H, I 

220529 Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping B 

220553 Identification For Plumbing Piping & Equipment B 

220700 Plumbing Insulation B 

221100 Water Distribution Piping & Specialties A, B, F, H, I 

221111 Mechanically Joined Plumbing Piping Systems A, B, F, H, I 

221300 Sanitary Drainage & Vent Piping & Specialties A, B, F 

224000 Plumbing Fixtures B, E, H, I 

CODED LEGEND 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

G 

H 

I 

As-Built Drawings 

Product Data 

Performance Data, Capacities, Curves and Certificates 

Wiring Diagrams 

Operating Instructions 

Test Reports 

Warranties 

Recommended Spare Parts List 

Service and Maintenance Instructions 





AGREEMENT FOR TRANSFER OF INFORMATION 

MACHINE-READABLE FORMAT 

PROJECT NAME: ___________________________________ 

PROJECT NO/PHASE: ______________________ 

Made this day, ______________________________________ 

By and Between Henderson Engineers, Inc., Lenexa, Kansas (hereinafter referred to as ENGINEER) and 

(hereinafter referred to as RECIPIENT). 

The enclosed electronic media are provided pursuant to your request for the purpose of production of 

shop drawings or record drawings. In using it, modifying it, or accessing information from it, you are responsible 

for confirmation, accuracy, and checking of the data from the media. ENGINEER hereby disclaims any and all 

responsibility from any results obtained in use of this electronic media and does not guarantee any accuracy of the 

information. 

RECIPIENT agrees that it shall not use the information provided by ENGINEER for any purpose other 

than that described above without the express written consent of ENGINEER. RECIPIENT also hereby 

acknowledges that the data delivered by ENGINEER is for use by RECIPIENT only, and is not to be released to 

any other party without the written consent of the ENGINEER and does not transfer ownership of the instruments 

of professional service. 

RECIPIENT understands that the automated conversion of information and data from the system and 

format used by ENGINEER to an alternate system or format cannot be accomplished without the possibility of 

introduction of inexactitudes, anomalies, and errors. In the event project documentation provided to RECIPIENT in 

machine readable form is so converted, RECIPIENT agrees to assume all risk associated therewith, and to the 

fullest extent permitted by law, to hold harmless and indemnify ENGINEER from and against all claims, liabilities, 

losses, damages, and costs, including but not limited to attorney’s fees, arising therefrom or in connection 

therewith. 

RECIPIENT recognizes that changes or modifications to ENGINEER’S instruments of professional 

service introduced by anyone other than ENGINEER may result in adverse consequences that ENGINEER can 

neither predict nor control. Therefore, and in consideration of ENGINEER’S agreement to deliver its instruments of 

professional service in machine readable format, RECIPIENT agrees, to the fullest extent permitted by law to hold 

harmless and indemnify ENGINEER from and against all claim, liabilities, losses, damages, and costs, including 

misuse or reuse by others of the machine readable information and data provided by ENGINEER under this 

Agreement. The foregoing indemnification applies, without limitation, to any use of the project documentation on 

another project, for additions to this project, or for completion of this project by others; ENGINEER may authorize 

excepting only such use in writing. 

Send a check for shipping and handling costs in the amount of $200 for an electronic drawing set up to 

12 sheets plus $15 per sheet in excess of 12 sheets payable to Henderson Engineers, Inc. along with completed 

and signed agreement and Architect’s written authorization to receive electronic media. Be sure to indicate below 

the desired shipping method, format type and media type. 

Sheet numbers 

requested:________________________________________________________________________________ 

1-12 sheets @ $200 + ___________ sheet(s) @ $15 each = $________total due to Henderson Engineers, Inc. 

Signature 

HENDERSON ENGINEERS, INC. 

Signature 

RECIPIENT 

Date 

Date 

Shipping Method Format Media 

E-Mail AutoCAD 2000/2002 CD-ROM 

First Class Mail AutoCAD 2004/2005 DVD 

FedEx Overnight (No P.O.Boxes) 

DXF 

Shipping or E-Mail Address: 

Phone: 




COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Section 220500 – Page 1 

SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods for application 

with Plumbing installations as follows: 

1. Access panels and doors in walls, ceilings, and floors for access to Plumbing materials 

and equipment. 

2. Non-shrink grout for equipment installations. 

3. Sleeves for Plumbing penetrations. 

4. Miscellaneous metals for support of Plumbing materials and equipment. 

5. Wood grounds, nailers, blocking, fasteners, and anchorage for support of Plumbing 

materials and equipment. 

6. Joint sealers for sealing around Plumbing materials and equipment. 

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 

1. Division 7 Section “Penetration Firestopping” for material and methods for firestopping 

systems. 

2. Division 22 Section "Basic piping Materials and Methods" for materials and methods for 

mechanical sleeve seals. 


A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Division 1 and Division 22 Section “General 

Plumbing Requirements”. 

1. Product data for the following products: 

a. Access panels and doors. 

b. Through and membrane-penetration firestopping systems. 

c. Joint sealers. 

2. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal fabrications, and wood 

supports and anchorage for Plumbing materials and equipment. 

3. Welder certificates, signed by Contractor, certifying that welders comply with requirements 

specified under "Quality Assurance" article of this Section. 

4. Schedules indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective 

demolition prior to commencement of Work. Include coordination for shut-off of utility 

services and details for dust and noise control. 

a. Coordinate sequencing with construction phasing and Owner occupancy specified 

in Division 1 Section "Summary of Work." 

5. Through and Membrane Penetration Firestopping Systems Product Schedule: Provide UL 

listing, location, wall or floor rating and installation drawing for each penetration fire stop 

system. 

a. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting 

agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit 

illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping 

manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent 

fire-resistance-rated assembly. 






A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural 

Welding Code - Steel." 

1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding 

processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. 

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where a fire-resistance classification is indicated, provide access door 

assembly with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in the UL "Building 

Materials Directory" for rating shown. 

1. Provide UL Label on each fire-rated access door. 

C. Through and Membrane Penetration Systems Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in 

installing penetration firestopping systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated 

for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. 

Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's 

products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping 

system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer 

qualification on buyer. 


2.1 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT 

A. All control devices, specialties, valves, etc. shall be located so as to provide easy access for 

operation, service inspection and maintenance. 

B. Access Doors: 

1. Provide access doors for all concealed equipment, except where above lay-in ceilings. 

Refer to Section “Plumbing Identification” for labeling of access doors. 

2. Access doors shall be adequately sized for the devices served with a minimum size of 18" 

x 18", furnished by the respective Contractor or Subcontractor and installed by the 

General Contractor. 

3. Access doors must be of the proper construction for type of construction where installed. 

4. The exact location of all access doors shall be verified with the Architect prior to 

installation. 

5. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Factory-fabricated and assembled units, complete with 

attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall be 

continuously welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. 

6. Frames: 16-gauge steel, with a 1-inch-wide exposed perimeter flange for units installed in 

unit masonry, pre-cast, or cast-in-place concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling. 

a. For installation in masonry, concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling: 1 inch-wideexposed 

perimeter flange and adjustable metal masonry anchors. 

b. For gypsum wallboard or plaster: perforated flanges with wallboard bead. 

c. For full-bed plaster applications: galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed 

casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame. 

7. Flush Panel Doors: 14-gauge sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed 

continuous piano hinge set to open 175 degrees; factory-applied prime paint. 

8. Locking Devices: Flush, screwdriver-operated cam locks. 

9. Locking Devices: Where indicated on the drawings or where access panels are installed in 

locations accessible to the public, provide 5-pin or 5-disc type cylinder locks, individually 

keyed; provide 2 keys. 






following: 

a. Arrow United Industries. 

b. Bar-Co., Inc. 

c. J.L Industries. 

d. Karp Associates, Inc. 

e. Milcor Div. Inryco, Inc. 

f. Nystrom Building Products 

g. Wade 

h. Zurn 

2.2 GROUT 

A. Provide nonshrink, nonmetallic grout conforming to ASTM C 1107, Grade B, in premixed and 

factory-packaged containers. 

B. Grout shall have post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, non-staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous, 

hydraulic-cement characteristics and shall be as recommended by manufacturer for 

interior and exterior applications. 

C. Grout shall have 5,000 psi, 28-day compressive strength design mix. 

2.3 PENETRATIONS 

A. Sleeves: 

1. Steel Sleeves: Schedule 40 galvanized, welded steel pipe, ASTM A-53 grade A or 12 

gauge (0.1084 inches) welded galvanized steel formed to a true circle concentric to the 

pipe. 

2. Sheet-Metal Sleeves: 10 gauge (0.1382 inches), galvanized steel, round tube closed with 

welded longitudinal joint. 

B. Frames for rectangular openings attached to forms and of a maximum dimension established by 

the Architect. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side 

greater than 16 inches, provide 18 gauge (0.052 inches) welded galvanized steel. For sleeve 

cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal 

to, or greater than, 16 inches, provide 10 gauge (0.1382 inches) welded galvanized steel. Notify 

the General Contractor or Architect before installing any box openings not shown on the 

Architectural or Structural Drawings. 

C. Box Frames: Frames for rectangular openings shall be of welded 12 gauge steel attached to 

forms and of a maximum dimension established by the Architect. Contractor shall notify the 

General Contractor or Architect before installing any box openings not shown on the Architectural 

or Structural Drawings. 

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS METALS 

A. Steel plates, shapes, bars, and bar grating: ASTM A 36. 

B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500. 

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501. 

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded. 

E. Fasteners: Zinc-coated, type, grade, and class as required. 






A. Framing Materials: Standard Grade, light-framing-size lumber of any species. Number 3 Common 

or Standard Grade boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules, or Number 3 boards complying 

with SPIB rules. Lumber shall be preservative treated in accordance with AWPB LP-2, and kiln 

dried to a moisture content of not more than 19 percent. 

B. Construction Panels: Plywood panels; APA C-D PLUGGED INT, with exterior glue; thickness as 

indicated, or if not indicated, not less that 15/32 inches. 

2.6 JOINT SEALERS 

A. General: Joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with 

joint substrates under conditions of service and application. 

B. Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 

C. Elastomeric Joint Sealers: Provide the following types: 

1. One-part, nonacid-curing, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade 

NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for masonry, glass, aluminum, and other 

substrates recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Provide one of the following: 

a. "Dow Corning 790," Dow Corning Corp. 

b. "Silglaze II SCS 2801," General Electric Co. 

c. "Silpruf SCS 2000," General Electric Co. 

d. "864," Pecora Corp. 

e. "Rhodia 5C," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 

f. "Spectrem 1," Tremco, Inc. 

g. "Spectrem 2," Tremco, Inc. 

h. "Dow Corning 795," Dow Corning Corp. 

i. "Rhodia 7B," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 

j. "Rhodia 7S," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 

k. "Omniseal," Sonneborn Building Products Div. 

2. One-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade 

NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for glass, aluminum, and nonporous joint 

substrates; formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with nonporous 

substrates; and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and 

temperature extremes. Provide one of the following: 


b. "Sanitary 1700," General Electric Co. 

c. "898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant," Pecora Corp. 

d. "OmniPlus," Sonneborn Building Products Div. 

D. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealants: One-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable complying with ASTM C 

834 recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations involving 

joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5 percent. Provide one of the following: 


a. "Chem-Calk 600," Bostik Construction Products Div. 

b. "AC-20," Pecora Corp. 

c. "Sonolac," Sonneborn Building Products Div. 

d. "Tremflex 834," Tremco, Inc. 






3.1 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS 

A. Set frames accurately in position and securely attached to supports, with face panels plumb and 

level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces. 

B. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. 

3.2 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE 

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and 

elevation to support and anchor Plumbing materials and equipment. 

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code." 

3.3 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE 

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage accurately in location, 

alignment, and elevation to support and anchor Plumbing materials and equipment. 

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view 

or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners 

without splitting wood members. 

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 

3.4 PREPARATION FOR JOINT SEALERS 

A. Surface Cleaning for Joint Sealers: Clean surfaces of joints immediately before applying joint 

sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer. 

B. Apply joint sealer primer to substrates as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer. Protect 

adjacent areas from spillage and migration of primers, using masking tape. Remove tape 

immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 

3.5 APPLICATION OF JOINT SEALERS 

A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to 

products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. 

1. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric joint sealants. 

2. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 790 for use of acrylic-emulsion joint sealants. 

B. Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool 

sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and 

adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 

Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by 

sealant manufacturer. 

3.6 PENETRATIONS: 

A. Construction in Existing Facilities: 





1. Saw cut or core drill existing walls and slabs to install sleeves and sleeve seals in existing 

facilities. Do not cut or drill any walls or slabs without first coordinating with, and receiving 

approval from, the Architect, Owner, or both. Seal sleeves and sleeve seals into concrete 

walls or slabs with a waterproof non-shrink grout acceptable to the Architect. 

B. Provide sleeves and/or box frames for openings in all concrete and masonry construction and fire 

or smoke partitions, for all mechanical work that passes through such construction; Coordinate 

with other trades and Divisions to dimension and lay out all such openings. 

C. The General Contractor will provide only those openings specifically indicated on the Architectural 

or Structural Drawings as being provided under the General Contractor's work. 

D. The cutting of new or existing construction shall not be permitted except by written approval of the 

Architect. 

E. Floor sleeves shall be fitted with means for attachment to forms and shall be of length to extend at 

least two inches above the floor level. 

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. 

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. 

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry. 

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for penetrations of gypsum board 

assemblies. 

J. All openings sleeved through underground exterior walls shall be sealed with mechanical sleeve 

seals as specified in Division 22 Section “Basic Piping Materials and Methods”. 





BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS Section 220515 – Page 1 

SECTION 220515 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section specifies piping materials and installation methods common to more than one 

Section of Division 22 and includes joining materials, piping specialties and basic piping 

installation instructions. 


1. Division 22 Section "Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods," for materials and methods 

for sleeve materials. 

2. Division 26 Section “Common Work Results for Electrical” required electrical devices. 

3. Division 26 Sections "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for field-installed 

disconnects. 


A. Refer to Division 1 and General Plumbing Requirements for administrative and procedural 

requirements for submittals. 

B. Product Data: Submit product data on the following items: 

1. Escutcheons 

2. Dielectric Unions and Fittings 

3. Strainers 

C. Quality Control Submittals: 

1. Submit welders' certificates specified in Quality Assurance below. 


A. Welder's Qualifications: All welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and 

Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. 

B. Welding procedures and testing shall comply with ANSI Standard B31.9 - Standard Code for 

Building Services Piping and The American Welding Society, Welding Handbook. 

C. Soldering and Brazing procedures shall conform to ANSI B9.1 Standard Safety Code for Plumbing 

Refrigeration. 

D. Pipe specialties and fittings shall be manufactured in plants located in the United States. 



A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide piping materials and specialties 





from one of the following: 

1. Pipe Escutcheons: 

a. Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. 

b. Tubular Brass Plumbing Products, Zurn Industries, Inc. 

2. Dielectric Unions and Fittings: 

a. Eclipse, Inc.; Rockford-Eclipse Div. 

b. Capital Mfg. Co. 

c. Watts Industries Inc.; Water Products Div. 

d. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. 

e. Calpico, Inc. 

f. Central Plastics Co. 

3. Strainers: 

a. Armstrong Machine Works. 

b. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div. 

c. MEPCO 

d. Metraflex Co. 

e. Mueller Steam Specialties. 

f. Nicholson Steam 

g. RP&C Valve, Division of Conbraco Ind. 

h. Spirax Sarco. 

i. Victaulic Co. of America (provide grooved systems for low pressure applications 

only). 

j. Watts Regulator Co. 

2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Refer to the individual piping system specification sections in Division 22 for specifications on 

piping and fittings relative to that particular system. 

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS 

A. Refer to individual Division 22 Piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. 

B. Welding Materials: AWS D10.12; Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure 

Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the 

pipe being welded. 

C. Brazing Materials: AWS A5.8; Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure 

Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials appropriate for the materials being joined. 

D. Soldering Materials: ASTM B32; Refer to individual piping system specifications for solder 

appropriate for each respective system. 

E. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ASME B16.21; Gasket material shall be full-faced for cast-iron 

flanges and raised-face for steel flanges. Select materials to suit the service of the piping system 

in which installed and which conform to their respective ANSI Standard (A21.11, B16.20, or 

B16.21). Provide materials that will not be detrimentally affected by the chemical and thermal 

conditions of the fluid being carried. 





2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES 

A. Escutcheons: Chrome-plated, stamped steel, hinged, split-ring escutcheon, with set screw. 

Inside diameter shall closely fit pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is 

insulated. Outside diameter shall completely cover the opening in floors, walls, or ceilings. 

B. Unions: Malleable-iron, Class 150 for low pressure service and class 250 for high pressure 

service; hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joints, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces; 

female threaded ends. 

C. Dielectric Unions and Fittings: Provide factory-fabricated dielectric unions and fittings with 

appropriate end connections for the pipe materials in which installed (screwed, soldered, or 

flanged), which effectively isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion. 

D. Y-Type Strainers: Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping 

system materials. Screens for 2-1/2” and smaller shall be Monel 40 mesh and screens for 3” and 

larger shall be Type 304 stainless steel, with 3/64" perforations at 233 per square inch. 

1. For low pressure applications, cast iron strainers shall have 125 psi working pressure 

rating and cast bronze and carbon steel strainers shall have 150 psi working pressure 

rating. For high pressure applications, cast iron strainers shall have 250 psi working 

pressure rating and cast bronze and carbon steel strainers shall have 300 psi working 

pressure rating. 

2. Soldered Ends, 2” and Smaller For Domestic Water Applications: Cast bronze body, 

screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 

3. Threaded Ends, 2” and Smaller: Cast bronze body, screwed screen retainer with centered 

blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 

4. Threaded Ends, 2" and Smaller: Cast-iron body, screwed screen retainer with centered 


5. Threaded Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with off-center 


6. Flanged Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with off-center 


E. Sleeves: 

1. Sleeve: Refer to Division 22 Section “Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods” for sleeve 

materials. 



A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes, and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris for both inside and outside of piping and fittings before 

assembly. 

3.2 INSTALLATIONS 

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the 

general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping 

layout take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other 

design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. Refer to individual system 

specifications for requirements for coordination drawing submittals. 

B. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or 





floors, unless indicated otherwise. 

C. Install piping free of sags and bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper 

insulation applications. 

D. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, 

unless expressly indicated on the Drawings. 

E. Install horizontal piping as high as possible allowing for specified slope and coordination with 

other components. Install vertical piping tight to columns or walls. Provide space to permit 

insulation applications, with 1" clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above 

removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal. 

F. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and 

servicing of valves. 

G. Support piping from structure. Do not support piping from ceilings, equipment, ductwork, conduit 

and other non-structural elements. 

H. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4" ball 

valve, and short 3/4" threaded nipple and cap. 

I. Verify final equipment locations for roughing in. 

3.3 PIPING PROTECTION 

A. Protect piping during construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris, and to prevent 

damage from traffic and construction work. 

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops. 


A. Plumbing penetrations occur when piping penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or 

fire / smoke rated floor and wall assemblies. 

B. Above Grade Concrete or Masonry Penetrations 

1. Provide sleeves for pipes passing through above grade concrete or masonry walls, 

concrete floor or roof slabs. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes in existing 

masonry walls, concrete floors or roofs. Provide sleeves as follows: 

a. Provide schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in 

diameter. 

b. Provide galvanized sheet metal for sleeves 6 inches in diameter and larger, 

thickness shall be 10 gauge (0.1382 inches). 

c. Provide welded galvanized sheet metal for rectangular sleeves with the following 

minimum metal thickness: 

1) For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no 

side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 18 gauge (0.052 inches). 

2) For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 

inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness 

shall be 10 gauge (0.1382 inches). 

d. Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves are acceptable for use in areas without return air 

plenums. 





2. Extend pipe insulation for insulated pipe through floor, wall and roof penetrations, 

including fire rated walls and floors. The vapor barrier shall be maintained. Size sleeve 

for a minimum of 1” annular clear space between inside of sleeve and outside of 

insulation. 

3. Seal elevated floor, exterior wall and roof penetrations watertight and weathertight with 

non-shrink, non-hardening commercial sealant. Pack with mineral wool and seal both 

ends with minimum of ½” of sealant. 

C. Concrete Slab on Grade Penetrations: 

1. Provide schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves for vertical pressure pipe passing through concrete 

slab on grade. Sleeves shall be one nominal pipe size larger than the pipe served and 

two pipe sizes larger than pipe served for ductile iron pipes with restraining rods. Seal 

water-tight with silicone caulk. 

2. Provide ½” thick cellular foam insulation around perimeter of non-pressure pipe passing 

thru concrete slab on grade. Insulation shall extend to 2” above and below the concrete 

slab. 

D. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls: Seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or 

duct, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Pack with mineral wool 

and seal both ends with minimum of ½” of sealant. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" 

for materials and installation. 

1. Extend pipe insulation for insulated pipe through sleeve. The vapor barrier shall be 

maintained. Size sleeve for a minimum of 1” annular clear space between inside of sleeve 

and outside of insulation. 

E. Fire / Smoke Rated Floor and Wall Assemblies: Seal around penetrations of fire rated assemblies 

to maintain fire resistance rating of fire-rated assemblies. Coordinate fire ratings and locations 

with the architectural drawings. Install sealants in compliance with the manufacturer’s UL listing. 

Refer to Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing” for firestoppings and materials. 

3.5 FITTINGS AND SPECIALTIES 

A. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections. 

B. Remake leaking joints using new materials. 

C. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. 

D. Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, pressure reducing or regulating valve, 

solenoid valve, mixing valve, backflow preventer and elsewhere as indicated. 

E. Install unions adjacent to each valve, and at the final connection to each piece of equipment and 

plumbing fixture having 2" and smaller connections, and elsewhere as indicated. 

F. Install Flanges in piping 2-1/2" and larger, where indicated, adjacent to each valve, and at the final 

connection to each piece of equipment. 

G. Install dielectric unions to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in dry piping systems (gas, 

compressed air, vacuum). 

H. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in wet piping systems 

(water). 

3.6 JOINTS 

A. Steel Pipe Joints: 





1. Pipe 2" and Smaller: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads in accordance with ANSI 

B2.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs 

and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint lubricant or sealant suitable for the 

service for which the pipe is intended on the male threads at each joint and tighten joint to 

leave not more than 3 threads exposed. 

2. Pipe Larger Than 2": 

a. Weld pipe joints (except for exterior water service pipe) in accordance with ASME 

Code for Pressure Piping, B31. 

b. Weld pipe joints of exterior water service pipe in accordance with AWWA C206. 

c. Install flanges on all valves, apparatus, and equipment. Weld pipe flanges to pipe 

ends in accordance with ASME B31.9 Code for Building Services Piping. Clean 

flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to torque specified by manufacturer 

of flange and flange bolts, to provide uniform compression of gaskets. 

B. Non-ferrous Pipe Joints: 

1. Brazed And Soldered Joints: For copper tube and fitting joints, braze joints in accordance 

with ANSI B31.9 - Standard Code for Building Services Piping and ANSI B9.1 - Standard 

Safety Code for Plumbing Refrigeration. 

2. Thoroughly clean tube surface and inside surface of the cup of the fittings, using very fine 

emory cloth, prior to making soldered or brazed joints. Wipe tube and fittings clean and 

apply flux. Flux shall not be used as the sole means for cleaning tube and fitting surfaces. 

3. Plumbing Joints: Flared compression fittings may be used for refrigerant lines 3/4" and 

smaller. 

C. Joints for other piping materials are specified within the respective piping system Sections. 

3.7 PIPE FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing: Refer to individual piping system specification sections. 

B. Inspection Report Form: Refer to the inspection report form at the end of this section for 

inspection data to be completed for each piping system. Submit completed forms to the Owner 

and Engineer. 






PLUMBING & PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS 

INSPECTION REPORT FORM 

Project Name: 

Project No: 

General Contractor: 

Inspection Date: 

Contractor Project No. 

Temperature: 

System Inspected 

Building: 

Location/Description: 

Service: 

Inspection Results 

Time of Inspection: 

Approval to Insulate: Y N Approval to Cover in Wall: Y N 

Approval to backfill Y N 

Signatures 

Witness: 

Witness: 

Witness: 

Representing: 

Representing: ______________________________ 

Representing: ______________________________ 

Remarks 

Contractor Supervisor’s signature: 




GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING Section 220523 – Page 1 

SECTION 220523 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes general duty valves common to most mechanical piping systems. 

1. Special purpose valves are specified in individual piping system specifications. 

B. Contractors Option: 

1. The Division 22 contractor may provide grooved or press to connect mechanical joints, 

couplings, fittings, valves and related components as an option in lieu of, in whole or in 

part, copper sweat, brazing, threaded or flanged piping methods. Grooved or press to fit 

plumbing piping where used must be provided in compliance with specification Section 

221111 “Mechanically Joined Plumbing Piping Systems”. 

a. Grooved couplings may be used at equipment connections where specified for 

vibration isolation control only. 

2. Grooved or press to connect mechanical joints, couplings, fittings, valves and related 

components shall not be provided for natural gas piping in lieu of welded, threaded or 

flanged piping methods. 


A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 

Specification Sections. 

1. Product data, including body material, valve design, pressure and temperature 

classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, 

dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. 


A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide products specified in this section from the same 

manufacturer where products are available and conform to the specification requirements. 

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for 

building services piping and ASME B31.1 for power piping. 

C. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) Compliance: 

Comply with the various MSS Standard Practices referenced. 

D. Valves shall be manufactured in plants located in the United States or certified that they comply 

with applicable ANSI, ASTM and MSS standards. 







A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the 

manufacturers listed in valve schedule. 

2.2 VALVE FEATURES, GENERAL 

A. Valve Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems. 

1. Nonrising stem valves may be used where headroom prevents full extension of rising 

stems. 

B. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As scheduled and required to suit system pressures and 

temperatures. 

C. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Operators: Provide the following special operator features: 

1. Handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter turn. 

2. Lever handles, on quarter-turn valves 6-inch and smaller, except for plug valves. Provide 

plug valves with square heads; provide one wrench for every 10 plug valves. 

3. Chain-wheel operators, for valves 2-1/2-inch and larger, installed 72 inches or higher 

above finished floor elevation. Extend chains to an elevation of 5'-0" above finished floor 

elevation. 

4. Gear drive operators, on quarter-turn valves 8-inch and larger. 

E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to 

receive insulation. 

F. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections. 

G. End Connections: As indicated in the valve specifications. 

1. Threads: Comply with ANSI B1.20.1. 

2. Flanges: Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B16.5 for steel, and ANSI B16.24 

for bronze valves. 

3. Solder-Joint: Comply with ANSI B16.18. 

a. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting 

point below 840 deg F for gate, globe, and check valves; below 421 deg F for ball 

valves. 

2.3 GATE VALVES 

A. Gate Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi CWP, body and bonnet of 

ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with threaded or solder ends, solid disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass 

packing gland, non-asbestos composition packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Provide Class 

150 valves meeting the above where system pressure requires. 

2.4 BALL VALVES 

A. Ball Valves, 2 Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150 saturated steam pressure, 600-psi 





CWP; two-piece construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 584, conventional port, 

chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, 

solder ends and vinyl-covered steel handle. 

2.5 CHECK VALVES 

A. Swing Check Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi CWP, cast-bronze 

body and cap conforming to ASTM B 62; with horizontal swing, Y-pattern, and bronze disc; and 

having threaded or solder ends. Provide valves capable of being reground while the valve 

remains in the line. Provide Class 150, 300-psi CWP, valves meeting the above specifications, 

with threaded end connections, where system pressure requires or where Class 125 valves are 

not available. 

B. Wafer Check Valves: Class 125, cast-iron body; with replaceable bronze seat, and non-slam 

design lapped and balanced twin bronze flappers and stainless steel trim and torsion spring. 

Provide valves designed to open and close at approximately one foot differential pressure. 

C. Lift Check Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: Class 125; cast-bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM 

B 62; horizontal or angle pattern, lift-type valve, with stainless steel spring, bronze disc holder with 

renewable "Teflon" disc, and threaded ends. Provide valves capable of being refitted and ground 

while the valve remains in the line. 


3.1 VALVE ENDS SELECTION 

A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: 

1. Copper Tube Size, 2-Inch and Smaller: Solder ends. 

2. Copper Tube Sizes 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: flanged end. 

3.2 VALVE PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE CLASSIFICATION SCHEDULES 

A. VALVES, 2-INCH AND SMALLER 

SERVICE GATE GLOBE BALL CHECK 

PLUG 

Domestic Hot and Cold Water 125 125 150 125 

175 

3.3 VALVE SCHEDULE 

A. Gate Valves - 2 Inch and Smaller, Class 125: 

THREADED 

SOLDER 

MANUFACTURER NRS THREADED RS NRS 

SOLDER RS 

Crane 438 428 1701S 1700S 

Hammond IB645 IB640 IB647 IB635 

Milwaukee 105 148 115 1149 

Nibco T113 T111 S113 S111 

Powell 507 500 1822 1821 

Stockham B103 B-100 B-104 B-108 





B. Gate Valves - 2 Inch and Smaller, Class 150: 

THREADED 

SOLDER 


SOLDER RS 

Crane 437 431/431UB 1324 1334 

Hammond IB637 IB629 x IB648 

Milwaukee x 1151 x 1169 

Nibco T-136 T-134 S-136 S-134 

Powell 2712 2714 x 1842 

Stockham B-130 B-120 x B-124 

1. x means not available. 

C. Ball Valves – 2 inch and smaller: 

MANUFACTURER THREADED ENDS SOLDER ENDS 

(Apollo) Conbraco 70-100 70-200 

Hammond 8501 8511 

Milwaukee BA-100 BA-100S 

Nibco T-580-70-66 S-580-70-66 

Watts B-6000 B-6001 

3.4 APPLICATION SCHEDULE 

A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe, ball, and butterfly 

for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve applications 

and arrangements. 

B. Domestic Water Systems: Use the following valve types: 

1. Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system. 

2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP, with stem extension. 

3. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, elastomer-coated ductile iron disc; EPDM or 

Buna N sleeve and stem seals. 

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATIONS 

A. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. Provide access 

doors and fire rated access doors as required. 

B. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment arranged to allow equipment 

removal without system shutdown. Unions are not required on flanged devices. 

C. Install three-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling-type valves. 

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe. 

E. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement. 


A. Tests: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and 

balancing, inspect valves for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks; replace valves if leak 

persists. 






A. Cleaning: Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and prepare 

valves to receive finish painting or insulation. 

B. Inspect valves for leaks after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before 

final adjusting and balancing. Adjust or replace packing, as required, on valves with leaks. 

Replace valve if leak persists. 





HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING Section 220529 – Page 1 

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following: 

1. Horizontal-piping hangers and supports 

2. Vertical-piping clamps 

3. Hanger-rod attachments 

4. Building attachments 

5. Saddles and shields 

6. Spring hangers and supports 

7. Miscellaneous materials 

8. Pipe alignment guides 

9. Anchors 

10. Equipment supports 


1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation", for high density insulation for protecting 

insulation vapor barrier and materials and methods for piping hanger installations. 

2. Division 22 “Water Distribution Piping and Specialties”, for pipe hanger types and spacing 

for horizontal and vertical domestic water distribution and heat traced piping of sizes and 

materials indicated. 

3. Division 22 “Sanitary Drainage & Vent Piping and Specialties”, for pipe hanger types and 

spacing for heat traced and cold sanitary piping of sizes and materials indicated. 


A. Terminology used in this Section is defined in MSS SP-90. 


A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contract and Division 1 

specification Sections. 

1. Product data, including installation instructions for each type of support and anchor. 

Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, 

location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support. 

2. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer of hangers and supports certifying that 

their products meet the specified requirements. 

3. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements 

specified under "Quality Assurance" Article. 

4. Assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support and anchor, indicating dimensions, 

weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components. 

5. Maintenance data for supports and anchors for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance 

Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 22 Section "General Plumbing Requirements." 










B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ASME "Boiler and Pressure 

Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable plumbing codes pertaining to product materials 

and installation of supports and anchors. 

D. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Hangers, supports, 

and components shall be listed and labeled by a NRTL where used for fire protection piping 

systems. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 



A. Hangers and Supports 

1. Anvil International 

2. B-Line 

3. Halfen-DEHA 

4. Hilti 

5. ERICO\Michigan Hanger Co. 

6. Midwest 

7. National Pipe Hanger Corporation 

8. Power-Strut. 

9. Truscon 

10. Unistrut 

B. Expansion Anchors 

1. Hilti 

2. Phillips 

3. Power Fasteners 

4. Rawl 

2.2 SUPPORT MATERIALS 

A. Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of materials, design, and 

manufacturer complying with MSS SP-58. 

1. Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that 

will not have field-applied finish. 

2. Pipe attachments shall be copper-plated or have nonmetallic coating for electrolytic 

protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. 

3. Components as listed below shall be made of 304 stainless steel where indicated. 

B. Insulation Protection Shield: Sheet metal construction, meeting MSS SP-69 & SP-58 Type 40, of 

18 gauge for 5-1/2” inside dimension and smaller, 16 gauge for 6-1/2” to 10-3/4” inside dimension 

and 14 gauge for 11-3/4” to 17” inside dimension. Shield shall cover half of the circumference of 

the pipe and shall be of length indicated by manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation. 

C. 360 Insulation Protection Shield: Sheet metal construction, of 18 gauge for 5-1/2” inside 

dimension and smaller, 16 gauge for 6-1/2” to 10-3/4” inside dimension and 14 gauge for 11-3/4” 

to 17” inside dimension. Shield shall cover all of the circumference of the pipe with two half 

circumference sections held together with bolts and nuts and shall be of length indicated by 





manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation. 

D. Pre-engineered Support Strut Systems: Minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel with factory-punched 

attachment holes. Two piece straps shall be captivated at the shoulder when attachment nut is 

tightened and designed for use with strut system. Long or short pipe rollers designed for use with 

strut system, where indicated, shall attach to the channel with brackets and nuts. Provide plastic 

galvanic isolators for connecting bare copper pipe for use with pre-engineered support strut 

system where indicated. All nuts, brackets and clamps shall have the same finish as the 

channels. 

E. Expansion Anchors: Self drilling, drilled flush or shell type. 

F. Pre-Engineered Roof Pipe Supports: 4” X 4” X12” long closed cell polyethylene blocks with 

embedded pre-engineered support strut or pre-engineered support struts with factory plastic 

bases. Two piece straps shall be captivated at the shoulder when attachment nut is tightened and 

designed for use with strut system. All nuts, brackets and clamps shall have the same finish as 

the channels. 


A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. 

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, 

natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix ratio shall be 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by 

volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. 

C. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semisteel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting 

of bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider that bolts tightly to 

pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. 


3.1 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from 

building structure; do not attach to ceilings, equipment, ductwork, conduit and other non-structural 

elements such as floor and roof decking. 

B. Hangers, supports, clamps and attachments shall comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Arrange 

for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty 

trapeze hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP- 

69. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for 

smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe as specified above for 

individual pipe hangers. 

C. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Space attachments within 

maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at 

concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes 

in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert to forms. 

Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2,500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars 

through openings at top of inserts. 

D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and 

other accessories. Provide two nuts on threaded supports to securely fasten the support. 

E. Field-Fabricated, Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads 

required; weld steel in accordance with AWS D-1.1. 





F. Support fire protection systems piping independently from other piping systems. 

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of 

movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, 

expansion bends and similar units. 

H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses 

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 

I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum 

pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping Code is not exceeded. 

J. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. 

1. Riser Clamps: Attach riser clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with riser clamps 

projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. Do 

not use riser clamps to support horizontal, insulated piping. Seal insulation for hot piping 

and protect vapor barrier for cold piping as specified in Division 22 Section “Plumbing 

Insulation”. 

2. Insulation Protection Shield: Install insulation protection shield and high density insulation 

where vapor barrier is indicated, sized for the insulation thickness used as specified in 

Division 22 Section “Plumbing Insulation”. 

a. Install a minimum 8” long section at each support point, top and bottom halves of 

the pipe, of same thickness of insulation used. 

K. Pre-engineered Support Strut Systems: Channel strut systems can be used at the Contractors 

option in lieu of individual hangers for horizontal pipes. Space channel strut systems at the 

required distance for the smallest pipe supported. Provide channel gauge and hanger rods per 

the manufacturer’s recommendations for the piping supported. Where strut systems are attached 

to walls, install anchor bolts per manufacturer’s recommendations. 

1. Uninsulated Copper Pipe: Install with plastic galvanic isolators 

2. Insulated Tube or Pipe: Install with 360 insulation protection shields or pre-engineered 

thermal hanger-shield inserts as specified in Division 22 Section “Plumbing Insulation”. 

L. Expansion Anchors: Use in existing concrete, masonry or in pre-cast concrete construction. 

3.2 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS 

A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME 

B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. 

B. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to structure. 

Comply with ASME B31.9 and with AWS Standards D1.1. 

C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit 

manufacturer's written instructions to control movement to compensators. 

D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe runs, at 

intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset 

of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES 

A. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins expansion joints and elsewhere as indicated. 

B. Anchor to building substrate. 





3.4 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 

A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support 

equipment above floor. 

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for piping and equipment. 

3.5 METAL FABRICATION 

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors and equipment supports. 

Install and align fabricated anchors in indicated locations. 

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be 

shop welded because of shipping size limitations. 

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, 

appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the 

following: 

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion 

resistance of base metals. 

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 

3. Remove welding flux immediately. 

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing, and so 

that contours welded surfaces to match adjacent contours. 

3.6 ADJUSTING 

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve 

indicated slope of pipe. 

B. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection of anchors and supports, clean field welds and 

abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop 

painting to comply with SSPC-PA-1 requirements for touch-up of field-painted surfaces. 

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 

C. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply 

galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 





IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Section 220553 – Page 1 

SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Extent of Plumbing work to be identified as required by this Section is indicated on drawings 

and/or specified in other Division 22 Sections. 

B. Types of identification devices specified in this Section include the following: 

1. Plastic Pipe Markers 

2. Plastic Tape 

3. Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker 

4. Valve Tags 

5. Valve Schedule Frames 

6. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs 

7. Plastic Equipment Markers 

8. Plasticized Tags 

1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS: 

A. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and 

viewing angles of identification devices. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each 

identification material and device required. 

B. Samples: Submit samples of each color, lettering style and other graphic representation required 

for each identification material or system. 

C. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" 

x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), 

location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are 

intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of 

schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as 

specified in Division 1. 

D. Maintenance Data: Include product data and schedules in Maintenance Manuals as specified in 

Division 1 and Section “General Plumbing Requirements.” 


A. Furnish minimum of 5% extra stock of each plumbing identification material required, including 

additional numbered valve tags (not less than 3) for each piping system, additional piping system 

identification markers, and additional plastic laminate engraving blanks of assorted sizes. 






2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide plumbing identification materials 

of one of the following: 

1. Allen Systems, Inc. 

2. Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div. 

3. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc. 

4. Seton Name Plate Corp. 

2.2 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each 

application as referenced in other Division 22 sections. Where more than single type is specified 

for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product 

category. 

2.3 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS 

A. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap-on, color-coded 

pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1 

B. Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, 

color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1 

C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6" (including insulation if any), provide full-band 

pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the 

following methods: 

1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. 

2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. 

3. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). 

4. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4" 

wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2". 

D. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping system 

in each instance, as selected by Architect/Engineer in cases of variance with names as shown or 

specified. 

E. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled, or shown, and 

abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. 

1. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally 

with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as a separate 

unit of plastic. 

2.4 PLASTIC TAPE 

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure-sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl 

tape, not less than 3 mils thick. 

B. Width: Provide 1-1/2" wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if 

any) of less than 6", 2-1/2" wide tape for larger pipes. 





C. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated. 

2.5 VALVE TAGS 

A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19-gauge polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved piping 

system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2" high, and with 5/32" 

hole for fastener. 

1. Provide 1-1/2" diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated. 

2. Fill tag engraving with black enamel. 

B. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded 

type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and 

manufactured specifically for that purpose. 

C. Access Panel Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard 1/16" thick engraved plastic laminate 

access panel markers, with abbreviations and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. 

Include 1/8" center hole to allow attachment. 

2.6 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS 

A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, in the 

sizes and thickness indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and 

wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for 

plumbing fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. 

B. Thickness: 1/16" for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8" length; 1/8" for larger units. 

C. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where 

screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate. 

2.7 PLASTIC EQUIPMENT MARKERS 

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded equipment markers. 

Conform to the following color code: 

1. Green: Cooling equipment and components. 

2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components. 

3. Yellow/Green: Combination cooling and heating equipment and components. 

4. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components. 

5. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any of the above criteria. 

6. For hazardous equipment, provide colors and designs recommended by ANSI A13.1. 

B. Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible: 

1. Name and plan number. 

2. Equipment service. 

3. Design capacity. 

4. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, rpm, etc. 

C. Size: Provide 2-1/2" x 4" markers for control devices, dampers, and valves; and 4-1/2" x 6" for 

equipment. 





2.8 PLASTICIZED TAGS 

A. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention tags, of 

plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing. Tags shall be minimum 3-1/4" x 5-5/8" 

in size, provided with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed 

wording including large-size primary wording (as examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT 

OPERATE). 

2.9 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS 

A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in plumbing identification 

work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering 

and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as 

required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of plumbing systems and equipment. 

1. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and 

specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as 

service (as examples; Boiler No. 3, Air Supply No. 1H, Standpipe F12). 


3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 

A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting 

or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished plumbing spaces, install identification 

after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical 

ceilings and similar removable concealment. 

3.2 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION 

A. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to receive 

identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow: 

1. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this section. 

Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated pipes. 

B. Application: Provide piping system identification for the following systems: 

1. Domestic cold water piping. 

2. Domestic hot water piping. 

3. Domestic hot water recirculating piping. 

4. Sanitary and waste piping. 

5. Vent piping. 

C. Location: Install pipe markers and color bands in the following locations where piping is exposed 

to view, concealed only by a removable ceiling system, installed in machine rooms, installed in 

accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations. 

1. Within 5 feet of each valve and control device. 

2. Within 5 feet of each branch, excluding take-offs less than 25 feet in length for fixtures or 

terminal units; mark flow direction of each pipe at branch connection. 

3. Within 5 feet where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings or enter non-accessible 

enclosures. Provide identification on each side of wall, floor or ceiling. 

4. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed 

piping. 

5. Within 5 feet of major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 





6. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce 

spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment where there are more than two 

piping systems or pieces of equipment. 

3.3 VALVE IDENTIFICATION 

A. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; 

exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture faucets, 

convenience and lawn-watering hose bibs, and shut-off valves at plumbing fixtures and similar 

rough-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. 

B. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system. Mount valve schedule frames 

and schedules in machine rooms where indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, where directed by 

Architect/Engineer. 

3.4 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 

A. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or near each major 

item of plumbing equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise 

specified for each item or device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment 

and operational devices: 

1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as 

gas outlets. 

2. Meters, gauges, thermometers and similar units. 

3. Pumps 

4. Heat exchangers 

5. Water heaters, tanks and pressure vessels. 

6. Strainers, water treatment systems and similar equipment. 

B. Optional Sign Types: Where lettering larger than 1" height is needed for proper identification, 

because of distance from normal location of required identification, stenciled signs may be 

provided in lieu of engraved plastic, at Installer's option. 

C. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4" high lettering for name of unit where viewing distance is less than 

2'-0", 1/2" high for distances up to 6'-0", and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. 

Provide secondary lettering of 2/3 to 3/4 of size of the principal lettering. 

D. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between 

multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency 

precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. 

1. Optional Use of Plasticized Tags: At Installer's option, where equipment to be identified is 

concealed above acoustical ceilings or similar concealment, plasticized tags may be 

installed within concealed space to reduce amount of text in exposed sign (outside 

concealment). 

2. Operational valves and similar minor equipment items located in non-occupied spaces 

(including machine rooms) may, at Installer's option, be identified by installation of 

plasticized tags in lieu of engraved plastic signs. 





PLUMBING INSULATION Section 220700 – Page 1 

SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Extent of Plumbing insulation required by this Section is indicated on drawings and schedules, 

and by requirements of this Section. 

B. Types of Plumbing insulation specified in this Section include the following: 

1. Piping Systems Insulation: 

a. Fiberglass 

b. Cellular Glass 

c. Calcium Silicate 

d. Flexible Unicellular 

e. Polyisocyanurate (closed cell) 

2. Equipment Insulation: 

a. Fiberglass 

b. Calcium Silicate 

c. Cellular 

d. Flexible Elastomeric 


A. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite Plumbing insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, 

sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed 

index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. 

1. Exception: Outdoor Plumbing insulation may have flame spread index of 75 and smoke 

developed index of 150. 

2. Exception: Industrial Plumbing insulation that will not affect life safety egress of building 

may have flame spread index of 75 and smoke developed index of 150. 


1. Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping," for insulation shields for 

protecting insulation vapor barrier and materials and methods for piping installations. 



type of Plumbing insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, k-value, 

thickness, and furnished accessories for each Plumbing system requiring insulation. 

B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of 

Plumbing insulation. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual. 

C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's sample of each piping insulation type required, and of each duct 

and equipment insulation type required. Affix label to sample completely describing product. 







A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 

1. Aeroflex USA, Inc. 

2. Armacell LLC. 

3. Cell-U-Foam Corp. 


5. Knauf Insulation 

6. Johns Manville 

7. K-Flex USA 

8. Owens Corning 

9. Pittsburgh Corning Corp. 

10. ITW Insulation Systems, Inc. 

11. Dyplast Products. 

2.2 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS 

A. Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1 unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Cellular Glass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2. 

C. Calcium Silicate Piping Insulation: ASTM C 533, Type I. 

D. Flexible Elastomeric Piping Insulation: ASTM C 534, Type I. 

E. Polyisocyanurate Piping Insulation: ASTM C591. Provide vapor retardant film and tape of 

thickness as recommended by the manufacturer for the installation. 

F. Jackets for Piping Insulation: ASTM C 1136, Type I for piping with temperatures below ambient, 

Type II for piping with temperatures above ambient. Type I may be used for all piping at Installers 

option. 

1. Encase pipe fittings insulation with one-piece pre-molded PVC fitting covers, fastened as 

per manufacturer's recommendations. PVC fitting covers shall be Johns Manville Zeston 

2000 PVC or approved equal. 

2. Encase exterior piping insulation with aluminum jacket with weather-proof construction. 

Jacket shall be minimum 20 gauge corrugated aluminum with three aluminum attachment 

bands per section and with aluminum fitting covers. 

G. Staples, Bands, Wires, and Cement: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for 

applications indicated. 

H. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for 


I. Insulation Diameters: Comply with ASTM C585 for inner and outer diameters of rigid thermal 

insulation. 

J. Pipe, Valve and Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C450 for fabrication of fitting covers for pipe, 

valves and fittings. 

K. High Density Insulation: 

1. Calcium Silicate And Fiberglass: ASTM C 795 and MIL-I-24244. 





L. Pre-Engineered Thermal Hanger-Shield Inserts: 

1. Calcium silicate insulation meeting ASTM C 795 and encased in steel insulation shield. 

2. Flexible elastomeric piping insulation meeting ASTM C 534-01a, Type I with integral high 

density pipe supports and encased in steel insulation shield. 

a. Manufacturer: Cooper B-Line / Armacell or approved equal 

2.3 EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS 

A. Rigid Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 612, Class 2. 

B. Flexible Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type I, Class B-4. 

C. Calcium Silicate Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 533, Type I, Block. 

D. Cellular Glass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 

E. Flexible Elastomeric Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 534, TYPE II. 

F. Jacketing Material for Equipment Insulation: Provide pre-sized glass cloth jacketing material, not 

less than 7.8 ounces per square yard, or metal jacket at Installer's option, except as otherwise 

indicated. 

G. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cements, sealers, mastics and protective 

finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 

H. Equipment Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape, corner angles, 

anchors and stud pins as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 


3.1 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION 

A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on the following: 

1. Chrome-plated exposed piping 

2. Water Hammer Arrestors 

3. Unions, strainers, check valves, balancing or flow valves and pressure regulator valves 

4. Drain lines from water coolers 

5. Exterior condensate drain piping 

6. Pre-insulated equipment. 

B. Cold Piping: 

1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold plumbing piping systems: 

a. Potable cold water piping. 

b. Potable chilled water piping. 

c. Plumbing vents within 6 lineal feet of roof outlet. 

d. Condensate piping inside the building. 

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and 

thicknesses of insulation: 





C. Hot Piping: 

a. Fiberglass: 1" thickness. 

b. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2" thickness. 

c. Calcium Silicate: 1-1/2" thickness. 

d. Flexible Elastomeric: 1” thickness 

e. Polyisocyanurate: 1” thickness. 

1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot plumbing piping systems: 

a. Potable hot water piping. 

b. Potable hot water recirculation piping. 

D. P-traps: 



a. Fiberglass: 1" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 6", 1-1/2" thick for pipe sizes 

over 6". 

b. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 6", 1-1/2" thick for 

pipe sizes over 6". 

c. Calcium Silicate: 1-1/2" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 6", 2-1/2" thick for 

pipe sizes over 6". 

d. Polyisocyanurate: 1” thick for pipe sizes up to and including 6”, 1-1/2” thick for 

pipe sizes over 6”. 

1. Insulate P-traps receiving chilled water waste and P-traps of water coolers as described 

below: 

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 2", 1” thick for 

pipe sizes 2” to 6” (largest size permitted). 

2. Insulate P-traps receiving hot water waste above 140F as described below: 




d. Flexible Elastomeric (high temp formula up to 300F): 1” thickness. 


E. Piping Inside Masonry Wall Units: 

1. Insulate cold, hot and hot water recirculation piping installed inside of masonry walls 

where the piping needs to be insulated as the wall is constructed as described below: 

F. Exterior piping: 

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 2", 1” thick for 

pipe sizes 2” to 6” (largest size permitted). 

1. Encase cold, hot and hot water recirculation piping insulation with aluminum weather-proof 

jackets. 

2. Insulate and heat trace P-traps, sanitary, waste, cold, hot and hot water recirculation 

piping as described below: Refer to Division 22 Section “Heat Tracing for Plumbing 

Piping” for heat trace system material and installation requirements. 








d. Flexible Elastomeric: 1” thickness. 


3. Insulate and heat trace grease waste piping and grease waste P-traps as described 

below: Refer to Division 22 Section “Heat Tracing for Plumbing Piping” for heat trace 

system material and installation requirements. 


b. Cellular Glass: 3" thickness. 


d. Flexible Elastomeric: 2” thickness. 


3.2 EQUIPMENT INSULATION 

A. Cold Equipment (Below Ambient Temperature): 

1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold equipment: 

a. Drip pans under chilled equipment. 

2. Insulate each item of equipment specified above with one of the following types and 


a. Fiberglass: 2" thick for cold surfaces above 35 degrees F (2 degrees C) and 3" 

thick for surfaces 35 degrees F (2 degrees C) and lower. 

b. Cellular Glass: 3" thick for surfaces above 35 degrees F (2 degrees C) and 4-1/2" 

thick for surfaces 35 degrees F (2 degrees C) and lower. 

c. Flexible Elastomeric: 1" thick. 

B. Hot Equipment (Above Ambient Temperature): 

1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot equipment: 

a. Condensate pumps. 

2. Insulate each item of equipment specified above with one of the following types and 


a. Fiberglass: 2" thick, except 3" thick for low-pressure boilers and steam-jacketed 

heat exchangers. 

b. Calcium Silicate: 3" thick except 4-1/2" thick for low-pressure boilers and steamjacketed 

heat exchangers. 

c. Flexible Elastomeric: 1" thick for equipment operating up to 180 degrees F (82 

degrees C). and 300F (149C) for high-temperature formula for 181 degrees F and 

higher. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION 

A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in 

accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended 

purpose. 

B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting, testing, and 





acceptance of tests. 

C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping 

with full-length units of insulation, with a single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces 

or scraps abutting each other. 

D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure a 

complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. 

E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on cold pipe insulation, and protect insulation with 

shields to prevent puncture or other damage as specified in Division 22 Section “Hangers and 

Supports for Plumbing Piping.” Provide high density insulation of material as specified herein and 

of length equivalent to pipe shield. Provide pipe hangers sized for the pipe outside diameter plus 

insulation thickness. Seal butt joint between insulation and high density insulation with wet coat of 

vapor barrier lap cement. 

1. Exception for vertical piping: Provide clamps sized for the outside diameter of the vertical 

pipe and extend clamp through insulation. Seal penetrations of insulation and vapor 

barrier with wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement. 

F. Provide pipe hangers for hot piping sized for the outside diameter of piping. Butt insulation to 

hanger or riser clamp for vertical pipe. Seal exposed insulation with insulation sealer. 

G. Butt pipe insulation tightly at insulation joints. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor barrier tape or 

band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints 

and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band. 

H. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with 

continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same 

material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly 

against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular 

surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is 

uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same 

material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt 

each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with 

adhesive. 

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same 

material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe 

insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe 

diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve 

stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with 

insulating cement. 

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same 



diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating 

cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and 

replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable 

insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor 

barrier. 

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. 

Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe 

insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a 

mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for 

above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the 

mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 





8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric 

and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and 

unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation 

facing using PVC tape. 

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match 

size and color of pipe labels. 

I. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, 

test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape 

insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement 

and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. 

J. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the 

following: 

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same 

thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe 

insulation. 

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation 

from flanges or union at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe 

insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainlesssteel 

or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide 

the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of 

mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached 

insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe 

insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe 

insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied 

in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 

K. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a 

metal jacket. 

L. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, 

except where otherwise indicated. 

M. Exterior Piping: Provide aluminum weather-proof jackets over piping insulation, except flexible 

elastomeric, on pipes installed exterior to the building. 

N. Exterior Flexible Elastomeric Piping: Provide multi-ply, polymeric blend laminate jacketing, 16 

mils thick with approved adhesive. Provide insulation shields so that the piping supports do not 

puncture, cut or break the jacket. Seal all vertical joints with tape. 

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION 

A. General: Install equipment thermal insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written 

instructions, and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves 

intended purpose. 

B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces. Redo 

poorly fitted joints. Do not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gapping joints and excessive 

voids resulting from poor workmanship. 

C. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on equipment insulation and protect it to prevent puncture and 

other damage. 

D. Do not apply insulation to equipment, breechings, or stacks while hot. 

E. Apply insulation using the staggered joint method for both single and double layer construction, 





where feasible. Apply each layer of insulation separately. 

F. Coat insulated surfaces with layer of insulating cement, troweled in workmanlike manner, leaving 

a smooth continuous surface. Fill in scored block, seams, chipped edges and depressions, and 

cover over wire netting and joints with cement of sufficient thickness to remove surface 

irregularities. 

G. Cover insulated surfaces with all-service jacketing neatly fitted and firmly secured. Lap seams at 

least 2". Apply over vapor barrier where applicable. 

H. Do not insulate boiler manholes, handholes, cleanouts, ASME stamp, and manufacturer's 

nameplate. Provide neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation. 

I. Provide removable insulation sections to cover parts of equipment which must be opened 

periodically for maintenance; include metal vessel covers, fasteners, flanges, frames and 

accessories. 

J. Equipment Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installation of 

weather-barrier mastic protective finish, or jacketing, as recommended by the manufacturer. 

3.5 EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR 

A. Repair damaged sections of existing Plumbing insulation, both previously damaged or damaged 

during this construction period. Use insulation of same thickness as existing insulation, install 

new jacket lapping and sealed over existing. 

3.6 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT 

A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor 

barrier damage and moisture saturated units. 

B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work 

during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. 





WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING AND SPECIALTIES Section 221100 – Page 1 

SECTION 221100 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes domestic cold water, hot water, and hot water recirculation piping, fittings, 

and specialties within the building to a point 5 feet outside the building. 

B. Contractors Option: 

1. The Division 22 contractor may provide grooved, press to connect or push to connect 

mechanical joints, couplings, fittings, valves and related components as an option in lieu 

of, in whole or in part, copper sweat, brazing, threaded or flanged piping methods. 

Grooved, press to fit or push to connect plumbing piping where used must be provided in 

compliance with specification Section 221111 “Mechanically Joined Plumbing Piping 

Systems”. 

a. Grooved couplings may be used at equipment connections where specified for 

vibration isolation control only. 

2. Grooved, press to connect or push to connect mechanical joints, couplings, fittings, valves 

and related components shall not be provided for natural gas piping in lieu of welded, 

threaded or flanged piping methods. 

C. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 

1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork," for trenching and backfilling materials and methods for 

underground piping installations. 

2. Division 2 Section "Water Service Systems," for water service piping beginning from 5'-0" 

outside the building. 

3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers," for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations 

through basement and foundation walls, and fire and smoke barriers. 

4. Division 22 Section "Identification, for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for labeling and 

identification of water distribution piping. 

5. Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing," for materials and methods for 

fire barrier penetrations, wall penetrations and equipment pads. 

6. Division 22 Section "Basic Piping Material and Methods," for materials and methods for 

strainers, flexible connectors and mechanical sleeve seals. 

7. Division 22 Section "General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping," for materials and methods 

for installing water distribution piping valves. 

8. Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping," for insulation shields, 

materials and methods for hanging and supporting water distribution piping. 

9. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation," for materials and methods for insulating water 

distribution piping. 

10. Division 22 Section “Sanitary Drainage and Vent Piping and Specialties,” for material and 

methods for trap primer outlet piping. 


A. Water Distribution Pipe: A pipe within the building or on the premises that conveys water from the 

water service pipe or meter to the points of usage. 

B. Water Service Pipe: The pipe from the water main or other source of potable water supply to the 

water distribution pipe of the building served. 





C. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are nominal pipe size (NPS). 



Specifications Sections. 

1. Product data for each piping specialty and valve specified. 

2. Welder Certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements 

specified in Article "Quality Assurance" below. 

3. Certification of Compliance with ASME and UL fabrication requirements specified in Article 

"Quality Assurance" below. 

4. Maintenance data for each piping specialty and valve specified for inclusion in 

Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 22 Section "General Plumbing 

Requirements." 

5. Test reports specified in Part 3 of this Section. 


A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure 

Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following codes: 

1. ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation. Safety 

valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. 

2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications" 

for Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators. 

3. 2006 International Plumbing Code 

C. Comply with the installation requirements for CPVC pipe and CPVC CTS tube per the Lubrizol 

“Flowguard Gold and CORZAN Design and Installation Manual”. 


A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish one valve key for each key-operated wall hydrant, hose bibb, fixture 

supply, or faucet installed. 



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following: 

1. Flow Control Valves: 

a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 

b. Bell & Gosset, ITT 

c. NIBCO 

2. Piston Type Water Hammer Arresters: 





a. Amtrol, Inc. 

b. Josam Co. 

c. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. 

d. PROFLO 

e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co. 

f. Tyler Pipe/Wade Div.; Subs. of Tyler Corp. 

g. Watts Regulator Co. 

h. Zurn Industries, Inc. Wilkins Regulator Div. 

3. Thermostatic Mixing Valves 

a. Bradley 

b. Lawler Manufacturing Co., Inc. 

c. Leonard Valve Co. 

d. Powers Process Controls 

e. Symmons Industries, Inc. 

4. Trap Primers and Distribution Units 

a. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. 

b. MIFAB 

c. PROFLO 

d. Sioux Chief 

5. Plumbing Pipe Support Brackets 

a. Holdrite 

b. PROFLO 

c. Sioux Chief 

6. Tube Suspension Clamps 

a. PROFLO 

b. Sioux Chief or approved Equivalent 

2.2 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Pipe and Tube: Refer to Part 3, Article "Pipe Applications", for identification of systems where the 

materials listed below are used. 

B. Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L Water Tube, drawn temper. 

C. Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type K Water Tube, annealed temper. 

D. Brass Pipe: Chrome Plated Schedule 40 ASTM B43 iron pipe size (IPS.) 

2.3 FITTINGS 

A. Wrought Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern. 

B. Brass Fittings: Chrome plated ANSI B16, Class 125 with threaded connections. 

C. Bronze Flanges: ANSI B16.24, Class 150, raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced. 

D. Unions: ASME B16.39, malleable iron, Class 150, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joints, 

metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces, female threaded ends. Threads shall conform to ASME 





B1.20.1. 

E. Dielectric Unions: Threaded, solder, or grooved-end connections as required to suit application; 

constructed to isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and prevent corrosion. 


A. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B32, 95-5 Tin-Antimony. 

B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Bag Silver. 

C. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and design 

temperatures and pressures. 

2.5 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES 

A. General-duty valves (i.e., gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves) are specified in Division 22 

Section "General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." Special duty valves are specified below by 

their generic name; refer to Part 3, Article "Valve Applications" for specific uses and applications 

for each valve specified. 

2.6 SPECIAL DUTY VALVES 

A. Flow Control Valves: 400 psi WOG, 1 piece bronze, ball valve, handle, memory stop, with solderend 

connections. 


A. Piston Type Water Hammer Arresters: Piston type, with casing of type “L” copper tube and spun 

copper ends, nylon piston with two EPDM “O”rings pressure lubricated with FDA approved 

silicone, pressure rated for 250 psi, tested and certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201. 

B. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Capacity as scheduled. 

1. Bronze body construction, non-corrosive parts, tamper resistant temperature adjustment, 

union inlets with strainers, checks, stops, pressure reducing valve for larger mixing valves, 

and dial thermometer. Valve shall be designed to fail to the cold side of the system. 

Maximum pressure drop shall not be exceeded for the scheduled flow rate scheduled on 

the drawings. 

C. Trap Primers: Brass construction, line pressure operation, capacity to prime number of traps as 

indicated with distribution units complying with requirements of ASSE Standard 1018. 

D. Pipe Support Brackets: 

1. Sheet Stud Bracket: 20 gauge copper with nominal copper tube holes of ½” on 2” centers 

and holes of ¾” or 1” on 4” centers. 

2. Pipe Mounted Bracket: 20 gauge copper or plastic bracket with clamps for securing 

copper water tube and stainless steel hose clamp for securing bracket to vertical waste 

and vent pipe in wall. 

3. Carrier Bracket: 20 gauge copper bracket with 1” hole for supporting rough-in for flush 

valve copper tube and bolt slot for attaching to chair carrier. 

E. Tube Suspension Clamps 





1. Combination plastic supports and insulators for installing copper tube in stud walls with 

integral bracket for securing to stud with screws. 


3.1 PREPARATION FOUNDATION FOR BELOW GROUND WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE AND 

FITTINGS 

A. Grade trench bottoms to provide a smooth, firm, and stable foundation, free from rock, throughout 

the length of the pipe. 

B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be laid 

and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated invert elevation. 

C. Pipe Beds: 

1. Copper Tube: Provide 6” thick sand pipe bed underneath and around sides of pipe, up to 

middle half of the pipe, including fittings. Tamp bed with mechanical tamper to 85% to 

95% compaction. Provide first layer of sand backfill 6” above pipe, tamp backfill with 

mechanical tamper to 85% to 95% compaction. 

D. Provide backfill above top of pipe bed as required for field conditions. Refer to Division 22 Section 

"General Plumbing Requirements” for materials and methods for backfill. 

3.2 ABOVE GROUND WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Install Type L, drawn copper tube with wrought copper fittings and solder joints for pipe sizes 4 

inches and smaller, within the building. 

3.3 BELOW GROUND WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Install Type K, soft annealed copper tube and brazed joints for pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller, 

with minimum number of joints, inside and outside building. 

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION 




design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. 

B. Use fittings for all changes in direction and branch connections. 

C. Install piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless 

expressly indicated. 

D. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper 


E. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or 

floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view. 

F. Install horizontal piping as high as possible allowing for proper slope and coordination with other 





components. Install vertical piping tight to columns or walls. Provide space to permit insulation 

applications, with 1-inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable 

ceiling panels to allow for panel removal. 

G. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and 


H. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4-inch ball 

valve, and short 3/4-inch threaded nipple and cap. 

I. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass though fire-rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and 

floors, maintain the fire-rated integrity. Refer to Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for 

Plumbing” for special sealers and materials. 

J. Elevated Floor Penetrations of Waterproof Membrane, Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire Rated 

Walls and Concrete Slab on Grade Penetrations: Provide sleeves and seal pipes that pass 

through waterproof floors, non-fire rated walls, partitions and ceilings or concrete slab on grade. 

Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Piping Materials and Methods” for special sealers and 

materials. 

K. Install piping with 1/32-inch-per-foot (1/4 percent) downward slope towards drain point. 

1. Install piping level with no pitch. 

3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

A. General: Hanger, support, insulation protection shield and anchor components and installation 

procedures conforming to MSS SP-58 and SP-69 are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers 

and Supports for Plumbing Piping”. Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports. 

B. Pipe Attachments: Install the following: 

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS SP-69 Type 1, for individual horizontal runs. 

2. Riser clamps, MSS SP-69 Type 8, for individual vertical runs. Provide copper coated riser 

clamps when in contact with copper tube. 

3. Insulation protection shields and high density insulation at each hanger for insulated pipe 

as specified in Division 15 Sections “Supports and Anchors” and “Plumbing Insulation”. 

4. Copper coated extension split ring pipe clamp, MSS SP-69 Type 12, for individual vertical 

exposed runs of copper tube 2” and smaller on walls and for securing 1-1/4” to 2” copper 

tube inside walls and chases for battery fixtures. Secure clamp to the copper tube. 

a. Seal each joint with insulation and split ring pipe to maintain the insulation barrier. 

Refer to Section “Mechanical Insulation” for requirement for maintenance of the 

vapor barrier and vapor barrier seal method. 

5. Extension split ring pipe clamp, MSS SP-69 Type 12, for individual vertical exposed runs 

of stainless steel tube 2” and smaller on walls or for securing tube inside walls for 

connection to faucets. 

6. Support copper tube in chases and walls at plumbing fixtures with plastic or copper 

brackets secured to structure and U-bolts sized to bare on the pipe. 

7. Engineered strut support system may be provided, at the contractor’s option, in lieu of 

individual hangers for horizontal pipes as specified in Division 22 “Hangers and Supports 

for Plumbing Piping”. Provide two piece straps for uninsulated pipe secured to the bare 

pipe and provide plastic galvanic isolators for bare copper tube. Provide two piece straps 

and 360 insulation protection shields sized for the insulation thickness used for the pipe 

for all insulated pipes. 

8. Secure copper tube rough-in for individual fixtures with sheet stud brackets attached to the 

wall studs or pipe mounting brackets attached to the fixture waste & vent pipe at each 

plumbing fixture. 





9. Secure 1” and smaller copper water tubing in stud walls at stud penetrations with tube 

suspension clamps. 

a. Cut hole through non-supporting studs with a minimum 1/8” clearance around 

each uninsulated copper tube or insulated copper tube. 

b. Seal each joint of insulation and tube suspension clamp to maintain the insulation 

barrier. Refer to Division 22 “Plumbing Insulation” for requirement for maintenance 

of the vapor barrier similar to insulation butted against insulation inserts and vapor 

barrier seal method. 

10. Secure copper tubes for flush valve wall mounted water closets to the chair carrier with 

carrier brackets. 

11. Provide vinyl coated hangers and riser clamps for use with PVC or CPVC pipe. 

C. Install hangers for horizontal piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 

Nom. Pipe Copper Tube Min. Rod 

Size - In. Max. Span - Ft. 

Dia. - In. 

Up to 3/4 5 3/8 

1 6 3/8 

1-1/4 7 3/8 

1-1/2 8 3/8 

2 8 3/8 

1. Support vertical copper tube at each floor and in intervals not to exceed 10 feet. 

D. Support water piping within 12” of each elbow or tee and for water piping 2-1/2” and larger at each 

valve or strainer. 

E. Support water piping above the floor with pipe supports attached to the floor with anchor bolts 

where indicated on the drawings. Conform to the table above for maximum spacing of supports. 

3.6 PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION 

A. Soldered Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Soldering Manual." 

B. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual." 

1. CAUTION: Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves and accessible internal parts of 

piping specialties before soldering and brazing. 

2. Fill the tubing and fittings during soldering and brazing with an inert gas (nitrogen or 

carbon dioxide) to prevent formation of scale. 

3. Heat joints to proper and uniform temperature. 

C. Threaded Joints: Conform to ASME B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field-cut threads. Join pipe 

fittings and valves as follows: 

1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or 

wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. 

2. Align threads at point of assembly. 

3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry 

seal threading is specified). 

4. Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the 

pipe is being threaded. 

a. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with corroded or damaged threads. If a weld 





opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used. 

D. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to 

make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants 

on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench. 

3.7 VALVE APPLICATIONS 

A. General-Duty Valve Applications: The Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific 

valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 

1. Shut-off duty: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves. 

B. Throttling duty: Use globe, ball, and butterfly valves. 

3.8 INSTALLATION OF VALVES 

A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch 

or riser serves 2 or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated. 

For sectional valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for sectional valves 2-1/2 

inches and larger, use gate or butterfly valves. 

B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, on each supply to 

each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated. For shutoff valves 2 inches and smaller, use 

gate or ball valves; for shutoff valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, use gate or butterfly valves. 

C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves on each plumbing equipment item, located to drain equipment 

completely for service or repair. Install drain valves at the base of each riser, at low points of 

horizontal runs, and elsewhere as required to drain distribution piping system completely. For 

drain valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for drain valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, 

use gate or butterfly valves. 

D. Hose Bibbs: Install on exposed piping where indicated with vacuum breaker. 

E. Wall Hydrants: Install where indicated with vacuum breaker. 

F. Mixing Valves: Install on a sheet of plywood extending 6” beyond the physical boundary of the 

mixing valve and firmly attach backboard to the wall. Connect hot water return piping per the 

manufacturer’s published recommendations. 

3.9 INSTALLATION OF FLOW CONTROL VALVES 

A. Install balancing valves or automatic flow control valves in each hot water recirculating loop, and 

elsewhere as indicated. Install a shutoff valve and strainer upstream and a union, check valve 

and shutoff valve downstream of each balancing valve. 

B. Set balancing valve flow rate as follows: 

1. Preliminary Procedures For Hot Water Return System Balancing: 

a. Before operating the system perform these steps: 

1) Open valves at recirculation pump and flow control or balancing valves to 

full open position. 

2) Remove and clean all strainers. 

3) Check recirculation pump rotation. 





4) Set water heater temperature as indicated on the drawings. 

2. Procedures For Hot Water Return System Balancing 

a. Provide required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements. Instruments 

shall be properly maintained and protected against damage. 

b. Apply instrument as recommended by the manufacturer. 

c. Take readings with the eye at the level of the indicated value to prevent parallax. 

d. Mark balancing valve setting with memory stop. Mark with paint or other suitable, 

permanent identification materials. 

e. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system 

modifications, and resubmit test results. 

C. Reports: Prepare hot water return system balancing reports signed and submit to the Architect 

upon completion of the project. Include the following information: 

1. Valve tag number and description of location 

2. Valve body size 

3. Differential pressure reading from instrument in psi 

4. Actual flow rate derived from the manufacturer’s charts and tables for the valve size and 

measured differential pressure. 

3.10 TRAP PRIMERS 

A. Install trap primers where indicated and where required by local authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Connect trap primer supply line to the top of domestic cold water line no larger than 1 ½” in 

diameter. 

C. Provide trap primer distribution units for trap primers serving more than one trap. 

D. Install trap primer distribution level to insure even water distribution unit to each circuit. 

E. Where applicable, adjust the trap primer for proper flow. 

F. Install trap primers a minimum of 12 inches above finished floor for every 20 feet of horizontal 

outlet piping to floor drains served. 

G. Install trap primers in an accessible location. 

H. Refer to Division 22 Section “Sanitary Drainage and Vent Piping and Specialties” for trap primer 

outlet pipe requirements. 

3.11 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS 

A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping runouts to fixtures of sizes 

indicated, but in no case smaller than required by plumbing code. 


A. Inspections: Inspect water distribution piping as follows: 

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it has 

been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 

2. During the progress of the installation, notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction at 

least 24 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified 





below in the presence of the plumbing official. 

a. Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before 

concealed or closed in after system is roughed in and prior to setting fixtures. 

b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to observe 

the tests specified below and to ensure compliance with the requirements of the 

plumbing code. 

c. Reinspections: Whenever the plumbing official finds that the piping system will not 

pass the test or inspection, make the required corrections and arrange for 

reinspection by the plumbing official. 

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports signed by the plumbing official and turn over 

to the Architect upon completion of the project. 

B. Factory Start-up for Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Provide the services of a factory-authorized 

service representative to test and inspect unit installation, provide start-up service, and 

demonstrate operation of equipment to the Owner’s maintenance personnel for a minimum time of 

1 hour. 

1. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and required corrective action signed by the factoryauthorized 

service representative and turn over to the Architect upon completion of the 

project. 

C. Piping System Test: Test water distribution systems in accordance with the procedures of the 

authority having jurisdiction, or in the absence of a published procedure, as follows: 

1. Test for leaks and defects all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing 

systems that have been altered, extended or repaired. If testing is performed in 

segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with a diagram of the portion 

of the system tested. 

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new, altered, extended, or replaced water 

distribution piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose all such work for testing 

that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved. 

3. Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 50 psig above the 

operating pressure without exceeding the pressure rating of the piping system materials. 

Isolate the test source and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure 

constitute defects that must be repaired. 

4. Repair all leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until 

satisfactory results are obtained. 

5. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and required corrective action signed by the 

plumbing official and turn over to the Architect upon completion of the project. 


A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows: 

1. Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have 

been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use. 

2. Use the purging and disinfecting procedure proscribed by the authority having jurisdiction 

or, in case a method is not prescribed by that authority, the procedure described in either 

AWWA C651, or AWWA C652, or as described below: 

a. Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear 

at the points of outlet. 

b. Fill the system or part thereof with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 

parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system or part thereof and allow 

to stand for 24 hours. 

c. Drain the system or part thereof of the previous solution and refill with a 

water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and 

isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. 

d. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean, potable water 





until chlorine residual is lowered to incoming city water level. 

e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the authority having jurisdiction. Repeat 

the procedure if the biological examination made by the authority shows evidence 

of contamination. 

3. Reports: Prepare disinfection reports signed by the authority having jurisdiction and turn 

over to the Architect upon completion of the project. 

3.14 COMMISSIONING 

A. Fill the system. Check compression tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the 

system is completely full of water. 

B. Before operating the system, perform these steps: 

1. Close drain valve, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 

2. Open valves to full open position. 

3. Remove and clean strainers. 

4. Check pumps for proper direction of rotation. Correct improper wiring. 

5. Lubricate pump motors and bearings. 





MECHANICALLY JOINED PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS Section 221111 – Page 1 

SECTION 221111 - MECHANICALLY JOINED PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section only applies to grooved or press to connect mechanical piping for Plumbing applications 

as defined in Division Section 22 “Water Distribution Piping and Specialties”. 

B. The Division 15 contractor may provide grooved or press to connect mechanical joints, couplings, 

fittings, valves and related components as an option in lieu of, in whole or in part, copper sweat, 

brazing, threaded or flanged piping methods. Grooved flexible style couplings may be used at 

equipment connections where specified for vibration isolation control only. 

C. Grooved or press to fit mechanical joints, couplings, fittings, valves and related components shall 

not be provided for natural gas piping in lieu of welded, threaded or flanged piping methods. 

D. This Section includes grooved mechanical pipe couplings, fittings, valves and other grooved components 

for use as an option to copper sweat, brazing, threading or flanged methods. 

E. All grooved joint or press to connect components shall be of one manufacturer. 

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING: 

A. Division 22 Section “Water Distribution Piping and Specialties” for related sections. 


A. Product Data: Submit data for each type of coupling, fitting and special-duty valve indicated. Include 

flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing. 

B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support assemblies and 

their attachment to the building structure. 

C. Maintenance data for each piping specialty and valve specified for inclusion in Maintenance Manual 

specified in Division 1 and Division 22 Section "General Plumbing Requirements." 

D. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the following: 

1. Test procedures used. 

2. Test results that comply with requirements. 

3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements. 


A. All grooved and press to connect components shall be of one manufacturer, be date and origin 

stamped for quality assurance and traceability and conform to local code approval. 

B. Grooved mechanical piping shall conform to local code approval and/or as listed by ANSI-B-31.1, 

B-31.3, B-31.9, ASME, UL/ULC, FM, IAPMO or BOCA. 





C. Grooved or press to connect end product manufacturer shall be ISO certified. 

D. Grooved couplings shall meet the requirements of ASTM F-1476. 

E. Where required by local authorities, couplings, fittings and valves shall meet ANSI/NSF-61. 


A. Reference Division 22 Section “Water Distribution Piping and Specialties” for coordination. 



A. Copper Grooved Copper Tubing System 

1. Victaulic 

2. Tyco Grinnell Mechanical Products. 

B. Press to Connect Copper Tubing System 

1. Viega ProPress 

2. Ridge Tool Company. 

3. NIBCO Inc., Press System. 

4. Elkhart Products Corporation, “XPRESS” 

2.2 COPPER GROOVED TUBING SYSTEM 

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B-88 Type K or L hard drawn with roll grooved per manufacturer’s current 

listed standards. (Flaring of tube ends to IPS dimensions is not allowed.) 

B. Mechanical Couplings: 2" through 8" for connecting copper tube and fittings consisting of cast 

ductile iron housings meeting ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, coated with copper colored alkyd 

enamel, plated nuts and bolts to secure unit together. Coupling gasket shall be EPDM synthetic 

rubber elastomers meeting ASTM D-2000 with a pressure-responsive seal design configuration 

conforming to the copper tube size (CTS) outside diameter and coupling housing. All gaskets shall 

conform to ANSI/NSF 61. 

C. Fittings: 2” through 8” copper tube size with copper tube size grooves designed to accept grooved 

end couplings of the same manufacturer, wrought copper, meeting ASTM B-75 alloy C12200 or 

ASTM B-152 alloy C11000 per ANSI B16.22, or bronze sand castings meeting ASTM B-584-87 

copper alloy CDA 836 (85-5-5-5) per ANSI B16.18. (Flaring of fitting ends to IPS dimensions is not 

allowed.) 

D. Flange Adapters: 2” through 6” copper tube size for roll grooved copper tube and fittings directly to 

ANSI Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel flanges consisting of cast ductile iron housing meeting 

ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12 with copper colored alkyd enamel. (Flaring of fitting ends to IPS 

dimensions is not allowed.) 

E. Valves: 2" through 6" copper tube size butterfly type with copper tube size grooves designed to 

accept grooved end couplings of the same manufacturer, with 300 psi (2065 kPa) cast bronze 

body meeting CDA-836 (85-5-5-5), elastomer encapsulated ductile iron disc meeting ASTM A-536, 

Grade 65-45-12, with integrally cast stem for bubble tight, dead-end or bi-directional service. Provide 

with memory stop for throttling, metering or balancing service. 





1. Victaulic #608 

2. Tyco Grinnell # B680 

2.3 PRESS TO CONNECT COPPER TUBING SYSTEM 

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B-88 Type K or L. 

B. Couplings: ½” through 2” copper press to connect couplings with EPDM O-rings meeting ASME 

B16.18 or ASME B16.22. 

C. Fittings: ½” through 2” copper tube size fittings with copper press to connect couplings with EPDM 

O-rings meeting ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22. 

D. Press to Connect Valves 

1. Ball Valves 

a. Cast bronze body and end pieces with male or female press to connect ends meeting 

ASTM B584 Alloy C84400, rated at 200 PSI CWP to 250º F maximum, RTFE 

seats, blow out proof stem and chrome plated brass ball. Provide with 2” extended 

handles of non-thermal conductive material for insulated piping, ball valves shall be 

equipped with handle to have extended sleeve to allow valve operation without disturbing 

the insulation and with memory stop for throttling, metering or balancing 

service. 

b. NIBCO PF585-70-66 

c. Cimberio 225 Series 

2. Ball Valves 

a. Cast bronze body and end pieces with male or female press to connect ends meeting 

ASTM B584 Alloy C84400, rated at 200 PSI CWP to 250º F maximum, RTFE 

seats, blow out proof stem and stainless steel ball. Provide with 2” extended handles 

of non-thermal conductive material for insulated piping, ball valves shall be 

equipped with handle to have extended sleeve to allow valve operation without disturbing 

the insulation and with memory stop for throttling, metering or balancing 

service. 

b. NIBCO PF585-70-66 series 

c. Cimberio 225-SS Series 

3. Gate Valves 

a. Cast bronze body, bonnet, wedge and end pieces with male or female press to 

connect ends meeting ASTM B62, silicon bronze stems meeting ASTM B 371 or 

ASTM B 99, rated at 200 PSI CWP to 250º F maximum, non-asbestos packing and 

malleable or ductile iron hand-wheel. Valves shall be manufactured in accordance 

with MSS SP-80. 

b. NIBCO PS111-Y or PS113-Y 

4. Globe And Angle Valves 

a. Cast bronze body, bonnet and end pieces with male or female press to connect 

ends meeting ASTM B62, silicon bronze stems meeting ASTM B 99, rated at 200 

PSI CWP to 250º F maximum, TFE seat disc, non-asbestos packing and malleable 

or ductile iron hand-wheel. Valves shall be manufactured in accordance with MSS 

SP-80. 

b. NIBCO PS211-Y or PS311-Y 

5. Check Valves 





a. Check Valves (Y pattern, swing type or in-line) with male or female press to connect 

ends shall be shall be rated 200 PSI CWP to 250º F maximum. Valves shall 

be manufactured in accordance with MSS SP 80. Body and cap to be manufactured 

of dezincification resistant cast bronze (ASTM B 62). Valves to have TFE 

seat disc. 

b. NIBCO PS 413-Y, PS480-Y, or PCM480-Y 

c. Cimberio 80 series. 


3.1 PIPE APPLICATIONS ABOVE GRADE 

A. Water piping in sizes 2 inches and smaller shall be Type L drawn copper tube with plain ends and 

copper tube dimensioned press to connect copper couplings and fittings. 

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS 

A. Water distribution piping installations shall be installed subject to Division 22 Section “Water Distribution 

Systems and Specialties” in addition to those requirements specified in this Section. 

B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general 

location and arrangement of piping systems. Locations and arrangements of piping take into consideration 

pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. 

So far as practical, install piping as indicated. 


A. Support of piping must account for expansion and contraction, vibration, and the dead load of the 

piping and its contents. 

B. General: Hanger supports, and anchors devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers 

And SUPPORTS for Plumbing Piping." Reference Division 22 Section “Water Distribution Systems 

and Specialties” for pipe spacing limitations. 

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION 

A. Copper Grooved tubing System 

1. Verify gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) is suitable for the intended service as 

specified with latest published manufacturer’s product data. 

2. Reference latest published manufacturer’s product data for additional pressure ratings and 

application information. 

3. Reference latest published latest published manufacturer’s field installation instructions or 

other included installation instruction prior to attempting assembly. 

4. Ream, debur and clean tube ends and verify they are free from indentations, projections 

and roll marks in the area from tube end to groove for proper gasket sealing. 

5. All grooved components (couplings, fittings, valves, gaskets, bolts and nuts) and all grooving 

tools shall be of one manufacturer. 

6. Install gaskets with lubricant suitable for all piping services. Lubricant shall be by one 

manufacturer. 

B. Press to connect Copper Tubing System 

1. Ream, debur and clean tube ends and verify they are free from indentations, projections, 





burrs and foreign matter. 

2. Install permanent inspection mark on tube. 

3. Clean tube and fittings of all dirt and oil. Verify O-ring is in place and free of oil, grease or 

dirt. 

4. Push copper tube into fittings with twisting action to all the way to the fitting stop or shoulder. 

5. Mark tube with permanent marker to indicate proper tube insertion depth. 

6. Verify press tool has correct size jaw set for tube size used. 

7. Complete one tool cycle with empty jaw to calibrate tool for each time new jaw is inserted 

into tool. 

8. Squeeze jaw arms to open tool jaws and place jaws around the contour of the fitting. Verify 

tool is perpendicular to the fitting and depress tool switch. 

9. Squeeze jaw open to remove the tool and observe witness mark. 

10. Verify crimped fitting connection for misalignment of the copper tube, misalignment of the 

tool or improper insertion of the tube. If any of these conditions are found cut out the joint 

and provide a new joint. 

11. Maintain minimum distance between joints per the manufacturer’s published installation instructions. 


A. Reference Division 22 Section “Water Distribution Piping and Specialties” for valve applications. 

3.6 WATER DISTRIBUTION SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION 

A. Reference Division 22 Section “Water Distribution Systems and Specialties” for water distribution 

specialties and installation requirements. 


A. The following procedures are paraphrased from the ASME B-31.9, code for pressure piping, building 

services piping. 

B. Installing contractor shall schedule training session with the grooved, press to connect, or push to 

connect manufacturer at project site for all workers that will be installing or handling the grooved, 

Press Fit or Push to connect piping systems. Submit certification letter along with list of attendees 

to engineer of record within 30-days of mobilization. Include copy of certification letter with closeout 

documents. 

C. Grooved or press to connect piping manufacturer shall provide certification training to contractor 

without cost and without additional cost to Owner. 

D. Provide testing procedures as defined in Division 22 Section “Water Distribution Systems and 

Specialties” and as specified in grooved mechanical piping manufacturer’s installation instructions. 

E. Installing contractor shall visually inspect couplings and repair or replace any misaligned couplings 

and couplings with gaps prior to calling for inspection as defined in Division 22 Section “General 

Plumbing Requirements.” 

F. Grooved or press to connect piping manufacturers representative shall make periodic visits to the 

jobsite during construction to make sure the installing contractor is following the latest published 

manufacturer’s field installation instructions and best practice procedures provided during the jobsite 

training session. 





3.8 STARTUP 

A. Refer to Division 22 Section “Water Distribution Piping and Specialties” for startup procedures. 





SANITARY DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES Section 221300 – Page 1 

SECTION 221300 - SANITARY DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes building sanitary drainage and vent piping systems, including drains and 

drainage specialties. 


1. Division 31 Section "Earthwork," for trenching and backfilling materials and methods for 

underground piping installations. 

2. Division 33 Section "Sanitary Sewage Systems," for sanitary drainage piping beginning 

from 5'-0" outside the building. 

3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers," for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations 

through basement and foundation walls, and fire and smoke barriers. 

4. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Identification," for labeling and identification of drainage 

and vent piping. 

5. Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing," for materials and methods for 

fire barrier penetrations, wall and floor penetrations and equipment pads 



7. Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping," for materials and 

methods for hanging and supporting drainage and vent piping. 

8. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation," for materials and methods for insulating 

drainage piping. 

9. Division 22 Section “Water Distribution Piping and Specialties,” for material and methods 

for trap primers and trap primer inlet piping. 


A. Sanitary Building Drain: That part of the lowest piping of a drainage system which receives the 

discharge from soil, waste and other drainage pipes inside the walls of the building and conveys it 

to the building sewer. 

B. Sanitary Building Sewer: That part of the drainage system which extends from the end of the 

building drain and conveys its discharge to a public sewer, private sewer, individual sewage 

disposal system, or other point of disposal. 

C. Drainage System: Includes all the piping within a public or private premises which conveys 

sewage or other liquid wastes to a point of disposal. It does not include the mains of public sewer 

systems or a private or public sewage treatment or disposal plant. 

D. Vent System: A pipe or pipes installed to provide a flow of air to or from a drainage system, or to 

provide a circulation of air within such system to protect trap seals from siphonage and back 

pressure. 



Specifications Sections. 

B. Product data for the following products: 





1. Drainage piping 

2. Drainage piping specialties 

3. Floor drains 

4. Trench drains 

5. Interceptors 

6. No-hub fitting restraints 

C. Test reports specified in Part 3 of this Section. 


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following codes: 

1. 199_ BOCA National Building Code 

2. 199_ International Plumbing Code 

3. 199_ Standard Plumbing Code 

4. 199_ Uniform Plumbing Code 




following: 

1. Drainage Piping Specialties, including backwater valves, expansion joints, cleanouts, floor 

drains, cast-iron trench drains and vandal-proof vent caps: 

a. Josam Mfg. Co. 

b. Smith (Jay R) Mfg. Co. 

c. Tyler Pipe/Wade Div.; Subs. of Tyler Corp. 

d. Watts Industries, Inc. 

e. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. 

2. Heavy Duty Hubless Couplings 

a. Anaco Husky SD-4000 

b. Clamp-All 125in. lb. 

3. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 

a. AB & I Foundry 

b. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company 

c. Tyler Pipe / Soil Pipe Division 

4. Shielded Transition Couplings 

a. FERNCO, “Proflex 3000 Series” 

b. Mission Rubber Company, “Band Seal Specialty Couplings” 

5. Underground Shielded Adapter Couplings 

a. FERNCO, “1056 Series with SR73 Shear Ring” 

b. Mission Rubber Company, “MR56 Series” 

6. Hubless Couplings: 





a. Anaco 

b. Ideal 

c. Mission Rubber Company 

d. Tyler Pipe / Soil Pipe Division 

2.2 ABOVE GROUND DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI 301 and ASTM A888, no-hub pipe and fittings. 

1. Couplings and compression gaskets, NSF certified: ASTM C564 and CISPI 310. 

2. Heavy duty couplings and compression gaskets: ASTM C1540 and meeting FM 1680. 

B. Copper Tube: ASTM B306, Type DWV, hard drawn for pipe, and cast-bronze, drainage pattern 

fittings with soldered joints. 

1. Solder Filler Materials: ASTM B32, 95-5 tin-antimony solder. 

C. Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type M, hard drawn for pipe and wrought copper fittings with soldered 

joints. 

1. Solder Filler Materials: ASTM B32, 95-5 tin-antimony solder. 

D. Shielded Transition Couplings: ASTM C1460 with neoprene adapter gasket with stainless steel 

Shield and hose clamps. 

2.3 UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAIN AND VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Service weight, hub-and-spigot soil pipe and fittings. Pipe and 

fittings shall have a heavy coating of coal tar varnish or asphaltum on both inside and outside 

surfaces. 

1. Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C564. 

B. Underground Shielded Adapter Couplings: ASTM C1173 with neoprene adapter gasket with 

stainless steel shield and stainless steel hose clamps. 

2.4 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 

A. Cleanout Plugs: As specified on the drawings. 

1. Floor Cleanouts: As specified on the drawings. 

B. Wall Cleanouts: As specified on the drawings. 

C. Floor Drains: As specified on the drawings. 

2.5 NO-HUB FITTING RESTRAINTS 

A. Pre-engineered kits of galvanized steel pipe straps with stainless steel band clamps and tee bolts, 

meeting requirements of the CISPI Installation Handbook. 






3.1 PREPARATION FOUNDATION FOR UNDERGROUND SANITARY BUILDING DRAINS 

A. Grade trench bottoms to provide a smooth, firm, and stable foundation, free from rock, throughout 

the length of the pipe. 

B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be laid 

and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated invert elevation. 

C. Pipe Beds: 

1. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe for 90-degrees (bottom 

1/4 of the circumference). Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe joint 

dig bell holes to relieve the bell of the pipe of all loads, and to ensure continuous bearing 

of the pipe barrel on the foundation.. For piping with rock trench bottoms, provide sand 

pipe bed 6” underneath and around sides of pipe, including fittings. 

D. Provide backfill above top of pipe bed as required for field conditions. Refer to Division 22 Section 

"General Plumbing Requirements” for materials and methods for backfill. 

3.2 PIPE APPLICATIONS - ABOVE GROUND, WITHIN BUILDING 

A. Install hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for 15” and smaller soil, waste, and vent pipe. 

B. Install Type DWV copper tube with cast bronze Type DWV fittings for waste connections from 

lavatories, sinks, water coolers, and kitchen equipment to cast iron drainage piping. 

C. Install Type M copper tube with wrought copper fittings, 1” and smaller, with ¾” minimum size and 

install Type DWV copper tube with cast bronze Type DWV fittings for 1-1/4” and larger for waste 

connections from kitchen equipment and terminate over floor receptors with air gap. 

D. Install Type M copper tube with wrought copper fittings, 1” and smaller, with ¾” minimum size and 

install Type DWV copper tube with cast bronze Type DWV fittings for 1-1/4” and larger for 

condensate connections from mechanical equipment inside the building and terminate over floor 

receptors with air gap. Provide galvanic isolators as specified in Division 15 “Basic Piping 

Materials and Methods”. 

E. Install Type M copper tube with wrought copper fittings, 1” and smaller, with ¾” minimum size and 

install Type DWV copper tube with cast bronze Type DWV fittings for 1-1/4” and larger for 

condensate connections from mechanical equipment outside the building and terminate over roof 

receptors with air gap at roof drains as indicated on the plans. Provide galvanic isolators as 

specified in Division 22 “Basic Piping Material and Methods”. 

F. Install ½” type L copper tube for trap primer outlet piping. 

3.3 PIPE APPLICATIONS - BELOW GROUND, WITHIN BUILDING 

A. Install hub-and-spigot, service weight, cast-iron, soil pipe and fittings with gasketed joints for 15 

inch and smaller for soil, waste, and vent pipe. 

B. Install ½” type K soft copper tube for trap primer outlet piping. 





3.4 PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION 

A. Copper Tubing: Solder joints in accordance with the procedures specified in AWS "Soldering 

Manual." 

B. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: Make hubless joints in accordance with the Cast-Iron Soil Pipe & Fittings 

Handbook, Chapter IV. Install Couplings as followings: 

1. Coordinate requirement for heavy duty no-hub couplings with Owner and Architect for 

installation on sanitary piping 3” and larger. Coordinate with section 3 of this text and 

general notes. 

2. Install hubless couplings complying with CISPI 310 on soil, waste and vent piping. 

3. Install hubless couplings complying with CISPI 310 on and soil and waste piping 3” and 

smaller and all vent piping. 

4. Install heavy duty hubless couplings on soil or waste stacks, soil and waste piping 

connections to soil or waste stacks and all soil and waste piping 5” and larger. 

5. Install No-Hub fitting restraints on joints 5” and larger at: 

a. Changes of direction from vertical to horizontal 

b. Branches, including wyes and wye combination fittings 4” and larger 

c. Horizontal changes of direction 22-1/2 degrees and greater 

C. Cast Iron to PVC Below Grade: Join cast iron to PVC with underground shielded adapter 

couplings. 




layout take into consideration pipe sizing, slope, expansion, and other design considerations. So 

far as practical, install piping as indicated. 

B. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections. 

C. Install piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless 

expressly indicated. 

D. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper 


E. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or 


F. Install horizontal piping as high as possible allowing for proper slope and coordination with other 

components. Install vertical piping tight to columns or walls. Provide space to permit insulation 

applications, with 1-inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable 

ceiling panels to allow for panel removal. 

G. Paint exposed copper drain lines serving kitchen equipment with a minimum of two coats of 

chromium-base paint. 

H. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings and 

floors, maintain the fire rated integrity. Refer to Division 22 Section " Basic Piping Material and 

Methods” for special sealers and materials. 

I. Elevated Floor Penetrations of Waterproof Membrane, Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire Rated 



Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing” for special sealers and 





materials. 

J. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate 45 degree wyes, 

combination wye and eighth bend, or long sweep, quarter, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends. 

Sanitary tees or quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks of drainage lines where the change 

in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical, except use long-turn pattern combination wye and 

eighth bends where two fixtures are installed back to back and have a common drain. Straight 

tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. No change in direction of flow greater than 

90 degrees shall be made. Where different sizes of drainage pipes and fittings are connected, 

use proper sized standard increasers and reducers. Reduction of the size of drainage piping in 

the direction of flow is prohibited. 

K. Install underground building drains to conform with the plumbing code, and in accordance with the 

Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Engineering Manual. Lay underground building drains beginning at 

low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. 

Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets in accordance with 

manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation 

requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. 

L. Install drainage piping pitched down at a minimum slope of 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent) for piping 

3 inch and smaller, and 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent) for piping 4 inch and larger. Install vent 

piping pitched to drain back by gravity to the sanitary drainage piping system. 


A. General: Hanger, support, insulation protection shields, and anchor components and installation 

procedures conforming to MSS SP-58 and SP-69 are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers 

and Supports for Plumbing Piping”. Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports. 

B. Install the following pipe attachments: 

1. Adjustable clevis hangers, MSS SP-69 Type 1, for individual horizontal runs. 

2. Riser clamps, MSS SP-69 Type 8, for individual vertical runs. 

3. Insulation protection shields and high density insulation at each hanger for insulated pipe 

as specified in Division 22 Sections “Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping” and 

“Plumbing Insulation”. 

a. Install high density insulation on insulated pipe. 

C. Install hangers at the following intervals and provide rods of diameter as listed below: 

Nom. Pipe Steel Pipe Copper Tube Min. Rod Min. Rod 

Size Max. Span Max. Span. Dia. - Inches Dia. – Inches 

Steel or 

In Inches In Feet In Feet Cast Iron Copper 

Up to 3/4 7 5 3/8 3/8 

1 7 6 3/8 3/8 

1-1/4 7 7 3/8 3/8 

1-1/2 9 8 3/8 3/8 

2 10 8 3/8 3/8 

2-1/2 11 9 1/2 3/8 

3 12 10 1/2 1/2 

3-1/2 13 11 1/2 1/2 

4 14 12 5/8 1/2 

5 16 13 5/8 1/2 

6 17 14 3/4 5/8 

8 19 16 7/8 3/4 

10 22 18 7/8 3/4 

12 23 19 7/8 3/4 





1. Support all sizes of service weight horizontal cast iron piping every five feet, except up to 

ten feet where ten foot sections are installed. Support all sizes of hubless horizontal cast 

iron piping every other joint, unless over four feet, then support each joint. Provide 

support adjacent to joint, not to exceed 18”. Provide sway brace on horizontal piping at 

not more than 40’ intervals to prevent horizontal movement. Provide support at each 

horizontal branch. 

2. Support all sizes of vertical cast iron piping every ten feet. 

3. Support piping within 12” of each elbow or tee. 

4. Support each P-trap. 

3.7 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES 

A. Install expansion joints on stacks or horizontal piping as indicated, and as required by the 


B. Above Ground Cleanouts: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as indicated, 

and: 

1. as required by plumbing code; 

2. at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees; 

3. at minimum intervals of 50' for piping 4" and smaller and 100' for larger piping; 

4. at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. 

C. Cleanout Covers: Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, types as indicated. 

D. Floor Cleanouts: Install in below floor building drain piping at minimum intervals of 50' for piping 

4" and smaller and 75' for larger piping. 

3.8 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS 

A. Install floor drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations 

indicated. 

B. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of drains 

flush with finished floor. 

C. Refer to architectural documents for floor slope requirements and set floor drain elevation to 

match. Where architectural documents do not indicate the requirements, set the floor drain 

elevation depressed below the finished slab elevation as listed below to provide proper slope to 

drain: 

DEPRESSION IN INCHES RADIUS OF AREA DRAINED - FEET 

1/2 5 

3/4 10 

1 15 

1-1/4 20 

1-1/2 25 

D. Provide P-traps for drains connected to the sanitary sewer. 

E. Install floor drains in waterproof floors with waterproof membrane securely flashed with drain 

flashing clamp so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity 

of waterproof membranes, where penetrated. 

F. Position drains so that they are level, accessible and easy to maintain. 





3.9 INSTALLATION OF TRAP PRIMERS 

A. Install trap primer outlet piping with 1/32” per foot slope towards drain trap where possible. 

B. Connect trap primer outlet piping only to factory installed taps on the drain body or P-trap 

assembly or provide an auxiliary inlet fitting with factory installed trap primer tap. 

C. Install trap primer outlet piping in elevated slabs or slabs on grade below concrete reinforcing 

bars. Wrap with ½” thick flexible unicellular insulation, attach to the reinforcing bars with plastic 

ties and spacers every five feet to eliminate galvanic corrosion. Refer to Division 22 Section 

"Plumbing Insulation” for flexible unicellular insulation. 

D. Where proper trap primer outlet piping slope can be maintained and the trap primer outlet line 

would not be subject to freezing, trap primer outlet lines may be installed as follows: 

1. Install below elevated floor slabs. 

2. Install in the sub grade of slab on grade. 

E. Install sleeves and caulk at penetrations through building floor for watertight installation. In an 

elevated floor slab installation, bracket the piping to bottom of floor once the slab is poured. 

F. Refer to Division 22 Section “Water Distribution Piping and Specialties” for trap primer and trap 

primer inlet pipe requirements. 

G. Trap Seals: 

1. Install trap seals in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations 

indicated. 

2. Make watertight seal using an adhesive type caulk along bottom of trap seal, if required by 

the manufacturer. 

3. Employ a test plug for testing and remove before normal floor drain use. Clean inside of 

drain tailpiece and install trap seal after testing. 

4. Do not touch elastomeric plug or allow contact with primer or solvent cement. 

3.10 CONNECTIONS 

A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and 

drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than required by the 


B. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains. 


A. Inspections 

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it has 

been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 

2. During the progress of the installation, notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction, at 

least 24 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified 

below in the presence of the plumbing official. 

a. Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before 

concealed or closed-in after system is roughed-in, and prior to setting fixtures. 

b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to observe 

the tests specified below and to insure compliance with the requirements of the 


c. Reinspections: Whenever the piping system fails to pass the test or inspection, 





make the required corrections, and arrange for reinspected by the plumbing 

official. 

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the plumbing official. 

B. Piping System Test Test drainage and vent system in accordance with the procedures of the 

authority having jurisdiction, or in the absence of a published procedure, as follows: 

1. Test for leaks and defects all new drainage and vent piping systems and parts of existing 

systems, which have been altered, extended or repaired. If testing is performed in 

segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with a diagram of the portion 

of the system tested. 

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and 

vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose all such work for testing, that 

has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved. 

3. Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Except for outside leaders and perforated or open 

jointed drain tile, test the piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems upon 

completion of the rough piping installation. Tightly close all openings in the piping system, 

and fill with water to the point of overflow, but not less than 10 feet head of water. Water 

level shall not drop during the period from 15 minutes before the inspection starts, through 

completion of the inspection. Inspect all joints for leaks. 

4. Final Plumbing Test Procedure: After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps 

filled with water, their connections shall be tested and proved gas and water-tight. Plug 

the stack openings on the roof and building drain where it leaves the building, and 

introduce air into the system equal to a pressure of 1" water column. Use a "U" tube or 

manometer inserted in the trap of a water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure 

shall remain constant without the introduction of additional air throughout the period of 

inspection. Inspect all plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 

5. Repair all leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until 

satisfactory results are obtained. 

6. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and required corrective action signed by the 

plumbing official and turn over to the Architect upon completion of the project. 


A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 

B. Clean drain strainers, domes, and traps. Remove dirt and debris. 


A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris, and 

to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. 






PLUMBING FIXTURES Section 224000 – Page 1 

SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, and accessories, appliances, 

appurtenances, equipment, and supports associated with plumbing fixtures. 

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 

1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers," for materials and methods for sealing between 

plumbing fixtures and interior walls. 

2. Division 10 Section "Service Wall Systems" for wall modules with built-in plumbing 

fixtures. 

3. Division 22 Section "General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valves used as supply 

stops. 

C. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include: 

1. Plumbing fittings (including faucets) and piping indicated, for fixtures, appliances, 

appurtenances, and equipment provided by Owner. 

2. Plumbing fittings (including faucets) and piping indicated, for fixtures, appliances, 

appurtenances, and equipment specified in other Sections. 

D. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include: 

1. Owner-supplied fixtures, as indicated. 

2. Accessories, appliances, appurtenances, and equipment specified in other Sections, 

requiring plumbing services or fixture-related devices, as indicated. 


A. Accessible: Describes a plumbing fixture, building, facility, or portion thereof that can be 

approached, entered, and used by physically handicapped people. 

B. Accessory: Device that adds effectiveness, convenience, or improved appearance to a fixture but 

is not essential to its operation. 

C. Appliance: Device or machine designed and intended to perform a specific function. 

D. Appurtenance: Device or assembly designed to perform some useful function when attached to or 

used with a fixture. 

E. Equipment: Device used with plumbing fixtures or plumbing systems to perform a certain function 

for plumbing fixtures but that is not part of the fixture. 

F. Fitting: Fitting installed on or attached to a fixture to control the flow of water into or out of the 

fixture. 

G. Fixture: Installed receptor connected to the water distribution system, that receives and makes 

available potable water and discharges the used liquid or liquid-borne wastes directly or indirectly 

into the drainage system. The term "Fixture" means the actual receptor, except when used in a 

general application where terms "Fixture" and "Plumbing Fixture" include associated trim, fittings, 

accessories, appliances, appurtenances, support, and equipment. 





H. Roughing-In: Installation of piping and support for the fixture prior to the actual installation of the 

fixture. 

I. Support: Device normally concealed in building construction, for supporting and securing 

plumbing fixtures to walls and structural members. Supports for urinals, lavatories, and sinks are 

made in types suitable for fixture construction and the mounting required. Categories of supports 

are: 

1. Carrier: Floor-mounted support for wall-mounted water closet, and support fixed to wall 

construction for wall-hung fixture. 

2. Chair Carrier: Support for wall-hung fixture, having steel pipe uprights that transfer weight 

to the floor. 

3. Chair Carrier, Heavy Duty: Support for wall-hung fixture, having rectangular steel uprights 

that transfer weight to the floor. 

4. Reinforcement: Wood blocking or steel plate built into wall construction, for securing 

fixture to wall. 

J. Trim: Hardware and miscellaneous parts, specific to a fixture and normally supplied with it 

required to complete fixture assembly and installation. 




1. Product data for each type of plumbing fixture specified, including fixture and trim, fittings, 

accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, supports, construction details, 

dimensions of components, and finishes. 

2. Wiring diagrams for field-installed wiring of electrically operated units. 

3. Maintenance data for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 

1 and Division 22 Section "General Plumbing Requirements." 


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of ANSI Standard A117.1, "Buildings and 

Facilities -- Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People," Public Law 

90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act, 1968," with respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically 

handicapped and "Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings 1991" with 

respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of ATBCB (Architectural and Transportation 

Barriers Compliance Board) "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) - 1985-494-187" 

with respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped. 

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed 

and labeled. 

1. The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 

100. 

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" 

(NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 

D. Faucets and trim in contact with drinking water shall meet or exceed the Safe Water Drinking Act 

(SWDA) lead free standards of ANSI/NSF Standard 61, section 9. 

E. Design Concept: The drawings indicate types of plumbing fixtures and are based on the specific 

descriptions, manufacturers, models, and numbers indicated. Plumbing fixtures having equal 

performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations 





in dimensions, operation, color or finish, or other characteristics are minor and do not change the 

design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. Burden of proof for equality 

of plumbing fixtures is on the proposer. 


A. Deliver spare parts to Owner. Furnish spare parts described below matching products installed, 

packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels clearly describing 

contents. 

B. Faucet Washers and O-rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10 percent of 

amount of each installed. 

C. Flushometer Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10 percent of amount of 

each flushometer installed. 

D. Provide individual metal boxes or a hinged-top wood or metal box having separate compartments 

for each type and size of above extra materials. 

E. Water Closet Tank Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical flush valve units not less than 5 

percent of amount of each type installed. 

F. Toilet Seats: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of amount of each type 

toilet seat installed. 

G. Filter Cartridges: Furnish quantity of identical filter cartridges not less than 50 percent of amount 

of each type and size installed. 



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products in each category, by 

one of the following listed for that category: 

1. Water Closets: 

a. American Standard, Inc. 

b. Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products. 

c. Gerber Plumbing Fixture Corp. 

d. Kohler Co. 

e. TOTO KIKI USA, Inc. 

f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group 

2. Urinals: 




d. Kohler Co. 



3. Lavatories: 








d. Kohler Co. 



4. Sinks: 

a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. 

b. Just Manufacturing Co. 

c. Kohler Co. 

d. Moen Group; Stanadyne Corp. 

e. PROFLO 

f. Universal-Rundle Corp. 

5. Drinking Fountains: 


b. Acorn / Aqua 

c. Halsey Taylor; A Household International Co. 

d. Haws Drinking Faucet Co. 

e. Kohler Co. 

6. Water Coolers: 

a. Acorn / Aqua 

b. Elkay Manufacturing Co. 

c. Halsey Taylor; A Household International Co. 

d. Haws Drinking Faucet Co. 

7. Toilet Seats: 

a. Bemis Mfg. Co. 

b. Beneke Div.; Sanderson Plumbing Products, Inc. 

c. Church Seat Co. 

d. Kohler Co. 

e. Olsonite Corp. 

f. Sperzel Industries, Inc. 

8. Flushometers: 

a. Sloan Valve Co. 

9. Commercial/Residential Cast-Brass and Cast-Brass Underbody Faucets: 

a. Delta Faucet Co.; Div. of Masco Corp. 

10. Stop Valves & Supplies: 

a. Brass Craft Subsidiary; Masco Co. 

b. Engineered Brass Company 

c. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc. 

d. PROFLO 

e. Watts Brass and Tubular 

f. Zurn Industries 

11. P-traps, Drains & Miscellaneous Fittings: 

a. Brass Craft Subsidiary; Masco Co. 

b. Dearborn Brass 

c. Engineered Brass Company 

d. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc. 

e. PROFLO 

f. Watts Brass and Tubular 

g. Zurn Industries 





12. Supports: 

a. Josam Co. 

b. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. 

c. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. 

d. Watts Drainage Products 


13. Disposers: 

a. General Electric Co. 

b. Hotpoint; General Electric Co. 

c. In-Sink-Erator Div.; Emerson Electric Co. 

d. KitchenAid, Inc. 

e. Thermador/Waste King; A Masco Co. 

14. Insulation Kits 

a. Brocar 

b. McGuire 

c. Plumberex 

d. PROFLO 

e. Trap-Wrap 

f. Truebro, Inc. 

2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES, GENERAL 

A. Provide plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, other components, and supports as specified on the 

drawings and below: 

2.3 STOP VALVES & SUPPLIES 

A. Supplies General: As described on the drawings. 

1. Exposed piping and parts shall be polished chrome plated. 

2.4 P-TRAPS, DRAINS AND MISCELLLANEOUS FITTINGS: 

A. Fittings General: As described on the drawings, except as listed below. 

1. Exposed piping and fittings shall be polished chrome plated. 

2. Fittings installed concealed inside a plumbing fixture or within wall construction may be 

without chrome plate finish. 

B. Sink Continuous Wastes: Polished chrome-plated, tubular brass, 1-1/2 inches, 17 gauge, with 

brass nuts on slip inlets, and of configurations indicated. 

C. Escutcheons: Polished chrome-plated, sheet steel wall flange with friction clips. 

D. Deep Pattern Escutcheons: Wall flange with set screw or sheet steel wall flange with friction clips, 

of depth adequate to conceal protruding roughing-in fittings. 

2.5 FLUSHOMETERS 

A. Provide flushometers compatible with fixtures, with features and of consumption indicated As 





described on the drawings. 

1. Exposed metal parts shall be polished chrome plated. 

2. Flush valves installed within wall construction may be without chrome plate finish. 

2.6 TOILET SEATS 

A. General: As described on the drawings. 

2.7 DISPOSERS 

A. Disposers: As specified on the drawings. 

2.8 PLUMBING FIXTURE SUPPORTS 

A. Supports: ASME A112.6.1M, categories and types as required for wall-hanging fixtures specified, 

and wall reinforcement. 

B. Support categories are: 

1. Carriers: Supports for wall-hanging water closets and fixtures supported from wall 

construction. Water closet carriers shall have an additional faceplate and coupling when 

used for wide pipe spaces. Provide tiling frame or setting gauge with carriers for wallhanging 

water closets. 

2. Chair Carriers: Supports with steel pipe uprights for wall-hanging fixtures. Urinal chair 

carriers shall have bearing plates. 

3. Chair Carriers, Heavy Duty: Supports with rectangular steel uprights for wall-hanging 

fixtures. 

4. Reinforcement: 2-inch by 4-inch wood blocking between studs or 1/4-inch by 6-inch steel 

plates attached to studs, in wall construction, to secure floor-mounted and special fixtures 

to wall. 

C. Support Types: Provide support of category specified, of type having features required to match 

fixture. 

D. Provide supports specified as part of fixture description, in lieu of category and type requirements 

above. 

2.9 INSULATION KITS 

A. Insulation kits for lavatory and sink waste and supplies of vinyl plastic with reusable fasteners and 

openings for access to supply stop handles. 



A. Install plumbing fixtures and specified components, in accordance with designations and locations 

indicated on Drawings. 

B. Install supports for plumbing fixtures in accordance with categories indicated, and of type 

required: 





1. Carriers for following fixtures: 

a. Wall hanging lavatories 

b. Wall hanging electric water coolers and drinking fountains. 

c. Wall-hanging fixtures supported from wall construction. 

2. Chair carriers for the following fixtures: 

a. Wall-hanging urinals. 

b. Wall-hanging lavatories and sinks. 

c. Wall-hanging drinking fountains and electric water coolers. 

3. Heavy-duty chair carriers for the following fixtures: 

a. Accessible lavatories. 

b. Fixtures where specified. 

4. Reinforcement for the following fixtures: 

a. Floor-mounted lavatories required to be secured to wall. 

b. Floor-mounted sinks required to be secured to wall. 

c. Recessed, box-mounted electric water coolers. 

d. Wall mounted and mop sink faucets. 

e. Urinal flush valve solid pipe ring supports. 

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES 

A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturers' written 

installation instructions, roughing-in drawings, and referenced standards. 

B. Install floor-mounted, floor-outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals. 

C. Install wall-hanging, back-outlet urinals with gasket seals. 

D. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate when 

supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated. 

E. Fasten floor-mounted fixtures and special fixtures having holes for securing fixture to wall 

construction, to reinforcement built into walls. 

F. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls. 

G. Fasten counter-mounting-type plumbing fixtures to casework. 

H. Secure supplies behind wall or within wall pipe space, providing rigid installation. 

I. Install stop valve in an accessible location in each water supply to each fixture. 

J. Install trap on fixture outlet except for fixtures having integral trap. 

K. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and 

within cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding 

pipe fittings. 

L. Seal fixtures to walls, floors, and counters using a sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, 

silicone sealant in accordance with sealing requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint 

Sealers." Match sealant color to fixture color. 





M. Install insulation kits on ADA compliant sink and lavatory waste, continuous wastes, hot and cold 

water supplies where indicated on the drawings and as required by the ADA. 


A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other sections of Division 22. The Drawings 

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific 

connection requirements: 

1. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing 

equipment specified in other sections of Division 22. 

2. Install piping connections indicated between appliances and equipment specified in other 

sections, direct connected to plumbing piping systems. 


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. 

B. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are 

water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat 

procedure until all units operate properly. 


A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, 

and controls. 

B. Operate and adjust disposers and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units and 

controls. 

C. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, electric water coolers, faucets, and flushometers 

having controls, to provide proper flow and stream. 

D. Replace washers of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. 

E. Clean fixtures, fittings, and spout and drain strainers with manufacturers' recommended cleaning 

methods and materials. 

F. Adjust faucet wrist blade handles perpendicular to the spout while in the closed position. 

G. Review the data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Project 

Closeout." 

H. Set each shower valve temperature limit stop to 110ºF. Perform work after the shower head is 

installed and the domestic water heater is in operation. Allow the hot water to run for 5 minutes 

minimum or until temperature reaches equilibrium. Allow cold to run for 5 minutes minimum or 

until temperature reaches equilibrium. Provide the owner a schedule indicating the hot, cold and 

mixed maximum water temperature at each shower. 

3.6 FIXTURE SCHEDULE 

A. Provide plumbing fixtures as specified on the drawings. 

B. Install rough-in for plumbing fixtures as scheduled on the drawings. 





3.7 MOUNTING HEIGHTS SCHEDULE: 

A. Refer to the architectural drawings for plumbing fixture mounting heights. Unless indicated 

otherwise, install plumbing fixtures with the mounting heights as listed below with final approval by 

the Architect: 

FIXTURE 

Lavatory or Sink 

Standard Height 

ADA Accessible 

Urinal 



Water Closet 

Standard 


Water Cooler or Drinking Fountain 



Tub valves 



Janitor’s Sink Faucet Fittings 

Hose Bibbs 

Non Freeze Wall Hydrant 

MOUNTING HEIGHT 

31" floor to rim 





17” to 19" floor to top of seat 

41" floor to spout 

36" floor to spout 

32” floor to centerline 

Center between grab bar and tub rim 

42” floor to centerline 

36” AFF to centerline 

18” AFG to centerline 





GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Section 230010 – Page 1 

SECTION 230010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 


1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 

A. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of complete functioning systems, and each 

element thereof, as specified or indicated on the Drawings and Specifications or reasonably 

inferred; including every article, device or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) 

reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the 

equipment specified. Elements of the work include materials, labor, supervision, supplies, 

equipment, transportation, and utilities. 

B. Division 23 of the Specifications and Drawings numbered with prefixes M, MP or ME, or MEP 

generally describe these systems, but the scope of the Mechanical work includes all such work 

indicated in the Contract Documents: Instructions to Bidders; Proposal Form; General Conditions; 

Supplementary General Conditions; Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical 

Drawings and Specifications; and Addenda. 

C. The Drawings have been prepared diagrammatically intended to convey the scope of work, 

indicating the intended general arrangement of the equipment, fixtures, ductwork, piping, etc. 

without showing all the exact details as to elevations, offsets, control lines, and other installation 

requirements. The Contractor shall use the Drawings as a guide when laying out the work and 

shall verify that materials and equipment will fit into the designated spaces, and which, when 

installed per manufacturers requirements, will ensure a complete, coordinated, satisfactory and 

properly operating system. 


A. All work under this Division shall be executed in a thorough professional manner by competent and 

experienced workmen licensed to perform the Work specified. 

B. All work shall be installed in strict conformance with manufacturers’ requirements and 

recommendations. Equipment and materials shall be installed in a neat and professional manner 

and shall be aligned, leveled, and adjusted for satisfactory operation. 

C. Material and equipment shall be new, shall be of the best quality and design, shall be current 

model of the manufacturer, shall be free from defects and imperfections and shall have markings 

or a nameplate identifying the manufacturer and providing sufficient reference to establish quality, 

size and capacity. Material and equipment of the same type shall be made by the same 

manufacturer whenever practicable. 

D. Unless specified otherwise, manufactured items shall have been installed and used, without 

modification, renovation, or repair for not less than one year prior to date of bidding for this project. 


A. Execute Work in accordance with the National Fire Protection Association and all Local, State, and 

National codes, ordinances and regulations in force governing the particular class of Work 

involved. Obtain timely inspections by the constituted authorities, and upon final completion of the 

Work obtain and deliver to the Owner executed final certificates of acceptance from the Authority 

Having Jurisdiction. 

B. Any conflict between these Specifications and accompanying Drawings and the applicable Local, 





State and Federal codes, ordinances and regulations shall be reported to the Architect in sufficient 

time, prior to the opening of Bids, to prepare the Supplementary Drawings and Specification 

Addenda required to resolve the conflict. 

C. The governing codes are minimum requirements. Where these Drawings and Specifications 

exceed the code requirements, these Drawings and Specification shall prevail. 

D. All material, manufacturing methods, handling, dimensions, method or installation and test 

procedure shall conform to but not be limited to the following industry standards and codes: 

IBC 

IMC 

IPC 

IECC 

IFC 

IFGC 

ADA 

ADC 

AIA 

AMCA 

ANSI 

ARI 

ASHRAE 

ASME 

ASSE 

ASTM 

AWS 

AWWA 

CISPI 

MSS 

NBFU 

NEC 

NFPA 

NEMA 

OSHA 

PDI 

SMACNA 

UL 

International Building Code 

International Mechanical Code 

International Plumbing Code 

International Energy Conservation Code 

International Fire Code 

International Fuel Gas Code 

American Disabilities Act 

Air Diffusion Council 

Guidelines for Design and Construction of Hospital and Healthcare Facilities 

Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. 

American National Standards Institute 

Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 

American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers 

American Society of Mechanical Engineers 

American Society of Sanitary Engineering 

American Society of Testing Materials 

American Welding Society 

American Water Works Association 

Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 

Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry 

National Board of Fire Underwriters 

National Electrical Code 

National Fire Protection Association 

National Electrical Manufactures' Association 

Occupational Safety and Health Act 

Plumbing and Drainage Institute 

Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. 

Underwriter's Laboratories 

E. Contractor shall comply with rules and regulations of public utilities and municipal departments 

affected by connections of services. 

F. All mechanical work shall be performed in compliance with applicable safety regulations, including 

OSHA regulations. Safety lights, guards, shoring and warning signs required for the performance 

of the mechanical work shall be provided by the Contractor. 


A. General: 

1. Furnish: The term “furnish” is used to mean “supply and deliver to the project site, ready for 

unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar operations.” 

2. Install: The term “install” is used to describe operations at the project site including the 

actual “unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to 

dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.” 

3. Provide: The term “provide” means “to furnish and install, complete and ready for the 

intended use.” 

4. Furnished by Owner or Furnished by Others: The item will be furnished by the Owner or 

Others. It is to be installed and connected under the requirements of this Division, 

complete and ready for operation, including items incidental to the Work, including services 





necessary for proper installation and operation. The installation shall be included under 

the guarantee required by this Division. 








Work. 





intended to restrict the use of other listed Manufacturers and models that meet the 






C. The following definitions apply to excavation operations: 

1. Additional Excavation: Where excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, if 

unsuitable bearing materials are encountered, continue excavation until suitable bearing 

materials are reached. The Contract Sum may be adjusted by an appropriate Contract 

Modification. 

2. Subbase: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil layer used in pavement 

systems between the subgrade and the pavement base course material. 

3. Subgrade: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil immediately below the slab 

or pavement system. 

4. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade 

elevations or dimensions without specific direction from the Architect. 


A. The Contractor shall visit the site and ascertain the conditions to be encountered while installing 

the Work under this Division, verify all dimensions and locations before purchasing equipment or 

commencing work, and make due provision for same in the bid. Failure to comply with this 

requirement shall not be considered justification for omission, alteration, incorrect or faulty 

installation of Work under this Division or for additional compensation for Work covered by this 

Division. 

B. The Contractor shall refer to Drawings of the other disciplines and to relevant equipment drawings 

and shop drawings to determine the extent of clear spaces. The Contractor shall make offsets 

required to clear equipment, beams and other structural members; and to facilitate concealing 

piping and ductwork in the manner anticipated in the design. 

C. The Contractor shall confirm and coordinate the final location and routing of all mechanical, 

electrical, plumbing, fire protection, control and audio-visual systems with all architectural features, 

structural components, and other trades. The contractor shall locate equipment, components, 

ductwork, piping, conduit, and related accessories to maintain the desired ceiling heights as 

indicated on the architectural drawings. The contractor shall inform the architect of any areas 

where conflicts may prevent the indicated ceiling height from being maintained. The contractor 

shall not proceed with any installation in such areas until the architect has given written approval to 

proceed or has provided modified contract drawings or written instructions to resolve the apparent 

conflict. 





D. The Contractor shall provide materials with trim which will fit properly the types of ceiling, wall, or 

floor finishes actually installed. 

E. The Contractor shall maintain a foreman on the jobsite at all times to coordinate his work with other 

contractors and subcontractors so that various components of the mechanical systems will be 

installed at the proper time, will fit the available space, and will allow proper service access to the 

equipment. Carry on the Work in such a manner that the Work of the other contractors and trades 

will not be handicapped, hindered, or delayed at any time. 

F. Work of this Division shall progress according to the "Construction Schedule" as established by the 

Prime Contractor and his subcontractors and as approved by the Architect. Cooperate in 

establishing these schedules and perform the Work under this Division, in a timely manner in 

conformance with the construction schedule so as to ensure successful achievement of schedule 

dates. 


A. The drawings are schematic in nature, but show the various components of the systems 


building. Figured dimensions shall be taken in preference to scale dimensions. Determine exact 

locations by job measurements, by checking the requirements of other trades, and by reviewing 

the Contract Documents. The Contractor will be held responsible for errors which could have been 

avoided by proper checking and inspection. 


A. Submittals and shop drawings shall not contain HEI’s firm name or logo, nor shall it contain the 



information at the end of this section must be used. 

B. Assemble and submit for review, manufacturers product literature for material and equipment to be 

furnished and/or installed under this Division, to include shop drawings, manufacturer's product 

data and performance sheets and submittals required by this Division as noted in Table 1 at the 

end of this section. A minimum of seven (7) sets shall be submitted. Submittals of similar kind 

such as hydronic specialties, air devices, etc. shall be submitted in three-ring, loose-leaf, hardback 

notebook form, divided and tabbed. 

C. Shop Drawings shall be submitted for systems and equipment as listed in Table 1 in sufficient 

detail so as to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents and design concept. 

Highlight, mark, list or indicate the materials, performance criteria and accessories that are being 

proposed. 

D. Refer to individual Sections for additional submittal requirements. 

E. Submit Shop Drawings as early as required to support the project schedule. Allow for two weeks 

Engineer review time plus mailing time plus a duplication of this time for resubmittal if required. 

Submittal of Shop Drawings as soon as possible before construction starts is preferred. 

F. Before submitting Shop Drawings and material lists, the Contractor shall verify that the equipment 

submitted is mutually compatible and suitable for the intended use. He shall verify that the 

equipment will fit the available space and allow ample room for maintenance. If the size of 

equipment furnished makes necessary any change in location, or configuration, submit a shop 

drawing showing the proposed layout. 

G. Shop Drawings submitted by the Contractor shall contain the following information. Submittals not 

so identified will be returned to the Contractor without action: 






2. The applicable specification section and paragraph. 

3. Equipment identification acronym as used on the drawings. 


5. The Contractor's stamp which shall certify that the stamped drawings have been checked 

by the Contractor, comply with the Drawings and Specifications and have been 


H. Refer to Division 1 for acceptance of electronic submittals for this project. For electronic 




the website, user name and password information needed to access the submittals. For submittals 

sent by e-mail, Contractor shall copy the Architect and Engineer’s designated representatives. 

Contractor shall allow the Engineer review time as specified above in the construction schedule. 

Contractor shall submit only the documents required to purchase the materials and/or equipment in 

the electronic submittal and shall clearly indicate the materials, performance criteria and 

accessories being proposed. General product catalog data not specifically noted to be part of the 

specified product will be rejected and returned without review. 

I. The Architect and/or Engineer’s checking and subsequent acceptance of such drawings, 

schedules, literature, or illustrations shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for 

deviations from Drawings or Specifications unless he has, in writing, called the Engineer’s attention 

to such deviations at the time of submission, and secured his written acceptance; nor shall it 

relieve him from responsibility for errors in dimensions, details, size of members, or quantities; or 

omissions of components or fittings; or for coordinating items with actual building conditions and 

adjacent work. 


A. In preparation of shop drawings or record drawings, Contractor may, at his option, obtain electronic 

drawing files in AutoCAD or DXF format from the Engineer for a shipping and handling fee of $200 

for a drawing set up to 12 sheets and $15 per sheet for each additional sheet. Contact the 

Architect for Architect’s written authorization. Contractor shall complete and send the form 

attached at the end of this section along with a check made payable to Henderson Engineers, Inc. 

Contractor shall indicate the desired shipping method and drawing format on the attached form. In 

addition to payment, Architect’s written authorization and Engineer’s release agreement form must 

be received before electronic drawing files will be sent. 


A. Materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of 


B. No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval to bid 

has been received by the Engineer at least ten calendar days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. 

Each such request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be 

substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute including drawings, cuts, 

performance and test data and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting 

forth changes in other materials, equipment or other Work that incorporation of the substitute 

would require shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitute is 

upon the proposer. The Engineer's decision of approval or disapproval to bid of a proposed 

substitution shall be final. 

C. If the proposed substitution is approved prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be stated in an 

Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. Verbal approval will 

not be given. 





D. No substitutions will be considered after the Contract is awarded unless specifically provided in the 

Contract Documents. 

1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 

A. Submit manuals prior to requesting the final punch list. 

B. Instruct the Owner's permanent personnel in the proper operation of, startup and shutdown 

procedures and maintenance of the equipment and components of the systems installed under this 

Division. 

C. At the completion of the project furnish to the Architect for the Owner, four (4) copies of the data 

listed in Table 5 in three-ring, loose-leaf, hard-back binders. Include local contacts complete with 

address and telephone number, for equipment, apparatus, and system components furnished and 

installed under this Division of the specifications. 


A. Provide to the Owner the spare parts specified in the individual sections in Division 23 of this 

specification. Refer to Table 2 at the end of this Section for a list of specification sections in 

Division 23 that contain spare parts requirements. 

B. Owner or Owner’s representative shall initial and date each section line in Table 2 when the 

specified spare parts for that section are received and shall sign at the bottom when all spare parts 

have been received. 


A. A set of blueline prints shall be kept on the jobsite during construction for the purpose of noting 

changes. During the course of construction, the Contractor shall indicate on these drawings, 

changes made from the Contract Drawings. Particular attention shall be made to those items 

which need to be located for servicing. Underground piping shall be located, by dimension, from 

column lines. 


1.13 TRAINING 

A. Provide training as indicated in each specific section. Schedule training with the Owner at least 7 

days in advance. Video tape the training sessions in format as agreed to with the Owner. Provide 

three copies of each session to the Owner and obtain written receipt from the Owner. 

1.14 PAINTING 

A. Exposed ferrous surfaces, including pipe, pipe hangers, equipment stands and supports and 

exposed insulated piping shall be painted by the Contractor using materials and methods as 

specified under Division 9 of the Specifications; colors shall be as selected by the Architect. 

B. Factory finishes, shop priming and special finishes are specified in the individual equipment 

specification sections. 

C. Where factory finishes are provided and no additional field painting is specified, marred or 

damaged surfaces shall be touched up or refinished so as to leave a smooth, uniform finish. 






A. Equipment and material shall be delivered to the job site in their original containers with labels 

intact, fully identified with manufacturer's name, model, model number, type, size, capacity and 


item. 

B. Deliver, receive, handle and store equipment and materials at the job site in the designated area 





material from damage, to include the erection of temporary shelters to adequately protect 

equipment and material stored at the Site. Equipment and/or material which become rusted or 

damaged shall be replaced or restored by the Contractor to a condition acceptable to the Architect. 

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe storage of his own tools, material and equipment. 

1.16 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES 

A. Each system and element thereof shall be warranted against defects due to faulty workmanship, 


items are noted to carry a longer warranty in the Construction Documents or manufacturer's 

standard warranty. The Contractor shall remedy defects occurring within a period of one year from 

the date of Substantial Completion or as stated in the General Conditions. 

B. The following additional items shall be guaranteed: 

1. Piping shall be free from obstructions, holes or breaks of any nature. 

2. Insulation shall be effective. 

3. Proper circulation of fluid in each piping system. 

C. The above guarantees shall include both labor and material; and repairs or replacements shall be 

made without additional cost to the Owner. 

D. The remedial work shall be performed promptly, upon written notice from the Architect or Owner. 

E. At the time of Substantial Completion, deliver to the Owner warranties with terms extending 

beyond the one year guarantee period, each warranty instrument being addressed to the Owner 

and stating the commencement date and term. Refer to Table 3 at the end of this section for a list 

of specification sections in Division 23 that contain special warranties. 


A. Temporary Utilities: The types of services required include, but are not limited to, water, 

sewerage, surface drainage and gas. When connecting to existing franchised utilities for required 

services, comply with service companies’ recommendations on materials and methods, or engage 

service companies to install services. Locate and relocate services (as necessary) to minimize 


1. Provide the necessary backflow prevention devices where connecting to the potable water 

system. Protect water service from freezing by draining system or by providing adequate 

heat. Where non-potable water is used, mark each outlet with health hazard warning 

signs. 

2. Sewer Sediment: Maintain sewers and temporary connecting sewers in a clean, nonclogged 

condition during construction period. 





B. Construction Facilities: Provide facilities reasonably required to perform construction operations 







lighting. 



temperature not less than 65 degrees Fahrenheit. Use steam, hot water, or gas from piped 








1. The Drawings describe the general nature of remodeling to the existing building. However, 

the Contractor shall visit the Site prior to submitting his bid to determine the nature and 

extent of work involved. 

2. Work in the existing building shall be scheduled with the Owner. 

3. Certain demolition work must be performed prior to the remodeling. The Mechanical 

Contractor shall perform the demolition which involves Mechanical systems, equipment, 

piping, equipment supports or foundations and materials. 

4. Mechanical Contractor shall remove articles which are not required for the new Work. 

Unless otherwise indicated, each item removed by the Mechanical Contractor during this 

demolition shall become his property and shall be removed by the Mechanical Contractor 

from the premises and dispose of them in accordance with applicable federal, state and 

local regulations. 

5. Mechanical Contractor shall relocate and reconnect Mechanical facilities that must be 

relocated in order to accomplish the remodeling shown in the Drawings or indicated in the 

Specifications. Where Mechanical equipment or materials are removed, the Mechanical 

Contractor shall cap unused piping beyond the floor line or wall line to facilitate restoration 

of finish. 

6. General Contractor shall install finish material. 



8. Protect adjacent materials indicated to remain. Install and maintain dust and noise barriers 

to keep dirt, dust, and noise from being transmitted to adjacent areas. Remove protection 

and barriers after demolition operations are complete. 

9. Locate, identify, and protect mechanical services passing through demolition area and 


demolition limits. When services must be interrupted, install temporary services for 


B. Use of explosives is not permitted. 

C. Environmental Conditions: Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity conditions within 

the limits permitted by the joint sealer manufacturer. Do not apply joint sealers to wet substrates. 


(Not Used) 






3.1 PERMITS 

A. Secure and pay for permits required in connection with the installation of the Mechanical Work. 

Arrange with the various utility companies for the installation and connection of required utilities for 

this facility and pay charges associated therewith including connection charges and inspection 

fees, except where these services or fees are designated to be provided by others. 


A. Schedule and coordinate with the Utility Company, Owner and with the Engineer connection to, or 

relocation of, or discontinuation of normal utility services from existing utility lines. Premium time 

required for any such work shall be included in the bid. 

B. Existing utilities damaged due to the operations of utility work for this project shall be repaired to 

the satisfaction of the Owner or Utility Company without additional cost. 

C. Utilities shall not be left disconnected at the end of a work day or over a weekend unless 

authorized by representatives of the Owner or Engineer. 

D. Repairs and restoration of utilities shall be made before workmen leave the project at the end of 

the workday in which the interruption takes place. 

E. Contractor shall include in his bid the cost of furnishing temporary facilities to provide services 

during interruption of normal utility service. 


A. Refer to Division 2 and General Conditions for Selective Demolition requirements. 

B. General: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect abandoned mechanical materials and 


C. Materials and Equipment To Be Salvaged: Remove, demount, and disconnect existing mechanical 





E. Mechanical Materials and Equipment: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect the following 

items: 

1. Inactive and obsolete piping, fittings and specialties, equipment, ductwork, controls, and 

insulation. 

a. Piping and ducts embedded in floors, walls, and ceilings may remain if such 

materials do not interfere with new installations. Remove exposed materials and 

materials above accessible ceilings. Drain and cap piping and ducts allowed to 

remain. 

b. Perform cutting and patching required for demolition in accordance with Division 1, 

General Conditions and "Cutting and Patching" portion of this Section in Division 

23. 

F. Provide schedules indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective 





demolition prior to commencement of Work. Include coordination for shut-off of utility services and 

details for dust and noise control. 

1. Coordinate sequencing with construction phasing and Owner occupancy specified in 

Division 1 Section "Summary of Work." 


A. The Contractor shall do necessary cutting of walls, floors, ceilings and roofs. 

B. No structural member shall be cut without permission from Architect. 

C. Patch around openings to match adjacent construction. 



3.5 CLEANING 

A. Dirt and refuse resulting from the performance of the work shall be removed from the premises as 

required to prevent accumulation. The Mechanical Contractor shall cooperate in maintaining 

reasonably clean premises at all times. 

B. Immediately prior to the final inspection, the Mechanical Contractor shall clean material and 

equipment installed under the Mechanical Contract. Dirt, dust, plaster, stains, and foreign matter 

shall be removed from surfaces including components internal to equipment. Damaged finishes 

shall be touched-up and restored to their original condition. 


A. Prior to requesting inspection for "CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION", the 

Contractor shall complete the following items: 

1. Submit complete Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 


3. Perform special inspections. Refer to Table 4 at the end of this section for a list of 

specification sections in Division 23 that contain special inspection requirements. 

4. Start-up testing of systems. 

5. Removal of temporary facilities from the site. 

6. Comply with requirements for Substantial Completion in the "General Conditions". 

B. The Contractor shall request in writing a review for Substantial Completion. The Contractor shall 

give the Architect/Engineer at least seven (7) days notice prior to the review. 

C. The Contractor's written request shall state that the Contractor has complied with the requirements 

for Substantial Completion. 

D. Upon receipt of a request for review, the Architect/Engineer will either proceed with the review or 

advise the Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. 


above mentioned items, He shall reimburse the Architect/Engineer for time and expenses incurred 

for the visit. 

F. Upon completion of the review, the Architect/Engineer will prepare a "final list" of outstanding items 

to be completed or corrected for final acceptance. 





G. Omissions on the "final list" shall not relieve the Contractor from the requirements of the Contract 

Documents. 

H. Prior to requesting a final review, the Contractor shall submit a copy of the final list of items to be 

completed or corrected. He shall state in writing that each item has been completed, resolved for 

acceptance or the reason it has not been completed. 






TABLE 1: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 



230010 General Mechanical Requirements NONE 

230015 Electrical Coordination for Mechanical Equipment NONE 

230500 Common Work Results for HVAC A, B, G, N 

230510 Basic Piping Materials And Methods B, G 

230523 General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping B 

230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment B, F, G, H 

230593 Testing, Adjusting And Balancing For HVAC H, J 

230700 HVAC Insulation B, L 

232113 Hydronic Piping B, C, F, G, H 

233113 Metal Ducts A, B, D, G 

233300 Air Duct Accessories A, B, F, Q 

233416 Centrifugal HVAC Fans A, B, C, F, H 

233713 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles A, B, C, F, M, N, Q 

238500 Electric Heating Units B, C, E, F, M 

CODED LEGEND 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

G 

H 

I 

J 

K 

L 

M 

N 

O 

P 

Q 

Shop Drawings 

Product Data 


Coordination Drawings 


Installation Instructions 

Welder’s Certificates 

Certificates 

Calculations 

Test Reports 

Special Warranties 

Material Samples 

Color Samples 

Schedules 

Equipment List 

Material List 






TABLE 2: SPARE PARTS REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 

Section Number 

Received/Date/Initial 

230553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment _____________________ 

233300 Air Duct Accessories _____________________ 

233416 Centrifugal HVAC Fans _____________________ 

233713 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles _____________________ 

________________________________________ 

Owner’s Signature 





TABLE 5: MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUBMITTAL 

REQUIREMENTS 



230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC F 

230700 HVAC Insulation B 

232113 Hydronic Piping A, B, C, G, H, I 

233113 Metal Ducts A, B 

233300 Air Duct Accessories B, H 

233413 Axial HVAC Fans B, C, G, I 

233416 Centrifugal HVAC Fans B, C, G, I 

233713 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles C, H 

238500 Electric Heating Units B, C, D, E, I 

CODED LEGEND 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

G 

H 

I 

As-Built Drawings 

Product Data 



Operating Instructions 

Test Reports 

Warranties 


Service and Maintenance Instructions 







PROJECT NAME: ___________________________________________________________________________ 

PROJECT NO/PHASE: __________________________ 

Made this day, ______________________________ 

By and Between Henderson Engineers, Inc., Lenexa, Kansas (hereinafter referred to as ENGINEER) and 

_________________________________________________________________(hereinafter referred to as 

RECIPIENT). 

The enclosed electronic media are provided pursuant to your request for the purpose of production of 

shop drawings or record drawings. In using it, modifying it, or accessing information from it, you are responsible 

for confirmation, accuracy, and checking of the data from the media. ENGINEER hereby disclaims any and all 


information. 

RECIPIENT agrees that it shall not use the information provided by ENGINEER for any purpose other 

than that described above without the express written consent of ENGINEER. RECIPIENT also hereby 

acknowledges that the data delivered by ENGINEER is for use by RECIPIENT only, and is not to be released to 

any other party without the written consent of the ENGINEER and does not transfer ownership of the instruments 

of professional service. 

RECIPIENT understands that the automated conversion of information and data from the system and 

format used by ENGINEER to an alternate system or format cannot be accomplished without the possibility of 

introduction of inexactitudes, anomalies, and errors. In the event project documentation provided to RECIPIENT in 

machine readable form is so converted, RECIPIENT agrees to assume all risk associated therewith, and to the 

fullest extent permitted by law, to hold harmless and indemnify ENGINEER from and against all claims, liabilities, 

losses, damages, and costs, including but not limited to attorney’s fees, arising therefrom or in connection 

therewith. 

RECIPIENT recognizes that changes or modifications to ENGINEER’S instruments of professional 

service introduced by anyone other than ENGINEER may result in adverse consequences that ENGINEER can 

neither predict nor control. Therefore, and in consideration of ENGINEER’S agreement to deliver its instruments of 

professional service in machine readable format, RECIPIENT agrees, to the fullest extent permitted by law to hold 

harmless and indemnify ENGINEER from and against all claim, liabilities, losses, damages, and costs, including 

misuse or reuse by others of the machine readable information and data provided by ENGINEER under this 

Agreement. The foregoing indemnification applies, without limitation, to any use of the project documentation on 

another project, for additions to this project, or for completion of this project by others; ENGINEER may authorize 

excepting only such use in writing. 

Send a check for shipping and handling costs in the amount of $200 for an electronic drawing set up to 

12 sheets plus $15 per sheet in excess of 12 sheets payable to Henderson Engineers, Inc. along with completed 

and signed agreement and Architect’s written authorization to receive electronic media. Be sure to indicate below 

the desired shipping method, format type and media type. 

Sheet numbers requested:__________________ ___________________________________________ 


Signature 


Signature 

RECIPIENT 

Date 

Date 





DXF 


Phone: 




ELECTRICAL COORDINATION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT Section 230015 – Page 1 

SECTION 230015 - ELECTRICAL COORDINATION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which are an integral part 

of packaged mechanical equipment. These components include, but are not limited to factory 

furnished motors, starters, and disconnect switches furnished as an integral part of packaged 

mechanical equipment. 

B. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for mechanical 

equipment are scheduled on the Drawings. 

C. System shall be complete and operational with power and control wiring provided to meet the 

design intent shown on the drawings and specified within the specification sections. 


A. No separate submittal is required. Submit product data for motors, starters, and other electrical 

components with submittal data required for the equipment for which it serves, as required by the 

individual equipment specification Sections. 


A. Electrical components and materials shall be UL labeled. 

B. All electrical equipment provided and the wiring and installation of electrical equipment shall be in 

accordance with the requirements of this Section and Division 26. 


2.1 GENERAL 

A. The Contractors shall provide all motors, starters, disconnects, wire, conduit, etc. as specified in 

the Construction Documents. If, however, the Division 23 Contractor furnishes a piece of 

equipment requiring a different motor, starter, disconnect, wire size, etc. than what is shown 

and/or intended on the Construction Documents, this Contractor shall coordinate the requirements 

with any other Contractor and shall be responsible for any additional cost incurred by any other 

Contractor that is associated with installing the different equipment and related accessories for 

proper working condition. 

B. Refer to Division 26, "COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL” for specification of motor 

connections. 

C. Refer to Division 26, "ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS" for specification of motor starters. 

D. Refer to Division 26, "ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS" for specification of 

disconnect switches and enclosed circuit breakers. 






3.1 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION 

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all motors, equipment, controls, etc. shall be furnished, set in place 

and wired in accordance with Table 1. Any items not listed but shown on the drawings shall be 

considered part of the Contract Documents and brought to the attention of the Architect. 

B. The General Contractor is the central authority governing the total responsibility of all trade 

contractors. Therefore, deviations and clarifications of this schedule are permitted provided the 

General Contractor assumes responsibility to coordinate the trade contractors different than as 

indicated herein. If deviations or clarifications to this schedule are implemented, submit a record 

copy to the Engineer. 





TABLE 1: ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 

ITEM FURN SET POWER CONTROL 

BY BY WIRING WIRING 

Equipment motors DIV23m DIV23m DIV26 --- 

DIV23m = Mechanical Contractor 

DIV23t = Temperature Controls Sub-Contractor 

DIV26 = Electrical Contractor 

DIV28 = Electronic Safety and Security 





COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Section 230500 – Page 1 

SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods for application 

with mechanical installations as follows: 

1. Mechanical equipment nameplate data. 

2. Non-shrink grout for equipment installations. 

3. Sleeves for mechanical penetrations. 

4. Miscellaneous metals for support of mechanical materials and equipment. 

5. Wood grounds, nailers, blocking, fasteners, and anchorage for support of mechanical 

materials and equipment. 

6. Joint sealers for sealing around mechanical materials and equipment. 


1. Division 7 Section “Penetration Firestopping” for material and methods for firestopping 

systems. 

2. Division 23 Section "Basic Piping Materials and Methods," for materials and methods for 



A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Division 1 and Division 23 Section General 

Mechanical Requirements. 


a. Joint sealers. 

2. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal fabrications, and wood 

supports and anchorage for mechanical materials and equipment. 

3. Schedules indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective 

demolition prior to commencement of Work. Include coordination for shut-off of utility 

services and details for dust and noise control. 

a. Coordinate sequencing with construction phasing and Owner occupancy specified 

in Division 1 Section "Summary of Work." 



system. 

a. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting 

agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit 

illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping 

manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent 

fire-resistance-rated assembly. 










B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where a fire-resistance classification is indicated, provide access door 

assembly with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in the UL "Building 

Materials Directory" for rating shown. 

1. Provide UL Label on each fire-rated access door. 

C. Through and Membrane Penetration Firestopping Systems Installer Qualifications: A firm 

experienced in installing penetration firestopping systems similar in material, design, and extent to 

that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful 

performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install 

manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its 

penetration firestopping system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does 

not in itself confer qualification on buyer. 



A. All control devices, specialties, valves, dampers, etc. shall be located so as to provide easy 

access for operation, service inspection and maintenance. 

2.2 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA 

A. For each piece of power operated mechanical equipment, provide a permanent operational data 

nameplate indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, 

operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliance's, and similar essential data. 

Locate nameplates in an accessible location. 

2.3 GROUT 

A. Provide nonshrink, nonmetallic grout conforming to ASTM C 1107, Grade B, in premixed and 

factory-packaged containers. 

B. Grout shall have post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, non-staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous, 

hydraulic-cement characteristics and shall be as recommended by manufacturer for 

interior and exterior applications. 

C. Grout shall have 5,000 psi, 28-day compressive strength design mix. 


A. Sleeves: 

1. Steel Sleeves: Schedule 40 galvanized, welded steel pipe, ASTM A-53 grade A or 12 

gauge (0.1084 inches) welded galvanized steel formed to a true circle concentric to the 

pipe. 





2. Sheet-Metal Sleeves: 10 gauge (0.1382 inches), galvanized steel, round tube closed with 

welded longitudinal joint. 

B. Frames for rectangular openings attached to forms and of a maximum dimension established by 

the Architect. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side 

greater than 16 inches, provide 18 gauge (0.052 inches) welded galvanized steel. For sleeve 

cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal 

to, or greater than, 16 inches, provide 10 gauge (0.1382 inches) welded galvanized steel. Notify 

the General Contractor or Architect before installing any box openings not shown on the 

Architectural or Structural Drawings. 

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS METALS 

A. Steel plates, shapes, bars, and bar grating: ASTM A 36. 

B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500. 

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501. 

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded. 

E. Fasteners: Zinc-coated, type, grade, and class as required. 


A. Framing Materials: Standard Grade, light-framing-size lumber of any species. Number 3 Common 

or Standard Grade boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules, or Number 3 boards complying 

with SPIB rules. Lumber shall be preservative treated in accordance with AWPB LP-2, and kiln 

dried to a moisture content of not more than 19 percent. 

B. Construction Panels: Plywood panels; APA C-D PLUGGED INT, with exterior glue; thickness as 

indicated, or if not indicated, not less that 15/32 inches. 








substrates recommended by the sealant manufacture. Provide one of the following: 


b. "Silglaze II SCS 2801," General Electric Co. 

c. "Silpruf SCS 2000," General Electric Co. 

d. "864," Pecora Corp. 

e. "Rhodia 5C," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 

f. "Spectrem 1," Tremco, Inc. 

g. "Spectrem 2," Tremco, Inc. 

h. "Dow Corning 795," Dow Corning Corp. 

i. "Rhodia 7B," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 

j. "Rhodia 7S," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 

k. "Omniseal," Sonneborn Building Products Div. 









temperature extremes. Provide one of the following: 


b. "Sanitary 1700," General Electric Co. 

c. "898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant," Pecora Corp. 

d. "OmniPlus," Sonneborn Building Products Div. 

D. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealants: One-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable complying with ASTM C 

834 recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations involving 

joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5 percent. Provide one of the following: 


a. "Chem-Calk 600," Bostik Construction Products Div. 



a. "Tremflex 834," Tremco, Inc. 

b. “CP 506”, Hilti, Inc. 

c. “CP 572”, spray application, Hilti, Inc. 


3.1 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE 

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and 

elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. 

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code." 

3.2 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE 

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage accurately in location, 

alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. 

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view 

or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners 

without splitting wood members. 

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 

3.3 PREPARATION FOR JOINT SEALERS 

A. Surface Cleaning for Joint Sealers: Clean surfaces of joints immediately before applying joint 

sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer. 

B. Apply joint sealer primer to substrates as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer. Protect 

adjacent areas from spillage and migration of primers, using masking tape. Remove tape 

immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 





3.4 APPLICATION OF JOINT SEALERS 

A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to 

products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. 

1. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric joint sealants. 

2. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 790 for use of acrylic-emulsion joint sealants. 

B. Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool 

sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and 

adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 

Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by 

sealant manufacturer. 

3.5 PENETRATIONS: 

A. Construction in Existing Facilities: 





B. Provide sleeves and/or box frames for openings in all concrete and masonry construction and fire 

or smoke partitions, for all mechanical work that passes through such construction; Coordinate 

with other trades and Divisions to dimension and lay out all such openings. 

C. The General Contractor will provide only those openings specifically indicated on the Architectural 

or Structural Drawings as being provided under the General Contractor's work. 

D. The cutting of new or existing construction shall not be permitted except by written approval of the 

Architect. 

E. Floor sleeves shall be fitted with means for attachment to forms and shall be of length to extend at 

least two inches above the floor level. 

F. All sleeves shall be of ample size to allow for movement of conduit, duct or pipe and insulation 

through the sleeves without damage to the insulation. 

G. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. 

H. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. 

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry. 

J. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for penetrations of gypsum board 

assemblies. 

K. All openings sleeved through underground exterior walls shall be sealed with mechanical sleeve 

seals as specified in Division 23 Section “Basic Piping Materials and Methods”. 






SECTION 230510 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section specifies piping materials and installation methods common to more than one 

Section of Division 23 and includes joining materials, piping specialties, roof curbs for pipe 

penetrations, pipe freeze protection system and basic piping installation instructions. 


1. Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC," for materials and methods for 

sleeve materials. 

2. Division 26 Sections “Common Work Results for Electrical” and "Enclosed Controllers" for 

power-supply wiring including field-installed disconnects and required electrical devices. 


A. Refer to Division 1 and General Mechanical Requirements for administrative and procedural 

requirements for submittals. 

B. Product Data: Submit product data on the following items: 

1. Escutcheons 

2. Mechanical Sleeve Seals 


A. Welder's Qualifications: All welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and 

Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. 

B. Welding procedures and testing shall comply with ANSI Standard B31.9 - Standard Code for 

Building Services Piping, and The American Welding Society, Welding Handbook. 

C. Soldering and Brazing procedures shall conform to ANSI B9.1 Standard Safety Code for 

Mechanical Refrigeration. 

D. Pipe freeze protection system shall be listed and classified by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. as 

suitable for purpose intended. 

E. Pipe specialties and fittings shall be manufactured in plants located in the United States. 



A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide piping materials and specialties from one of the 

following: 

1. Pipe Escutcheons: 





a. Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. 

b. Tubular Brass Plumbing Products, Zurn Industries, Inc. 

2. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: 

a. Thunderline/Link Seal 

b. Calpico, Inc. 

c. Metraflex Co. 

3. Wall Pipes 

a. Josam Mfg. Co. 

b. Smith (Jay R) Mfg. Co. 

c. Tyler Pipe/Wade Div.; Subs. of Tyler Corp. 

d. Watts Industries, Inc. 


2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. Refer to the individual piping system specification sections in Division 23 for specifications on 

piping and fittings relative to that particular system. 

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 


A. Refer to individual Division 23 Piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. 

B. Welding Materials: AWS D10.12; Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure 

Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the 

pipe being welded. 

C. Brazing Materials: AWS A5.8; Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure 

Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials appropriate for the materials being joined. 

D. Soldering Materials: ASTM B32; Refer to individual piping system specifications for solder 

appropriate for each respective system. 

E. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ASME B16.21; Gasket material shall be full-faced for cast-iron 

flanges and raised-face for steel flanges. Select materials to suit the service of the piping system 

in which installed and which conform to their respective ANSI Standard (A21.11, B16.20, or 

B16.21). Provide materials that will not be detrimentally affected by the chemical and thermal 

conditions of the fluid being carried. 


A. Escutcheons: Chrome-plated, stamped steel, hinged, split-ring escutcheon, with set screw. 

Inside diameter shall closely fit pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is 

insulated. Outside diameter shall completely cover the opening in floors, walls, or ceilings. 

B. Sleeves: 

1. Sleeve: Refer to Division 23 Section “Common Work Results for HVAC” for sleeve 

materials. 

2. Wall Pipes: cast iron soil pipe, ASTM A74, with retaining ring. 





C. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber 

links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and 

pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing 

watertight seal and electrical insulation. 

2.5 WALL PIPES 

A. Cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange with clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane 

flashing. 

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews. 



A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes, and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris for both inside and outside of piping and fittings before 

assembly. 

3.2 INSTALLATIONS 




design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. Refer to individual system 

specifications for requirements for coordination drawing submittals. 

B. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or 

floors, unless indicated otherwise. 

C. Install piping free of sags and bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper 


D. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, 

unless expressly indicated on the Drawings. 





F. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and 


G. Support piping from structure. Do not support piping from ceilings, equipment, ductwork, conduit 

and other non-structural elements. 

H. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4" ball 


I. Verify final equipment locations for roughing in. 





3.3 PIPING PROTECTION 

A. Protect piping during construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris, and to prevent 

damage from traffic and construction work. 



A. Mechanical penetrations occur when piping or ductwork penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or 

masonry walls, or fire / smoke rated floor and wall assemblies. 

B. Above Grade Concrete or Masonry Penetrations 

1. Provide sleeves for pipes passing through above grade concrete or masonry walls, 

concrete floor or roof slabs. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes in existing 

masonry walls, concrete floors or roofs. Provide sleeves as follows: 

a. Provide schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in 

diameter. 

b. Provide galvanized sheet metal for sleeves 6 inches in diameter and larger, 

thickness shall be 10 gauge (0.1382 inches). 

c. Provide welded galvanized sheet metal for rectangular sleeves with the following 

minimum metal thickness: 

1) For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no 

side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 18 gauge (0.052 inches). 

2) For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 

inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness 

shall be 10 gauge (0.1382 inches). 


plenums. 

2. Extend pipe insulation for insulated pipe through floor, wall and roof penetrations, 

including fire rated walls and floors. The vapor barrier shall be maintained. Size sleeve 

for a minimum of 1” annular clear space between inside of sleeve and outside of 

insulation. 

3. Seal elevated floor, exterior wall and roof penetrations watertight and weathertight with 


ends with minimum of 1/2” of sealant. 

C. Elevated Floor Penetrations of Waterproof Membrane: 

1. Provide cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves, extend top of wall pipe minimum 1” above finish 

floor. Size wall pipe for minimum ½” annular space between pipe and wall pipe. 

2. Extend pipe insulation for insulated pipe through wall pipe. The vapor barrier shall be 

maintained. Size wall pipe for a minimum of 1” annular clear space between inside of 

sleeve and outside of insulation. 

3. Pack with mineral wool and seal both ends with minimum of 1/2” of waterproof sealant. 

Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation. 

4. Secure waterproof membrane flashing between clamping flange and clamping ring. 

Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal 

Flashing and Trim." 

5. Extend bottom of wall pipe below floor slab as required and secure underdeck clamp to 

hold wall pipe rigidly in place. 

D. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls: Seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or 





duct, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Pack with mineral wool 

and seal both ends with minimum of 1/2” of sealant. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" 

for materials and installation. 

1. Extend pipe insulation for insulated pipe through sleeve. The vapor barrier shall be 

maintained. Size sleeve for a minimum of 1” annular clear space between inside of sleeve 

and outside of insulation. 

E. Fire / Smoke Rated Floor and Wall Assemblies: Seal around penetrations of fire rated assemblies 

to maintain fire resistance rating of fire-rated assemblies. Coordinate fire ratings and locations 

with the architectural drawings. Install sealants in compliance with the manufacturer’s UL listing. 

Refer to Division 7 Section “Penetration Firestopping” for special sealers and materials. 

3.5 FITTINGS AND SPECIALTIES 

A. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections. 

B. Remake leaking joints using new materials. 

C. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. 

3.6 JOINTS 

A. Steel Pipe Joints: 

1. Pipe 2" and Smaller: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads in accordance with ANSI 

B2.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs 

and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint lubricant or sealant suitable for the 

service for which the pipe is intended on the male threads at each joint and tighten joint to 

leave not more than 3 threads exposed. 

2. Pipe Larger Than 2": 

a. Weld pipe joints (except for exterior water service pipe) in accordance with ASME 

Code for Pressure Piping, B31. 

b. Install flanges on all valves, apparatus, and equipment. Weld pipe flanges to pipe 

ends in accordance with ASME B31.9 Code for Building Services Piping. Clean 

flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to torque specified by manufacturer 

of flange and flange bolts, to provide uniform compression of gaskets. 

B. Non-ferrous Pipe Joints: 

1. Brazed And Soldered Joints: For copper tube and fitting joints, braze joints in accordance 

with ANSI B31.9 - Standard Code for Building Services Piping and ANSI B9.1 - Standard 

Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 

2. Thoroughly clean tube surface and inside surface of the cup of the fittings, using very fine 

emory cloth, prior to making soldered or brazed joints. Wipe tube and fittings clean and 

apply flux. Flux shall not be used as the sole means for cleaning tube and fitting surfaces. 

3. Mechanical Joints: Flared compression fittings may be used for refrigerant lines 3/4" and 

smaller. 

C. Joints for other piping materials are specified within the respective piping system Sections. 





3.7 PIPE FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing: Refer to individual piping system specification sections. 





GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING Section 230523 – Page 1 

SECTION 230523 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes general duty valves common to most mechanical piping systems. 

1. Special purpose valves are specified in individual piping system specifications. 




1. Product data, including body material, valve design, pressure and temperature 

classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, 

dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. 


A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide products specified in this section from the same 

manufacturer where products are available and conform to the specification requirements. 

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for 

building services piping and ASME B31.1 for power piping. 

C. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) Compliance: 

Comply with the various MSS Standard Practices referenced. 

D. Valves shall be manufactured in plants located in the United States or certified to meet the 

specified ASTM, ANSI and MSS standards. 



A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the 

manufacturers listed in valve schedule. 

2.2 VALVE FEATURES, GENERAL 

A. Valve Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems. 

1. Nonrising stem valves may be used where headroom prevents full extension of rising 

stems. 

B. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As scheduled and required to suit system pressures and 

temperatures. 





C. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Operators: Provide the following special operator features: 

1. Handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter turn. 

2. Lever handles, on quarter-turn valves 6-inch and smaller. Chain-wheel operators, for 

valves 2-1/2-inch and larger, installed 72 inches or higher above finished floor elevation. 

Extend chains to an elevation of 5'-0" above finished floor elevation. 

3. Gear drive operators, on quarter-turn valves 8-inch and larger. 

E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to 

receive insulation. 

F. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections. 

G. End Connections: As indicated in the valve specifications. 

1. Threads: Comply with ANSI B1.20.1. 

2. Flanges: Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B16.5 for steel, and ANSI B16.24 

for bronze valves. 

2.3 GATE VALVES 

A. Gate Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi CWP, body and bonnet of 

ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with threaded or solder ends, solid disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass 

packing gland, non-asbestos composition packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Provide Class 

150 valves meeting the above where system pressure requires. 

B. Gate Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 150, 300-psi CWP, body and union bonnet 

of ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with threaded or solder ends, solid disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, 

brass packing gland, non-asbestos composition packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Do not 

use solder end valves for hot water heating or steam piping applications. 

2.4 BALL VALVES 

A. Ball Valves, 2 Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150 saturated steam pressure, 600-psi 

CWP; two-piece construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 584, conventional port, 

stainless steel ball, replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinylcovered 

steel handle. Provide solder ends for use with copper tubing or threaded ends for use 

with steel piping. Provide Class 150 valves meeting the above where system pressure requires. 

B. Ball Valves, 2-1/2 Inch to 3 Inch: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600-psi CWP; 3-piece construction; 

with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 584, conventional port, chrome-plated brass ball, 

replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel 

handle. Provide solder ends for use with copper tubing or threaded ends for use with steel piping. 

2.5 GLOBE VALVES 

A. Globe Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi CWP; body and screwed 

bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with threaded or solder ends, brass or replaceable composition 

disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, non-asbestos composition packing, and 

malleable iron handwheel. Provide Class 150, 300-psi CWP, valves meeting the above where 

system pressure requires. 

B. Globe Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-85; Class 125, 200-psi CWP; iron body and bolted 

bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B; with outside screw and yoke, bronze mounted, 

flanged ends, and non-asbestos composition packing, and two-piece backing gland assembly. 





2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES 

A. Butterfly Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-67; Class 125/150; 200-psi CWP for low and 

medium pressure service, 250 psi for high pressure service; lug-type body constructed of cast-iron 

conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B or ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536. Provide valves 

with field replaceable EPDM sleeve/seat, nickel-plated ductile iron disc (except aluminum bronze 

disc for valves installed in condenser water piping), 416 stainless steel stem, and EPDM O-ring 

stem seals. Provide lever operators (10 position minimum), with locks and stops for sizes 2-1/2 

through 6 inches and gear operators with position indicator for sizes 8 inch and larger. Drill and 

tap valves on dead-end service or requiring additional body strength. Valves in low and medium 

pressure systems must be rated for dead end service at 150 psi with no downstream flange 

required. Valves in high pressure systems must be rated for dead end service at 200 psi with no 

downstream flange required 

2.7 CHECK VALVES 

A. Swing Check Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi CWP, cast-bronze 

body and cap conforming to ASTM B 62; with horizontal swing, Y-pattern, and bronze disc; and 

having threaded or solder ends. Provide valves capable of being reground while the valve 

remains in the line. Provide Class 150, 300-psi CWP, valves meeting the above specifications, 

with threaded end connections, where system pressure requires or where Class 125 valves are 

not available. 

B. Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-71; Class 125 200-psi CWP, (Class 175 

FM approved for fire protection piping systems), cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to 

ASTM A 126, Class B; horizontal swing, and bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze disc ring; 

and flanged ends. Provide valves capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line. 

C. Wafer Check Valves: Class 125, cast-iron body; with replaceable bronze seat, and non-slam 

design lapped and balanced twin bronze flappers and stainless steel trim and torsion spring. 

Provide valves designed to open and close at approximately one foot differential pressure. 

D. Lift Check Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: Class 125; cast-bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM 

B 62; horizontal or angle pattern, lift-type valve, with stainless steel spring, bronze disc holder with 

renewable "Teflon" disc, and threaded ends. Provide valves capable of being refitted and ground 

while the valve remains in the line. 


3.1 VALVE ENDS SELECTION 

A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: 

1. Copper Tube Size, 2-Inch and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for 

heating hot water. 

2. Steel Pipe Sizes 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: flanged or grooved end. 

3.2 VALVE PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE CLASSIFICATION SCHEDULES 

A. VALVES, 2-INCH AND SMALLER 

SERVICE GATE GLOBE BALL CHECK 

Chilled Water 125 125 150 125 

Heating Hot Water 150 150 150 150 





B. VALVES, 2-1/2-INCH AND LARGER 

SERVICE GATE GLOBE BALL BUTTERFLY CHECK 

Chilled Water 125 125 150 200 125 

Heating Hot Water 125 125 150 200 125 

3.3 VALVE SCHEDULE 

A. Gate Valves - 2 Inch and Smaller, Class 125: 

THREADED 

SOLDER 

MANUFACTURER NRS THREADED RS NRS SOLDER RS 

Crane 438 428 1701S 1700S 


Milwaukee 105 148 115 1149 

Nibco T113 T111 S113 S111 

Powell 507 500 1822 1821 

Stockham B103 B-100 B-104 B-108 

B. Gate Valves - 2 Inch and Smaller, Class 150: 

THREADED 

SOLDER 


SOLDER RS 

Crane 437 431/431UB 1324 1334 

Hammond IB637 IB629 NA IB648 

Milwaukee NA 1151 NA 1169 

Nibco T-136 T-134 S-136 S-134 

Powell 2712 2714 NA 1842 

Stockham B-130 B-120 NA B-124 

C. Ball Valves – 2 inch and smaller, Class 150: 



Hammond 8501 8511 

Milwaukee BA-100 BA-100S 

Nibco T-580-70-66 S-580-70-66 

Watts B-6000 B-6001 

F. Ball Valves - 2-1/2 Inch to 3 Inch, Class 150: 



Hammond 8604 8614 

Milwaukee BA350 BA350S 

Nibco T-595-Y S-595-Y 

G. Globe Valves - 2 Inch and Smaller: 

CLASS 125 CLASS 125 CLASS 150 CLASS 200 

MANUFACTURER THREADED SOLDER THREADED THREADED 

Crane 1 1310 7TF 212P 

Hammond IB440 IB423 IB413T IB434 

Jenkins 994AJ 995AJ 106BJ 2050J 

Milwaukee 502 1502 590 570 

Nibco T-211-B/Y S-211-B/Y T-235-Y T-256-AP 

Powell 650 1823 150 110 

Stockham B-16 B-14T B-22 B-37 





H. Globe Valves - 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: 

CLASS 125 CLASS 125 CLASS 250 

MANUFACTURER STRAIGHT BODY ANGLE BODY STRAIGHT BODY 

Bray CG-J NA NA 

Crane 351 353 21E 

Hammond IR116 IR118 IR313 

Jenkins 2342J 2344J 162J 

Milwaukee F2981 F2986 F2983 

Nibco F-718-B F-818-B F-768-B 

Powell 241 243 NA 

Stockham G-512 G-515 F-532 

I. Butterfly Valves - 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: 

1. The following are model numbers for lug-type, with nickel-plated ductile-iron disc: 

MANUFACTURER LEVER GEAR 

Apollo(Conbraco) LD141 xx DE1* LD141 xx DE2* 

Bray Series 31 Series 31 

Crane Center Line Series 200 Series 200 

Crane 14 44FXZ13N 14 44FXZ13G 

Keystone 129 129 

Nibco LD-3010-3 LD-3010-5 

Stockham LG-712-DS3E LG-722-DS3E 

Watts BF-03-111-11 BF-03-111-12 

Milwaukee ML222E ML322E 

Hammond 6241-01 6241-03 

* xx = Valve Size 

2. The following are model numbers for lug-type, with aluminum-bronze disc: 

MANUFACTURER LEVER GEAR 

Apollo(Conbraco) LD141 xx BE1* LD141 xx BE2* 

Crane Center Line Series 200 Series 200 

Crane 44BXZ13N 44BXZ13G 

Keystone 129 129 

Nibco LD-2000-3 LD-2000-5 

Stockham LG-712-BS3E LG-722-BS3E 

Watts BF-03-121-15 BF-03-121-1G 

Milwaukee ML223E ML323E 

Hammond 6211-01 6211-03 

xx = Valve Size 

J. Swing Check Valves - 2 Inch and Smaller: 

CLASS 125 CLASS 125 CLASS 150 CLASS 200 

MANUFACTURER THREADED SOLDER THREADED THREADED 

Crane 37 1342 137 36 


Jenkins 4037J 4093J 4092J 4449J 

Milwaukee 509 1509 510 507 

Nibco T-413 S-413 T-433 T-435-B 

Powell 578 1825 596 560 

Stockham B-319 B-309 B-321 B-345 

K. Swing Check Valves - 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: 

MANUFACTURER CLASS 125 CLASS 175 CLASS 250 

Crane 373 NA 39E 





L. Wafer Check Valves: 

Hammond IR1124 NA IR322 

Jenkins 587J NA 339RJ 

Kennedy NA Fig. 126 NA 

Milwaukee F2974 NA NA 

Nibco F-918 NA F-968 

Powell 559 NA NA 

Stockham G-931 G-940 F-947 

1. Bell & Gossett: NS. 

2. Center Line: Series 800 

3. Crane DuoChek II: G12HMP. 

4. Metraflex: CVXX. 

5. Nibco W-910. 

6. Stockham: WG970. 

7. Victaulic: Series 710/711 

8. Milwaukee 8800 

M. Lift Check Valves 2 Inch and Smaller: 

MANUFACTURER HORIZONTAL ANGLE 

Crane 27TF NA 

Hammond NA IB954 

3.4 APPLICATION SCHEDULE 

A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe, ball, and butterfly 

for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve applications 

and arrangements. Select pressure class or rating to suit application. 

B. Heating Water System: Use the following valve types: 

1. Gate Valves: Class 150 or 200 bronze or Class 125 or 250 cast-iron body to suit piping 

system. 

2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP or 1000-psi CWP, with stainless steel stem 

extension and memory stop. 

3. Globe Valves: Class 150 or 200 bronze or Class 125 or 250 cast-iron body to suit piping 

system. 

4. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or epoxy-coated ductile iron 

disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals. 

5. Bronze Swing Check: Class 150 or 200, with composition seat. 

6. Check Valves: Iron swing, wafer, or lift type, as indicated. Swing check shall be Class 

150 or 250 with bronze seat ring. 

C. Chilled-Water Systems: Use the following valve types: 

1. Gate Valves: Class 150 or 200, bronze body; or Class 125 or 250, cast-iron body. 

2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP or 1000-psi CWP, with stem extension and memory 

stop. 

3. Globe Valves: Class 125 or 200, bronze body with bronze or teflon disc; or Class 125 or 

250, cast-iron body. 

4. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or elastomer-coated ductile 

iron disc; EPDM sleeve and stem seals. 

5. Check Valves: Class 125 or 200, bronze body swing check; Class 125 or 250, cast-iron 

body swing check; Class 125, cast-iron body wafer check; or Class 125, cast-iron body lift 

check. 





3.5 VALVE INSTALLATIONS 

A. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. Provide access 

doors and fire rated access doors as required. 

B. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment arranged to allow equipment 

removal without system shutdown. Unions are not required on flanged devices. 

C. Install three-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling-type valves. 

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe. 

E. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement. 

F. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows: 

1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level. 

2. Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. 

3. Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb. 


A. Tests: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and 

balancing, inspect valves for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks; replace valves if leak 

persists. 


A. Cleaning: Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and prepare 

valves to receive finish painting or insulation. 

B. Inspect valves for leaks after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before 

final adjusting and balancing. Adjust or replace packing, as required, on valves with leaks. 

Replace valve if leak persists. 





HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT Section 230529 – Page 1 

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Horizontal-piping hangers and supports 

2. Vertical-piping clamps 

3. Hanger-rod attachments 

4. Building attachments 

5. Saddles and shields 

6. Spring hangers and supports 

7. Miscellaneous materials 

8. Pipe alignment guides 

9. Anchors 

10. Equipment supports 

11. Pre-engineered support strut systems 


1. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation," for high density insulation for protecting insulation 

vapor barrier and materials and methods for piping hanger installations. 

2. Division 23 “Hydronic Piping”, for pipe hanger types and spacing for horizontal and vertical 

hydronic piping of sizes and materials indicated. 


A. Terminology used in this Section is defined in MSS SP-90. 


A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contract and Division 1 

specification Sections. 

1. Product data, including installation instructions for each type of support and anchor. 

Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, 

location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support. 

2. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer of hangers and supports certifying that 

their products meet the specified requirements. 

3. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements 

specified under "Quality Assurance" Article. 

4. Assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support and anchor, indicating dimensions, 

weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components. 

5. Maintenance data for supports and anchors for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance 

Data specified in Division 1 and Division 23 Section "General Mechanical Requirements." 










B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ASME "Boiler and Pressure 

Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 



A. Hangers and Supports 

1. Anvil International 

2. B-Line 

3. Halfen-DEHA 

4. Hilti 

5. ERICO\Michigan Hanger Co. 

6. National Pipe Hanger Corporation 

7. Power-Strut. 

8. Unistrut 

B. Expansion Anchors 

1. Hilti 

2. Phillips 

3. Power Fasteners 

4. Rawl 

2.2 SUPPORT MATERIALS 

A. Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of materials, design, and 

manufacturer complying with MSS SP-58. 

1. Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that 

will not have factory applied or field-applied finish. 



B. Pipe Covering Protection Saddles: Sheet metal construction, meeting MSS SP-58 Type 39A or B, 

100-psi average compressive strength, waterproofed calcium silicate, encased with a sheet metal 

shield and center rib for pipes 12” and larger. Pipe covering protection saddles shall cover 

approximately one sixth of the circumference of the pipe and shall be 12” long. 

C. Insulation Protection Shield: Sheet metal construction, meeting MSS SP-58 Type 40, of 18 gauge 

for 5-1/2” inside dimension and smaller, 16 gauge for 6-1/2” to 10-3/4” inside dimension and 14 

gauge for 11-3/4” to 17” inside dimension. Shield shall cover half of the circumference of the pipe 

and shall be of length indicated by manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation. 

D. Pre-engineered Support Strut Systems: Minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel with factory-punched 

attachment holes. Two piece straps shall be captivated at the shoulder when attachment nut is 

tightened and designed for use with strut system. Long or short pipe rollers designed for use with 

strut system, where indicated, shall attach to the channel with brackets and nuts. Provide plastic 

galvanic isolators for connecting bare copper pipe for use with pre-engineered support strut 

system where indicated. All nuts, brackets and clamps shall have the same finish as the 

channels. 

E. Expansion Anchors: Self drilling, drilled flush or shell type. 






A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. 

B. Pipe Alignment Guides: For steel piping, factory fabricated, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated 

steel, for copper piping utilize factory fabricated copper, consisting of bolted two-section outer 

cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider that bolts tightly to pipe. Length of guides shall 

be as recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. 


3.1 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from 

building structure; do not attach to ceilings, equipment, ductwork, conduit and other non-structural 

elements such as floor and roof decking. 

B. Hangers, supports, clamps and attachments shall comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping 

of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze 

hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing specified within Division 23 

piping sections. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space 

hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe as 

specified above for individual pipe hangers. 

C. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Space attachments within 

maximum piping span length specified in Division 23 piping sections. Install additional 

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, 

and at changes in direction of piping as specified in Division 23 piping sections. . Install concrete 

inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert to forms. Where concrete with compressive 

strength less than 2,500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. 

D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and 

other accessories. Provide two nuts on threaded supports to securely fasten the support. 

E. Field-Fabricated, Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads 

required; weld steel in accordance with AWS D-1.1. 

F. Install appropriate types of hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, 

to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, 

expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. 

G. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses 

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 

H. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum 

pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping Code is not exceeded. 

I. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. 

1. Riser Clamps: Attach riser clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with riser clamps 

projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. Do 

not use riser clamps to support horizontal, insulated piping. Seal insulation for hot piping 

and protect vapor barrier for cold piping as specified in Division 23 Section “HVAC 

Insulation”. 

2. Pipe Covering Protection Saddles: Install pipe covering protection saddles where 

insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation 

that match adjoining pipe insulation. 

3. Insulation Protection Shield: Install insulation protection shield and high density 





insulation where vapor barrier is indicated, sized for the insulation thickness used as 

specified in Division 23 Section “HVAC Insulation”. 

a. Install a minimum 8” long section at each support point, top and bottom halves of 

the pipe, of same thickness of insulation used. 

J. Pre-engineered Support Strut Systems: Channel strut systems can be used at the Contractors 

option in lieu of individual hangers for horizontal pipes. Space channel strut systems at the 

required distance for the smallest pipe supported. Provide channel gauge and hanger rods per 

the manufacturer’s recommendations for the piping supported. Where strut systems are attached 

to walls, install anchor bolts per manufacturer’s recommendations. 

1. Uninsulated Copper Pipe: Install with plastic galvanic isolators 

2. Insulated Tube or Pipe: Install with 360 insulation protection shields or pre-engineered 

thermal hanger-shield inserts as specified in Division 23 Section “HVAC Insulation”. 

K. Expansion Anchors: Use in existing concrete, masonry or in pre-cast concrete construction. 

3.2 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS 

A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME 

B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. 

B. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to structure. 

Comply with ASME B31.9 and with AWS Standards D1.1. 

C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit 

manufacturer's written instructions to control movement to compensators. 

D. Anchor Spacing: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe runs, at 

intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset 

of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES 

A. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins expansion joints, as required by expansion 

joint manufacturer, and elsewhere as indicated on plans and specification sections to eliminate 

binding and torsional stress on piping systems. Where not otherwise indicated, install guides as 

required by ASME B31.9. 

B. Anchor to building substrate. 

3.4 METAL FABRICATION 

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors and equipment supports. 

Install and align fabricated anchors in indicated locations. 

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be 

shop welded because of shipping size limitations. 

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, 

appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the 

following: 

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion 

resistance of base metals. 





2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 

3. Remove welding flux immediately. 

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing, and so 

that contours welded surfaces to match adjacent contours. 

3.5 ADJUSTING 

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve 

indicated slope of pipe. 

B. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply 

galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 





TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Section 230593 – Page 1 

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section specifies the requirements and procedures total mechanical systems testing, 

adjusting, and balancing. Requirements include measurement and establishment of the fluid 

quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and 

reporting the results. 

B. Test, adjust, and balance the following mechanical systems: 

1. Exhaust air systems; 

C. Test systems for proper sound and vibration levels. 

D. This Section does not include: 

1. Testing boilers and pressure vessels for compliance with safety codes; 

2. Specifications for materials for patching mechanical systems; 

3. Specifications for materials and installation of adjusting and balancing devices. If devices 

must be added to achieve proper adjusting and balancing, refer to the respective system 

sections for materials and installation requirements. 

4. Requirements and procedures for piping and ductwork systems leakage tests. 


A. Systems testing, adjusting, and balancing is the process of checking and adjusting all the building 

environmental systems to produce the design objectives. It includes: 

1. Balance of air and water distribution; 

2. Adjustment of total system to provide design quantities; 

3. Electrical measurement; 

4. Verification of performance of all equipment and automatic controls; 

5. Sound and vibration measurement. 

B. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment. 

C. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment (e.g., 

reduce fan speed, throttling). 

D. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (submains, branches, and terminals) 

according to specified design quantities. 

E. Procedure: Standardized approach and execution of sequence of work operations to yield 

reproducible results. 

F. Report forms: Test data sheets arranged for collecting test data in logical order for submission 

and review. These data should also form the permanent record to be used as the basis for 

required future testing, adjusting, and balancing. 

G. Terminal: The point where the controlled fluid enters or leaves the distribution system. These are 

supply inlets on water terminals, supply outlets on air terminals, return outlets on water terminals, 





and exhaust or return inlets on air terminals such as registers, grilles, diffusers, louvers, and 

hoods. 

H. Main: Duct or pipe containing the system's major or entire fluid flow. 

I. Submain: Duct or pipe containing part of the systems' capacity and serving two or more branch 

mains. 

J. Branch main: Duct or pipe serving two or more terminals. 

K. Branch: Duct or pipe serving a single terminal. 


A. Agency Data: 

1. Submit proof that the proposed testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meets the 

qualifications specified below. 

B. Engineer and Technicians Data: 

1. Submit proof that the Test and Balance Engineer assigned to supervise the procedures, 

and the technicians proposed to perform the procedures meet the qualifications specified 

below. 

C. Procedures and Agenda: Submit a synopsis of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures 

and agenda proposed to be used for this project. 

D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance and operating data that include how to test, adjust, and 

balance the building systems. Include this information in maintenance data specified in Division 1 

and Section “General Mechanical Requirements”. 

E. Sample Forms: Submit sample forms, if other than those standard forms prepared by the NEBB 

,AABC ,or TABB are proposed. 

F. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and signature 

of the Test and Balance Engineer. The reports shall be certified proof that the systems have been 

tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the referenced standards; are an accurate 

representation of how the systems have been installed; are a true representation of how the 

systems are operating at the completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures; and 

are an accurate record of all final quantities measured, to establish normal operating values of the 

systems. Follow the procedures and format specified below: 

1. Draft reports: Upon completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures, prepare 

draft reports on the approved forms. Draft reports may be hand written, but must be 

complete, factual, accurate, and legible. Organize and format draft reports in the same 

manner specified for the final reports. Submit 2 complete sets of draft reports. Only 1 

complete set of draft reports will be returned. 

2. Final Report: Upon verification and approval of draft reports, prepare final reports, type 

written, and organized and formatted as specified below. Submit 2 complete sets of final 

reports. 

3. Report Format: Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by the referenced 

standard for each respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced. Bind 

report forms complete with schematic systems diagrams and other data in reinforced, 

vinyl, three-ring binders. Provide binding edge labels with the project identification and a 

title descriptive of the contents. Divide the contents of the binder into the below listed 

divisions, separated by divider tabs: 

a. General Information and Summary 





b. Air Systems 

4. Report Contents: Provide the following minimum information, forms and data: 

a. General Information and Summary: Inside cover sheet to identify testing, 

adjusting, and balancing agency, Contractor, Owner, Architect, Engineer, and 

Project. Include addresses, and contact names and telephone numbers. Also 

include a certification sheet containing the seal and name address, telephone 

number, and signature of the Certified Test and Balance Engineer. Include in this 

division a listing of the instrumentations used for the procedures along with the 

proof of calibration. 

b. The remainder of the report shall contain the appropriate forms containing as a 

minimum, the information indicated on the standard report forms prepared by the 

NEBB, AABC, OR TABB, for each respective item and system. Prepare a 

schematic diagram for each item of equipment and system to accompany each 

respective report form. 

G. Calibration Reports: Submit proof that all required instrumentation has been calibrated to 

tolerances specified in the referenced standards, within a period of six months prior to starting the 

project. 


A. Test and Balance Engineer's Qualifications: A certified Test and Balance Engineer on staff and 

having at least 5-years of successful testing, adjusting, and balancing experience on projects with 

testing and balancing requirements similar to those required for this project. 

B. Agency Qualifications: 

1. Employ the services of an independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meeting 

the qualifications specified below, to be the single source of responsibility to test, adjust, 

and balance the building mechanical systems identified above, to produce the design 

objectives. Services shall include checking installations for conformity to design, 

measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as 

required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results. 

2. The independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency shall be certified by National 

Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or 

Testing Adjusting and Balancing Bureau (TABB) in those testing and balancing disciplines 

required for this project. Agency shall have at least one Professional Engineer certified by 

NEBB or AABC or TABB as a Test and Balance Engineer. The project shall be staffed at 

all times by qualified personnel. 

C. Codes and Standards: 

1. NEBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental 

Systems." 

2. AABC: "National Standards For Total System Balance". 

3. TABB: SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing”. 

4. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, 2007 HVAC Applications Volume, Chapter 37, “Testing, 

Adjusting, and Balancing”. 

5. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, 2007 HVAC Applications Volume, Chapter 47, “Sound 

and Vibration Control”. 

D. Balancing Tolerances: 

1. Air Systems: Balance individual terminal devices and branch lines to ± 10 percent and 

main ducts and air handling equipment to ± 5 percent of specified airflow. 

E. Pre-Balancing Conference: Prior to beginning of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures, 

schedule and conduct a conference with the Architect/Engineer and representatives of installers 





of the mechanical systems. The objective of the conference is final coordination and verification 

of system operation and readiness for testing, adjusting, and balancing. 


A. Systems Operation: Systems shall be fully operational prior to beginning procedures. 

1.6 COORDINATION OF WORK 

A. Coordinate mechanical work including ductwork and controls to provide complete, properly tested, 

adjusted and balanced systems. Division 23 Contractor shall submit progress reports to 

communicate status of work so that the testing, adjusting and balancing work is completed in a 

timely manner. Division 23 Contractor shall ensure that duct systems are sealed and equipment 

is operational and capable of producing the scheduled capacity requirements. 

B. Coordinate with the Division 26 Contractor to verify that electrical work for mechanical equipment 

is complete, properly tested and operational prior to beginning procedures. 

C. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, 

HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to 

support and assist TAB activities. 

D. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and 

times. 

E. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been 

satisfactorily completed. 


(Not Used) 


3.1 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEM BALANCING 

A. Before operating the system, perform these steps: 

1. Obtain design drawings and specifications and become thoroughly acquainted with the 

design intent. 

2. Obtain copies of approved shop drawings of air handling equipment, outlets (supply, 

return, and exhaust) and temperature control diagrams. 

3. Compare design to installed equipment and field installations. 

4. Walk the system from the system air handling equipment to terminal units to determine 

variations of installation from design. 

5. Check dampers (both volume and fire) for correct and locked position, and temperature 

control for completeness of installation before starting fans. 

6. Verify volume dampers are installed at locations needed for balancing the air systems. 

7. Prepare report test sheets for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors 

and recommended procedures for testing. Prepare a summation of required outlet 

volumes to permit a crosscheck with required fan volumes. 

8. Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most accurate duct traverses. 

9. Place outlet dampers in the full open position. 

10. Prepare schematic diagrams of system "as-built" ductwork and piping layouts to facilitate 

reporting. 

11. Lubricate all motors and bearings. 





12. Check fan belt tension. 

13. Check fan rotation. 

3.2 PROCEDURES FOR STEAM SYSTEMS 

A. Measure and record upstream and downstream pressure of each piece of equipment. 

3.3 MEASUREMENTS 

A. Provide all required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements, calibrated to the tolerances 

specified in the referenced standards. Instruments shall be properly maintained and protected 

against damage. 

B. Provide instruments meeting the specifications of the referenced standards. 

C. Use only those instruments which have the maximum field measuring accuracy and are best 

suited to the function being measured. 

D. Apply instrument as recommended by the manufacturer. 

E. Use instruments with minimum scale and maximum subdivisions and with scale ranges proper for 

the value being measured. 

F. When averaging values, take a sufficient quantity of readings which will result in a repeatability 

error of less than 5 percent. When measuring a single point, repeat readings until 2 consecutive 

identical values are obtained. 

G. Take all reading with the eye at the level of the indicated value to prevent parallax. 

H. Use pulsation dampeners where necessary to eliminate error involved in estimating average of 

rapidly fluctuation readings. 

I. Take measurements in the system where best suited to the task. 

3.4 PERFORMING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system identified, in accordance with the 

detailed procedures outlined in the referenced standards. 

B. Cut insulation, ductwork, and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum extent 

necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. 

C. Patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed. 

D. Seal ducts and test for and repair leaks. 

E. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier. 

F. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control 

levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. Mark with paint or other suitable, 

permanent identification materials. 

1. Energize fan motors, verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust 

fan to indicated RPM. 

a. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. 





G. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and resubmit 

test results. 

3.5 TESTING FOR SOUND AND VIBRATION 

A. Test and adjust mechanical systems for sound and vibration in accordance with the detailed 

instructions of the referenced standards. 

3.6 RECORD AND REPORT DATA 

A. Record data regarding design conditions from contract documents and installed conditions from 

shop drawings including equipment identification number, model number, location, area served, 

manufacturer, model number, serial number, motor nameplate horsepower and rpm, fan rpm, 

capacity and electrical voltage, amps and phases 

B. Record data obtained during testing, adjusting, and balancing including sound and vibration 

measurements in accordance with, and on the forms recommended by the referenced standards, 

and as approved on the sample report forms. 

C. Prepare and submit report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical 

performances when system cannot be successfully balanced. 

D. Prepare and submit report of recommendations for correcting any sound or vibration levels that 

are outside of manufacturer’s tolerances, ASHRAE standards and/or values specified in the 

contract documents. 





HVAC INSULATION Section 230700 – Page 1 

SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Extent of Mechanical insulation required by this Section is indicated on drawings and schedules, 

and by requirements of this Section. 

B. Types of Mechanical insulation specified in this Section include the following: 

1. Piping Systems Insulation: 

a. Fiberglass 

b. Flexible Elastomeric 

c. Polyisocyanurate (closed cell) 

2. Ductwork System Insulation: 

a. Fiberglass 

b. Cellular Glass 

c. Flexible Elastomeric 

C. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 

1. Division 23 Section "Hangers & Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment," for insulation 

shields and pipe saddles for protecting insulation vapor barrier and materials and methods 

for piping installations. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship 

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of 

Apprenticeship and Training. 

B. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, 

sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed 

index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. 

1. Exception: Outdoor mechanical insulation may have flame spread index of 75 and smoke 

developed index of 150. 



type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, k-value, 

thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. 

B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of 

mechanical insulation. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual. 







A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 

1. Armacell LLC. 


3. Knauf Insulation 

4. Johns Manville 

5. Owens Corning 

6. Pittsburgh Corning Corp. 

2.2 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS 

A. Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 547-00, Class 1 unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Flexible Elastomeric Piping Insulation: ASTM C 534-01a, Type I. 

C. Polyisocyanurate Piping Insulation: ASTM C 591-01. Provide vapor retardant film and tape of 

thickness as recommended by the manufacturer for the installation. 

D. Jackets for Piping Insulation: ASTM C 1136, Type I for piping with temperatures below ambient, 

Type II for piping with temperatures above ambient. Type I may be used for all piping at Installers 

option. 

1. Encase pipe fittings insulation with one-piece pre-molded PVC fitting covers, fastened as 

per manufacturer's recommendations. PVC fitting covers shall be John Manville Zeston 

2000 PVC or approved equal. 

E. Staples, Bands, Wires, and Cement: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for 


F. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for 


G. Insulation Diameters: Comply with ASTM C 585 for inner and outer diameters of rigid thermal 

insulation. 

H. Pipe, Valve and Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for fabrication of fitting covers for pipe, 

valves and fittings. 

I. High Density Insulation: 

1. Calcium Silicate And Fiberglass: ASTM C 795 and MIL-I-24244. 

2. Styrofoam Billets: ASTM C 518. 

J. Pre-Engineered Thermal Hanger-Shield Inserts: 

1. Flexible elastomeric piping insulation meeting ASTM C 534-01a, Type I with integral high 

density pipe supports and encased in steel insulation shield. 

a. Manufacturer: Cooper B-Line / Armacell or approved equal 





2.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS 

A. Rigid Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 612, Class 1, with density of 3.0 pounds per cubic 

foot. 

B. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type II, Class B-4, with density of 1.5 

pounds per cubic foot. 

C. Jackets for Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 921, Type I for ductwork with temperatures below 

ambient; Type II for ductwork with temperatures above ambient. Protective jackets for ductwork 

shall be Type III made of sheet aluminum in accordance with ASTM B 209, 3003 alloy, H-14 

temper, minimum 0.032 inch thick with a moisture barrier lining except where the protective jacket 

is applied over a Type I vapor barrier jacket and with stainless steel draw bands. 

D. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, pins with insulation 

retaining washers, anchors, corner angles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation 

manufacturer for applications indicated. 

E. Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective 

finishes and similar compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications 

indicated. 

F. Protect insulation installed on exterior ductwork exposed to weather with one of the following 

options: 

1. Encase fiberglass insulation with aluminum jacket with weather-proof construction. Jacket 

shall be minimum 20 gauge corrugated aluminum with three aluminum attachment bands 

per section and with aluminum fitting covers. 

2. Provide Polyguard Products, Inc. Alumaguard RG-2400 or approved equal rubberized 

bitumen with 60 mil., UV resistant, foil faced membrane. Alumaguard shall only be applied 

when ambient temperature is above 50˚F. For installation in low temperatures down to 10 

F, Polyguard Products, Inc. Alumaguard Low Temp (LT) or approved equal rubberized 

bitumen with 35 mil UV resistant, foil faced membrane can be used. 


A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on hot piping within radiation enclosures or unit cabinets; on 

cold piping within unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan; on heating piping 

beyond control valve, located within heated space; and on flexible connections and expansion 

joints. 

B. Cold Piping (40 degrees F (4.4 degrees C) to ambient): 

1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold HVAC piping systems: 

a. HVAC chilled water supply and return piping. 

b. Air conditioner condensate drain piping. 



a. Fiberglass: 1" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2", 1-1/2" thick for pipe 

sizes over 1-1/2". 

b. Polyisocyanurate: 1” thick for piping up to and including 8”, 1-1/2" thick for piping 

larger than 8”. 

C. Hot Low Pressure Non-Steam Piping (to 250 degrees F (121 degrees C)): 





1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot low pressure HVAC piping systems 

(water piping up to 250 degrees F (121 degrees C). 

a. HVAC hot water supply and return piping. 



a. Fiberglass: 1" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2", 2" thick for pipe sizes 

over 1-1/2". 

3.2 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION 

A. Application Requirements: 

1. Insulate the following ductwork: 

a. HVAC plenums and unit housings not pre-insulated at factory or lined. 

b. Exhaust air ductwork within 10 feet of exterior discharge outlets. 

2. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types and 

thickness of insulation: 

a. Flexible Fiberglass: 2” thick, minimum R-5.0 installed R-value, application limited 

to concealed locations. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION 


accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended 

purpose. 

B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting, testing, and 

acceptance of tests. 

C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping 

with full-length units of insulation, with a single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces 

or scraps abutting each other. 

D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure a 


E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on cold pipe insulation, and protect insulation with 

shields to prevent puncture or other damage as specified in Section “Hangers & Supports for 

HVAC Piping & Equipment.” Provide high density insulation of material as specified herein and of 

length equivalent to pipe shield. Provide pipe hangers sized for the pipe outside diameter plus 

insulation thickness. Seal butt joint between insulation and high density insulation with wet coat of 

vapor barrier lap cement. 

1. Exception for vertical piping: Provide clamps sized for the outside diameter of the vertical 

pipe and extend clamp through insulation. Seal penetrations of insulation and vapor 

barrier with wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement. 





F. Provide pipe hangers for hot piping sized for the outside diameter of piping. Butt insulation to 

hanger or riser clamp for vertical pipe. Seal exposed insulation with insulation sealer. 

G. Butt pipe insulation tightly at insulation joints. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor barrier tape or 

band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints 

and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band. 

H. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with 

continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same 

material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly 

against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular 

surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is 

uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same 

material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt 

each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with 

adhesive. 

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same 



diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve 

stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with 

insulating cement. 

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same 



diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating 

cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and 

replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable 

insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor 

barrier. 

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. 

Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe 

insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a 

mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for 

above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the 

mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric 

and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and 

unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation 

facing using PVC tape. 

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match 

size and color of pipe labels. 

I. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, 

test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape 

insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement 

and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. 

J. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the 

following: 

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same 

thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe 

insulation. 

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation 

from flanges or union at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe 





insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainlesssteel 

or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide 

the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of 

mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached 

insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe 

insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe 

insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied 

in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed 

surfaces with a metal jacket. 

K. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, 

except where otherwise indicated. 

3.4 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION 


accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its indented 

purpose. 

B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. 

C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure 


D. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent puncture and 

other damage, 

E. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductwork 

penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. 

F. Cold Ductwork in Mechanical Rooms or Other Non-Conditioned Spaces: To prevent condensation 

from forming on the duct supports, provide one or more of the following: 

1. Install thermal break such as rigid board insulation between the support and duct. 

2. Wrap support that is in contact with the duct with external duct wrap insulation to prevent 

condensation. Wrap shall extend a minimum of 12” from point of contact of the support 

with the duct. Tape joints to provide a thermal and vapor barrier. 

3. If a support device similar to unistrut is used, foam fill or stuff tube. 

G. Corner Angles: Except for oven and hood exhaust duct insulation, install corner angles on 

external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with 

jacketing. 

H. Where rectangular ducts are 24” (600mm) in width or greater, duct wrap shall be additionally 

secured to the bottom of the duct with mechanical fasteners, spaced on 18” (425mm) centers 

(maximum) to prevent sagging of insulation. Fasteners shall include 2-inch square self-sticking 

galvanized carbon-steel base plates with minimum 0.106-inch diameter zinc-coated, low carbon 

steel, fully annealed shank spindle, length to suit depth of insulation. Insulation shall be secured to 

spindles with self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent cap 

retention. 

3.5 EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR 

A. Repair existing mechanical insulation, that is damaged during this construction period. Use 

insulation of same thickness as existing insulation, install new jacket lapping and sealed over 





existing. 


A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor 

barrier damage and moisture saturated units. 

B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work 

during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. Remove insulation 

that has been damaged or gotten wet during shipping, storage or installation. Dry surfaces prior 

to installation of new insulation that replaces the damaged or wet insulation. 





HYDRONIC PIPING Section 232113 – Page 1 

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes piping systems for hot water heating, chilled water cooling, condenser 

water, make-up water for these systems, blow-down drain lines, and condensate drain piping. 

Piping materials and equipment specified in this Section include: 

1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties; 

2. Special duty valves; 

3. Hydronic specialties. 


1. Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC" for materials and methods for wall 

and floor penetrations and equipment pads. 


strainers, flexible connectors and mechanical sleeve seals. 

3. Division 23 Section "General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping," for materials and methods for 

installing hydronic piping valves. 

4. Division 23 Section "Hangers & Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment," for insulation 

shields, saddles and materials and methods for hanging and supporting hydronic piping. 

5. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation," for materials and methods for insulating hydronic 

piping. 

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. General: The hydronic piping systems are the "water-side" of an air-and-water or all-water heating 

and air conditioning system. Hydronic piping systems specified in this Section include 2- or 4- 

pipe, hot water and chilled water piping system. These systems are classified by ASHRAE as 

Low Water Temperature, Forced, Recirculating systems. 

B. 4-Pipe System: The 4-pipe system includes independent chilled water and hot water supply and 

return piping mains in a closed loop, connecting the boilers and chillers to the terminal heat 

transfer units by means of primary/secondary piping loops. Circulation is accomplished by 

constant or variable volume, primary and/or secondary pumps in parallel or series configuration. 

Design flow rates and water temperatures are specified in the various equipment specifications 

and schedules. Control sequences and temperature reset schedules are specified in the 

temperature control specifications. 


A. Product Data, including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and 

operating), furnished specialties and accessories, and installation instructions for each hydronic 

specialty and special duty valve specified. 

1. Furnish flow and pressure drop curves for diverting fittings and circuit balancing valves, 

based on manufacturer's testing. 

B. Maintenance Data for hydronic specialties and special duty valves, for inclusion in operating and 

maintenance manual specified in Division 1 and Division 23 Section "General Mechanical 






C. Welders' certificates certifying that welders comply meet the quality requirements specified in 

Quality Assurance below. 

D. Certification of compliance with ASTM and ANSI manufacturing requirements for pipe, fittings, and 

specialties. 

E. Reports specified in Part 3 of this Section. 


A. Regulatory Requirements: comply with the provisions of the following: 

1. ASME B 31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation. Safety 

valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. 

2. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and 

Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. 

3. ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualification" 

for qualifications for welding processes and operators. 

B. Pipe, pipe fittings and pipe specialties shall be manufactured in plants located in the United States 

or certified to meet the specified ASTM and ANSI standards. 



A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hydronic piping system products 

from one of the following: 

1. Dielectric Unions: 

a. Perfection Corp. 

b. Watts Regulator Co. 

2.2 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS 

A. General: Refer to Part 3 Article "PIPE APPLICATIONS" for identification of where the below 

materials are used. 

B. Drawn Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L. 

C. Steel Pipe: 

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless) or Type F (furnace-butt welded), 

Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends. 

2. NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 10 ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded), Grade B, 

Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends. 

3. NPS 12 through NPS 24 ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded) or Type F 

(furnace-butt welded), Grade B, Schedule STD, black steel, plain ends. 

a. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, black steel; 

seamless for NPS 2 and smaller and electric-resistance welded for NPS 2-1/2 and 

larger. 





2.3 FITTINGS 

A. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern, for threaded joints. 

Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1. 

B. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, for threaded joints. 

Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1. 

C. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, seamless or welded, for welded joints. 

D. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern. 

E. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 125; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced. 

F. Cast Bronze Flanges: ANSI B16.24, Class 150; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced. 

G. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the 

following material group, end connection and facing: 

1. Material Group: 1.1. 

2. End Connections: Butt Welding. 

3. Facings: Raised face. 

H. Unions: ANSI B16.39 malleable-iron, Class 150, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joints, 

metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces; female threaded ends. Threads shall conform to ANSI 

B1.20.1. 

I. Dielectric Unions: Threaded or soldered end connections for the pipe materials in which installed; 

constructed to isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and prevent corrosion. 


A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 Tin-Antimony, for joining copper piping. 

B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg 1 (Silver). 

1. WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly toxic fumes 

when heated. Avoid breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation. 

C. Welding Materials: Comply, with Section II, Part C. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for 

welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being 

welded. 

D. Gasket Material: thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled, and design 

temperatures and pressures. 

2.5 GENERAL DUTY VALVES 

A. General duty valves (i.e., gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves) are specified in Division 23 

Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." Special duty valves are specified below by their 

generic name; refer to Part 3 Article "VALVE APPLICATION" for specific uses and applications for 

each valve specified. 






3.1 PIPE APPLICATIONS 

A. Install Type L, drawn copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and solder joints for 2 inch and 

smaller, above ground, within building. Install Type K, annealed temper copper tubing for 2 inch 

and smaller without joints, below ground or within slabs. 

B. Install steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 2 inch and smaller, and with welded joints for 

2-1/2 inch and larger. 

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS 

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general 

location and arrangement of piping systems. Locations and arrangements of piping take into 

consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design 

considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. 

B. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections. 

C. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, 

unless expressly indicated. 

D. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or 






F. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing 

of valves. 

G. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4" ball 


H. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and 

floors, maintain the fire rated integrity. Refer to Division 7 Section “Penetration Firestopping” for 

special sealers and materials. 

I. Elevated Floor Penetrations of Waterproof Membrane, Interior Penetrations of No-Fire Rated 



Refer to Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC” for special sealers and materials. 

J. Install piping at a uniform grade of 1 inch in 40 feet upward in the direction of flow. 

K. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with the level side up. 

L. Install branch connections to mains using Tee fittings in main with take-off out the bottom of the 

main unless otherwise shown on the drawings, except for up-feed risers which shall have take-off 

out the top of the main line. 

M. Install unions in pipes 2 inch and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections each piece 

of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices. 

N. Install dielectric unions to join dissimilar metals. 





O. Install dielectric waterway fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 

P. Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 inch and larger connections. 

Q. Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to pumps (unless otherwise 

indicated) and other vibration producing equipment. Omit flexible connectors if replaced by series 

of three grooved couplings on projects where grooved pipe is used. 

R. Install strainers on the supply side of each pressure reducing valve, pressure regulating valve, 

pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install nipple and ball valve in blow down connection of 

strainers 2 inch and larger. 

S. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction. 


A. General: Hanger, supports, and anchors devices are specified in Division 23 Section "HANGERS 

AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT." Conform to the table below for 

maximum spacing of supports: 



B. Install the following pipe attachments: 

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length. 

2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or 

longer. 

3. Pipe roller complete - MSS Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs, 20 feet or longer, 

supported on a trapeze. 

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 

5. Provide insulation saddles and protection shields as specified in Section “Hangers & 

Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment”. 

C. Install hangers with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing: 

Nom. Pipe Steel Pipe Copper Tube Min. Rod 

Size - In. Max. Span - Ft. Max. Span - Ft. Dia. - In. 

Up to 3/4 7 5 3/8 

1 7 6 3/8 

1-1/4 7 7 3/8 

1-1/2 9 8 3/8 

2 10 8 1/2 

2-1/2 11 9 1/2 

3 12 10 1/2 

4 14 12 5/8 (1/2 for copper) 

5 16 13 5/8 (1/2 for copper) 

6 17 14 3/4 (5/8 for copper) 

8 19 16 7/8 (3/4 for copper) 

D. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at maximum 15-foot intervals between floors. 

E. Install a support within one foot of each change of direction. 

F. Space supports not more than five feet apart at valves, strainers or piping accessories in piping 

larger than 2”. 





3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION 

A. Soldered Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Soldering Manual." 

B. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual." 

1. CAUTION: Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves and accessible internal parts at 

piping specialties before brazing. 

2. Fill the pipe and fittings during brazing, with an inert gas (ie., nitrogen or carbon dioxide) to 

prevent formation of scale. 

3. Heat joints using oxy-acetylene torch. Heat to proper and uniform temperature. 

C. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe 

fittings and valves as follows: 

1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or 

wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. 

2. Align threads at point of assembly. 

3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry 

seal threading is specified). 

4. Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the 

pipe is being threaded. 

a. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or damaged. 

If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall 

not be used. 

D. Welded Joints: Comply with the requirement in ASME Code B31.9-"Building Services Piping." 

E. Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to 

make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants 

on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench. 


A. General Duty Valve Applications: The Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific 

valve types are not indicated the following requirements apply: 

1. Shut-off duty: use gate, ball, and butterfly valves. 

2. Throttling duty: use globe, ball, and butterfly valves. 

3. Install shut-off duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply 

connection to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 

4. Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return 

connections to each piece of equipment, elsewhere as indicated. 

B. Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and elsewhere as required for 

system drainage. 


A. Preparation for testing: Prepare hydronic piping in accordance with ASME B 31.9 and as follows: 

1. Leave joints including welds uninsulated and exposed for examination during the test. 

2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints which cannot sustain the reactions due 

to test pressure. If temporary restraints are not practical, isolate expansion joints from 

testing. 

3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. 

4. Isolate equipment that is not to be subjected to the test pressure from the piping. If a 





valve is used to isolate the equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against the 

test pressure without damage to the valve. Flanged joints at which blinds are inserted to 

isolate equipment need not be tested. 

5. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than 1/3 higher than the test pressure, to 

protect against damage by expansion of liquid or other source of overpressure during the 

test. 

A. Testing: Test hydronic piping as follows: 

1. Use ambient temperature water as the testing medium, except where there is a risk of 

damage due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workmen and 

compatible with the piping system components. 

2. Use vents installed at high points in the system to release trapped air while filling the 

system. Use drains installed at low points for complete removal of the that liquid. 

3. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand test pressures are 

properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure that it is tight and that low pressure 

filling lines are disconnected. 

4. Subject piping systems other than ground source heat pump loop systems to a hydrostatic 

test pressure which at every point in the system is 1.5 times the maximum system design 

pressure but not less than 100 psi. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum 

pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test. Make a 

check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not 

exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the "SE" value in 

Appendix A of ASME B31.9, Code For Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping. 

5. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 15 minutes, examine 

piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or 

replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 


A. Clean and flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer 

screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping system, but before balancing, remove 

disposable fine mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers. 

B. Mark calibrated name plates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has been 

completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position. 

3.8 STARTUP 

A. Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment. 

B. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the system is completely 

full of water. 

C. Before operating the system perform these steps: 

1. Open valves to full open position. Close coil bypass valves. 

2. Remove and clean strainers. 

3. Check pump for proper direction of correct improper wiring. 

4. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure. 

5. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and operating 

freely (automatic type) or to bleed air completely (manual type). 

6. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 

7. Check operation of automatic bypass valves. 

8. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design 

requirements. 





9. Lubricate motors and bearings. 





METAL DUCTS Section 233113 – Page 1 

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes rectangular metal ducts and plenums for ventilating systems in pressure 

classes from minus 2 inches to plus 10 inches water gauge. 


1. Division 7 Section "Penetrations Firestopping," for materials and methods for fire barrier 

penetrations. 

2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers," for materials and methods for sealing duct penetrations 

through basement and foundation walls. 

3. Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC," for materials and methods for wall 

penetrations and equipment pads. 


A. Sealing Requirements Definitions: For the purposes of duct systems sealing requirements 

specified in this Section, the following definitions apply: 

1. Seams: A seam is defined as joining of two longitudinally (in the direction of airflow) 

oriented edges of duct surface material occurring between two joints. All other duct 

surface connections made on the perimeter are deemed to be joints. 

2. Joints: Joints include girth joints; branch and subbranch intersections; so-called duct 

collar tap-ins; fitting subsections; louver and air terminal connections to ducts; access door 

and access panel frames and jambs; duct, plenum, and casing abutments to building 

structures. 

1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. The duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air moving and 

distribution equipment and other components of the air system. Changes or alterations to the 

layout or configuration of the duct system must be specifically approved in writing. Accompany 

requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that the proposed layout will provide 

the original design results without increasing the system total pressure. 


A. Product data including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual 

components, profiles, and finishes for the following items: 

1. Sealing Materials. 

2. Fire-Stopping Materials. 

B. Shop drawings from duct fabrication shop, drawn to a scale not smaller than 1/4 inch equals 1 

foot, on drawing sheets same size as the Contract Drawings, detailing: 

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation details, including plans, elevations, sections, 

details of components, and attachments to other work. 





2. Duct layout, indicating pressure classifications, duct gauge and sizes in plan view. For 

exhaust ducts systems, indicate the classification of the materials handled as defined in 

this Section. 

3. Fittings. 

4. Reinforcing details and spacing. 

5. Seam and joint construction details. 

6. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 

7. Location of manual balancing dampers. 

8. Duct smoke detector locations. Refer to electrical drawings for general locations and 

coordinate locations with the electrical contractor. 


A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA Standards: 

1. NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," 

except as indicated otherwise. 

B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association, Inc. (SMACNA): Provide 

ductwork systems in conformance with “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible,” 

latest edition. 

C. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL): Provide mastic and tapes that are listed and labeled in 

accordance with UL 181A and marked according to type. 

D. National Air Duct Cleaners Association, Inc. (NADCA): Clean ductwork systems in accordance 

with the standard Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems (ACR 2002). 


A. Protect ductwork during shipping and storage from dirt, debris and moisture damage. Provide 

plastic covers over ends of ductwork during shipping, storage and installation. 


2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS 

A. Sheet Metal, General: Provide sheet metal in thickness indicated (minimum 26 gauge), packaged 

and marked as specified in ASTM A 700. 

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality, ASTM A 653, Coating Designation G 90. Provide 

mill phosphatized or galvanealed finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view that is to be field 

painted. 

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, provide galvanized steel 

reinforcing where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts. For aluminum and stainless steel 

ducts provide reinforcing of compatible materials. 

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-inch 

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 

2.2 SEALING MATERIALS 

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term sealant used here is not limited to materials of 





adhesive or mastic nature, but also includes tapes and combinations of open weave fabric strips 

and mastics. Duct tape shall not be used as a sealant on any ducts. 

B. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide, glass-fiber-reinforced fabric. 

C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral compound and a 

modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with the tape to form a hard, durable, 

airtight seal. 

D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, non-sag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized 

butyl sealant complying with FS TT-S-001657, Type I; formulated with a minimum of 70 percent 

solids. 

E. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: UL 181 Listed and UL 723 classified with flame 

spread/smoke development of less than 25/50. Sealant shall be rated to ±15 inches w.g. Sealant 

shall have a service temperature of –25 to 200 F and be freeze/thaw stable through 5 cycles. 

Approved products: Design Polymerics DP 1010, Ductmate Proseal/Fiberseal, Duro Dyne 

Duroseal, United Duct Sealer (Water Based) and Hardcast 601. 

F. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone elastomeric joint sealants, complying with 

ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O. 

G. Flanged Gasket Tapes: Butyl gasket shall be UL 181 classified with flame spread/smoke 

development of 10/10. Gasket size shall be minimum 5/8” x 3/16” and have nominal 100% solid 

content. It shall be non-oxidizing, non-skinning and have a service temperature of –25 to 180 F. 

Approved products: Design Polymerics DP 1040, Ductmate 440 and Hardcast 1902. 

2.3 FIRE-STOPPING 

A. Fire-Resistant Sealant: Provide two-part, foamed-in-place, fire-stopping silicone sealant 

formulated for use in a through-penetration fire-stop system for filling openings around duct 

penetrations through walls and floors, having fire-resistance ratings indicated as established by 

testing identical assemblies per ASTM E 814 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other testing and 

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Fire-Resistant Sealant: Provide one-part elastomeric sealant formulated for use in a throughpenetration 

fire-stop system for filling openings around duct penetrations through walls and floors, 

having fire-resistance ratings indicated as established by testing identical assemblies per ASTM E 

814 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 

1. "3M Fire Stop Foam"; 3M Corp. 

2. "SPECSEAL Pensil 200 Silicone Foam"; Specify Technology, Inc. 

3. 3M Fire Stop Sealant"; 3M Corp. 

4. "3M Fire Barrier Caulk CP-25"; Electrical Products Div./3M. 

5. "Fyre Putty"; Standard Oil Engineered Materials Co. 


A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder actuated fasteners, or structural steel fasteners 

appropriate for building materials. Do not use powder actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight 

aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 

B. Hangers: Galvanized sheet steel, or round, uncoated steel, threaded rod. 

1. Hangers Installed In Corrosive Atmospheres: Electro-galvanized, all-thread rod or hot- 





dipped-galvanized rods with threads painted after installation. 

2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Conform with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 2005 

Edition, for sheet steel width and gauge and steel rod diameters. 

C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with 

duct materials. 

D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes conforming to ASTM A 36. 

1. Where galvanized steel ducts are installed, provide hot-dipped-galvanized steel shapes 

and plates. 

2. For stainless steel ducts, provide stainless steel support materials. 

3. For aluminum ducts, provide aluminum support materials, except where materials are 

electrolytically separated from ductwork. 

2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION 

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate rectangular ducts with galvanized sheet steel, 

in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 2005 Edition, Tables 2-1 

through 2-28, including their associated details. Conform to the requirements in the referenced 

standard for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie rod applications, and joint types 

and intervals. 

1. Fabricate rectangular ductwork of minimum 26 gauge sheet metal. 

2. Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class 

required for pressure classification. 

3. Provide materials that are free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, 

roller marks, stains, and discolorations. 

B. Crossbreaking or Cross Beading: Crossbreak or bead duct sides that are 19 inches and larger 

and are 20 gauge or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of unbraced panel area, as indicated in 

SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 2005 Edition, Figure 2-9, unless they are lined or 

are externally insulated. 

2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCT FITTINGS 

A. Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other duct construction in 

accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Metal Duct Construction Standard," 2005 Edition, Figures 4-1 

through 4-8. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, provide prefabricated 45 degree, high 

efficiency, rectangular/round branch duct takeoff fittings with manual balancing damper and 

locking quadrant for branch duct connections and take-offs to individual diffusers, registers and 

grilles. 

B. Provide radius elbows, turns, and offsets with a minimum centerline radius of 1-1/2 times the duct 

width. Where space does not permit full radius elbows, provide short radius elbows with a 

minimum of two continuous splitter vanes. Vanes shall be the entire length of the bend. 

C. Provide mitered elbows where space does not permit radius elbows, where shown on the 

drawings, or at the option of the contractor with the engineer’s approval. The contractor shall 

obtain approval to substitute mitered elbows in lieu of radius elbows prior to fitting fabrication. 

Mitered elbows less than 45 degrees shall not require turning vanes. Mitered elbows 45-degrees 

and greater shall have single thickness turning vanes of same material and gauge as ductwork, 

rigidly fastened with guide strips in ductwork. Vanes for mitered elbows shall be provided in all 

supply and exhaust ductwork and in return and outside air ductwork that has an air velocity 

exceeding 1000 fpm. Do not install vanes in grease ductwork. Refer to Section “Ductwork 

Accessories” for turning vane construction and mounting. 






3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS 

A. All ducts shall be galvanized steel. 

3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Duct System Pressure Class: Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct 

pressure classification indicated. 

1. Exhaust Air Ducts: 2 inches water gauge, negative pressure. 

B. Install ducts with the fewest possible joints. 

C. Use fabricated fittings for all changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections. 

D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with projections into duct at connections kept to a 

minimum. 

E. Locate ducts, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular 

to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. Install duct systems in shortest route that does not obstruct 

useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. 

F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent 

enclosure elements of building. 

G. Cover ducts openings during construction with duct caps or three-mil plastic to protect inside of 

(installed and delivered) ductwork from exposure to dust, dirt, paint and moisture. Do not use duct 

tape on ducts that will be exposed or painted. 

H. Provide clearance of 1 inch where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, plus 

allowance for insulation thickness, if any. 

I. Install insulated ducts with 1-inch clearance outside of insulation. 

J. Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow 

wall construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, 

except as specifically shown. 

K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work. 

L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and 

electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. 

M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass interior partitions and exterior walls, 

and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation 

with sheet metal flanges of same gauge as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 

inches. 

3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING 

A. General: Seal duct seams and joints as follows: 





1. Pressure Classification Less than or equal to 2 Inches Water Gauge: Transverse joints 

only to meet SMANCA Seal Class C. 

B. Seal externally insulated ducts prior to insulation installation. 

3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING 

A. Install rigid, rectangular metal duct with support systems indicated in Chapter 5 of the SMACNA 

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards", 2005 Edition. 

B. Support horizontal ducts within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of each branch intersection. 

C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor. 

D. Upper attachments to structures shall have an allowable load not exceeding 1/4 of the failure 

(proof test) load but are not limited to the specific methods indicated. Hangers and supports shall 

be fastened to building joists or beams. Do not attach hangers and supports to the above floor 

slab or roof with sheet metal screws. 

E. Install concrete insert prior to placing concrete. 


A. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where ducts pass though fire-rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and 

floors, maintain the fire-rated integrity. 

B. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal duct penetrations through exterior wall constructions with 

sleeves, packing, and sealant. Refer to Division 23 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and 

Methods” for additional information. 


A. Equipment Connections: Connect equipment with flexible connectors in accordance with Division 

23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." 

B. Branch Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 2005 Edition, 

Figures 4-5 and 4-6. 

C. Outlet and Inlet Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 2005 

Edition, Figures 7-6 and 7-7. 

D. Fan Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," 2005 Edition, 

Figure 7-8. 


A. Adjust volume control devices as required by the testing and balancing procedures to achieve 

required air flow. Refer to Division 23 Section "TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR 

HVAC" for requirements and procedures for adjusting and balancing air systems. 

B. Vacuum duct systems prior to final acceptance to remove dust and debris. 





AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Section 233300 – Page 1 

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Extent of ductwork accessories work is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by 

requirements of this Section. 

B. Types of ductwork accessories required for project include the following: 

1. Dampers. 

a. Low pressure manual dampers. 

b. Counterbalanced relief dampers. 

2. Turning vanes. 

3. Duct hardware. 

4. Flexible connections. 

C. Refer to other Division 23 Sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of ductwork accessories; 

not work of this Section. 


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork accessories, 

of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for 

not less than 3 years. 

B. Codes and Standards: 

1. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct 

Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible", 2005 Edition. 

2. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction of 

ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated. 

3. UL Compliance: 

a. Construct flexible ductwork in compliance with UL Standard 181 “Factory-Made Air 

Ducts and Connections”. 

b. Duct tape shall be labeled in accordance with UL Standard 181B and marked 

181B-FX. Non-metallic duct clamps shall be labeled in accordance with UL 

Standard 181B and marked 181B-C. 

4. NFPA Compliance: 

a. Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating 

Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories. Comply with NFPA 

90B “Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning 

Systems. 

5. ASTM Compliance: Products shall have flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke- 





developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 “Surface Burning Characteristics” 

(NFPA 255) method. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork accessory 

including dimensions, capacities and materials of construction; and installation instructions. 

Submit performance data for duct silencers including insertion loss performance in octave bands 

from 63 Hz to 8,000 Hz and pressure drop at specified airflow. 

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of ductwork 

accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fastening or support, and 

methods of assembly of components. 

C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type of 

duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in 

accordance with requirements of Division 1. 


2.1 DAMPERS 

A. Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or multi-blade type, 

constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards". 

B. Counterbalanced Relief Dampers: Provide dampers with parallel blades, counterbalanced and 

factory-set to relieve at indicated static pressure. Construct frames and blades of minimum 16-ga 

aluminum. Provide minimum 1/2" diameter, corrosion-resistant bearings and 1/2" diameter, 

galvanized or stainless steel axles. Blade edge seals shall be mechanically locked into blade 

edge. 

C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dampers of one of the following: 

1. Air Balance, Inc. 

2. Arrow United Industries. 

3. Cesco 

4. Greenheck 

5. Louvers & Dampers, Inc. 

6. Nailor Industries, Inc. 

7. Pottorff 

8. Ruskin Mfg. Co. 

9. Vent Products 

2.2 TURNING VANES 

A. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes and runners fabricated from galvanized 

sheet metal, lock-forming quality, ASTM A 653, minimum Coating Designation G 60, of the same 

gauge thickness or greater as the ductwork in which they are installed. Vanes shall be rigidly 

fastened with guide strips to minimize noise and vibration. Vanes in ductwork over 30" deep shall 

be installed in multiple sections with vanes not over 30" long and shall be rigidly fastened. Turning 

vanes shall be constructed per SMACNA Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible – 2005 

Edition, Figure 4-3 and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork. 

B. Acoustical Turning Vanes: Provide acoustical turning vanes constructed of airfoil shaped 

aluminum extrusion with perforated faces and fiberglass fill in systems serving noise critical 

spaces. Refer to Section “Common Work Results for HVAC”. 





C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide turning vanes of one of the 

following: 

1. Aero Dyne Co. 

2. Anemostat Products Div.; Dynamics Corp. of America. 

3. Ductmate, Ind. 

4. Duro Dyne Corp. 

1. Elgen Manufacturing Co., Inc. 

2. Hart & Cooley Mfg. Co. 

3. Register & Grille Mfg. Co., Inc. 

4. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. 

2.3 DUCT HARDWARE 

A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project, for 


1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated, duct 

test holes, consisting of slot and cover, for instrument tests. 

2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft; and 

end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended quadrant 

locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork. 

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct hardware of one of the 

following: 



3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 

4. Young Regulator Co. 

2.4 DUCT ACCESS DOORS 

A. General: Provide, where indicated on the drawings or where specified in Part 3 of this section, 

duct access doors of size allowable by duct dimensions with, unless otherwise noted on the 

drawings, minimum size of 10” by 10” and maximum size of 24” by 24”. Provide removable 

section of duct where duct size is too small for a 10” by 10” access door. Construct access doors 

in accordance with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible” and as 

specified herein. Label access doors for fire and smoke dampers as specified in Paragraph 

“Installation of Ductwork Accessories. 

B. Construction: Construct of same or greater gage as ductwork served, provide insulated doors for 

insulated ductwork. Provide flush frames for uninsulated ductwork, extended frames for externally 

insulated duct. Provide one size hinged, other side with one handle-type latch for doors 12" high 

and smaller, 2 handle-type latches for larger doors. 

C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct access doors of one of the 

following: 

1. Air Balance Inc. 



4. Register & Grille Mfg. Co., Inc. 

5. Ruskin Mfg. Co. 

6. Ventifabrics, Inc. 

7. Vent Products. 

8. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Air Systems Div. 





2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS 

A. General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated 

equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct 

flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint 

flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of 

absorbing vibration of connected equipment. 

B. Flexible connectors shall have flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 

or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. 

C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible connections of one of the 

following: 

1. American/Elgen Co.; Energy Div. 

2. ATCO Rubber Products, Inc. 



5. Flexaust (The) Co. 

6. Ventfabrics, Inc. 


3.1 INSPECTION 

A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not 

proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to 

Installer. 

3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 

A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with 

applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance 

with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function. 

B. Provide balancing dampers at branch takeoffs from main ducts. Unless otherwise noted on 

drawings, provide prefabricated 45 degree, high efficiency, rectangular/round branch duct takeoff 

fittings with manual balancing damper and locking quadrant for branch duct connections and takeoffs 

to individual diffusers, registers and grilles. 

C. Provide turning vanes, of same gauge as ductwork, rigidly fastened with guide strips in ductwork 

having an offset of 45 degrees or more. Vanes shall be provided in all supply and exhaust 

ductwork and in return and outside air ductwork that has an air velocity exceeding 1000 fpm. Do 

not install vanes in grease ductwork. 

D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of ductwork 

accessories properly with other work. 


A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air 

leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain 

proper operation and leakproof performance. 






A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings. 

B. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division-23 section "Testing, Adjusting, and 

Balancing for HVAC". 

C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with 

manufacturer's touch-up paint. 





CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS Section 233416 – Page 1 

SECTION 233416 - CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following types of centrifugal fans: 

1. Inline centrifugal fans 



Specification Sections: 

1. Product data for selected models, including specialties, accessories, and the following: 

a. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 

b. Certified fan sound power ratings. 

c. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories. For 

fans with factory-furnished starters or variable frequency drives, include short 

circuit current ratings. 

d. Materials gages and finishes, including color charts. 

e. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 

2. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating 

dimensions, weights, required clearances, components, and location and size of field 

connections. 

3. Wiring diagrams that detail power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between 

manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring. 

4. Product certificates, signed by manufacturers of centrifugal fans, certifying that their 

products comply with specified requirements. 

5. Maintenance data for air-handling units, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance 

Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 23 Section "General Mechanical 



A. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are licensed to 

use the AMCA Seal. 

B. UL Compliance: Fans and components shall be UL listed and labeled. 

C. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Fans and components 

shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 

1910.7. 

D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. 

E. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 

"National Electrical Code." 





1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 

A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad. 

B. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members. 


A. Furnish one additional complete set of belts for each belt-driven fan. 




following: 

1. Inline Centrifugal Fans: 

a. Acme Engrg. & Mfg. Corp. 

b. Barry Blower 

c. Carnes Company, Inc. 

d. Cook (Loren) Co. 

e. Greenheck Fan Corp. 

f. PennBarry. 

g. Twin City Fan Company 

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required: 

1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for Calculating 

Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans in accordance with AMCA 

Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating." Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA 

Certified Sound Ratings Seal. 

2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of 

rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in accordance with AMCA Standard 

210/ASHRAE Standard 51 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. 

2.3 FANS, GENERAL 

A. General: Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory 

finished, with indicated capacities and characteristics. 

B. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at 

the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. 

1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel, designed to operate at no more than 70 

percent of the first critical speed at the top of the speed range of the fan's class. 

C. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 

1. Service Factor: 1.4. 





D. Belts: Oil-resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic. 

E. Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 15 HP; fixed pitch for 

use with motors larger than 15 HP. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at the middle of the 

adjustment range at fan design conditions. 

1. Belt Guards: Provide steel belt guards for motors mounted on the outside of the fan 

cabinet. 

F. Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median life "Rating Life" (AFBMA L(50)) of 

200,000, calculated in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9 for ball bearings and AFBMA Standard 

11 for roller bearings. 

G. Factory Finish: The following finishes are required: 

1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coating prior to final assembly. 

2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly. 

2.4 INLINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS 

A. General Description: Inline, belt-driven, centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet guide 

vanes, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly, motor and disconnect switch, mounting brackets, and 

accessories. 

B. Housing: Split, spun-aluminum housing, with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet 

flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting. 

C. Belt-Drive Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure around 

belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of fan 

housing. 

D. Wheel: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub. 

E. Accessories: Provide the following accessories as indicated: 

1. Volume Control Damper: Manual operated with quadrant lock, located in fan outlet. 

2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections. 

3. Fan Guards: Expanded metal in removable frame. 

4. Speed Control: Variable speed switch with on-off control and speed control for 100 to 50 

percent of fan air delivery. 

2.5 MOTORS 

A. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate the driven loads satisfactorily. 

B. Motor Sizes: Minimum sizes and characteristics as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so 

that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor range. 

C. Temperature Rating: 90 deg C maximum temperature rise at 40 deg C ambient for continuous 

duty at full load (Class B Insulation). 

D. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors. Provide permanentsplit 

capacitor classification motors for shaft-mounted fans and capacitor start classification for 

belted fans. 

E. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B. 





1. Bases: Adjustable. 

2. Bearings: The following features are required: 

a. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals. 

b. Grease lubricated. 

c. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral 

or axial thrust in motor. 

3. Enclosure Type: The following features are required: 

a. Open drip-proof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during 

operation. 

b. Guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building 

occupants. 

4. Overload protection: Built-in, automatic reset, thermal overload protection. 

5. Noise rating: Quiet. 

6. Efficiency: Energy-efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in 

accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. If efficiency not specified, motors 

shall have a higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors" in accordance with 

IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. 

7. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, 

construction, and special features. 

F. Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Starters, electrical devices and connections are specified 

in Division 26. 



A. Install fans level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Support units 

as described below, using the vibration control devices indicated. Vibration control devices are 

specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration Isolation for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 

1. Support floor-mounted units on concrete equipment bases using neoprene pads. Secure 

units to anchor bolts installed in concrete equipment base. 

2. Support floor-mounted units on concrete equipment bases using housed spring isolators. 

Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete equipment base. 

3. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel 

rods and vibration isolation springs. 

B. Arrange installation to provide access space around fans for service and maintenance. 

3.2 EQUIPMENT BASES 

A. Construct concrete equipment pads in accordance with Division 23 Section “Common Work 

Results for HVAC”. 

3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING 

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 

B. Clean the entire unit including cabinet interiors just prior to substantial completion to remove 

foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet. 





3.4 STARTUP 

A. Final checks before start-up: Perform the following operations and checks before start-up: 

1. Remove shipping, blocking, and bracing. 

2. Verify fan assembly is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections 

for ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify proper thermal overload protection is 

installed in motors, starters, and disconnects. 

3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section. 

4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan 

wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align 

belts, and install belt guards. 

5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended 

lubricants. 

6. Verify manual and automatic volume control and that fire and smoke dampers in 

connected ductwork systems are in the full-open position. 

7. Disable automatic temperature control operators. 

B. Starting procedures for fans: 

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan 

to indicated RPM. 

a. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. 

b. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage. 

c. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature control operators. 

d. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for 

procedures for air-handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing. 


A. Demonstration Services: Train Owner's maintenance personnel on the following: 

1. Procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, 

preventative maintenance, and how to obtain replacement parts. 

2. Familiarization with contents of Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division 

1 Section "Closeout Procedures" and Division 23 Section "General Mechanical 


B. Schedule training with at least 7 days' advance notice. 





DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES Section 233713 – Page 1 

SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Extent of air outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by requirements 

of this Section. 

B. Types of outlets and inlets required for project include the following: 

1. Ceiling air diffusers. 

C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for ductwork and duct accessories required in conjunction with 

air outlets and inlets; not work of this Section. 

D. Refer to other Division 23 sections for balancing of air outlets and inlets; not work of this Section. 


A. Codes and Standards: 

1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650 

"Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets". 

2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70 

"Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets". 

3. ADC Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in certified laboratories under 

requirements of ADC 1062 "Certification, Rating and Test Manual". 

4. ADC Seal: Provide air outlets and inlets bearing ADC Certified Rating Seal. 

5. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A "Standard 

for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems". 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets including the 

following: 

1. Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location, number 

furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 

2. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating 

construction, finish, and mounting details. 

3. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration ability, 

temperature and velocity traverses; throw and drop; and noise criteria ratings at specified 

airflows. Indicate selections on data. 

4. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air 

outlet and inlet, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components. 

5. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, 

and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance 

manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. 

B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn to scale to show 

locations and coordination of diffusers, registers, and grilles with other items installed in ceilings 

and walls. 






A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 3 operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet that require 

them. 


2.1 CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS 

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard ceiling air diffusers 

where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and 

components as indicated, and provided with accessories as required for a complete installation. 

B. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity 

traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in 

manufacturer's current data. 

C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling 

systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and 

adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling 

systems which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser. 

D. Linear Slot Diffusers: Slot diffusers shall be standard one-piece lengths up to 6-feet and shall be 

furnished in multiple sections greater than 6-feet. Multiple sections shall be joined together endto-end 

with alignment pins to form a continuous slot appearance. All alignment components shall 

be provided by the manufacturer. Plenums shall be manufactured by the slot diffuser 

manufacturer. Plenums shall be internally insulated, by the manufacturer, with minimum ¼” thick, 

closed-cell insulation. Insulation shall not be made of fibrous material. 

E. Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as scheduled 

on the drawings. 

F. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide diffusers of one of the following: 

1. Carnes Co.; Div. of Wehr Corp. 

2. E.H. Price Industries. 

3. Krueger Mfg. Co. 

4. Nailor Industries, Inc. 

5. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc. 

6. Tuttle & Bailey; Div. of Interpace Corp. 

2.2 REGISTERS AND GRILLES 

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard registers and grilles 

where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and 

components as indicated, and provided with accessories as required for a complete installation. 

B. Performance: Provide wall registers and grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity 

traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device and listed in 

manufacturer's current data. 

C. Types: Provide registers and grilles of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as 

scheduled on the drawings. 

D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide registers and grilles of one of 






1. E.H. Price Industries. 

2. Krueger Mfg. Co. 

3. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc. 

4. Tuttle & Bailey; Div. of Interpace Corp. 


3.1 INSPECTION 

A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed for compliance 

with installation tolerances and conditions that would affect the performance of the equipment. Do 

not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, 

design drawings, referenced standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to 

insure that products serve intended function. 

B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, to interface installation of air 

outlets and inlets with other work. 

C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction "Reflected 

Ceiling Plans". Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling module. 

3.3 ADJUSTING 

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, 

before beginning air balance. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed 

surfaces to remove dirt and smudges. Replace any air device that has damaged finishes. 





ELECTRIC HEATING UNITS Section 238500 – Page 1 

SECTION 238500 - ELECTRIC HEATING UNITS 


1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: 

A. Commercial Electric Fintube Convectors 


A. Submit Shop Drawings as required by Division 1. 

B. Submit product data for each type and size of electric heater. 

C. Shop Drawings shall indicate volts, phase, watts and all options that are to be provided. 

D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating clearly between 

manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 

E. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of electric resistance heating units including 

plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. 

F. Color Samples: Submit color samples for each type of cabinet finish furnished for Architect 

selection. 

G. Maintenance data for electric resistance heaters to include in the operation and maintenance 

manual specified in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions for cleaning. 

1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing radiant heating panels 

similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service 

performance. 

B. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation. 

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. 

D. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose 

intended. 


2.1 GENERAL 

A. Provide electric heaters of voltage, size and capacity as indicated on the Drawings. 

B. Electric heaters shall be designed for a single circuit supply and provided with a single integral, 

factory-mounted power disconnect switch. Heating elements, motor and control circuits shall be 





subdivided and fused. 

C. Elements shall consist of helically coiled nickel chromium alloy resistance wire embedded and 

completely surrounded in magnesium oxide, enclosed in corrosion resistant sheaths and 

permanently attached to corrosion resistant steel fins. 

D. Motors shall be totally enclosed industrial type, permanently lubricated and equipped with thermal 

overload protection with automatic reset. Motors shall be mounted on a heavy gauge formed 

metal bracket. After the thermostat has been satisfied, the fan shall continue to run until residual 

heat has been dissipated. 

E. Electric heaters shall be equipped with an automatic reset thermal cutout which disconnects 

elements and motors in the event normal operating temperatures are exceeded. 

F. Contactors, relays and control transformers shall be factory assembled and wired. 

G. Provide 24 volt factory wired thermostat. 

2.2 COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC FINTUBE CONVECTORS 

A. Enclosures shall be 16 gauge steel, nominally 5-1/2” tall x 3” wide with a 14 gauge grille. The 

color shall be as selected by the Architect. Provide tamper proof hardware for all removable 

covers. 

B. Air inlet shall be through the bottom and the air discharge shall be through the top. 

C. Convectors shall be provided with a continuous raceway, equivalent to a 3/4” conduit, the entire 

length of the enclosure. Conductors shall be suitable for the temperatures encountered. 

D. Provide blank sections, corner and end caps as required. All sections shall be factory fabricated, 

no section shall be field fabricated. Fintube convectors shall be continuous from wall to wall, 

unless noted otherwise. 

E. Where indicated, the convector shall have a blank section for a duplex receptacle. Receptacles 

shall not be wired to the same circuit as the convector Receptacles shall match other wiring 

devices and shall be field installed. 

F. Pedestals shall be square nominally 3-1/2” tall and shall be hollow to allow feeder to enter from 

below. 

G. Wall mounted electric fintube convectors shall be: 

1. Berko AS series 

2. Erincraft EFT series 

3. Markel WB81 series 

4. Q Mark DSH series 

5. Raywall DBCT series 

6. Redd-i Products DBCT series 

7. Vulcan 6TW series 

H. Wall mounted convectors shall be mounted 3-1/2” above the floor. 







A. Verify conditions are acceptable prior to beginning installation. 


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

B. Locate each unit in the position indicated. 

C. Install units with sufficient clearance from adjacent construction, piping, ductwork and other 

obstructions to allow access for service and maintenance. 

D. Install flush units tight to the wall. The unit trim shall cover the opening. 


A. Verify operation of each electric heating unit by measuring input voltage and current 

simultaneously for period of ten minutes of continuous operation. 


A. Demonstrate location and setting procedures for thermostats and other heating controls. 





GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260010 – Page 1 

SECTION 260010 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 




Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section and to all following 

sections within Division 26. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Division requires providing complete functioning systems, and each element thereof, as 

specified, indicated, or reasonably inferred, on the Drawings and in these Specifications, including 

every article, device, or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably 

necessary to facilitate each system’s functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment 

specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to, materials, labor, supervision, 

supplies, tools, equipment, transportation and utilities. 

B. Division 26 of these Specifications, and Drawings numbered with prefixes E, generally describe 

these systems, but the scope of the electrical Work includes all such Work indicated in all of the 

Contract Documents, including, but not limited to: Instructions to Bidders; Proposal Form; General 

Conditions; Supplementary General Conditions; Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Plumbing 

and Electrical Drawings and Specifications; and Addenda. 

C. Drawings are graphic representations of the Work upon which the Contract is based. They show 

the materials and their relationship to one another, including sizes, shapes, locations, and 

connections. They also convey the scope of Work, indicating the intended general arrangement 

of the equipment, fixtures, outlets and circuits without showing all of the exact details as to 

elevations, offsets, control lines, and other installation requirements. Use the Drawings as a guide 

when laying out the Work and to verify that materials and equipment will fit into the designated 

spaces, and which, when installed per manufacturers' requirements, will ensure a complete, 

coordinated, satisfactory and properly operating system. 

D. Specifications define the qualitative requirements for products, materials, and workmanship upon 

which the Contract is based. 


A. Execute all Work under this Division in a thorough and professional manner by competent and 

experienced workmen duly trained to perform the Work specified. 

B. Install all Work in strict conformance with all manufacturers' requirements and recommendations, 

unless these Documents exceed those requirements. Install all equipment and materials in a neat 

and professional manner, aligned, leveled, and adjusted for satisfactory operation, in accordance 

with NECA guidelines. 

C. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, provide all material and equipment new, of the best 

quality and design, free from defects and imperfections and with markings or a nameplate 

identifying the manufacturer and providing sufficient reference to establish quality, size and 

capacity. Provide all material and equipment of the same type from the same manufacturer 

whenever practicable. 

D. Unless specified otherwise, manufactured items of the same types specified within this Division 

shall have been installed and used, without modification, renovation, or repair for not less than 





one year prior to date of bidding for this Project. 


A. Execute all Work in accordance with, and comply at a minimum with, National Fire Protection 

Association (NFPA) codes, state and local building codes, and all other applicable codes and 

ordinances in force, governing the particular class of Work involved, for performance, 

workmanship, equipment, and materials. Additionally, comply with rules and regulations of public 

utilities and municipal departments affected by connection of services. Where conflicts between 

various codes, ordinances, rules, and regulations exist, comply with the most stringent. Wherever 

requirements of these Specifications, Drawings, or both, exceed those of the above items, the 

requirements of these Specifications, Drawings, or both, shall govern. Code compliance, at a 

minimum, is mandatory. Construe nothing in these Construction Documents as permitting work 

not in compliance, at a minimum, with these codes. Bring all conflicts observed between codes, 

ordinances, rules, regulations and these documents to the Architect’s and Engineer’s attention in 

sufficient time, prior to the opening of Bids, to prepare the Supplementary Drawings and 

Specifications Addenda required to resolve the conflict. 

B. If the conflict is not reported timely, prior to the opening of bids, resolve the conflict and provide 

the installation in accordance with the governing codes and to the satisfaction of the Architect and 

Engineer, without additional compensation. Contractor will be held responsible for any violation of 

the law. 

C. Obtain timely inspections by the constituted authorities having jurisdiction; and, upon final 

completion of the Work, obtain and deliver to the Owner executed final certificates of acceptance 

from these authorities having jurisdiction. 

D. All material, manufacturing methods, handling, dimensions, methods of installation and test 

procedures shall conform to industry standards, acts, and codes, including, but not limited to the 

following, except where these Drawings and Specifications exceed them: 

IBC International Building Code 

ADA Americans with Disabilities Act 

AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies 

ANSI American National Standards Institute 

ASTM American Society of Testing Materials 

AWS American Welding Society 

AWWA American Water Works Association 

CSA/USA Canadian Standards Association/USA 

ICEA Insulated Conductors Engineers Association 

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 

IES Illuminating Engineering Society 

NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters 

NEC National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 

NECA National Electrical Contractors Association 

NEMA National Electrical Manufactures' Association 

NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association 

NFPA National Fire Protection Association 

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act 

UL Underwriter's Laboratories 

E. Comply with rules and regulations of public utilities and municipal departments affected by 

connections of services. 

F. Perform all electrical work in compliance with applicable safety regulations, including OSHA 

regulations. All safety lights, guards, and warning signs required for the performance of the 

electrical work shall be provided by the Contractor. 

G. Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses and fees that are required by the governing authorities for 

the performance of the electrical work. 






A. Whenever used in these Specifications or Drawings, the following terms shall have the indicated 

meanings: 

1. Furnish: “To supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, 

assembling, installing, and similar operations.” 

2. Install: “To perform all operations at the project site, including, but not limited to, and as 

required: unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, 

working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, testing, commissioning, 

starting up and similar operations, complete, and ready for the intended use.” 

3. Provide: “To furnish and install complete, and ready for the intended use.” 

4. Furnished by Owner (or Owner-Furnished) or Furnished by Others: “An item furnished by 

the Owner or under other Divisions or Contracts, and installed under the requirements of 

this Division, complete, and ready for the intended use, including all items and services 

incidental to the Work necessary for proper installation and operation. Include the 

installation under the warranty required by this Division. 








Work. 





intended to restrict the use of other NRTLs that are acceptable to the AHJ, and standards 

that meet the specified criteria. 





C. Manufacturers: The listing of specific manufacturers does not imply acceptance of their products 

that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed are not 

relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 


A. Coordinate with other Divisions for electrical work included in them but not listed in Division 26 or 

indicated on electrical Drawings. 

B. Visit the site and ascertain the conditions to be encountered in installing the Work under this 

Division, verify all dimensions and locations before purchasing equipment or commencing work, 

and make due provisions for same in the bid. Failure to comply with this requirement shall not be 

considered justification for omission, alteration, and incorrect or faulty installation of any of the 

Work under this Division or for additional compensation for any Work covered by this Division. 

C. Refer to Drawings and Divisions of the other trades and to relevant equipment drawings and shop 

drawings to determine the extent of clear spaces. Make all offsets required to clear equipment, 

beams and other structural members, and to facilitate concealing conduit in the manner 

anticipated in the design. 

D. Provide materials with trim that will fit properly the types of ceiling, wall, or floor finishes actually 

installed. 





E. Maintain an electrical foreman on the jobsite at all times to coordinate this Work with other trades 

so that various components of the electrical systems is installed at the proper time, fits the 

available space, and allows proper service access to all equipment. Carry on the Work in such a 

manner that the Work of the other trades will not be handicapped, hindered, or delayed at any 

time. 

F. Work of this Division shall progress according to the "Construction Schedule" as described in 

Division 01 and as approved by the Architect. Cooperate in establishing these schedules and 

perform the Work under this Division, in a timely manner in conformance with the construction 

schedule so as to ensure successful achievement of all schedule dates. 


A. The Drawings are schematic in nature, but show the various components of the systems 


Work. Figured dimensions take precedence to scaled dimensions. Determine exact locations by 

job measurements, by checking the requirements of other trades, and by reviewing all Contract 

Documents. Correct, at no additional costs to the Owner, errors that could have been avoided by 

proper checking and inspection. 


A. Refer to Division 01 and General Conditions for submittal requirements. 

B. Submittals and shop drawings shall not contain HEI’s firm name or logo, nor shall it contain the 



information at the end of this section must be used. 

C. Assemble and submit for review, manufacturers product literature for material and equipment to 

be furnished, installed, or both, under this Division, including shop drawings, manufacturers’ 

product data and performance sheets, samples, and other submittals required by this Division . 

Provide the number of submittals required by Division 01; however, at a minimum, submit seven 

(7) sets. 

D. Provide submittals in sufficient detail so as to demonstrate compliance with these Contract 

Documents and the design concept. Highlight, mark, list or indicate the materials, performance 

criteria and accessories that are being proposed. 

E. Refer to individual Sections for additional submittal requirements. 

F. Transmit submittals as early as required to support the project schedule. Allow for two weeks 

Engineer review time, plus to/from mailing time via the Architect, plus a duplication of this time for 

resubmittals, if required. Transmit submittals as soon as possible after Notice to Proceed and 

before construction starts. 

G. Before transmitting submittals and material lists, verify that the equipment submitted is mutually 

compatible with and suitable for the intended use. Verify that the equipment will fit the available 

space and allow ample room for maintenance. If the size of equipment furnished makes 

necessary any change in location, or configuration, submit a shop drawing showing the proposed 

layout. 

H. Submittals shall contain the following information. Submittals not so identified will be returned to 

the Contractor without action: 


2. The applicable Specification Section and paragraph. 






4. The Contractor's stamp, which shall certify that the stamped drawings have been checked 

by the Contractor, comply with the Drawings and Specifications, and have been 


I. Refer to Division 1 for acceptance of electronic submittals for this project. For electronic 




the website, user name and password information needed to access the submittals. For 

submittals sent by e-mail, Contractor shall copy the Architect and Engineer’s designated 

representatives. Contractor shall allow the Engineer review time as specified above in the 

construction schedule. Contractor shall submit only the documents required to purchase the 

materials and/or equipment in the electronic submittal and shall clearly indicate the materials, 

performance criteria and accessories being proposed. General product catalog data not 

specifically noted to be part of the specified product will be rejected and returned without review. 

J. The Engineer’s checking and subsequent acceptance of such submittals shall not relieve the 

Contractor from responsibility for deviations from Drawings or Specifications unless he has, in 

writing, called the Engineer’s and Architect’s attention to such deviations at the time of 

submission, and secured written acceptance; nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors 

in dimensions, details, sizes of members, or quantities; or for omissions of components or fittings; 

or for not coordinating items with actual building conditions and adjacent work. 


A. In preparation of shop drawings or record drawings, Contractor may, at his option, obtain 

electronic drawing files in AutoCAD or DXF format from the Engineer for a shipping and handling 

fee of $200 for a drawing set up to 12 sheets and $15 per sheet for each additional sheet. 

Contact the Architect for Architect’s written authorization. Contractor shall complete and send the 

form attached at the end of this section along with a check made payable to Henderson 

Engineers, Inc. Contractor shall indicate the desired shipping method and drawing format on the 

attached form. In addition to payment, Architect’s written authorization and Engineer’s release 

agreement form must be received before electronic drawing files will be sent. 


A. Refer to Bid documents, General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification 

Sections for limitations and restrictions on substitutions. 

B. Materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of 


C. No substitutions will be considered with receipt of Bids, unless the Architect and Engineer have 

received from the Bidder a written request for approval to bid a substitution at least ten calendar 

days prior to the date for receipt of Bids, and have approved the substitution request. Include, 

with each such request, the name of the material or equipment for which substitution is being 

requested, and a complete description of the proposed substitution, including drawings, cut 

sheets, performance and test data, and all other information necessary for an evaluation. Include 

also a statement setting forth changes in other materials, equipment or other work that would be 

required to incorporate the substitution. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed 

substitute is upon the proposer. The Architect's or Engineer’s decision to approve or disapprove a 

substitution in a Bid is final. 

D. If the proposed substitution is approved prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be stated in an 

Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner, including verbal. 

E. No substitutions will be considered after receipt of Bids and before award of the Contract. 

F. No substitutions will be considered after the Contract is awarded unless specifically provided in 





the Contract Documents. 

1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 

A. Refer to Division 01 and General Conditions for Operation and Maintenance Data. 

B. Submit data prior to requesting the final punch list and before all requests for Substantial 

Completion. 

C. Instruct the Owner's permanent personnel in the proper operation of, startup and shutdown 

procedures and maintenance of the equipment and components of the systems installed under 


D. Prior to Substantial Completion of the project, furnish to the Architect, for Engineer’s review, and 

for the Owner’s use, four (4) copies of brochures in three-ring, loose-leaf, hard-back notebook 

form, divided and tabbed, containing equipment data, approved submittals, shop drawings, 

diagrams, capacities, spare part numbers, manufacturer’s service and maintenance data, 

warranties, guarantees, etc. Include local contacts complete with address and telephone number, 

for equipment, apparatus, and system components furnished and installed under this Division of 

the specifications. 


A. Provide to the Owner the spare parts specified in the individual sections of this Division. 


A. Keep a set of jobsite work prints of the Issued for Construction Drawings on the jobsite during 

construction, for the purpose of annotating changes. During the course of construction, indicate 

on these Documents, changes made from the Conformed Contract Documents. Pay particular 

attention to those items that require locating for servicing. 


C. At the completion of the project, obtain reproducible vellum copies of the final Drawings and 

incorporate changes noted on the jobsite work prints onto these vellums. These changes shall be 

done by a skilled drafter. Mark each sheet "Record Drawing", along with the date, and deliver 

these Record Drawings to the Architect. 


A. Refer to Division 01 and General Conditions for Delivery, Storage and Handling. 

B. Deliver equipment and material to the job site in their original containers with labels intact, fully 

identified with manufacturer's name, make, model, model number, type, size, capacity and 


item. 

C. Deliver, receive, handle and store equipment and materials at the job site in the designated area 





material from damage, including the erection of temporary shelters to adequately protect 

equipment and material stored at the Site. Equipment and/or material which becomes rusted or 

damaged shall be replaced or restored by the Contractor to a condition acceptable to the Architect 





and Engineer. 

D. Be responsible for the safe storage of tools, material and equipment. 

1.15 WARRANTIES 

A. Refer to Division 01 and General Conditions for Warranties. 

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the 

Project Manual. 

C. Warrant each system and each element thereof against all defects due to faulty workmanship, 


items are noted to carry a longer warranty in these Construction Documents or manufacturer’s 

standard warranty exceeds 12 months. Remedy all defects, occurring within the warranty 

period(s), as stated in the General Conditions and Division 01. 

D. Also warrant the following additional items: 

1. All raceways are free from obstructions, holes, crushing, or breaks of any nature. 

2. All raceway seals are effective. 

3. The entire electrical system is free from all short circuits and unwanted open circuits and 

grounds. 

E. The above warranties shall include labor and material. Make repairs or replacements without any 

additional costs to the Owner. 

F. Perform the remedial work promptly, upon written notice from the Architect or Owner. 

G. At the time of Substantial Completion, deliver to the Owner all warranties, in writing and properly 

executed, including term limits for warranties extending beyond the one year period, each 

warranty instrument being addressed to the Owner and stating the commencement date and term. 


A. Refer to Division 01 and General Conditions for Temporary Facilities requirements. 

B. Temporary Utilities: The types of services required include, but are not limited to, electricity, 

telephone, and internet. When connecting to existing franchised utilities for required services, 

comply with service companies’ recommendations on materials and methods, or engage service 

companies to install services. Locate and relocate services (as necessary) to minimize 


C. Construction Facilities: Provide facilities reasonably required to perform construction operations 







lighting. 



temperature not less than 65 degrees F. Use steam, hot water, or gas from piped 












1. The Drawings describe the general nature of remodeling to the existing building; however, 

visit the Site prior to submitting bid to determine the nature and extent of work involved. 

2. Schedule Work in the existing building with the Owner. 

3. Perform certain demolition work prior to the remodeling. Perform the demolition that 

involves electrical systems, Light fixtures, equipment, raceways, equipment supports or 

foundations and materials. 

4. Remove articles that are not required for the new Work. Unless otherwise indicated, 

remove each item removed during this demolition from the premises and dispose in 

accordance with applicable federal, state and local regulations. 

5. Relocate and reconnect electrical facilities that must be relocated in order to accomplish 

the remodeling shown in the Drawings or indicated in the Specifications. Where electrical 

equipment or materials are removed, cap unused raceways below the floor line or behind 

the wall line to facilitate restoration of finish. 

6. Finish material will be installed under other Divisions. 



8. Protect adjacent materials indicated to remain. For Work specific to this Division, install 

and maintain dust and noise barriers to keep dirt, dust, and noise from being transmitted 

to adjacent areas. Remove protection and barriers after demolition operations are 

complete. 

9. Locate, identify, and protect electrical services passing through demolition area and 


demolition limits. When services must be interrupted, provide temporary services for 


B. Site Information: Subsurface conditions were investigated during the design of the Project. 

Reports of these investigations are available for information only; data in the reports are not 

intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity of conditions. The Owner will 

not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this information. 

C. Use of explosives is not permitted. 

D. Environmental Conditions: Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity conditions within 

the limits specified by the joint sealer manufacturer. Do not apply joint sealers to wet substrates. 


(Not Used) 


3.1 PERMITS 

A. Secure and pay for all permits required in connection with the installation of the Electrical Work. 

Arrange with the various utility companies for the installation and connection of all required utilities 

for this facility and pay all charges associated therewith including connection charges and 

inspection fees, except where these services or fees are designated to be provided by others. 





3.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND WIRING 

A. Provide 208Y/120 volt, three-phase, four-wire, temporary electrical service and temporary lighting 

system to facilitate construction. 

B. In existing facilities, with Owner’s approval, Contractor may utilize the existing electrical system as 

the source of temporary power. Coordinate the point of connection and method of connection to 

the existing system with the Owner’s Representative. 

C. Pay all charges made by the Electric Utility, with respect to installation and energy charges for 

temporary services. 

D. Work for the temporary power shall consist of all labor and materials, including, but not limited to 

conduit, wiring, panelboards, fuse blocks, fused disconnecting switches, fuses, pigtails, 

receptacles, wood panel switch supports, and other miscellaneous materials required to complete 

the power system. 

E. Install all temporary wiring in accordance with applicable codes, and maintain in an OSHAapproved 

manner. 

F. Provide an adequate number of GFCI type power distribution centers, rated 208Y/120V, four-wire, 

and not less than 60A, with sufficient fuse blocks or breakers for lighting and hand tool circuits, 

60A four-wire feeders, all mounted within pre-fabricated enclosures UL listed for this application or 

on suitable wood panels bolted to columns or upright wood supports as required. 

G. Install circuits to points on each level of each building so that service outlets can be reached by a 

50-foot extension cord for 120V power and a 100-foot extension cord for 208V power (or as 

required by OSHA or local authorities). 

H. Provide one lighting outlet per 30 linear feet of corridor and at least one light in each room and for 

every 800 square feet of floor area. Temporary lighting shall comply with OSHA requirements. 

I. If additional service is required for cranes, electrical welders or for electric motors over 1/2 HP per 

unit, such additional service shall become the responsibility of the trade involved. 

J. When the permanent wiring for lighting and power is installed, with approval of the Architect and 

Owner, the permanent system may be used, provided the Contractor assumes full responsibility 

for all electrical material, equipment, and devices contained in the systems and provided that roof 

drainage system and roofing are complete. 

K. When directed by the Architect, remove all temporary services, lighting, wiring and devices from 

the property. 


A. Refer to Division 01, Division 02, and General Conditions for Selective Demolition requirements. 

B. General: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect abandoned electrical materials and 


C. Materials and Equipment To Be Salvaged: Remove, demount, and disconnect existing electrical 





E. Electrical Materials and Equipment: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect the following 

items: 





1. Inactive and obsolete raceways, fittings, supports and specialties, equipment, wiring, 

controls, fixtures, and insulation: 

a. Raceways and outlets embedded in floors, walls, and ceilings may remain if such 

materials do not interfere with new installations. Cut embedded raceways to below 

finished surfaces, seal, and refinish surfaces as specified or as indicated on the 

Architectural finish Drawings. Remove materials above accessible ceilings. Cap 

raceways allowed to remain. 

b. Perform cutting and patching required for demolition in accordance with Division 

01, General Conditions and "Cutting and Patching" portion of this Section in 

Division 26. 

3.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS 

A. Existing conditions indicated on the Drawings are taken from the best information available from 

the Owner, existing record drawings, and from limited, in-situ, visual site observations; and, they 

are not to be construed as "AS BUILT" conditions. The information is shown to help establish the 

extent of the new Work. 

B. Verify all actual existing conditions at the project site and perform the Work as required to meet 

the existing conditions and the intent of the Work indicated. 


A. Schedule and coordinate with the Utility Company, Owner and with the Architect all connections 

to, relocation of, or discontinuation of normal utility services from any existing utility line. Include 

all premium time required for all such work in the Bid. 

B. Repair all existing utilities damaged due to construction operations to the satisfaction of the Owner 

or Utility Company without additional cost. 

C. Do not leave utilities disconnected at the end of a workday or over a weekend unless authorized 

by representatives of the Owner or Architect. 

D. Make repairs and restoration of utilities before workmen leave the project at the end of the 

workday in which the interruption takes place. 

E. Include in Bid the cost of furnishing temporary facilities to provide all services during interruption 

of normal utility service. 

3.6 WORK IN EXISTING FACILITIES 

A. The Drawings describe the general nature of remodeling to the existing facilities; however, visit 

the Site prior to submitting a Bid, to determine the nature and extent of Work involved. 

B. Schedule Work in the existing facility with the Owner. 

C. Certain demolition work shall be performed prior to the remodeling. Perform the demolition that 

involves electrical systems, fixtures, conduit, wiring, equipment, equipment supports or 

foundations and materials. 

D. Remove all of these articles that are not required for the new Work. Unless otherwise indicated, 

each item removed during this demolition shall be removed from the premises and disposed of in 

accordance with all state and local regulations. 

E. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by 

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to 





provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical 

service. 

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission. 

F. Relocate and reconnect all electrical facilities that must be relocated in order to accomplish the 

remodeling shown in the Drawings or indicated in the Specifications. Where electrical fixtures or 

equipment are removed, cap all unused raceways behind the floor line or wall line to facilitate 

restoration of finish, and, remove all existing wiring from abandoned raceways. 

G. Finish materials are specified in other Divisions. 

H. Where removal of existing wiring interrupts electrical continuity of circuits that are to remain in 

use, provide necessary wiring, raceways, junction boxes, etc., to ensure continued electrical 

continuity. 

I. Channel walls and floors as required to produce the desired result; however, obtain permission 

from the Architect or Owner for all channeling not specifically noted on the Drawings. 


A. Locate all pull boxes, junction boxes and controls so as to provide easy access for operation, 

service inspection and maintenance. Provide an access door where equipment or devices are 

located above inaccessible ceilings. Refer to Division 26 Section “Common Work Results for 

Electrical”. 

B. Maintain all code required clearances and clearances required by manufacturers. 


A. Unless otherwise noted as being provided under other Divisions, provide sleeves, box frames, or 

both, for openings in floors, walls, partitions and ceilings for all electrical work that passes through 

construction. Refer to Division 26 Section “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 

B. Provide sleeves, box frames, or both, for all conduit, cable, and busways that pass through 

masonry, concrete or block walls. 

C. The cutting of new and/or existing construction will not be permitted except by written approval of 

the Architect. 


A. Provide all necessary cutting of walls, floors, ceilings and roofs for work under this Division. 

B. Cut no structural member without permission from Architect. 

C. Patch around all openings to match adjacent construction. 



3.10 PAINTING 

A. Paint exposed ferrous surfaces, including, but not limited to, hangers, equipment stands and 





supports using materials and methods as specified under individual Sections; colors shall be as 

selected by the Architect. 

B. Re-finish all field-threaded ends of galvanized conduits and field-cut ends of galvanized supports 

with a cold-galvanizing compound approved for use on conductive surfaces. Follow closely 

manufacturer’s instructions for pre-cleaning surfaces and application. 

C. Factory finishes and shop priming and special finishes are specified in the individual equipment 

Specification sections. 

D. Where factory finishes are provided and no additional field painting is specified, touch up or 

refinish, as required by, and to the acceptance of, the Architect and Engineer, marred or damaged 

surfaces so as to leave a smooth, uniform finish. If, in the opinion of the Architect or Engineer, the 

finish is too badly damaged to be properly re-finished, replace the damaged equipment or 

materials at no additional costs to the Owner. 

3.11 CLEANING 

A. Remove dirt and refuse, resulting from the performance of the Work, from the premises as 

required to prevent accumulation. Cooperate in maintaining reasonably clean premises at all 

times. 

B. Immediately prior to final inspection, make a final cleanup of dirt and refuse resulting from Work 

and assist in making the premises broom clean. Clean all material and equipment installed under 


C. Remove dirt, dust, plaster, stains, and foreign matter from all surfaces. 

D. Touch up and restore damaged finishes to their original condition. 

3.12 ADJUSTING, ALIGNING AND TESTING 

A. Adjust, align and test all electrical equipment furnished and/or installed under this Division. 

B. Check motors for alignment with drive and proper rotation, and adjust as required. 

C. Check and test protective devices for specified and required application, and adjust as required. 

D. Check, test and adjust adjustable parts of all light fixtures and electrical equipment as required to 

produce the intended performance. 

E. Verify that completed wiring system is free from short circuits, unintentional grounds, low 

insulation impedances, and unintentional open circuits. 

F. After completion, perform tests for continuity, unwanted grounds, and insulation resistance in 

accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 and NETA. 

G. Be responsible for the operation, service and maintenance of all new electrical equipment during 

construction and prior to acceptance by the Owner of the complete project under this Contract. 

Maintain all electrical equipment in the best operating condition including proper lubrication. 

H. Notify the Architect immediately of all operational failures caused by defective material, labor or 

both. 

I. Maintain service and equipment for all testing of electrical equipment and systems until all Work is 

approved and accepted by the Owner. 





J. Keep a calibrated voltmeter and ammeter (true RMS type) available at all times. Provide service 

for test readings when and as required. 

K. Refer to individual Sections for additional and specific requirements. 

3.13 START-UP OF SYSTEMS 

A. Prior to start-up of electrical systems, check all components and devices, lubricate items 

appropriately, and tighten all screwed and bolted connections to manufacturers’ recommended 

torque values using appropriate torque tools. 

B. Each power, lighting and control circuit shall be energized, tested and proved free of breaks, 

short-circuits and unwanted grounds. 

C. Balance all single phase loads at each panelboard, redistributing branch circuit connections until 

balance is achieved to plus or minus 10 percent. 

D. Replace all burned-out lamps. Replace the lamps of all light fixtures that use incandescent, 

halogen or quartz lamp sources that are installed as part of the finished building, but are used by 

the Contractor during construction, with new lamps of appropriate type and wattage prior to 

turning the facility over to the Owner or Tenant. 

E. After all systems have been inspected and adjusted, confirm all operating features required by the 

Drawings and Specifications and make final adjustments as necessary. 

F. Demonstrate that all equipment and systems perform properly as designed per Drawings and 

Specifications. 

G. At the time of final review and tests of the power and lighting systems, all equipment and system 

components shall be in place and all connections at panelboards, switches, circuit breakers, and 

the like, shall be complete. All fuses shall be in place, and all circuits shall be continuous from 

point of service connections to all switches, receptacles, outlets, and the like. 

3.14 TEST REPORTS 

A. Perform tests as required by these Specifications and submit the results in the operations and 

maintenance manuals. The tests shall establish the adequacy, quality, safety, and reliability for 

each electrical system installed. Notify the Architect and Engineer two working days prior to each 

test. 

B. For specific testing requirements of special systems, refer to the Specification section that 

describes that system. 

C. Upon completing each test, record the results, date and time of each test and the conditions under 

which the test was conducted. Submit to the Architect, for Engineer’s review, in duplicate, the test 

results for the following electrical items: 

1. Electrical service grounding conditions and grounding resistance. 

2. Proper phasing throughout the entire system. 

3. Voltages (phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral) and amperes at each phase for each 

panelboard. 

4. Test all wiring devices for electrical continuity and proper polarity of connections. 

D. Promptly correct all failures or deficiencies revealed by these tests as determined by the 

Engineer. 






A. Prior to requesting a site observation for "CERTIFICATION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION", 

complete the following items: 

1. Submit complete Operation and Maintenance Data. 


3. Perform all required training of Owner’s personnel. 

4. Turn over all spares and extra materials to the Owner, along with a complete inventory of 

spares and extra materials being turned over. 

5. Perform start-up tests of all systems. 

6. Remove all temporary facilities from the site. 

7. Comply with all requirements for Substantial Completion in the Division 01 and General 

Conditions. 

B. Request in writing a review for Substantial Completion. Give the Architect at least seven (7) days 

notice prior to the review. 

C. State in the written request that the Contractor has complied with the requirements for Substantial 

Completion. 

D. Upon receipt of a request for review, the Architect will either proceed with the review or advise the 

Contractor of unfilled requirements. 


above-mentioned items, he shall reimburse the Architect and Engineer for time and expenses 

incurred for the visit. 

F. Upon completion of the review, the Architect and Engineer will prepare a “final list” of outstanding 

items to be completed or corrected for final acceptance. 

G. Omissions on the “final list” shall not relieve the Contractor from the requirements of the Contract 

Documents. 

H. Prior to requesting a final review, submit a copy of the final list of items to be completed or 

corrected. State in writing that each item has been completed, resolved for acceptance or the 

reason it has not been completed. 








PROJECT NAME: ___________________________________ 

PROJECT NO/PHASE: ______________________ 

Made this day, ________________________, By and Between Henderson Engineers, Inc., Lenexa, Kansas (hereinafter 

Referred to as ENGINEER) and _______________________________________ (hereinafter referred to as RECIPIENT). 

The enclosed electronic media are provided pursuant to your request for the purpose of production of shop 

drawings or record drawings. In using it, modifying it, or accessing information from it, you are responsible for 

confirmation, accuracy, and checking of the data from the media. ENGINEER hereby disclaims any and all 


information. 

RECIPIENT agrees that it shall not use the information provided by ENGINEER for any purpose other than 

that described above without the express written consent of ENGINEER. RECIPIENT also hereby acknowledges that 

the data delivered by ENGINEER is for use by RECIPIENT only, and is not to be released to any other party without the 

written consent of the ENGINEER and does not transfer ownership of the instruments of professional service. 

RECIPIENT understands that the automated conversion of information and data from the system and format 

used by ENGINEER to an alternate system or format cannot be accomplished without the possibility of introduction of 

inexactitudes, anomalies, and errors. In the event project documentation provided to RECIPIENT in machine readable 

form is so converted, RECIPIENT agrees to assume all risk associated therewith, and to the fullest extent permitted by 

law, to hold harmless and indemnify ENGINEER from and against all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, and costs, 

including but not limited to attorney’s fees, arising therefrom or in connection therewith. 

RECIPIENT recognizes that changes or modifications to ENGINEER’S instruments of professional service 

introduced by anyone other than ENGINEER may result in adverse consequences that ENGINEER can neither predict 

nor control. Therefore, and in consideration of ENGINEER’S agreement to deliver its instruments of professional 

service in machine readable format, RECIPIENT agrees, to the fullest extent permitted by law to hold harmless and 

indemnify ENGINEER from and against all claim, liabilities, losses, damages, and costs, including misuse or reuse by 

others of the machine readable information and data provided by ENGINEER under this Agreement. The foregoing 

indemnification applies, without limitation, to any use of the project documentation on another project, for additions 

to this project, or for completion of this project by others; ENGINEER may authorize excepting only such use in 

writing. 

Send a check for shipping and handling costs in the amount of $200 for an electronic drawing set up to 12 

sheets plus $15 per sheet in excess of 12 sheets payable to Henderson Engineers, Inc. along with completed and 

signed agreement and Architect’s written authorization to receive electronic media. Be sure to indicate below the 

desired shipping method, format type and media type. 

Sheet numbers requested:_____________ ______________________________________________________________ 


Signature 


Signature 

RECIPIENT 

Date 

Date 





DXF 


Phone: 




COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 – Page 1 

SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods, electrical 

equipment coordination, and common electrical installation requirements as follows: 

1. Access doors in walls, ceilings, and floors for access to electrical materials and 

equipment. 

2. Electrical equipment nameplate data. 

3. Sleeves and seals for electrical penetrations. 

4. Joint sealers for sealing around electrical materials and equipment, and for sealing 

penetrations in fire and smoke barriers, floors, and foundation walls. 


A. Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping” for fire stopping materials and installation at 

penetrations through walls, ceilings, and other fire-rated elements. 

B. Division 26 Section “General Electrical Requirements” for general requirements and related 

documents that apply to this Section. 

C. Division 26 Section “Equipment Wiring Systems” for electrical connections to equipment specified 

under other Sections, Divisions, or furnished by the Owner. 



Electrical Requirements”: 


a. Sleeve seals. 

b. Through and membrane penetration firestoppong systems. 

c. Joint Sealers 

2. Shop drawings for: 

a. Detailed fabrication drawings of access panels and doors. 

3. Detailed list of proposed nameplates for Owner/Engineer review and acceptance before 

fabrication and attachment. 



system. 

a. Where Project conditions require modification to qualified testing and inspecting 

agency’s illustrations for a particular firestopping condition, submit illustration, with 

modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer’s fireprotection 

engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated 





assembly. 

b. Qualifications Data for testing agency. 

5. Record Drawings: Submit Record Drawings as required by Division 1 and Division 26 

a. Accurately record actual locations of firestopped penetrations and access 

panel/door locations. Indicate dimensions from fixed structureal elements. 


A. The following abbreviations apply to this and other Sections of these Specifications: 

1. AFF: Above Finished Floor 

2. AHJ: Authority(ies) having Jurisdiction 

3. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications 

4. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing 

5. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber 

6. FMC: Flexible Metal Conduit 

7. GRS: Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit 

8. IMC: Intermediate Metal Conduit 

9. LFMC: Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit 

10. LFNC: Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit 

11. MC: Metal Clad 

12. MFR: Manufacturer 

13. N/A: Not Available or Not Applicable 

14. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber 

15. NRTL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory 

16. PCF: Pounds per Cubic Foot 

17. RAC: Rigid Aluminum Conduit 

18. RMC: Rigid Metal Conduit 

19. RNC: Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit 

B. The following definitions apply to this and other Sections of these Specifications: 

1. HOMERUN: That portion of an electrical circuit originating at a junction box, termination 

box, receptacle or switch with termination at an electrical panelboard. Note: Where MC 

Cable is utilized for receptacle and/or lighting branch circuiting loads, the originating point 

of the homerun shall be at the first load in the circuit or at a junction box in an accessible 

ceiling space immediately above the first load. 


A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment: 

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce 

headroom are indicated. 

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other 

installations. 

3. To allow right of way for piping, ducts, and other systems installed at required slopes 

and/or elevations. 

4. So connecting raceways, cables, and wireways will be clear of obstructions and of the 

working and access space of other equipment. 

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, 

masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. 

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished 

surfaces or otherwise concealed. 





D. Coordinate electrical testing of electrical, mechanical, and architectural items, so equipment and 

systems that are functionally interdependent are tested to demonstrate successful interoperability. 



A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to 

product selection: 

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 


manufacturers specified. 



B. Where a list is provided, manufacturers are listed alphabetically and not in accordance with any 

ranking or preference. 

2.2 ACCESS PANELS 

A. Manufacturers: 

1. Bar-Co., Inc. 

2. J.L Industries. 

3. Karp Associates, Inc. 

4. Milcor 

5. Nystrom Building Products 

6. Wade 

7. Zurn 

B. Access Doors: 

1. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Factory-fabricated and assembled units, complete with 

attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. 

2. Joints and seams: continuously welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush with 

adjacent surfaces. 

3. Frames: 16-gauge steel, with a 1-inch-wide exposed perimeter flange for units installed in 

unit masonry, pre-cast, or cast-in-place concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling: 

a. For installation in masonry, concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling: 1-inch-wideexposed 

perimeter flange and adjustable metal masonry anchors. 

b. For gypsum wallboard or plaster: perforated flanges with wallboard bead. 

c. For full-bed plaster applications: galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed 

casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame. 

4. Flush Panel Doors: 14-gauge sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed 

continuous piano hinge set to open 175 degrees; factory-applied prime paint. 

5. Locking Devices: Flush, screwdriver-operated cam locks. 

2.3 NAMEPLATES 

A. Engraved, contrasting color, three-layer, laminated plastic indicating the name of the equipment, 

load, or circuit as designated on the Drawings and in the Specifications. 

B. Self-adhering, with a permanent, weatherproof adhesive. Attachment method shall be acceptable 





to the manufacturers of the equipment to which the nameplates are being applied. 

C. Color: black background with white letters for Normal Power; red background with white letters for 

Emergency Power. Letter height: 1/4-inch minimum. 

2.4 STEEL SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES 

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain 

ends and drip rings. 

2.5 CAST IRON WALL PIPE SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES 

A. Manufacturers 

1. Josam Mfg. Co. 

2. Smith (Jay R) Mfg. Co. 

3. Tyler Pipe/Wade Div.; Subs of Tyler Corp. 

4. Watts Industries, Inc. 

5. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. 

B. Cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange with clamping ring, and nuts for membrane flashing. 

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews. 

C. Sleeves for rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052-inch thickness as 

indicated and of length to suit application. 

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified 

in Division 7 Section “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems.” 

2.6 SLEEVE SEALS 

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between 

sleeve and raceway or cable. 


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 

b. Calpico, Inc. 

c. Metraflex Co. 

d. O-Z/Gedney 

e. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking or solid sealing links shaped or pre-drilled to fit 

surface of cable or raceway. Include type and number required for material and size of 

raceway or cable. 

3. Pressure Plates: Plastic . Include two for each sealing element. For multi-phase circuits, 

use slotted pressure plates if metal. 

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length 

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing 

element. 












substrates recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 





temperature extremes. 


a. One-Part, Nonacid-Curing, Silicone Sealant: 

1) "Dow Corning 790," Dow Corning Corp. 


3) "Silglaze N SCS 2801," General Electric Co. 

4) "Silpruf SCS 2000," General Electric Co. 

5) "864," Pecora Corp. 

6) ."Omniseal," Sonneborn Building Products Div 

7) "Spectrem 1," Tremco, Inc. 

8) "Spectrem 2," Tremco, Inc. 

b. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant, Silicone Sealant: 


2) "Sanitary 1700," General Electric Co. 

3) "898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant," Pecora Corp. 

4) "OmniPlus," Sonneborn Building Products Div. 

5) "Tremsil 600 White," Tremco Corp. 

D. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealants: One-part, non-sagging, mildew-resistant, paintable complying with 

ASTM C 834 recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations 

involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5 percent. 


a. "Chem-Calk 600," Bostik 



d. "Tremflex 834," Tremco, Inc. 

2.8 FIRESTOPPING 

A. Sealants and accessories shall have fire-resistance ratings indicated, as established by testing 

identical assemblies in accordance with UL 2079 or ASTM E 814, by Underwriters' Laboratories, 

Inc., or other NRTL acceptable to AHJ. 


a. Hilti, Inc. 

b. RectorSeal. 





c. Specified Technologies Inc. 

d. 3M Corp. 

e. United States Gypsum Company. 


3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with NECA 1. 

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for 

wall-mounting items, unless indicated otherwise. 

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange 

and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with 

these requirements. 

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of 

both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate 

future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity. 

E. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. 

3.2 ACCESS DOORS 

A. Furnish adequately sized access doors for the devices served, with a minimum size of 18 inches x 

18 inches, for installation under Division 09 “Finishes”. 

B. Furnish access doors of the proper construction for type of ceiling or wall construction where 

installed. 

C. Verify the exact location, sizes, and types of all access doors with the Architect prior to purchase. 

D. Provide access doors for all concealed electrical equipment, except where above lay-in ceilings. 

E. Coordinate with architectural finishes to set frames accurately in position and securely attached to 

supports, with face panels plumb and level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces. 

F. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. 

G. Label all access doors per Paragraph “Nameplates” herein. 

3.3 NAMEPLATES 

A. Provide nameplates for the following items: 

1. Switchboards 

2. Panelboards 

3. Disconnect switches 

4. Enclosed circuit breakers 

5. Starters 

6. Miscellaneous cabinets 

7. Access panels 

8. Feeder devices in switchboards, distribution panelboards, and motor control centers 





B. Attach nameplates securely and permanently to the equipment, and in a manner acceptable to the 

equipment manufacturer. 

3.4 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS 

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate 

concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. 

B. Provide all sleeves for required openings in all concrete and masonry construction and fire, 

smoke, or both, partitions, for all electrical Work that passes through such construction. 

Coordinate with all other trades and Divisions to dimension and lay out all such openings. 

C. Only those openings specifically indicated on the Architectural or Structural Drawings will be 

provided under other Divisions. 

D. Construction in Existing Facilities: 





E. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified 

in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping”. 

F. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed 

openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. Do not cut or core drill new 

construction without written approval from the Architect and Structural Engineer. 

G. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 

H. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness: 

1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 

16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. 

2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or 

more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch. 

I. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies 

unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor 

or wall. 

J. Install pipe and rectangular sleeves in above-grade walls and slabs, where penetrations are not 

subject to hydrostatic water pressures. Ensure that drip ring is fully encased and sealed within the 

wall or slab. 

K. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. 

L. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. 

M. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable 

unless sleeve seal is to be installed; in which case, size sleeves as recommended by the seal 

manufacturer. 

N. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve 

and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer 

to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation. 

O. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and 





floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration 

sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 

P. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boottype 

flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. 

Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical 

sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (or larger, if required by the seal manufacturer) 

annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 

R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves 

to allow for 1-inch (or larger, if required by the sleeve manufacturer) annular clear space between 

raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 

S. Above Grade Concrete or Masonry Penetrations 

1. Provide sleeves for cables or raceways passing through above grase concrete or masonry 

walls, concrete floor or roof slabs. Sleeves are not required for core drilledholes in 

existing masory walls, concrete floors or roofs. Provide sleeves as follows: 

a. Install schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in 

diameter. 

b. Install galvanized sheet metal for sleeves 6 inches in diameter and larger, 

thickness shall be 0.138 inches. 

c. Install galvanized sheet metal for rectangular sleeves with the following minimum 

metal thickness: 

1) For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches and no side greater 

than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.52 inches. 

2) For sleeve cross-section rectangular perimeter equal to, or greater than, 

50 inches and one (1) or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, 

thickness shall be 0.138 inches. 


plenums. 

2. Seal elevated floor, exterior wall and roof penetrations watertight and weather tight with 


ends with minimum of ½” of sealant. 

T. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves. Size sleeves to 

allow for 1-inch (or larger, if required by the mechanical sleeve manufacturer) annular clear space 

between sleeve and cable or raceway. Provide mechanical sleeve seal. 

1. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pipe 

material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates 

that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 

2. Inspect installed sleeve and sleeve-seal installation for damage and faulty work. Verify 

watertight integrity of sleeves and seals installed below grade to seal against hydrostatic 

pressure. 

U. Elevated Floor Penetrations of waterproof Membrane: 

1. Provide cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves, extend top of wall pipe minimum 1” above finish 

floor. Size wall pipe for minimum ½” annular space between wall pipe and cable or 

raceway. 

2. Pack with mineral wool and seal both ends with minimum of ½” of waterproof sealant. 

Refer to Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for materials and installation. 

3. Secure waterproof membrane flashing between clamping flange and clamping ring. 

Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Division 7 Section “Sheet Metal 

Flashing and Trim” 





4. Extend bottom of wall pipe below floor slab as required and secure underdeck clamp to 

hold wall pipe rigidly in place. 

V. Interior Foundation Penetration: Provide sleeves for horizontal raceway passing through or under 

foundation. Sleeves shall be cast iron soil pipe two normal pipe sizes larger than the pipe served. 

W. Concrete Slab on Grade Penetrations: 

1. Provide ½” thick cellular foam insulation around perimeter of raceway passing through 

concrete foundation. Installation shall extend to 2” above and below the concrete slab. 

X. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable or 

raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Pack with mineral 

wool and seal both ends with minimum of ½” of sealant. Refer to Division 07 Section “Joint 

Sealants” for materials and installation. 

Y. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or duct, using joint 

sealant for size, depth, and location of joint. Pack with mineral wool and seal both ends with 

minimum of ½” of waterproof sealant. Refer to Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for material 

and installation. 

Z. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boottype 

flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. 

AA. 

Sleeve-Seal Installation 

1. Install sleeve seals for all underground raceway penetrations through walls at elevations 

below finished grade. Additionally, install seals inside raceways, after conductors or 

cables have been installed, in all raceway penetrations through walls at elevations below 

finished grade. 

2. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or 

cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble 

mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and 

sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and 

make watertight seal. 

BB. 

Inspect installed sleeve and sleeve-seal installations for damage and faulty work. Verify watertight 

integrity of sleeves and seals installed below grade and above grade where installed to seal 

against hydrostatic pressure. 

3.5 FIRESTOPPING 

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire/smoke-rated floor and wall assemblies to 

restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation 

requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 


A. Preparation For Joint Sealers 

1. Clean surfaces of penetrations, sleeves, or both, immediately before applying joint 

sealers, to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer. 

2. Apply joint sealer primer to substrates as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer. 

Protect adjacent areas from spillage and migration of primers, using masking tape. 

Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 

B. Application Of Joint Sealers 





1. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions 

applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent 

requirements apply. 

a. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric joint 

sealants. 

b. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 790 for use of acrylic-emulsion joint 

sealants. 

2. Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, 

tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure 

contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from 

surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent 

surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 

C. Installation of Fire-Stopping Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing, and other 

accessory materials, to fill openings around electrical raceways penetrating floors and walls, to 

provide fire-stops with fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which 

penetration occurs. Comply with installation requirements established by testing and inspecting 

agency. 





EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 260502 – Page 1 

SECTION 260502 - EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

This Section includes limited scope for electrical connections to equipment specified under other Sections 

or Divisions, or furnished under separate contracts or by the Owner. 

A. Related Sections include the following: 

1. Division 26 Section “General Electrical Requirements” for general requirements and 

related documents that apply to this Section. 

2. Division 26 Section “Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems” for raceways. 

3. Division 26 “Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” for conductors, cables, 

and cords. 

4. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box 

service fittings. 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: 

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 

29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

2. Marked for intended use. 

B. Comply with NFPA 70. 


A. Unless otherwise noted, perform all electrical Work required for the proper installation and 

operation of equipment, furnishings, devices and systems specified in other Divisions of these 

Specifications, furnished under other contracts, and/or furnished by the Owner for installation 


B. Coordinate work with Division 23 Section, “Common Work Results for HVAC”. 

C. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment 

furnished under other sections. 

D. Determine connection locations and rough-in requirements based on Shop Drawings. 

E. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation schedule for 

equipment. 

F. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up schedule for equipment. 


2.1 CORDS AND CAPS 

A. Attachment Plugs: Conform to NEMA WD 1. 




EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 260502 – Page 2 

B. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, matching receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment, 

or as required by the equipment manufacturer. 

C. Cord: See Paragraph “Flexible Cords” in Division 26 Section “Low-voltage Electrical Power 

Conductors and Cables”. 

D. Provide cord size suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch 

circuit overcurrent protection. 



A. Verify conditions of equipment and installation prior to beginning work. 

B. Verify that equipment is ready for connecting, wiring, and energizing. 

3.2 ELECTRICAL DEVICES 

A. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices (other than 

temperature control devices) as indicated. 

B. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices (other than 

temperature control devices) specified in other Divisions of these Specifications, furnished under 

other contracts, and/or furnished by the Owner for installation under this Contract. 

3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 

A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturers’ instructions. 

B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquid tight flexible conduit 

with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. 

C. Make wiring connections using conductors and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures 

encountered in heat producing equipment. 

D. Provide receptacle outlet where connection with attachment plug is indicated. Provide cord and 

cap where field-supplied attachment plug is indicated on the Drawings. 

E. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and 

equipment connection boxes. 

F. Provide interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment where indicated on 

the Drawings. 

3.4 HVAC EQUIPMENT 

A. When equipment is delivered in separate parts and field assembled, internal wiring, indicated on 

Shop Drawings as field wiring, will be provided by the equipment supplier, unless otherwise noted. 





LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 – Page 1 

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes: 

1. Conductors, cables, and cords rated 600V and less. 

2. Connectors and terminations rated 600V and less. 


A. Division 26 Section “General Electrical Requirements” for general requirements and related 


B. Division 26 Section “Common Work Results for Electrical” for sleeves and seals for electrical 

penetrations. 

C. Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems” for conductors and 

connectors for grounding systems. 

D. Division 26 Section “Equipment Wiring Systems” for electrical connections to equipment specified 


E. Division 28 Section “Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System” for fire alarm wiring. 

F. Division 23 Section “Direct-Digital Control for HVAC” for temperature control wiring. 



Electrical Requirements”: 


a. Metal Clad (MC) cable and fittings. 

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. 

C. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From Contractor. 

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS 

A. The following abbreviations apply to this and other Sections of these specifications: 

1. MC: Metal Clad 

2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber 

B. The following definitions apply to this and other Sections of these Specifications: 

1. HOMERUN: That portion of an electrical circuit at a junction box, termination box, 





receptacle or switch with termination at an electrical panelboard. Note: MC Cable is 

utilized for receptacle and/or lighting branch circuiting loads, the originating point of the 

homerun shall be at the first load in the circuit or at a junction box in an accessible ceiling 

space immediately above the first load. 


A. Materials shall be manufactured by companies that have been specializing in the products 

specified in this Section, for a minimum of 3 years. 

B. Test Equipment Suitability and Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS, "Suitability of Test 

Equipment" and "Test Instrument Calibration." 

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability 

to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing 

Association or is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to AHJ. 

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational 

Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering 

Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. 

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: 


29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to AHJ. 


E. Comply with NFPA 70. 


A. Coordinate electrical testing of electrical, mechanical, and architectural items, so equipment and 

systems that are functionally interdependent are tested to demonstrate successful interoperability. 












2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 

A. General 






a. Advance Wire and Cable 

b. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 

c. Alan Wire 

d. Alcan Aluminum Corporation; Alcan Cable Div 

e. ALFLEX Corporation, a Southwire Company 

f. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company 

g. Encore Wire Corporation 

h. General Cable (Flexible Cords) 

i. Northern Cables Inc. 

j. Okonite Company 

k. Southwire Company 

2. Conductor Material: Annealed (soft) copper complying with ICEA S-95-658/NEMA WC70 

and UL Standards 44 or 83, as applicable; stranded conductor and stranded for all flexible 

cords, cables, and control wiring . 

3. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN/THWN-2 complying with ICEA S-95- 

658/NEMA WC70 . 

4. Sizes of conductors and cables indicated or specified are American Wire Gage (Brown 

and Sharpe). 

5. Unless indicated otherwise, special purpose conductors and cables, such as low voltage 

control and shielded instrument wiring, shall be as recommended by the system 

equipment manufacturer. 

6. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable 

construction, and ratings. 

B. Metal Clad Cable, Type MC (for non-patient care areas only. Do not use for life safety or critical 

systems.) 

1. MC Cable (with insulated green grounding conductor, no bonding conductor): 

a. Manufacturers: 

1) AFC Cable Systems, Inc (MC Lite) 

2) Encore Wire Corporation (MC) 

3) Kaf-Tech 

4) Southwire Company (Amorlite) 

b. 600V, Unjacketed UL Standard 83, UL Standard 1569 for Type MC, UL Standard 

1685, Federal Specification A-A59544, IEEE 1202 Vertical Cable Tray Flame Test 

and the NEC. Type MC Cable shall be listed for use in UL 1, 2, and 3 Hour 

Through-Penetration Firestop Systems. 

c. Armor Assembly: Aluminum interlocked armor (aluminum color). 

d. Phase Conductors: Solid soft-drawn copper, THHN-insulated single conductors, 

color code: ICEA Method 1. 

e. Grounding Conductor: Solid soft-drawn copper, THHN/THWN green insulated 

grounding conductor sized per NEC Table 250.122. 

f. Marking: Cable markings shall comply with the requirements on NEC ART. 310.11. 

2. MC Cable (with full-sized bare grounding/bonding conductor and no insulated green 

grounding conductor): 

a. Manufacturer & Series: 

1) AFC Cable Systems Inc (MC-Quick) 

2) Encore Wire Corporation (MCMP) 

3) Southwire Company (MC AP ) 

b. 600V, Unjacketed UL Standard 1569 for Metal-Clad cables, UL Standard 83, UL 

Standard 1063, Federal Specification A-A59544, IEEE 1202 Vertical Cable Tray 





Flame Test and the NEC. MC cable shall be listed for use in UL 1, 2, and 3 Hour 

through-Penetration Firestop Systems. 

c. Armor Assembly: Aluminum interlocked armor and full-sized solid bare aluminum 

grounding/bonding conductor in intimate and continuous contact with armor – 

recognized as equipment ground per NEC Articles 250.118 and 517.13(A). 

d. Phase Conductors: Solid soft-drawn copper, THHN-insulated single conductors, 

color code: ICEA Method 1. 

e. Marking: Cable markings shall comply with the requirements of NEC Art 310 

.11(1). 

3. MC Cable Fittings: 

C. Single Conductors 

a. Manufacturer & Model: 

1) Arlington (4010 AST snap-in type): (SG38 saddle type) 

2) Crouse-Hinds (QLK Quick-Lok Series, Saddle type); ACB Series; setscrew, 

saddle type) 

3) O-Z Gedney (AMC-50 speed-lok, saddle type) 

4) Thomas & Betts (XC-730 Series cable-lok, saddle type); 3110 Series Tite- 

Bite) 

b. Fittings used for connecting Type MC cable to boxes, cabinets, or other equipment 

shall be UL listed and identified for such use with an MCI-A marking on the fitting 

carton or package. 

c. Fittings shall be insulated type not requiring the use of anti-short bushings. 

d. Romex style, clamp type fittings are not acceptable. 

1. 600V, THHN/THWN- insulated conductors, color-coded as follows: 

PHASE 240∆/120V 208Y/120V 

A Black Black 

B Orange Red 

C Red Blue 

Neutral White White 

Equipment Ground Green Green 

Isolated Ground N/A Green/Yellow Stripe 

**Except as provided in NFPA 70. 

2. Conductors shall not be smaller than No. 12 AWG, except that wiring for signal and pilot 

control circuits and pre-manufactured whips for light fixtures may be No. 14 AWG. 

D. Flexible Cords 

1. 600V, multi-conductor (2, 3, or 4 as indicated on the Drawings), oil-resistant black jacket, 

extra-hard-usage; Type SEO, for indoor dry and damp locations; SEOW, for damp, wet, 

and outdoor locations; or as required by the manufacturer of the equipment to which the 

cords are connected. 

2. 300V, multi-conductor (2, 3, or 4 as indicated on the Drawings), oil-resistant black jacket, 

hard-usage; Type SJEO, for indoor dry locations; SJEOW, for damp, wet, and outdoor 

locations; or as required by the manufacturer of the equipment to which the cords are 

connected. 

E. Control Wiring 

1. Unless otherwise noted, all control wiring will be the responsibility of the Section or 

Division in which the control system is specified. 

F. Connectors 






a. AMP; Tyco 

b. FCI-Burndy 

c. Gould 

d. Ideal Industries, Inc. 

e. Ilsco 

f. NSi Industries, Inc. 

g. O-Z/Gedney 

h. Panduit 

i. Thomas and Betts 

j. 3-M Electrical Products Division 

2. Compression connectors for conductors No. 8 AWG and larger: Long-barreled, UL 486- 

listed, tinned copper, compression type (Burndy "Hylug”, or equal), insulated with clampon, 

cold-shrink, or molded covers, or wrapped with multiple over-lapping layers of 3-M 

Scotch electrical tape. 

a. Termination fittings: 1- or 2-hole pad and inspection port. 

3. Mechanical connections for conductors No. 8 AWG and larger: UL-listed, tinned copper 

and/or tinned aluminum, dual-rated, mechanical type, insulated with clamp-on, cold-shrink, 

or molded covers, or wrapped with multiple over-lapping layers of 3-M Scotch electrical 

tape. 

a. Termination fittings: 1- hole pad and inspection port. 

4. Connectors for solid conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller: Insulated winged wire nuts. 

Color-coded for size, except use green only for grounding connections. 

5. Connectors for stranded conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller: Tinned copper, insulatedsleeve, 

compression type, UL-listed, with wire insulation grip. Terminations: flanged forktongue 

type. 

6. Connectors and terminations for aluminum conductors and cables No. 2 and larger: UL 

486B listed and marked AL7CU for 75 deg C rated conductors and AL9CU for 90 deg C 

rated conductors. 



A. General: 

1. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings on in other Sections, install all conductors in 

raceway. Install continuous conductors between outlets, devices and boxes without 

splices or taps. Do not pull connections into raceways. Leave at least 8 inches of 

conductor at outlets for fixture or device connections. 

2. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound 

used shall not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's 

recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. 

3. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave conductor/cable 

grips that will not damage conductors/cables or raceway. 

4. Electrical conductor and cable work is schematically represented on the Drawings. Unless 

otherwise indicated, conductor sizes shown on the Drawings are based on not more than 

three single current-carrying conductors in a raceway in free air. Current ratings are 

based on copper at 75 degrees C temperature rating for all power circuits. Modify 

raceway and conductor sizing as may be necessitated by any deviation from these 

conditions. Do not decrease the indicated conductor size due to the use of conductors 

having a temperature rating of 90 degrees C. 

5. Conductor sizes shown are minimum based on code requirements, voltage drop, and/or 





other considerations. Where approved by the Engineer and at no extra cost to the Owner, 

larger conductor sizes may be installed at Contractor's option in order to utilize stock 

sizes, provided raceway sizes are increased where necessary to conform with NFPA 70 

(determine the effect of the use of larger conductors on the short circuit current ratings of 

the electrical equipment, and provide increased short circuit current rated equipment as 

required). 

6. Where parallel conductors are shown, install each set of conductors in separate raceways 

of essentially the same length. 

7. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Part 2 of this Section. 

8. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Part 2 of this Section . 

9. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductors at each outlet with at least 6 inches of slack. 

10. Common or Shared Neutrals are not allowed unless shown on the plans or specifically 

noted to be allowed. 

11. Multi-wire branch circuits (i.e., shared neutral) shall be provided with a means that will 

simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors at the point the branch circuit 

originates. Multi-pole breakers or 3 single pole breakers with a handle tie are two example 

12. When multiple home runs are combined into a single raceway such that the number of 

conductors exceeds four (conductor count is made up of any combination of phase and 

neutral conductors), the following restrictions apply, which are in addition to those in NFPA 

70: 

a. Normal or Non-Essential circuits. 

1) Maximum of 16 conductors in a single raceway. For up to eight conductors 

in a raceway, minimum raceway size: 3/4 inch. For greater than eight 

conductors, minimum raceway size: 1 inch. Do not install any other type of 

circuit in this raceway. 

2) The minimum wire size for all conductors in this raceway: No. 10 AWG. 

3) Only 15A and 20A branch circuit homeruns may be combined into one 

raceway. 

b. GFCI-protected circuits. 

1) Do not use multi-conductor circuits, with a shared neutral, for any GFCI 

circuit breaker or receptacle circuit. 

13. For branch circuits fed from GFCI circuit breakers, limit the one-way conductor length to 

100 feet between the panelboard and the most remote receptacle or load on the GFCI 

circuit. 

14. Where the number of conductors for branch circuits is not shown on the Drawings, 

determine the number of conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. Provide adequate 

conductors so as to allow performance of all functions of the device. 

15. Provide all conductors with 600V insulation of the following types, unless otherwise noted 

on the Drawings or in these Specifications: 

a. Wet or dry locations, in raceways: 

1) Feeders and branch circuits: Type THWN, THWN/THHN, or XHHW. 

2) Conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller: Types THWN or THWN/THHN. 

b. Fluorescent light fixtures or conductors within three feet of high temperature 

equipment such as heaters: Type THHN, XHHW, or higher temperature insulation 

as required for the use. 

B. Metal Clad Type MC Cable: 

1. Securing and Supporting: 

a. Support per Art 330 for MC cable 

b. Secure cable within 12 inches of every box or fitting. 

c. Secure/supporting intervals shall not exceed six (6) feet for MC cable. 





d. Utilize steel cable hangers, Arlington SMC series or equivalent, for MC cable 

support wherever possible so as to provide for cable routing in a neat and 

workmanship like manner. 

2. Type MC cable may only be used: 

a. In lieu of flexible conduit and wiring from light fixtures in accessible ceilings to 

junction boxes (attached to building structure) above the ceiling. Provide cable 

whips of sufficient lengths to allow for relocating each light fixture within a 5-foot 

radius of its installed location, but not exceeding 6 feet in unsupported lengths. 

3. MC Cable shall not be used for any use not listed in the paragraph above. Examples of 

those uses include, but are not limited to: 

C. Flexible Cords 

a. In locations not permitted by the NEC. 

b. When specifically not allowed by the local AHJ and/or Owner. 

c. Homeruns to panelboards. 

d. Where exposed to view. 

e. Where subject to physical damage. 

f. Corrosive or Hazardous locations. 

g. Wet locations. 

h. Emergency systems (life safety and critical branches) of Health Care facilities 

accept as allowed by Art 517.30(C)(3). 

1. Refer to Division 26 Section, ““Equipment Wiring Systems”, for electrical connections to 

equipment. 

D. Control Wiring 

1. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in other sections, install all control wiring in 

raceway, regardless of voltage. A qualified Electrician shall install all control wire 

operating at 120V nominal and above. Control wiring operating at less than 120V (e.g., 

12V and 24V) may be installed under the Division furnishing it. 

2. Open wiring in air-handling plenums: UL listed and classified for use in air plenums 

without raceway. Where indicated on the Drawings or specified, and permitted by local 

codes, only cable for communication or fire alarm systems and low voltage control wiring 

may be installed without raceways. 

E. Connections: 

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening 

values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in 

UL 486A and UL 486B. 

2. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess 

equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 

3. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors. 

4. Use only resin pressure splices and splicing kits that totally encapsulate the splice for 

splices in underground junction boxes. Arrange the splicing kit to minimize the effects of 

moisture. 

5. Connect conductors No. 6 AWG and larger to panelboards and apparatus by means of 

approved mechanical lugs or compression connectors. 

6. Do not use terminals on wiring devices to feed through to the next device. 


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control 

testing: 





B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing: 

C. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing: 

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, 

test for compliance with requirements. Test all wiring prior to energizing to ensure that it is 

free from unintentional grounds and shorts, is properly phased, and that all connectors are 

tight. 

2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, 

Section 7.3. Certify compliance with test parameters. 

D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 



3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve 

compliance with requirements. 





GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 – Page 1 

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY: 

A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements 

specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in 

other Sections. 

B. This Section includes: 

1. Grounding Conductors 

2. Connector Products 



documents that apply to this section. 

B. Division 26 Section " Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” for insulated 

conductors. 

C. Division 26 Section “Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems” for raceways. 


A. Qualification Data: For Contractor. 

B. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From Contractor. 



3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with 

requirements. 

C. Record Drawings: Submit Record Drawings as required by Division 01 and Division 26 Section 

“General Electrical Requirements”: 

1. Accurately record actual locations of all exterior buried electrodes and all buried ground 

rings. Indicate dimensions from fixed structural elements. 


A. The following apply to this and other Sections of these Specifications: 

1. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. 

2. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing. 

3. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. 

4. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. 

5. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 

6. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit. 








10. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 

11. PSF: Pounds per Square Foot 




B. Test Equipment Suitability and Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS (current version), "Suitability 

of Test Equipment" and "Test Instrument Calibration." 

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: 




3. Comply with UL 467. 

D. Comply with NFPA 70; for overhead-line construction and medium-voltage underground 

construction, comply with IEEE C2. 

E. Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. 

F. Comply with NFPA 70. 












2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS, CONNECTORS, AND ELECTRODES: 

A. Manufacturers: 

1. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. 

2. Boggs, Inc. 

3. Chance/Hubbell. 

4. Copperweld Corp. 

5. Dossert Corp. 

6. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. 

7. FCI/Burndy Electrical. 

8. Galvan Industries, Inc. 

9. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc. 





10. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc. 

11. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co. 

12. Ideal Industries, Inc. 

13. ILSCO. 

14. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems. 

15. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries. 

16. Lightning Master Corp. 

17. Lyncole XIT Grounding. 

18. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group. 

19. Panduit, Inc 

20. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell. 

21. Robbins Lightning, Inc. 

22. Salisbury: W. H. Salisbury & Co. 

23. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. 

24. Thomas & Betts, Electrical. 

2.3 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS 

A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical." 

B. Material: Aluminum, copper-clad aluminum, and copper. 

C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation. 

D. Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe. On 

feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to 

provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow. 

E. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Bare, stranded, unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Underground Conductors: Tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum stranded, unless 


G. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following: 

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 

2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 

H. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows: 

1. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch in 

diameter. 

2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor. 

3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with 

copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 

4. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated with 

copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (wide and 1/16 inch thick. 

I. Aluminum Bonding Conductors: As follows: 

1. Bonding Cable: 10 strands of No. 14 AWG aluminum conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 

2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded aluminum conductor. 

3. Bonding Jumper: Aluminum tape, braided bare aluminum conductors, terminated with 

aluminum ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 

J. Ground Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles: As follows: 

1. No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper conductor. 





2. Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding. If wood, use pressure-treated fir, 

or cypress or cedar. 

K. Grounding Bus: UL & cUL Listed to UL467 & C22.2 respectively, , bare, 1/4 inch thick, 

electrolytic, tough pitch copper bar, length and width as indicated on the Drawings; insulators and 

standoffs as specified in Paragraph “Ground Bars” below. 

2.4 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS 

A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of 

conductors and connected items. 

B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors 

1. Compression Connectors: Burndy Hyground, or equal, permanent, pure, wrought copper, 

meeting ASTM 8 1 87, essentially the same as the conductors being connected; clearly 

and permanently marked with the information listed below: 

a. Company symbol and/or logo. 

b. Catalog number. 

c. Conductors accommodated. 

d. Installation die index number or die catalog number is required. 

e. Underwriters Laboratories “Listing Mark:”. 

f. The words “Suitable for Direct Burial” or, where space is limited, “Direct Burial” or 

“Burial” per UL Standard ANSI/UL467 (latest revision). 

2. Cast connectors: copper base alloy according to ASTM B 30 (latest revision). 

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written 

instructions. 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. Examine areas and conditions under which electrical grounding connections are to be made and 

notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. 

Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

B. Provide all materials, labor and equipment for an electrical grounding system in accordance with 

applicable portions of the NEC and NECA. Coordinate electrical work as necessary to interface 

installation of electrical grounding systems with other work. 

C. Accomplish grounding and bonding of electrical installations and specific requirements for 

systems, circuits and equipment required to be grounded for both temporary and permanent 

construction. 


A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact 

with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials. 

B. In branch circuit and feeder raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors. 

C. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service 





equipment, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. 

1. Use insulated spacers and mounting brackets, and support from wall 8 feet above finished 

floor, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. At doors, route the bus up to the top of the door frame, across the top of the doorway, and 

down to the specified height above the floor. 

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS 

A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding 

conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are 

indicated. 

B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and branch circuits. 

C. Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the following items, in 

addition to those required by NFPA 70: 

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 

2. Lighting circuits. 

3. Receptacle circuits. 

4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 

5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 

6. Flexible raceway runs. 

7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. 

8. Feeders and branch circuits installed in non-metallic raceways. 

D. Separately Derived Systems: Bond the derived neutral (grounded) conductor of all separately 

derived system (e.g., transformers, generators, UPS) to the nearest available grounding electrode, 

or back to the service grounding electrode if no approved electrodes are readily available. Size 

the grounding electrode conductor and bonding jumpers as indicated on the Drawings or as 

required by NFPA 70 Table 250.66, whichever is larger. 

E. Busway Supply Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor from the grounding 

bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panelboard to the equipment grounding bar 

terminal on the busway, if a direct bus-to-bus connection is not factory provided. 

F. Water Heater Cables: Install a separate equipment grounding conductor to each electric water 

heater, heat-tracing, and antifrost heating cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, 

connected equipment, and components. On water heaters, bond metal hot and cold water pipes 

together, across the heater tank. 

G. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other 

communication systems, provide No. 6 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway 

from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and 

central equipment location. 

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding 

conductor on a ground bar. Size: 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch. 

2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. 


A. Grounding Conductors: Where the size of the grounding conductors are not shown, size in 

accordance with NEC Table 250.122 Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless 

otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be 

subjected to strain, impact, or damage. 





B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation 

hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded 

connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a 

bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent 

parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance. 


A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select 

connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct 

contact will be galvanically compatible. Provide electrical bonding plates, connectors, terminals, 

lugs and clamps as recommended by the manufacturers for indicated applications. Provide 

electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials, and bonding straps 

as recommended by the manufacturers for types of service indicated. 

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make 

contact points closer to order of galvanic series. 

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 

3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical 

clamps. 

4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and 

mechanical clamps. 

5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future 

penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. 

B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Replace 

welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning. Use 

exothermic welded connections for the following: 

1. Connecting conductors together. 

2. Connecting conductors to ground rods, except at test wells. 

3. Connecting conductors to building steel. 

4. Connecting conductors to plates. 

C. Compression Fittings: Permanent compression-type fittings may be used for the following rather 

than exothermic connections: 

1. Connecting conductors together. 

2. Connecting conductors to building steel. 

3. Connecting conductors to ground rods, except at test wells. 

D. Mechanical Pressure Fittings: Use bolted mechanical (removable) pressure-type clamps for the 

following: 

1. Connecting conductors to ground rods at test wells. 

2. Connecting conductors to pipes. 

E. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type 

grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged 

pressure-type connectors. 

F. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to 

manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not 

indicated, use those specified in UL 486A . 





G. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct 

circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by 

connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible 

indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor. 





HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 – Page 1 

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 

2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. 





A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. 

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. 

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 


A. Product Data: For the following: 

1. Steel slotted support systems. 

B. Welding certificates. 


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding 

Code - Steel." 



A. Coordinate installation of roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section 

"Roof Accessories." 






2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS 

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field 

assembly. 


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the 

following: 


following: 

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. 

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 

c. ERICO International Corporation. 

d. GS Metals Corp. 

e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 

g. Wesanco, Inc. 

3. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 

4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating 

applied according to MFMA-4. 

5. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 

6. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. 

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. 

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for 

types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. 

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded 

body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser 

conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to 

suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. 

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, 

and bars; black and galvanized. 

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their 

supports to building surfaces include the following: 

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement 

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for 

supported loads and building materials where used. 

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not 


b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one 

of the following: 

1) Hilti Inc. 

2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 

3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 

4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 





2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in 

hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate 

for supported loads and building materials in which used. 

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not 


b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one 

of the following: 

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 

2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 

3) Hilti Inc. 

4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 

5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS 

Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for 

attached structural element. 

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES 

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of 

supported equipment. 

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes 

and plates. 



A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical 

equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. 

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for 

EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 

diameter. 

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support 

system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding 

specified design load limits. 

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps . 

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2- 

inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above 

suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 





3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this 

Article. 

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC 

may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. 

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will 

be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum 

static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 

200 lb (90 kg). 

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten 

electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless 

otherwise indicated by code: 

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor 

fasteners on solid masonry units. 

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 

5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock 

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) 

thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs 

less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 

6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers 

and nuts . 

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 

8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, 

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, 

transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate. 

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS 

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for sitefabricated 

metal supports. 

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to 

support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. 

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 

3.4 PAINTING 

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately 

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with 

SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). 

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup 

painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous 

metal. 





C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply 

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 





RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 – Page 1 

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 

PART 1 - GENERAL REQUREMENTS 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes: 

1. Raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. 




B. Division 26 Section “Common Work Results for Electrical” for limited scope general construction 

materials and methods. 

C. Division 26 Section “Equipment Wiring Systems” for electrical connections to equipment specified 


D. Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding”. 

E. Division 26 Section “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems”. 

F. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes, power poles, and multi-outlet 

assemblies. 


A. Record Drawings: Submit Record Drawings as required by Division 01 and Division 26 Section 

“General Electrical Requirements”: 

1. Accurately record actual routing of all exterior buried raceway and all interior raceways 

three inches and larger. Indicate dimensions from fixed structural elements. 


A. Terminology used in this specification is as defined below: 

1. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing 

2. FMC: Flexible Metal Conduit 


4. IMC: Intermediate Metal Conduit 

5. LFMC: Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit 

6. LFNC: Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit 



9. RNC: Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit 








B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: 


29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to AHJ. 


C. Comply with NFPA 70. 












2.2 CONDUITS, SURFACE MOUNTED RACEWAYS AND ACCESSORIES 

A. Metal Conduit And Tubing 


a. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 

b. Alflex Corporation, a Southwire Company 

c. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 

d. Electri-Flex Co. 

e. Indalex 

f. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex 

g. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal (Fittings) 

h. Republic Raceway 

i. Tyco International; Allied Tube & Conduit Div. 

j. Wheatland Tube Co. 

2. RMC: 

a. GRS: Hot-dip galvanized: ANSI C80.1, UL 6. 

b. RAC: ANSI C80.5, UL6A. 

3. IMC: ANSI C80.6, UL 1242. 

4. Plastic-Coated GRS and Fittings: NEMA RN 1, UL-listed. Coating thickness of 0.04 

inches (1mm), minimum. 

5. Plastic-Coated IMC and Fittings: NEMA RN 1, UL-listed. 





6. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3, UL 797. 

a. Fittings: Set-screw or compression type. 

7. FMC: Aluminum: UL 1. 

8. LFMC: Flexible steel raceway with PVC jacket: UL 360. 

9. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with raceway and tubing materials. 

10. RNC: Schedule 40 PVC: NEMA TC 2, UL 651. 

B. Metal Wireways 

a. Fittings: match to raceway type and material: NEMA TC 3, NEMA TC 6, UL 651, as 

applicable. 


a. Cooper B-Line 

b. EPI-Electrical Enclosures 

c. Hoffman. 

d. Square D. 

2. Material and Construction: 14 gauge (minimum) sheet steel, sized and shaped as 

indicated, NEMA 1 

3. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, 

hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required 

for complete system. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete 

wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70. Where indicated, provide a barrier to divide 

wireway into compartments. 

4. Wireway Covers: Hinged type 

5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard phosphate pre-treatment and baked enamel finish. 

C. Surface Metal Raceways 


a. Wiremold/Legrand. 

b. Mono-Systems, Inc. 

c. Panduit Corp 

2. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish with 

manufacturer's standard prime coating. 

3. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that 

match and mate with raceways. 

D. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways 


a. Butler Manufacturing Co.; Walker Division. 

b. Enduro Composite Systems. 

c. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Device Division. 

d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 

e. Panduit Corp. 

f. Mono-Systems, Inc. 

g. Wiremold/Legrand 

2. Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC compound with matte texture and 

manufacturer's standard color. 

3. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that 

match and mate with raceways. 





2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS 

A. General 


B. Outlet Boxes 

a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 

b. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company. 

c. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. 

d. Hoffman. 

e. Hubbell, Inc. 

f. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. 

g. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 

h. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 

i. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 

j. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division. 

k. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. 

l. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

m. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 

n. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary 

1. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1; UL514A. 

2. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover. 

3. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2 

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be 

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified in the 

following paragraphs. Manufacturers and model numbers listed are used only to 

represent the characteristics required and are not intended to restrict the use of other 

Available Manufacturers listed above and models that meet the specified criteria. 

a. Boxes for exposed work: deep drawn type with raised covers: 

1) Appleton 4S 1/2-DR; 8300 series cover. 

2) RACO 190 series; 800 series cover. 

3) Steel City 52150 series; RS series cover. 

b. Concealed and exposed boxes for lighting: 

1) Appleton 40-3/4. 

2) RACO 160 series. 

3) Steel City 54170 series. 

c. Boxes for flush switches, receptacles, telephone, data or other general devices: 

1) Appleton 4SVB series; 8400 series cover. 

2) RACO 198 series; 770 series cover. 

3) Steel City CWV series; 52-C-00 series cover. 

d. Boxes for flush switches, receptacles, telephone, data or other general devices 

installed in masonry construction: 

C. Junction And Pull Boxes 

1) Appleton MI-250 series or MI-350 series. 

2) RACO 690 series or 960 series. 

3) Steel City GW series. 





1. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. 

2. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast iron with gasketed cover. 

D. Cabinets and Enclosures 

1. General: 

a. Compliance: NEMA 250; UL 50 and 508A, as applicable. 

b. NEMA Type 1: Code-gauge phosphatized steel with continuously welded seams; 

manufacturer's standard ANSI 61 gray polyester powder finish inside and out; nongasketed 

removable hinged front cover, with flush latch and concealed hinge; 

collar studs. 

c. NEMA Type 3R: Code-gauge galvanized steel with drip shield top, seam-free front, 

side, and back; manufacturer's standard ANSI 61 gray polyester powder finish 

inside and out; non-gasketed continuous-hinged door, with stainless steel pin; 

captive, plated steel cover screws; hasp and staple for padlocking; collar studs. 

d. Removable painted steel interior panel mounted on standoffs; metal barriers to 

separate wiring of different systems and voltages. 

e. Where keyed locks are indicated, provide 2 keys for each enclosure, with all locks 

keyed alike. 

f. Provide enclosures wider than 36 inches with double doors; removable center 

posts; internal bracing, supports, or both, as required to maintain their structural 

integrity; and, accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 

g. Provide clamps, grids, slotted wireways, or similar devices to which or by which 

wiring may be secured. Provide DIN-rail mounted terminal strips for terminating 

all incoming and outgoing control wiring, and power terminal blocks for 

incoming/outgoing power wiring. 

h. Provide metal barriers to separate compartments containing control wiring 

operating at less than 50 volts from power and higher-voltage control wiring. 

2.4 FACTORY FINISHES 

A. Finish: For metal wireway and surface raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide 

manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting. 

B. Finish: For metal wireway and surface raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide 

manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled metal wireway and surface raceways, 

enclosures, and cabinets before shipping. 


3.1 RACEWAYS 

A. General 

1. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 

2 except where requirements on drawings or in this article are stricter. 

2. Provide sizes and types of raceways as indicated on the Drawings. Sizes are based on 

THWN insulated copper conductors, except where noted otherwise. Where sizes are not 

shown on the Drawings or in the Specifications, size raceways in accordance with NFPA 

70 requirements for the number, size and type of conductors installed. Minimum raceway 

size: 1/2 inch (concealed and exposed); 1 inch (underground and under slab). 

3. Provide all raceways, fittings, supports, and miscellaneous hardware required for a 

complete electrical system as described by the Drawings and Specifications. 

4. Install a green-insulated, equipment-grounding conductor, which is bonded to the 

electrical system ground, in all raceways, with the exception of Service Entrance 

raceways. 

5. Install grounding bushings on all conduit terminations and bond to the enclosure, 





equipment grounding conductor, and electrical system ground. 

6. Install raceways concealed in walls or above suspended ceilings in finished areas. When 

approved by the Architect, raceways may be installed concealed in elevated floor slabs. 

Do not install raceways horizontally within slabs on grade. 

7. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved 

portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. 

8. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water 

pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. 

9. Make bends and offsets so inside diameters are not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the 

same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated. 

10. Install raceways: 

a. To meet the requirements of the structure and the requirements of all other Work 

on the Project. 

b. To clear all openings, depressions, ducts, pipes, reinforcing steel, and so on. 

c. Within or passing through the concrete structure in such a manner so as not to 

adversely affect the integrity of the structure. Become familiar with the 

Architectural and the Structural Drawings and their requirements affecting the 

raceway installation. If necessary, consult with the Architect. 

d. Parallel or perpendicular to building lines or column lines. 

e. When concealed, with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance, 

considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

11. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and 

leave at least 2 inches of concrete cover. 

a. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete 

placement. 

b. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete. 

c. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size parallel or at right angles to main 

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab 

support. 

d. Change from RNC to coated GRS or IMC before rising above the floor. 

12. Where masonry walls are left unfinished, coordinate raceway installations with other 

trades so that the raceways and boxes are concealed and the wall will have a neat and 

smooth appearance. 

13. Support raceways from structural elements of the building as required by NFPA 70, 

Division 26 Section “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems”,. Do not support 

raceways by hangers used for any other systems foreign to the electrical systems; and, do 

not attach to other foreign systems. Do not lay raceways on top of the ceiling system. 

14. Provide support spacing in accordance with NFPA 70 requirements, and at a minimum in 

accordance with NEMA standards. Support by the following methods: 

a. Attach single raceway directly to structural steel with beam clamps. 

b. Attach single raceway directly to concrete with one-hole clamps or clips and 

anchors. Outdoors and wherever subject to dampness or moisture, offset 

raceways from the surface by using galvanized clamps and clamp backs, to 

mitigate moisture entrapment between raceways and surfaces. 

c. Attach groups of raceway to structural steel with slotted support system attached 

with beam clamps. Attach raceway to slotted channel with approved raceway 

clamps. 

d. Attach groups of raceway to concrete with cast-in-place steel slotted channel 

fabricated specifically for concrete embedment. Attach raceway to steel slotted 

channel with approved raceway clamps. 

e. Hang plumb horizontally suspended single raceway using a threaded rod. Attach 

threaded rods to concrete with anchors and to structural steel with beam clamps. 

Attach raceway to threaded rod with approved raceway clamps. 

f. Hang horizontally suspended groups of raceway using steel slotted support 

system suspended from threaded rods. Attach threaded rods to concrete with 

anchors and to structural steel with beam clamps. Attach raceway to steel slotted 





channel with approved raceway clamps. 

g. Support conductors in vertical raceway in accordance with NFPA 70 requirements. 

h. Cross-brace suspended raceway to prevent lateral movement during seismic 

activity. 

i. Use pre-fabricated non-metallic spacers for parallel runs of underground or underslab 

conduits, either direct buried or encased in concrete. 

15. Install electrically- and physically-continuous raceways between connections to outlets, 

boxes, panelboards, cabinets, and other electrical equipment with a minimum possible 

number of bends and not more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends between 

boxes. Make bends smooth and even, without flattening raceway or flaking the finish. 

16. Protect all electrical Work against damage during construction. Repair all Work damaged 

or moved out of line after rough-in, to meet the Architect’s approval, without additional cost 

to the Owner. Cover or temporarily plug openings in boxes or raceways to keep raceways 

clean during construction. Clean all raceways prior to pulling conductors or cables. 

17. Align and install raceway terminations true and plumb. 

18. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. 

19. Install a pull cord in each empty raceway that is left empty for installation of wires or 

cables by other trades or under separate contracts. Use polypropylene or monofilament 

plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at 

each end of pull cord. 

20. Install approved expansion/deflection fittings where raceways pass through or over 

building expansion joints. 

21. Route raceway through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through roof seals 

approved by the Architect, the roofing contractor, or both. Obtain approval for all roof 

penetrations and seal types from the Architect, Owner, roofing contractor, or all three as 

required to maintain new or existing roofing warranties. 

22. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them 

with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush 

steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or 

surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 

a. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of 

refrigerated spaces or from building exterior to building interior. 

b. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. 

B. RMC 

23. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to 

freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for 

plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with GRS; FMC may 

be used 6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with 

floor for future equipment connections. 

1. Use GRS or IMC in the following areas: 

a. Where indicated. 

b. Exterior applications where above grade and exposed. 

c. Below grade when concrete-encased, plastic-coated, or provided with a corrosion 

resistant approved mastic coating. 

d. All raceways penetrating slabs on grade (use plastic-coated raceway or provide 

with a corrosion resistant approved mastic coating). This shall include the 90- 

degree elbow below grade and the entire vertical transition to above grade. 

2. Use RAC in the following areas: 

a. Indoors above grade. 

b. Interior wet or damp locations. 

c. For circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for 





such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. 

C. EMT 

3. Do not use RAC: 

a. Below grade. 

b. Imbedded in concrete or other areas corrosive to RAC. 

1. Use EMT in the following areas: 

a. Where indicated. 

b. Interior concealed locations for: 

1) Branch and feeder circuits. 

2) Low-voltage control, security, and fire alarm circuits 

2. Do not use EMT: 

D. FMC and LFMC 

a. Below grade. 

b. In exterior applications when exposed. 

1. Use FMC or LFMC: 

a. For the final 24 inches of raceway to all motors, transformers, and other equipment 

subject to vibration or movement. 

b. From outlet boxes (attached to building structure) to recessed light fixtures. Install 

sufficient length to allow for relocating each light fixture within a 5-foot radius of its 

installed location. 

E. RNC 

2. Do not use FMC or LFMC: 

a. For branch circuits, homeruns or feeders. 

b. In lengths exceeding 6 feet. 

1. Solvent-weld RNC fittings and raceway couplings per the manufacturer’s instructions and 

make all connections watertight. Use solvent of the same manufacturer as the raceway. 

2. Where installed exposed outdoors or other areas subject to temperature variations, install 

expansion fittings per Article 352.44 of NFPA 70, to accommodate thermal expansion in 

straight runs. 

3. Use RNC in the following locations: 

a. Only where specifically indicated, and then only as specified below. 

b. Underground, single and grouped, in lieu of GRS or IMC, when indicated. 

1) Direct buried 

2) Concrete-encased (use approved rigid PVC interlocking spacers, selected 

to provide minimum duct spacing and cover depths indicated while 

supporting ducts during concreting and backfilling; produced by the same 

manufacturer as the ducts). 





4. Do not use RNC: 

a. Exposed indoors 

b. In occupied spaces. 

c. In return air plenums. 

d. Where subject to physical damage. 

e. Where not permitted by codes. 

F. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 

1. RMC and IMC: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings and installation tools 

approved by the manufacturer for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in 

PVC coating after installing conduits. Replace all fittings and conduits that have any 

portion of the coating scraped off to bare metal, at no additional cost to the Owner. 

3. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight. 

4. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors at raceway terminations: 

a. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to 

enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, 

one inside and one outside box. 

b. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings 

tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase 

nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase 

nipple so no threads are exposed. 

G. Telephone and Signal/Data System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to 

above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 

90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to 

comply with these requirements. 

H. Wireways 

1. Use flat head screws, clips and straps to fasten wireways to surfaces. Mount plumb and 

level. 

2. Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings. 

3. Close ends of wireway and unused raceway openings. 

I. Surface Raceways 

1. Use flat head screws, clips and straps to fasten surface raceways to surfaces. Mount 

plumb and level. 

2. Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings. 

3. Close ends of surface raceway. 

3.2 BOXES 

A. General 

1. Verify locations of device boxes prior to rough in. 

2. Set boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as specified or indicated on the 

Drawings. 

3. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. 

Adjust box locations to accommodate intended purpose. 

4. Install boxes to preserve fire ratings of walls, floors, and ceilings. 

5. Install flush wall-mounted boxes without damaging wall insulation or reducing its 

effectiveness. 

6. Support boxes independently of raceway. 

7. Clean the interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. Clean exposed 

surfaces and restore finish. 





8. Adjust flush-mounted boxes to make front edges flush with finished wall material. 

9. Provide boxes of the depth required for the service, device and the application, and with 

raised covers set flush with the finished wall surface for boxes concealed in plaster 

finishes. Select covers with the proper openings for the devices being installed in the 

boxes. Install boxes flush unless otherwise indicated. 

10. Install outlet boxes in firewalls complying with UL requirements, with box surface area not 

exceeding 16 square inches; and, when installed on opposite sides of the wall, separate 

by a distance of at least 24 inches. 

B. Outlet Boxes 

1. Install all electrical devices, such as plug receptacles, lamp receptacles, light switches, 

and light fixtures in or on outlet boxes. 

2. Locations of outlets on Drawings are approximate; and, except where dimensions are 

shown, determine exact dimensions for locations of outlets from plans, details, sections, or 

elevations on Drawings, or as directed by Architect. Locate outlets generally from column 

centers and finish wall lines or to centers or joints of wall or ceiling panels. 

3. Locate outlet boxes so they are not placed back-to-back in the same wall, and in metal 

stud walls, so they are separated by at least one stud space, to limit sound transmission 

from room to room. Install outlet boxes in accessible locations and do not install outlets 

above ducts or behind furring. 

4. Install extension and plaster rings as required by NFPA 70. 

5. Carefully set outlet boxes concealed in non-plastered block walls so as to line up with wall 

joints. Coordinate the box and raceway installation with the wall construction as required 

for a flush and neat appearing installation. Outlet box extensions may be used where 

necessary. 

6. Do not exceed allowable fill per NFPA 70. 

7. Where multiple devices are shown grouped together, gang mount with a common cover 

plate. 

C. Junction and Pull Boxes 

1. Install junction and pull boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas. 

2. Provide boxes set flush in painted walls or ceilings with primer coated cover. 

3. Where junction and pull boxes are installed above an inaccessible ceiling, locate so as to 

be easily accessible from a ceiling access panel. 

4. Boxes for exterior use shall be: 

a. PVC with a UV-stabilized PVC cover sealed and gasketed watertight. 

b. Cast aluminum with a cast aluminum cover sealed and gasketed watertight. 

c. Cast iron with cast iron cover sealed and gasketed watertight in vehicular traffic 

areas. Provide box and cover UL listed for use in vehicular traffic areas. 

d. Install buried boxes so that box covers are flush with grade, unless indicated 

otherwise. 

3.3 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 

A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide NEMA 1 construction for indoor, dry 

locations; NEMA 12 for indoor, damp and dusty locations. 

B. Install flush mounted in the wall in finished spaces, with the top 78 inches above finished floor. 

The front shall be approximately 3/4-inch larger than the box all around. 

C. Install surface mounted in unfinished spaces, with the top 78 inches above finished floor. The front 

shall be the same height and width as the box. 

D. Electrically ground all metallic cabinets and enclosures. Where wiring to cabinet or enclosure 

includes a grounding conductor, provide a grounding lug in the interior of the cabinet or enclosure. 

Cabinets and enclosures specified in this Section are intended to house miscellaneous electrical 





components assembled in a custom arrangement, such as contactors and relays. 

E. All components that are specified or indicated for assembly in cabinets and enclosures shall each 

be individually UL listed and labeled. Arrange wiring so that it can be readily identified. Support 

wiring no less than every 3 inches. Install gauges, meters, pilot lights and controls on the face of 

the door. 

F. Do not provide cabinets and enclosures smaller than the sizes indicated. Where sizes and types 

are not indicated, provide cabinets and enclosures of the size, type and classes appropriate for 

the use and location per the guidelines of the NEC. Provide all items complete with covers and 

accessories required for the intended use. 





LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 – Page 1 

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 



A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 

and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices: 

1. Indoor low voltage occupancy sensors. 

2. Emergency shunt relays. 

B. Related Sections include the following: 

1. Division 26 Section “General Electrical Requirements” for general requirements and related 


2. Division 26 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” for outlet boxes and other assemblies 

to support wiring devices. 

3. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors, 

and manual light switches. 


A. LED: Light-emitting diode. 

B. PIR: Passive infrared. 



1. Occupancy sensors 

B. Shop Drawings: 

a. Catalog cut sheets, including major and minor motion coverage patterns, time delay 

and sensitivity adjustability settings, load restrictions when used with electronic 

ballasts and performance specification items indicating compliance with this specification. 

b. Documentation showing compliance with California Energy Commission certification. 


a. Show installation details. 

b. Lighting plan showing location, mounting height, orientation and coverage area of 





each sensor. 

c. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring. 

d. List of ballast types and lamp combinations compatible with occupancy sensors. 

e. For any manufacturer submitted other than that listed as the Basis of Design, provide 

the following information for Engineer review: 

C. Field quality-control test reports. 

1) Factory-generated occupancy sensor layout on project lighting plans with 

sensor location, orientation and product type clearly marked on plans. 

Sensor placement shall be coordinated with project reflected ceiling plan 

layout, ceiling heights, lights, diffusers, and any other ceiling devices and 

equipment. 

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, 

and maintenance manuals. 


a. Manufacturer’s installation instructions, including instructions for storage, handling, 

protection, examination, preparation, start-up calibration and installation. 

b. Product data clearly showing sensor field adjustments, including dip switch setting 

definitions and location of settings within sensors. 

c. Manufacturer’s maintenance, including operating and adjustment instructions. 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 

100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended 

use. 

B. Occupancy Sensors 

1. Products supplied shall be from a single manufacturer that has been continuously involved 

in the manufacturing of occupancy sensors for a minimum of 5 years. 

2. Products shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 certified manufacturing facility. 

3. Manufacturer shall test all equipment prior to shipment. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates 

ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, 

fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Occupancy manufacturers shall provide a five (5) year warranty for sensors and accessories from 

date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS 

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering prod- 





ucts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or a comparable 

product by one of the following. The listing of any manufacturer below does not imply automatic 

approval; refer to shop drawings requirements listed within the Section for additional requirements: 

1. Hubbell Incorporated; Hubbell Building Automation.. 

2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 

3. Watt Stopper, a division of Pass & Seymour/Legrand. 

D. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit. 

1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights and motor or equipment loads on when 

covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning loads off, 

adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes with a maximum of 30 minutes. 

2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. 

Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit. 

3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 15-A tungsten 

at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150- 

mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70. 

4. Mounting: 

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. Available 

in white or off-white finish. 

b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch (13-mm) knockout in a standard 

electrical enclosure. 

c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged 

door. 

5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation 

of the sensor. 

6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure concealed on unit to prevent 

tampering 

7. Sensor coverage pattern shall have been confirmed with Nema WD7 Guide and Robotic 

test method. 

8. UL Listed for dry locations and complies with local codes. 

9. Operating temperatures of 32 degree F through 104 degree F, and relative humidity of 0%- 

95%. 

10. Sensor shall be capable of being networked with additional units to achieve adequate coverage. 

11. Field selectable time delay and sensitivity settings or the capability for self-adjusting technologies 

to optimize time delay and sensitivity settings to respond to occupancy usage patterns. 

Occupancy usage patterns shall be saved in a non-volatile memory that retains settings 

in the event of a power outage. 

12. Sensors shall be capable of operating normally with electronic ballasts, PL lamp systems 

and rated motor loads. 

13. Sensors and related relays shall be compatible with the specific lighting types controlled. 

E. PIR Type: Ceiling or wall mounting as indicated on plans; detect occupancy by sensing a combination 

of infrared heat and movement in area of coverage. 

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch minimum movement of any portion of a 

human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. 

2. Detection Coverage (Small Area): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 450 

sq. ft. major motion when mounted on a 96-inch high ceiling. 

3. Detection Coverage (Large Area): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1200 

sq. ft. major motion when mounted on a 96-inch high ceiling. 

4. Sensor shall utilize pulse count processing and digital signature analysis to respond only to 

those signals caused by human motion. 





5. Sensor shall provide high immunity to false triggering from RFI and EMI. 

6. Sensor shall have a multiple-segmented fresnel lens in a multiple-tier configuration, with 

grooves to eliminate dust and residue buildup. Sensor shall be capable of accepting mask 

inserts to mask specific portions of the lens to prevent false triggering. 

F. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling or wall mounting as indicated on plans; detect occupancy by using 

a combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology 

or combination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the field by operating 

controls on unit. 

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 

2. Detector Sensitivity: PIR Component detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of 

any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and Ultrasonic 

component detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 

inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. 

3. Different LED indicator colors for each sensing technology 

4. PIR Sensor Component 

a. Shall utilize pulse count processing and digital signature analysis to respond only 

to those signals caused by human motion. 

b. Provide high immunity to false triggering from RFI and EMI. 

c. Shall have a multiple-segmented fresnel lens in a multiple-tier configuration, with 

grooves to eliminate dust and residue buildup. Sensor shall be capable of accepting 

mask inserts to mask specific portions of the lens to prevent false triggering. 

5. Ultrasonic Sensor Component 

a. Detection Frequency (Small Area – 500 sq. ft. and less): Ultrasonic operating frequency 

shall be crystal controlled at 40 kHZ within +/- 0.005% tolerance to assure 

reliable performance and eliminate sensor cross-talk. 

b. Detection Frequency (Medium and Large Areas – greater than 500 sq. ft.): Ultrasonic 

operating frequency shall be crystal controlled at 32 kHZ within +/- 0.005% 

tolerance, to assure reliable performance and eliminate sensor cross-talk. 

c. Sensors shall be capable of automatically adapting to airflow conditions or filtering 

frequency spectrum related to air movement. 

6. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a 360 degree area 

of 500 sq. ft. major motion when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling. 

7. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a 360 degree 

area of 1000 sq. ft. major motion and 500 sq. ft minor motion for ultrasonic component 

when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling. 

8. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a 360 degree area 

of 2000 sq. ft. major motion and 1000 sq. ft. minor motion for ultrasonic component and 

1200 sq. ft. major motion for PIR component when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling. 

9. Wall Mount Detection Coverage: Detect occupancy anywhere within a 120 degree area of 

1200 sq. ft. major motion when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling or wall. 

10. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 10 to 100 fc (Ceiling Mount) and from 3 to 

200fc (Wall Mount); keep lighting off when selected lighting level is present. 

OC3-S: Ceiling Mount, Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors (Small Area) 

Manufacturer 

Model Series 

Wattstopper 

N/A 

Hubbell 

OMNI-DT500RP 

Leviton 

OSC05-MOW 





OC3-M: Ceiling Mount, Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors (Medium 

Area) 

Manufacturer 

Wattstopper 

Hubbell 

Leviton 

Model Series 

DT-300 

OMNI-DT1000RP 

OSC10-MOW 

OC3-L: Ceiling Mount, Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors (Large Area) 

Manufacturer 

Model Series 

Wattstopper 

N/A 

Hubbell 

OMNI-DT2000RP 

Leviton 

OSC20-MOW 

OW3: Wall Mount, Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors 

Manufacturer 

Model Series 

Wattstopper 

DT-200 

Hubbell 

LODTRP 

Leviton 

OSW12-MOW 

2.2 EMERGENCY SHUNT RELAY 

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products 

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or a comparable 

product by one of the following: 

1. Lighting Control and Design, Inc. 

D. Description: Normally closed, electrically held relay, arranged for wiring in parallel with manual or 

automatic switching contacts; complying with UL 924. 

1. Coil Rating: 120 V. 


A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. 

Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and 

Cables." 

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller 

than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical 

Power Conductors and Cables." 

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than 

No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power 

Conductors and Cables." 






3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION 

A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. 

Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. The locations 

and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the rooms 

that are to be provided with sensors. Provide additional sensors as required to properly and completely 

cover the respective rooms. 

B. Arrange a pre-installation meeting with manufacturer’s factory authorized field representative, at 

Owner’s facility, to verify placement of sensors and installation criteria. 

C. Install devices and auxiliary equipment in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. 

D. Install relay units where concealed from view and where accessible. 

E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torquetightening 

values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 

486A and UL 486B. 

3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION 

A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structureborne 

vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators. 

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION 

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and 

Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch (13 mm). 

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited 

conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. 

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless 


D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, 

pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. 


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, 

adjust and test for compliance with requirements. 

2. Operational Test: Test all occupancy sensors in test mode to confirm sensor coverage and 

sensitivity of sensor per manufacturer’s instructions. Upon completion of tests, set sensor 

time delay to 15 minutes adaptive. Follow testing and adjustment procedures as written in 

the manufacturer’s installation instructions for each sensor model. 

B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work. 





3.5 ADJUSTING 

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, 

provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits 

to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 





PANELBOARDS 262416 – Page 1 

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 


A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating. 

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient 

voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and 

manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and 

finishes. 

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of 

installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 

3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 

4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 

5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 

6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent 

protective devices and auxiliary components. 

7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 

8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective 

device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include 

selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. 

D. Field Quality-Control Reports: 



3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with 

requirements. 

E. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. 





F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, 

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section 

"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective 

device that allows adjustments. 


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site 

testing. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and 

accessories from single source from single manufacturer. 

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards 

including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with 

indicated maximum dimensions. 

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by 

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 

E. Comply with NEMA PB 1. 

F. Comply with NFPA 70. 


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary 

electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation. 

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407 . 


A. Environmental Limitations: 

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work 

in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC 

system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at 

occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise 

indicated: 

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) to plus 

104 deg F (plus 40 deg C). 

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m). 

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 

2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m). 





C. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities 

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after 

arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Architect Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of 

electric systems. 

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric systems without Owner's written permission. 

3. Comply with NFPA 70E. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that 

penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, 

raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. 

Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and 

panels. 

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Concrete, 

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. 

1.9 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or 

replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within 

specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS 



1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 

2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types: 

Two spares for each panelboard. 

3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and 

type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 

4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each 

size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 


2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS 

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in 

Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 

B. Enclosures: Flush -mounted cabinets. 

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. 

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 

b. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, 

match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 





2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged 

trim cover. 

3. Finishes: 

a. Panels and Trim: Steel , factory finished immediately after cleaning and 

pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of 

prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. 

b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim. 

c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective 

devices and other components. 

4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder. 

C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom. 

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 

1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum . 

2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding 

conductors; bonded to box. 

3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated 

from box. 

4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as 

suitable for nonlinear loads. 

5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections. 

E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 

1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 

2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type. 

3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type. 

4. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate 

at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 

5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. 

Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 

6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at 

same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 

7. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra-capacity 

neutral bus. 

F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load 

centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. 

G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances 

required for future installation of devices. 

H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or 

remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type 

of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit 

rating by an NRTL. 

I. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current 

available at terminals. 

2.2 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 


following: 





1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 

3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 

4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. 

C. Mains: Lugs only. 

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing 

adjacent units. 

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 

F. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box 

equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses. 

2.3 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 


following: 

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 

3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 

4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet 

available fault currents. 

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, 

and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip 

setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 

2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault 

protection (6-mA trip). 

3. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, 

single-pole configuration. 

4. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: 

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 

b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor 

materials. 

c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching 

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity 

discharge (HID) lighting circuits. 

d. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in 

on position. 



A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407 . 

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have 

been subjected to water saturation. 





C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances 

and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407 . 

B. Wall-Mounted Panelboards: Install panelboards on walls with tops at uniform height unless 

otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel 

channels bolted to wall. For panelboards not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with 

Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 

C. Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards 

with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. 

E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. 

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces. 

G. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space 

designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits into raised 

floor space or below slab not on grade. 

H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties. 

I. Comply with NECA 1. 

3.3 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components." 

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. 

Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten 

directories are not acceptable. 

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate. 


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, 

and adjust assemblies, and equipment, including connections. 

C. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, 

feeder, and control circuit. 

2. Test continuity of each circuit. 





D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards 

included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial 

action taken, and observations after remedial action. 

3.5 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as 

recommended by manufacturer. 

B. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, 

measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 

2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the 

facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax 

machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. 

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings 

before and after changes and submit test records. 

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is 

not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement. 


A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's 

written instructions. 





WIRING DEVICES 262726 – Page 1 

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Receptacles: Single, duplex, quad/4-plex, twist-lock, ground-fault circuit interrupters 

(GFCI), 

2. AC Wall Switches: Single- and double-pole, three--way 

3. AC Wall Occupancy Sensors. 




B. Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical Systems" for cords, caps, outlet boxes, 

floor service outlets, and poke-through assemblies used to support wiring devices. 


A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. 

B. IG: Isolated Ground 

C. PIR: Passive Infrared. 

D. RFI: Radio Frequency Interference 

E. TVSS: Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor 



Electrical Requirements”. 

B. Product data for the following products: 

1. Provide manufacturer’s catalog information specifically marked to indicate which devices 

are being furnished, and showing dimensions, colors, and configurations for all devices, 

including, but not limited to: Receptacles, AC wall switches, emergency shunt relays, 

cover plates, power poles, and multi-outlet assemblies. 

C. Field quality-control test reports. 

D. Operations and Maintenance Data: 

1. Provide operating and adjusting instructions for each type occupancy sensor. 

E. Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Section. 






A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated cover plate from a single 

manufacturer and through one source. Where practical and possible, obtain all wiring devices 

and associated cover plates from a single manufacturer and one source. 

B. Materials shall be manufactured by companies that have been specializing in the products 


C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: 


29 CFR 1910.7, and that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 


D. Comply with NFPA 70. 


A. Receptacles for Equipment Furnished by Owner or Under Other Divisions or Contracts: Match 

plug configurations. 


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with 

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Wall Plates: One for every 10 of each type (i.e., style, size, and finish) installed, but no 

fewer than two of each type. 

1.8 SPARES 

A. Furnish spare parts described below that match products installed and that are packaged with 


1. Wall Plates: One for every 10 of each type (i.e., style, size, and finish) installed, but no 

fewer than two of each type. 


2.1 GENERAL 

A. Wiring devices are defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution systems, such as 

convenience receptacles, switches, special purpose receptacles, and similar, which are intended 

to carry, but not use electrical energy. Install wiring devices as required by the Specifications and 

where indicated on the Drawings. 


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 


B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 





following: 

1. Receptacles and Switches: 

a. Cooper Wiring Devices. 

b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 

c. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 

d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. 

2. AC Wall Occupancy Sensors: 

a. Cooper Wiring Devices. 

b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 

c. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 

d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. 

C. In other Part 2 articles below, where lists of manufacturers and device catalog numbers are 

included, the following additional requirements apply to product selection: 

1. Additional Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include manufacturers listed in 

individual articles below, in addition to those listed in Paragraph “Manufacturers” above. 

2.3 FINISHES 

A. Color: 

1. Wiring devices connected to normal power systems: As selected by Architect , unless 

otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70. Cover plates: As selected by the Architect. 

B. Manufacturer's model numbers listed are to establish the quality of the wiring devices. Coordinate 

the proper suffixes in order to provide the correct color as specified above. 

2.4 CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLE: 

A. The catalog numbers listed below are generally for 20A rated devices. Where 15A rated devices 

are indicated on the Drawings or required for circuit rating limitations, provide receptacles 

equivalent to those specified for 20A, but rated for 15A. 

B. Duplex convenience receptacles: Specification grade, NEMA 5-20R, 125V, 20A, grounding type, 

UL listed and labeled, smooth nylon face, side and back wired, self-grounding. 

Manufacturer Duplex Single 

Cooper 5352 5351 

Hubbell 5352A HBL5361 

Leviton 5352 5891 

Pass & Seymour 5352 5361 

2.5 QUAD/4-PLEX 

A. Four NEMA 5-20R, 125V, 20A, grounding type, Specification Grade, single receptacles in a 

formed nylon enclosure, back wired, self-grounding, UL listed and labeled; with break tabs for split 

dual-circuit, 3-wire connections. 

Manufacturer 

Specification Grade 

Cooper 

Hubbell 

HBL420I 

Leviton 21254 

Pass & Seymour 





2.6 GFCI RECEPTACLES 

A. Ground fault circuit interrupter type receptacles: Specification Grade UL listed and labeled 

complying with UL 943, Class A and NEMA WD-1-1.10, 125V, 20A, trip at 4-6mA within 0.025 

second, and feed-thru type with integral heavy duty NEMA 5-20R receptacle arranged to protect 

receptacles down stream on the same circuit. 

Manufacturer 

Specification Grade 

Cooper 

GF20 

Hubbell 

GF20LA 

Leviton 6898 

Pass & Seymour 2091-S 

2.7 SWITCHES 

A. The catalog numbers listed below are generally for 20A rated devices. Where 15A rated devices 

are indicated on the Drawings or required for circuit rating limitations, provide switches equivalent 

to those specified for 20A, but rated for 15A. 

B. Switches: Specification grade, rated for 120/277V, 20A, back and side wired, and UL listed and 

labeled. 

Manufacturer 1 Pole 2 Pole 3 Way 

Cooper 2221 2222 2223 

Hubbell 1221 1222 1223 

Leviton 1221-2 1222-2 1223-2 

Pass & Seymour 20AC1 20AC2 20AC3 

2.8 OCCUPANCY SENSORS 

A. Wall switch occupancy sensors: Passive Infrared type, wall box switch, 120/277V, up to 20-minute 

time delay, light level sensor, 180-degree field of view, 900-square-foot coverage minimum, UL 

listed and labeled, and conforms to California Title 24 Energy Code. 

Manufacturer 

Passive Infrared 

Cooper 

6111 (120V only) 

6117 (277V only) 

Hubbell 

WS1277 

Leviton 

ODS10-ID 

Pass & Seymour WS3000 

Watt Stopper 

WS-200 

2.9 COVER PLATES 

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices and manufacturer of wiring 

devices specified herein. 

1. Plate securing screws: Metal with head color to match finish plate. 

2. Masonry walls and oversized wall openings: Jumbo size plates with same material as 

indicated above. 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. Outlets are only approximately located on the small scale Drawings. Use great care in the actual 

location by consulting the various large scale detailed Drawings used by other Division trades, and 

by securing definite locations from the Architect. 





B. Do not use multi-conductor circuits, with a shared neutral, for any GFCI receptacle circuit. Provide 

a separate neutral conductor with all GFCI receptacle circuits. 


A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. 

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height and are flush with the finished surface. 

C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. 

D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring 

devices. 


A. If required, provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. 

B. Clean debris from in and around outlet boxes. 


A. Install all wiring devices plumb, level, and square with building lines. Wiring device bodies shall 

extend to the finished surface of the walls, ceiling or floor, as applicable, without projecting beyond 

them. 

B. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductors around screw terminals. Tighten electrical 

connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If 

manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 

C. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and 

bond to metal outlet box. Exception: Do not bond grounding terminals of isolated ground 

receptacles to the outlet box. 

D. Install devices shown on wood trim, cases or other fixtures symmetrically and, where necessary, 

set with the long dimensions of the plate horizontal, or ganged in tandem. 

E. Unless dimensioned otherwise, install wiring devices a minimum of 24 inches from the closest 

edge of any sink. 

F. Install switches with OFF position down. 

G. Provide a separate grounded conductor (neutral) for each circuit controlled by a dimmer. Do not 

share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers. 

H. Install cover plates on all switches, receptacles, and blank outlets. 

I. Locate wiring devices so that the cover plate does not have to be cut to be installed. 

J. Where devices are shown near wall openings, coordinate location if corner guards are to be 

installed so that cover plates do not require cutting. 

K. Install cover plates after the wall has been finished (painted, wall paper, etc). 

L. Install device boxes in brick or block walls such that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless 

the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 





3.5 MOUNTING HEIGHTS 

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Division 26 Section “Common Work Results 

for Electrical”. 

B. Unless noted otherwise, install wiring devices as indicated below (NOTE: All dimensions are to the 

BOTTOM of the outlet box unless noted otherwise): 

1. Receptacles: 

a. General: 

1) Vertically with the ground slot mounted at the top: 16 inches above finished 

floor. 

2) Horizontally, with neutral slot mounted at the top: 16 inches above finished 

floor. 

b. Above counters: 

1) For 36-inch high counter tops: 44 inches above finished floor, vertically. 

2) For 34-inch high counter tops: 40 inches above finished floor, vertically. 

c. GFCI receptacles: Same as general receptacles . 

d. Concrete Block Walls: Dimensions above may be adjusted slightly, as required to 

compensate for variable joint dimensions, such that bottom or top of boxes, as 

applicable, are at block joints. 

2. Switches: 

a. General: 44 inches above finished floor. 

b. Above counters: Same as for receptacles. 

c. Concrete Block Walls: 40 inches above finished floor (dimension may be adjusted 

slightly, as required to compensate for variable joint dimensions, such that bottom 

of boxes are at block joints). 

d. Walls with wainscoting: 6 inches minimum above wainscoting, but not exceeding 

48 inches above finished floor. 

3. Telephone/Data Outlet Boxes: 

a. General: Match mounting height of adjacent wiring device listed above. 

b. Wall-mounted telephone: 40 inches above finished floor. 

3.6 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Label all devices fed down stream of GFCI protected receptacles as “GFCI PROTECTED”. 

B. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 

1. Receptacles and Switches: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served, 

using: 

a. Hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black -filled lettering on face of 

plate. 

b. Durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 

c. Permanent-ink marker, hand-printed legibly, inside outlet boxes. 

d. Adhesive film label, but with letter/number height of 1/4 inch, on face of plate. 

e. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay, but with letter/number height of 

1/4 inch, on face of plate, for exterior and damp/wet locations. 






A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. 

B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. 

C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. After installing wiring devices and after electrical 

circuitry has been energized, test for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with 

requirements. 

D. Test all wiring devices for electrical continuity and proper polarity of connections. 

E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. 

F. Correct wiring devices incorrectly installed. 

G. Repair or replace all damaged items or damaged finishes at no expense to the Owner. 

3.8 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 

3.9 CLEANING 

A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. 





INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 – Page 1 

SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Included in the work of this section are labor, material, and appurtenances required to complete 

the work of this Section as specified herein, including, but limited to: 

1. Interior light fixtures, lamps, reflectors, lenses or faceplates, and ballasts (includes exterior 

light fixtures normally installed on exterior surfaces of buildings). 

2. Emergency lighting units. 

3. Exit signs. 

4. Light fixture supports. 

5. Quality assurances. 

6. Specific requirements. 




B. Division 26 Section “Common Work Results for Electrical” for raceways, conductors, cables, and 

cords. 

C. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time 

switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors. 

D. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps. 


A. General: 

1. Only those light fixtures and manufacturers per each fixture type designated and listed in 

the Light Fixture Schedule or on the Drawings, and approved in accordance with 

paragraph 1.4-SUBSTITUTIONS of this Section, or both, will be accepted. Where the 

Light Fixture Schedule indicates an allowance to be made for a specific light fixture, the 

price is a contractor price and monies shall be allotted for freight, installation, and lamping 

(if designated). Alternate manufacturers presented at bid shall be disqualified. 

2. Submit all light fixtures, specified for use on this Project, in a single submittal package of 

portfolios, so that all light fixtures can be reviewed at one time. 

3. Prepare portfolios from manufacturer's standard specification sheets, and include the 

number indicated on the Light Fixture Schedule to identify each light fixture. Do not 

combine more than one light fixture type on a single sheet. 

4. Fixture or other materials shall not be shipped, stored, or installed into the work without 

approval of shop drawings. 

5. Modifications to fixtures shall be in accordance with Architect’s comments. 

B. Product Data: For each type of light fixture, collated and bound in sets, and arranged in order of 

fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 

1. Name of manufacturer. 

2. Descriptive cut sheets providing physical description of light fixture including dimensions 

and weights. 





3. Battery and charger information for emergency lighting units and exit signs. 

4. Fixture efficiency. 

5. Coefficient of utilization tables. 

6. Light fixture voltage. 

7. The number, type and wattage of the light fixture lamps (including cutsheet). 

8. Lens type (if applicable). 

9. Light fixture options that are to be provided. 

10. Light fixture mounting details, including non-standard outlet boxes. 

11. Construction of light fixture housing and door (if applicable). 

12. Light fixture ballast manufacturer, number and type per light fixture. 

13. Light fixture finish and color (if applicable). 

14. Descriptive cut sheets providing physical description of lamps, including voltage, wattage, 

efficacy, CCT, CRI, lumens, and life expectancy. 

15. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each light fixture type, 

outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the light 

fixture as applied in this Project. 

a. For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified 

independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be 

certified by the manufacturer. 

16. Descriptive cut sheets providing physical description of emergency ballasts for use in 

normal light fixtures, including complete battery information, lumens, and method for 

testing per NFPA 101. 

C. Shop Drawings: Show details of non-standard or custom light fixtures. Indicate dimensions, finish 

color, including custom color, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, 

accessories, and modifications. Scaled documents shall be provided for custom fixtures. 

1. Submittal Schedule 

a. Within (30) days from General Contractor receiving bids, shop drawings covering 

all light fixtures within this section shall be forwarded to architect to begin approval 

process. Any shop drawings submitted after the required time frame will require 

the contractor to submit only the 1st named manufacturer and associated 

specification data listed on the fixture schedule as the only approved 

manufacturer. No substitutions will be allowed after the specified time frame. 

b. Within 15 days of “approved” and “approved as noted” shop drawings, contractor 

shall forward to Architect a guaranteed ship date for each specified fixture. 

c. Within 15 days after contractor’s receipt of “reject and resubmit” or “not approved” 

shop drawings, contractor shall provide Architect with resubmitted shop drawings 

for only those fixtures deemed unacceptable. 

d. Contractor is responsible to call to the attention of the Architect any submittals that 

have not been returned to him in a timely manner that may affect delivery of 

fixtures or as otherwise affecting Section 1.4.D of this specification. 

2. Control Wiring 

D. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by 

product manufacturer. 

E. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for light fixtures. 

F. Field quality-control test reports. 

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in operation and 






H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 


A. Refer to Division 26 Section “General Electrical Requirements”. 

B. Prior to the Bid Date, substitutions will not be considered unless the Architect/Engineer have 

received written request for approval at least ten calendar days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. 

Include in each such request the Light Fixture Schedule designation, name of the material or 

equipment for which it is to be substituted and complete Product Data for the proposed substitute, 

as defined in SUBMITTALS above, and all other information necessary for an evaluation. Provide 

interior point-by-point calculations, under both normal and emergency lighting conditions, as 

applicable, if required by the Engineer. Submit a $100.00 review fee to the Engineer with each 

such point-by-point calculation for use of electronic base files. The fee will be returned if the 

substitution is added to the specification. 

C. During the Bid 

1. Any proprietary, sole-sourced light fixture listed in the fixture schedule shall be unit priced 

only. Unit prices shall be clearly identified on the bid form. 

2. Representative agents shall be allowed to offer mini-lot pricing (MLP). MLP shall be 

defined as: 

a. Agents can group only specified fixtures they represent, and 

b. Only represent in the region where the specification originated, and 

c. Exclude all fixtures outside their represented lines from the MLP, and 

d. Sole-sourced (proprietary) light fixtures shall not be included in the MLP. 

3. Packaging of light fixtures will not be considered nor approved. Packaging is defined as: 

distributor(s) providing a single price for a light fixture package made up of specified and 

non-specified light fixtures. Any submittal package containing non-specified light fixtures 

will be immediately rejected in its entirety. 

D. After the Bid Date, proposals to substitute light fixtures for those shown on the Drawings or 

specified herein, will only be considered as a deduct. Submit proposed substitutions separately, 

in Submittal form, with a list of proposed substitutions together with a deduct price for each 

substitution. Proposed substitutions will then be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. 

E. During the construction period, no substitutions shall be considered if product delay is due to 

contractor’s failure to order products in a timely manner after presentation of fixture schedules and 

specifications. Additional costs associated with air freight or special factory runs to meet schedule 

due to contractor’s error shall be at the expense of contractor. 

F. The Architect/Engineer has the final authority as to whether the light fixture is an acceptable 

replacement to the specified item. The proposed substitution may also be rejected for aesthetic 

reasons if felt necessary or desirable. In the event the proposed substitutions herein described 

are rejected, provide the specified item(s). 


A. BF: Ballast factor. 

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature 

C. CRI: Color-rendering index. 

D. CU: Coefficient of utilization. 





E. EISA: Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007. 

F. HID: High-intensity discharge. 

G. LER: Light fixture (Luminaire) efficiency rating. 

H. Light Fixture: Complete light fixture, including ballast housing if provided. 

I. RCR: Room cavity ratio. 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: 





C. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent 

agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as 

defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7. 

D. Regulatory Agencies: Provide fixtures conforming to nationally- or internationally-recognized 

accredited testing agencies, such as U.S., ETL, ARL, or others in acceptance with local code 

enforcement policy. 

E. Electrical Components and Devices: Provide only fixtures that comply with National Electric Code 

(NEC), and in particular to Section 410. All ceiling recessed fixtures, whether indicated in a 

catalog number or not, shall be equipped with an integral thermal protection device. 


A. Unless otherwise noted, perform all electrical Work required for the proper installation and 

operation of equipment, furnishings, devices and systems specified in other Divisions of these 

Specifications, furnished under other contracts, and/or furnished by the Owner for installation 


B. Give ample notice of any special openings or rough-in work required for placing electrical/lighting 

work so as to avoid cutting or removal of completed work. 

C. Where work of this Section is to be flush or concealed, install it so it does not project beyond 

finished lines of walls, ceilings or floor surface. 

D. Verify all ceiling systems and coordinate light fixture type and accessories prior to ordering light 

fixtures. Coordinate and cooperate with ceiling installer in regards to the location and installation 

of light fixtures. 

1.8 WARRANTY 

A. General Guarantee: For a period of one year after Owner’s initial acceptance and establishment 

of the beginning date of the guarantee period, and at no cost to the Owner, contractor shall 

promptly provide and install replacements for any fixtures or components deemed by the Owner 

as defective in workmanship under normal operating conditions, excluding lamp replacement as 

noted in Section 1.10.A.1. Contractor shall repair installed equipment on the job site to Owner’s 





satisfaction. For any time during said guarantee period that fixtures are not fully functional due to 

defects in material or workmanship, contractor shall provide or pay for suitable temporary light 

fixtures, an shall remove said temporary fixtures upon installation of replacement elements. 

Contractor shall furthermore guarantee replacement fixtures for a period of one year following 

replacement. 

B. Contractor shall not be held responsible for damage of fixtures or equipment components 

occurring after the beginning of the guarantee period due to acts of vandalism, acts of war, or acts 

of God. 

C. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which 

manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components 

of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of Substantial 

Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the 

remaining nine years. 

2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast Batteries: Seven years from date of 

Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for 

the remaining six years. 

D. Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer agrees 

to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 

E. Special Warranty for T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to 

Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or 

workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period as 

stated above.. 

1.9 SPARES 

A. Furnish spare materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with 


1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each 

type. 

2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish 

at least one of each type. 

3. Battery and Charger Data: One for each emergency lighting unit. 

4. Ballasts: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each 

type. 

5. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one 

of each type. 



A. In Light Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the 

following requirements apply to product selection: 









manufacturers specified. No substitutions shall be allowed as per Section 1.4. 

3. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each light fixture is based on the product named. 

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a 

comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 

2.2 LIGHT FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Provide light fixtures as shown on the drawings and/or specified. This shall include all lamps, 

material and labor to securely hang light fixtures, clean them and make them completely ready for 

use. Provide all hangers, supports, and miscellaneous hardware required to install light fixtures. 

Provide additional tie wires connected to structure to conform to applicable seismic requirements 

where required. 

B. Light fixture models scheduled on the Drawings are to show the manufacturer, grade and style of 

light fixtures required. Regardless of the manufacturer's catalog number suffixes indicated, 

provide all options and features as described in the Light Fixture Schedule. 

C. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. 

Manufac-turer of recessed fixtures shall provide mounting brackets suitable for connection to 

ceiling system structure. Modifications to standard mounting brackets shall be coordinated with 

contractor and delivered with fixture so that no delays to product delivery shall be allowed. 

D. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to 

NEMA LE 5A. Minimum gauge of sheet steel to be 18 gauge. 

E. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to 

NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. Minimum gauge of sheet steel to be 22 gauge. 

F. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 

G. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent 

warping and sagging. 

H. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under 

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent 

doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping 

and when secured in operating position. 

I. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 

4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent. 

J. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing 

and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is 

indicated. 

b. UV stabilized. 

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. 

K. Fixture Finishes: 

1. Apply fixture finishes after fabrication in a manner that assures a durable wear-resistant 





surfacing. Give exposed metal surfaces (brass, bronze, aluminum and others) and 

finished castings, except chromium-plated or stainless steel parts, an even coat of highgrade 

meth/acrylate lacquer or transparent epoxy. 

2. For corrosive or salt water environments, manufacturer shall provide fixtures with low 

copper/zinc cast aluminum (AB-47100 aluminum with less than 0.6% copper – classified 

for corrosive areas) housings to prevent salts from “pitting” aluminum housing. 

Manufacturer shall provide, in addition to or in lieu of, AB-47100 aluminum, ion added or 

pre-anodized polyester powder cast finish for “marine grade” applications. Manufacturer 

shall otherwise provide all stainless steel housing in conjunction with stainless steel 

hardware. 

3. Recessed downlights in corrosive or salt water interior environments shall be equipped 

with a “natatorium” finish comprised of a zinc-chromated and phosphated process, then 

powder-coated on the exterior of the housing. 

L. Reflectors: 

1. Provide aluminum reflectors or reflecting cones for downlight style fixtures comprised of 

#12 aluminum reflector sheet, 0.57 inch (15 gauge) or heavier and free of tool-making 

indentations, including spinning lines caused by assembly techniques. All reflectors shall 

be of first-quality, anodized finish :Alzak” with specular or semi-specular finish and color as 

selected. Provide specular reflectors with no apparent brightness above 45 degrees from 

Nadir and semi-specular, diffuse reflectors with no apparent brightness above 75 degrees 

from Nadir. 

M. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. 

Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from 

normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: 

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. 

b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad, 

triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact 

fluorescent luminaires. 

c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for 

HID luminaires. Indicate maximum allowed wattage. 

d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact 

fluorescent luminaires. 

e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. 

f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires. 

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS 

A. Electronic Ballasts: Comply with UL 935 and ANSI C82.11; programmed-start type, unless 

otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be 

designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated. 

1. Sound Rating: A . 

2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 

3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 

4. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 

5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 

6. BF: 0.85 or higher, or as otherwise noted on Fixture Schedule to reduce light output. 

7. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 

8. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C 82.11 and shall be 

connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. 

B. Light Fixtures controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts. 

C. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T5 and T5HO Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and 






1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps. 

2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 

3. Sound Rating: A. 





8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated. 


D. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor, Class P, 

and having automatic-reset thermal protection. 

1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label. 

E. Single Ballasts for Multiple Light Fixtures: Factory-wired with ballast arrangements and bundled 

extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in the field. 

F. Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Light Fixtures: Electronic type. 

1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of 

the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off. 

a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. 

b. Low-Level Operation: 50 percent of rated lamp lumens. 

2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. 

G. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and lamp 

type indicated. Ballasts in indoor locations shall have a disconnecting means either internal or 

external to each luminaire. 

H. Approved Linear Fluorescent Ballast Manufacturers 

1. Advance 

2. Magnetek 

3. Motorola 

4. Osram 

5. Universal 

6. Val-Mont/G.E. 

2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS 

A. Description: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and ANSI C 82.11, 

designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output 

unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 

2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 

3. Sound Rating: A. 





8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated. 


10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on 





electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 

11. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum. 

B. Operating Characteristics: Electronic Ballasts 

1. Ballasts shall be universal voltage, operating at either 120V or 277V supplied voltage. 

2. Ballasts shall be universal wattage, capable or operating 26 Watt or 32 Watt lamps 

without replacing ballast. 

3. Electronic ballasts shall be used for all 4-pin bases, including but not limited to: 2G11, 

G24Q-1, 2, 3 and GX24Q-1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6, and GR10Q-4. 

2.5 EXIT SIGNS 

A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply 

with authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Internally Lighted Signs: 

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 

2.6 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS 

A. Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924. 

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 

2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 

3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops to 

80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery 

when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay 

disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on 

charger. 

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and 

demonstrates unit operability. 

5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; 

bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 

2.7 LAMPS GENERAL 

A. Unless specific manufacturers and lamp types are called for in the Light Fixture Schedule, all 

lamps provided for this project shall be by the same manufacturer. Lamps shall be manufactured 

by: 

1. Eiko 

2. General Electric 

3. Osram/Sylvania 

4. Philips 

5. Ushio 

6. Venture 

B. All lamps shall be new and shall be delivered to the project in manufacturer's original sealed 

package. 

C. Substitutions of specific lamp manufacturer as addressed in Fixture Schedule shall not be 

allowed. Costs associated with re-lamping due to non-compliance with specification, for both 

labor and material costs, shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor. For those fixtures with 

lamp included in fixture, contractor shall coordinate with manufacturer to ensure only approved 





lamp(s) is (are) installed. Lamp manufacturers indicated on Fixture Schedule are for reference. 

Where required, contractor shall coordinate with Owner regarding national purchasing agreement 

of specific lamp manufacturers. Purchasing of lamps, whether through competitive bidding of 

listed manufacturers or proprietary supply, shall be at the discretion of the Owner. 

2.8 FLUORESCENT LAMPS 

A. Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test ; shall 

yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1. 

B. Paragraphs and subparagraphs below are sample specifications for typical lamps, which are a few 

of the thousands of types and ratings available for building illumination. Indicate here or in Light 

Fixture Schedule the standard designations of the lamps that meet lumen output, energy rating, 

CRI, color temperature, lamp life, and other requirements for specific Project applications. See 

Editing Instruction No. 10 in the Evaluations. 

C. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial 

lumens (minimum), CRI 78 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 

hours, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. T8 rapid-start lamps low-mercury, rated 25 W maximum, nominal length of 36 inches (915 mm), 

2000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 78 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated 

life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. 

E. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial 

lumens (minimum), CRI 78 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 

20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. 

F. T5 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 2900 

initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 

20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. 

G. T5 rapid-start lamps low-mercury, rated 21 W maximum, nominal length of 33.4 inches (849 mm), 


life of 30,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. 

H. T5 rapid-start lamps low-mecury, rated 14 W maximum, nominal length of 21.6 inches (549 mm), 


life of 30,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. 

I. T5HO rapid-start, high-output low-mercury lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 

inches, 5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and 

average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. 

J. T5HO rapid-start low-mercury, high-output lamps, rated 39 W maximum, nominal length of 33.4 

inches (1150 mm), 3500 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, 

and average rated life of 30,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. 

K. T5HO rapid-startlow-mecury, high-output lamps, rated 24 W maximum, nominal length of 21.6 

inches (549 mm), 2000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, 

and average rated life of 30,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. 

L. T8 rapid-start extra life lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches (1220 mm), 


life 24,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. 

M. T8 rapid-start extra life lamps, rated 25 W maximum, nominal length of 36 inches (915 mm), 2000 

initial lumens (minimum), CRI 78 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 

24,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. 





N. T8 rapid-start extra life lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches (610 mm), 1300 

initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 

24,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. 

O. T8 rapid start lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches (1220 mm), 2750 initial 

lumens (minimum), CRI 82 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 18,000 

hours unless otherwise indicated. 

P. T5HO rapid-start, high-output low-mercury lamps, rated 51 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 

inches, 5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and 

average rated life of 25,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. 

Q. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, low mercury, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, 

average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum). 



4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 



2.9 INCANDESCENT/ QUARTZ AND LOW VOLTAGE LAMPS 

A. Standard A-line lamps above 1100 lumens shall not be allowed. Only “watt-miser” reduced 

wattage lamps or halogen versions such as BT-15 or TB19 lamps shall be acceptable. Wattages 

above 250 watts for standard incandescent A-line lamps shall be used on a specific need basis 

only for existing liturgical fixtures or otherwise demdanded for decorative fixture. Standard A-line 

lamps with wattages above 150 watts shall not be used for downlight purposes unless required for 

MRI installations or installations requiring non-harmonic functioning sources. 

B. Medium based 50 watt PAR20 lamps shall not be used. Either reduced wattage or “IR” technology 

versions of said lamp shall be used. For the remaining PAR lamps, standard lamping shall be 

replaced by silver-backed or “IR” technology lamps. Extended life PAR lamps shall be excluded 

from the requirement. R7S base single contact linear quartz lamps above 300 watts shall be 

required to use the “IR” technology versions of said lamp with the same base and maximum 

overall length. 

C. 75 watt MR-16 lamps shall not be allowed. 71 watt and 65 watt MR-16 lamps, unless protective 

glass lens cannot be allowed, shall be replaced by 50 watt (or lower wattage) “IR” MR-16 lamps 

instead. No standard, non-dichroic backed MR-16 lamps with rated life of 2000 hours shall be 

allowed under any circumstance. 

D. Incandescent lamps shall be guaranteed for 30 days from the date of final acceptance and during 

this period, shall be replaced, upon failure, at no cost to the Owner. 

2.10 LED LAMPS 

A. Comply with ANSI C78.377 for white light LED color range. Minimum 70% maintained initial-rated 

lumens at average rated life of 50,000 hours. CRI 80 minimum for white light LEDs. LED 

binning specification tolerance to be maximum 15 % of rated values. All LEDs used for same 

fixture type throughout the project to originate from same production bin. White light production 

methods using only one color of LED with a single-color phosphor are not acceptable. 

2.11 LIGHT FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS 

A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints" for channel- and 





angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. 

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish 

same as fixture. 

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single 

fixture. Finish same as fixture. 

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage . 

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless 

steel, 12 gage . 

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. 

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with 

threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. 

2.12 TRANSFORMERS FOR LOW VOLTAGE FIXTURES 

A. Provide transformers to low voltage lamps which are suitable for the electrical characteristics of 

the supply circuits to which they are to be connected. For remote electronic or magnetic 

transformers, contractor shall remote transformers so as to reduce voltage drop. For 25 amp lowvoltage 

linear systems, contractor shall not daisy-chain 25A loaded runs together. Contractor 

shall provide home-run from end of run to remote transformer. 



A. Verify conditions of equipment and installation prior to beginning work. 

B. Verify that equipment is ready for connecting, wiring, and energizing. 


A. Light Fixtures: All work shall be executed to present a neat appearance. Set level, plumb, and 

square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. 

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for 

temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When 

construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean 

thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall. 

C. Support for Light Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support element. 

1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension 

devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from light fixture corners. 

2. Support Clips: Fasten to light fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture 

corner with clips that are UL listed for the application. 

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or 

center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch 

metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. 

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on light fixture. 

Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3. 





D. Suspended Light Fixture Support: 

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 

3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for 

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. Provide 

suitable connectors or collars to connect adjoining units to appear as a continuous unit. 

4. Manufacturers of decorative pendant-mounted fixtures shall provide flexible, field cutting 

cords. Contractor shall field cut cords to match elevations above finished floor as 

indicated on architectural elevations. Contractor shall not field cut pendants without 

elevation approval from Architect. Pendant suspensions on electrical documents are for 

reference only. 

E. Manufacturer shall supply contractor with a complete list of component elements to comply with 

design intent for either 20-amp (flexible low voltage track systems or line voltage track) or 50-amp 

bus bar track systems. Contractor shall install track systems based on design requirements 

outlined herein or Light Fixture Schedule. 

F. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 

G. Through wiring of recessed light fixtures, in suspended ceilings, is not permitted. Connect each 

light fixture by a whip to a junction box. The whip shall be of sufficient length to allow the light 

fixture to be relocated within a 6-foot radius. 

H. Wall Mounted Light fixtures 

1. Unless otherwise noted, conceal all raceways and back boxes for wall mounted light 

fixtures. Coordinate all wall-mounted light fixtures with interior elevations. Where specific 

elevations or dimensions are not indicated, verify the correct location with Architect prior to 

installation. Contractor shall supply structure to support weight of fixture. 

I. Contractor shall construct light coves according to architectural details. Contractor shall ensure, 

unless otherwise directed, that top of fixture lamp is flush with top of cove lip. Contractor shall 

provide blocking as needed under fixture to ensure stated requirement. 


A. Light fixtures shown on the Electrical Drawings represent general arrangements only. Refer to 

Architectural Drawings for exact locations. 

B. Coordinate the installation and location of light fixtures with other work and all other trades before 

installation to avoid conflicts. Coordinate light fixture locations in mechanical rooms with final 

installed piping and ductwork layouts. 

C. Verify all ceiling systems and coordinate light fixture type and accessories prior to ordering light 

fixtures. Coordinate and cooperate with ceiling installer in regards to the location and installation 

of light fixtures. 

D. Wall-Mounted Light fixtures 

1. Coordinate all wall-mounted light fixtures with the architectural features of the building. 

Where specific elevations or dimensions are not indicated, verify the correct location with 

the Architect prior to beginning any work. 

3.4 ADJUSTING 

A. Contractor shall adjust all light fixture sockets to match the lamp specified and aim all adjustable 

light fixtures as directed by the Architect. 





B. Where required, focusing shall be done during hours of darkness. Upon notification by contractor 

that all fixtures are correct as per shop drawings and functioning, that specified lamps have been 

verified, lighting designer or Architect shall coordinate with contractor as to a mutually agreed 

upon time to complete focusing. Failure of contractor to notify Architect during substantial 

completion will result in failure to comply with specifications. 


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify 

transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. 

B. Clean light fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of the installation. Protect installed light 

fixtures from damage during the remainder of the construction period. 

C. Upon completion of the installation of light fixtures, and after building circuits have been 

energized, energize lighting branch circuits to demonstrate capability and compliance with the 

requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at the site, then retest to demonstrate 

compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. 

D. At the time of final acceptance of this project by the Owner, ensure that all lamps are in working 

order and all light fixtures are fully lamped. 

E. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and 

interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance 

with standards. 

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE 

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by 

Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 

100 hours at full voltage. 

3.7 ADJUSTING 

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, 

provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. 

Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 

Some of this work may be required after dark. 

1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect. 





DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS 281111 – Page 1 

SECTION 281111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS 


1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 

A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all labor, 

equipment, and material as herein specified. 

B. This section requires the Contractor to furnish all materials required to install the fire alarm 

system. The Contractor shall be responsible for installing, testing, and start-up of a complete 

functioning fire alarm system, and each element thereof, as specified or indicated on the Drawings 

or reasonably inferred, including every article, device or accessory (whether or not specifically 

called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's function as indicated by the 

design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include materials, labor, supervision, 

supplies, equipment, transportation and utilities. Installation of devices shall be performed or 

supervised by a National Institute for Certification of Engineering Technologies (NICET) Level 2 or 

higher Fire Alarm Technician. Submit copies of the certification for employees through shop 

drawing submittals. 

C. All fire alarm system components shall include addressable field devices, and multiplexed, 

programmable, operator interface panels. 

D. The scope of work in this section includes: 

1. Fire alarm control panels. 

2. Remote annunciator panels. 

3. Manual fire alarm pull stations. 

4. Automatic smoke and heat detectors. 

5. Fire alarm notification appliances. 

6. Auxiliary fire alarm equipment. 

7. Door holder release. 

8. Battery stand-by power. 

E. Where coordination and interfacing with other systems or equipment is required, it shall be the 

responsibility of the fire alarm system installer (contractor) to either provide the relays, contacts, 

power supplies and other necessary hardware or see to it that such hardware is provided with the 

other systems or equipment. 

1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS 

A. The contractor shall coordinate work in this section with all related trades. Work and/or equipment 

provided in other sections and related to the fire alarm system shall include, but not be limited to: 

1. Conduit shall be by Division 26 “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 

1.3 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS 

A. Provide an integrated fire alarm system, which meets the codes and standards cited below and 

applicable local building and fire codes. All fire alarm equipment shall be Underwriters Laboratory 

(UL) and Factory Mutual (FM) approved for the type and class of service performed. 

1. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code, 2002 Edition 

2. NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm Code, 2002 Edition 





3. UL 864 – Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 

4. ULOJZ – Control Unit Systems 

5. UL 268 – Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 

6. UL 521 – Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 

7. UL 464 – Audible Signal Appliances 

8. UL 38 – Manual Signaling Boxes for Fire Alarm Systems 

9. UL 1971 – Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired 

10. UL 1480 – Speakers for Fire Protection Signaling Systems 

11. UL 1481 – Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 

12. UL 1711 – Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 

13. UL 1635 – Digital Alarm Communicator System Units 

14. IBC 2006 Edition with local amendments. 

15. IFC 2006 Edition with local amendments. 

16. ANSI A117.1 – Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 1998 Edition 

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. The fire alarm system shall be a non-coded manual and automatic fire alarm system with 

connections to the existing campus Fire Works system. Control panel shall be micro-processor 

based, with fully addressable alarm devices. 


A. Reference specification section 260010, GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS for general 

shop drawing submittal requirements. Also comply with the submittal requirements stated in this 

specification section. Submittals not complying fully with the submittal requirements of section 

260010 and this section will be rejected. 

B. Submit a Description of Operation that explains in detail the specific methods the submitted fire 

alarm system functions. Pre-printed, generic material will not be accepted and will be rejected. 

C. Shop Drawings: 

1. The fire alarm system equipment vendor shall provide shop drawings showing fire alarm 

floor plans and a full building riser diagram. Fire alarm floor plans and riser diagram shall 

show fire alarm control panel, annunciator, all fire alarm initiating devices and notification 

appliances. Show typical wiring diagrams of control panel/s, annunciator and each device 

and wiring connections required. Show all interfaces to other systems, such as 

temperature control systems, and security systems. 

2. Shop drawing scale shall match the Engineer’s drawings where possible. Scale shall not 

be less than 3/16" = 1’-0". 

3. The fire alarm floor plans and riser diagram shall show wiring to all fire alarm 

devices/appliances, indicating wire sizes and quantities as well as conduit/raceway sizes 

and locations of end-of-line (EOL) resistors. The fire alarm floor plans and riser diagram 

shall clearly show the routing of all fire alarm system wiring, including all horizontal routing 

and vertical routing (in chases). Routing of all fire alarm wiring shall comply with the 

“Survivability” requirements of NFPA 72. 

4. The fire alarm floor plans shall also contain a Bill of Materials and a Sequence of 

Operations Matrix that explains how the submitted fire alarm system functions. 

D. Product Data: Provide product cutsheets showing material specifications, electrical 

characteristics and connection requirements. 

E. Submittals and shop drawings shall not contain HEI’s firm name or logo, nor shall it contain the 



information at the end of this section must be used.NICET certification information referred to in 

Section 1.1.B this section. 





F. Test Reports: Indicate satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections. 

G. Indicate within the submittal all applicable UL listings and all applicable approvals or certifications. 

H. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use 

stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, 

examination, preparation, installation, and starting of products. 

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 

A. The fire alarm equipment vendor shall submit As-Built fire alarm drawings per the General and 

Supplemental Conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing as-built field changes 

recorded on a set of blue prints to the fire alarm equipment vendor for inclusion in the Record 

Drawings. 

B. The record drawings shall show actual locations of initiating devices, notification appliances, and 

end-of-line devices. Show the approximate location, size and type of all wiring and routing of 

wiring. Drawings should also include one-line riser diagrams showing all devices. 

C. The Contractor and fire alarm equipment vendor shall sign-off on the Record Drawings as being 

an accurate representation of the completed installation. 

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 

A. Submit under provisions of the General and Supplemental Conditions. 

B. Operation Data: Operating instructions. 

C. Maintenance Data: Maintenance and repair procedures. 

D. Include in the O&M manual a copy of the service representative’s contact list with all applicable 

phone and pager numbers. 

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS 

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with 

minimum three years documented experience. 

B. Installer: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section with minimum 

three years documented experience. Shall be bondable and licensed Contractor and employ fulltime 

factory-trained and certified installers and technicians. Installers shall provide with the fire 

alarm submittal proof of factory training for each installer. 

C. Final checkout and verification: Shall be conducted by a technician certified by the National 

Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) registered as level 2 or higher in 

the fire protection technology certification program. Provide certification information with fire 

alarm submittal. 

D. The equipment manufacturer's service department shall be fully stocked in standard parts and 

components and engaged in the maintenance of fire alarm systems. On-the-premises service 

shall be available within 4 hours of notification, 7 days a week, 24 hours a day. 

1.9 SERVICE AND GUARANTEE 

A. Furnish service and maintenance of fire alarm system including wiring and raceways for one year 





from date of substantial completion. 

B. All components, system software, parts and assemblies shall be guaranteed against defects in 

materials and workmanship for the one-year period stated above. 

C. Labor (including travel expenses) to trouble-shoot, repair, reprogram, or replace components shall 

be furnished by this contractor at no charge during the warranty period. 

D. All corrective software modifications made during warranty periods shall be updated on all user 

documentation and on user and manufacturer archived software disks. 


A. Provide 10% of the total or a minimum of three (3) manual pull stations. 

B. Provide 10% of the total or a minimum of two (2) of each type of automatic smoke detector. 

C. Provide 5% of the total or a minimum of one (1) of each type of automatic heat detector. 

D. Provide 5% of the total or a minimum of two (2) of each strobe type and candela rating. 

E. Provide 5% of the total or a minimum of two (2) of each speaker type. Combination 

speaker/strobe units matching the units installed are acceptable. 



A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products manufactured by the following 

manufacturers as indicated on the Drawings: 

1. Edwards System Technology. 

2. Approved Equal 

a. Approved equals will not be considered unless formally submitted during the 

bidding process as an RFI. 

2.2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL 

A. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be an EST-3 panel. 

B. Remote Annunciator: Provide supervised remote annunciator(s) where shown on the plans, 

including audible and visible indication of fire alarm by address, and audible and visible indication 

of system trouble and supervisory. Install in flush mounted enclosure. 

C. Power supply: Provide two separate and reliable power supplies. The control panel shall receive 

120 VAC power via a dedicated branch circuit of the building’s electrical system. Each shall have 

adequate capacity for the system. The fire alarm contractor shall submit battery calculations for 

review and approval. The calculations shall indicate each device and the load required in standby 

and alarm mode. The secondary power system shall be a battery-operated emergency power 

supply and charger with capacity for operating system in standby mode for 24 hours followed by 

alarm mode for 15 minutes. 

D. System Supervision: Automatically detects and reports open circuits, shorts, and grounds of 

wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification appliance circuits. Alarm, supervisory 





and trouble signals shall be monitored by the supervising station over a Digital Alarm 

Communicator Transmitter (DACT), or other approved method. 

E. Initiating Device Circuits: Provide circuitry, which meets the performance requirements during 

abnormal conditions, based upon the style and class of the circuitry selected. Initiating device 

circuits shall be Class B, Style B; 

F. Notification Appliance Circuits: Provide circuitry, which meets the performance requirements 

during abnormal conditions, based upon the style and class of the circuitry selected. Notification 

appliance circuits shall be Class B, Style Y. 

G. Signaling Line Circuits: Provide circuitry, which meets the performance requirements during 

abnormal conditions, based upon the style and class of the circuitry selected. Signaling line 

circuitry shall be Class B, Style 4;. 

H. Auxiliary Relays: Provide sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay contacts to provide accessory functions 

specified. 

I. Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter: Electrically supervised, capable of transmitting alarm, 

supervisory and trouble signals over telephone lines to remote station receiver. 

J. Provide TROUBLE ACKNOWLEDGE, DRILL, and ALARM SILENCE switch. 

K. Control Panel: The control panel and remote annunciator panel shall have dedicated alarm, 

supervisory and trouble LED’s and dedicated alarm, supervisory and trouble acknowledge 

switches. 

L. Lamp Test: Manual lamp test function causes each LED to function at fire alarm control panel. 

M. Drill Sequence of Operation: Manual drill function causes alarm mode operation as described 

above. 

N. Addressable systems shall have Silent Walk Test, History logging for a minimum of 400 events, 

80 character LCD display. 

O. Voice Communication: The system shall incorporate one-way voice communication via specified 

speakers. A central audible module shall provide for the necessary alarm message/tone 

generation, main and remote microphone connections and mixers/pre-amplifier circuits. 

Continuous supervision shall be provided along with specific information as to the type of failure 

(main microphone trouble, tone trouble, etc.) The following functions shall be provided at the fire 

alarm control panel. 

1. Hand held push to talk, noise canceling microphone in recessed protective panel mounted 

enclosure; 5 feet coiled cable; and LED to indicate the microphone push to talk has been 

pressed. 

2. Audible control switch module: Switches shall include “all circuits”, “aux tone 1”, “aux tone 

2”, “tone stop switch”, “audible trouble reset”; and these switches shall be supervised. 

3. Audible power amplifiers shall be self filtered; contain 24 volt power supply, transformer 

and amplifier monitor circuits; provide 70 volt RMS output with frequency response of 120 

HZ to 12,000 HZ. Amplifier shall operate all system speakers plus twenty-five (25) percent 

spare capacity. 

4. Audible supervision for open, short, or ground fault shall be provided with a distinct and 

individual trouble indication for each fault. 

5. Digitized voice messages are required to notify building occupants during alarm 

conditions. Message player shall not rely on tape or mechanical means of transmitting the 

voice message. A standard evacuation message shall be provided; however, the system 

shall be capable of transmitting a custom message of up to five (5) minutes long. 

6. Alarm sequence shall consist of a temporal (3) alarm tone for a maximum of 15 seconds 

followed by a automatic pre-selected message. At the end of the message the tone shall 

resume. This sequence shall continue until the fire alarm control panel has been silenced. 

Manual voice paging shall be available via panel switches to page individual floors or 





groups of floors. Each floor shall be an individual audible zone and have a corresponding 

audible switch. 

2.3 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 

A. Trouble Sequence of Operation: System or circuit trouble places system in trouble mode, which 

causes the following system operations: 

1. Visible and audible trouble alarm indicated at fire alarm control panel. 

2. Visible and audible trouble alarm indicated at remote annunciator panel, if provided. 

3. Trouble signal transmitted to supervising station. 

4. Manual acknowledge function at fire alarm control panel silences audible trouble alarm; 

visible alarm is displayed until initiating failure or circuit trouble is cleared. 

B. Supervisory Sequence of Operation: The activation of any sprinkler valve tamper switch or ductmounted 

smoke detector places system in supervisory mode, which causes the following system 

operations: 

1. Visible and audible supervisory alarm indicated by address at fire alarm control panel. 

2. Visible and audible supervisory alarm indicated by address at remote annunciator panel, if 

provided. 

3. Supervisory signal transmitted to supervising station. 

4. Duct-mounted smoke detectors shall shutdown their respective unit upon detection of 

smoke and remain down until manually reset. 

5. Manual acknowledge function at fire alarm control panel and remote annunciator panel 

silences audible supervisory alarm; visible alarm is displayed until device is returned to its 

normal position/supervisory condition is cleared. 

C. Alarm Sequence of Operation: Actuation of an alarm initiating device places circuit in alarm 

mode, which causes the following system operations. 

1. Audible notification appliances shall sound until silenced by the alarm silence switch at the 

control panel. 

2. All visible alarm notification appliances shall display a continuous synchronized pattern 

until reset by the Alarm Reset Switch. 

3. Alarm signal transmitted to supervising station. 

4. All air-handling systems that are monitored shall shutdown and remain down until the fire 

alarm control panel is reset. 

5. The alarm LED shall flash on the control panel and remote annunciator panel until the 

alarm has been acknowledged at the control panel/remote annunciator panel. Once 

acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on and the custom label for the address in alarm 

shall be displayed on the alphanumeric LCD readout. A subsequent alarm received from 

another address after acknowledged shall flash the alarm LED on the control panel 

showing the new alarm information. 

6. A pulsing alarm tone shall occur within the control panel until acknowledged. 

2.4 INITIATING DEVICES 

A. Manual Pull Station: Provide semi-flush, non-coded type, double action manual pull station. 

B. Spot Smoke Detector (Photoelectric type): Device shall have visible indication of detector 

actuation, self-restoring, plug-in with an integral addressable module indicating the detector 

status. Photoelectric detectors shall have sensitivity between 0.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke 

obscuration. 

C. Heat Detector – Fixed Temperature; Type: The device shall be actuated by a fixed temperature 

alarm point rating of 135 degree F. The base shall be plug-in with an integral addressable module 

indicating the detector status. 





2.5 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES 

A. Alarm Speakers: Speaker shall be UL 1480 listed; high quality tone and voice reproduction; 

capacitor connected for connection to supervised notification appliance circuit; semi-flush 

mounting; four inch cone; high impact, flame retardant PC/ABS thermoplastic; 25 or 70 VRMS; 

multi-tapped output power rated ¼ to 2 watts and produce 79 to 88 dB at 10 feet. 

B. Visible Alarm Notification Appliances (Strobes): Strobes shall be xenon or equivalent, unfiltered or 

clear filtered white light, a minimum intensity of 15/75 candela and as indicated on drawings, flash 

rate range from 1 to 3 Hz, a maximum pulse duration of 0.2 sec with a maximum duty cycle of 

40%. Strobe shall meet all requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (minimum 75 cd as 

tested per UL 1971). 

C. Audible/Visible Alarm Notification Appliances (/Speaker/Strobes): Combination units shall provide 

a common enclosure for the fire alarm audible and visible alarm appliances and be UL listed for its 

purpose. Minimum audible level and strobe intensity shall meet all requirements for separate 

appliances. 

2.6 AUXILIARY DEVICES 

A. Door Release: Magnetic door holders shall be suitable for wall or floor mounting. The 

electromagnet shall require no more than 3 watts to produce 25-lbf of holding force. The coil 

voltage shall be 120 VAC. 

B. Waterflow Alarm Switches: Shall be provided by the Fire Sprinkler Installer and shall be wired 

complete and ready for use by the Fire Alarm System Installer. Switch shall have an adjustable 

delay to minimize false alarms due to fluctuations in water pressure. 

C. Gate Valve (Tamper) Switches: Shall be provided by the Fire Sprinkler Installer and shall be wired 

complete and ready for use by the Fire Alarm System Installer. 

D. Control Relay Module: Provide intelligent control relay modules. The Control Relay Module shall 

provide one form “C” dry relay contact rated at 2 amps @ 24 VDC to control external appliances 

or equipment shutdown. The control relay shall be rated for pilot duty and releasing systems. The 

position of the relay contact shall be confirmed by the system firmware. 

2.7 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE 

A. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Building wire as specified in Division 26. 

B. Signaling Line, Initiating Device and Notification Appliance Circuits: Power limited fire-protective 

signaling cable, solid copper conductor, 300 volts insulation, suitable for temperature, conditions 

and location installed. Minimum wire size for initiating device circuits, control circuits and 

notification appliance circuits shall be determined by calculations and manufacturer’s 

requirements or recommendations. Wire and cable shall be twisted and shielded if recommended 

by the system manufacturer. Initiating, notification, and control circuits shall be sized based on 

20% additional power consuming devices. The conductors shall meet the requirements of NEC 

article 760. 

C. The type of cable chosen should be based on fire alarm system requirements, specification 

requirements and applicable code requirements. Consideration should also be given to the length 

of cable runs and potential interference. 

D. All wiring provided on this project shall be UL listed for the intended use. All wiring including 

wiring to existing modified devices and appliances shall be new. 






3.1 GENERAL 

A. The Contractor shall install, program and test all new equipment identified in this contract and 

revise existing equipment as noted. 

B. The installation supervisor shall be on the job site during the entire installation. The installation 

supervisor shall maintain marked up copies of the drawings at the job site showing as-built 

conditions. These drawings shall be updated daily and available for Owner review. 

C. The Contractor shall provide all required conduit and all associated hardware, and shall install 

(pull), connect, and test all cable for a complete fire alarm system. All wiring shall be installed in 

accordance with the guidelines of these specifications and documents as well as the NFPA codes 

and standards listed in these specifications. 


A. All wiring shall be installed in conduit. Minimum allowable conduit size shall be ¾ inch. The 

conduit shall be sized so that conduit fill does not exceed 75% of NFPA 70 maximum fill 

requirements. Cables in vertical risers shall not exceed 50% of NFPA 70 maximum fill 

requirements. Conduit installation shall be as required by the Contractor's layout and as described 

in these specifications. All conduit field routing shall be acceptable to the Owner. Routing not 

acceptable shall be rerouted and replaced without expense to the Owner. 

B. All wire, cable, conduit and raceways shall be concealed in walls, ceiling spaces, electrical shafts 

or closets in finished areas except as specifically noted otherwise. Conduit and raceways may be 

exposed in unfinished areas or where specifically approved by the Owner. 

C. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, all conduit shall be installed parallel or 

perpendicular to dominant surfaces with right angle turns made of symmetrical bends or fittings. 

Except where prevented by the location of other work, a single conduit or a conduit group shall be 

centered on structural members. 

D. Conduit shall be located at least six inches from hot water or steam pipes, and from other hot 

surfaces. Conduit shall not block access to any existing equipment or fixtures. 

E. All conduits and junction boxes shall be labeled as specified in Division 26 (red). 

F. All wiring shall be terminated at devices or panels using terminal connectors for screw type 

terminals. All terminal connectors for conductors shall be pre-insulated ring type or pre-insulated 

spade type. Pre-insulated terminal connectors shall include a vinyl sleeve, color coded to indicate 

conductor size. Pre-insulated terminal connectors shall include a metallic support sleeve bonded 

to the vinyl-insulating sleeve and designed to grip the conductor insulation. 

G. Mount end-of-line device in box with last device or separate box adjacent to last device in circuit 

for conventional hardwired class B initiating and notification appliance circuits. 

H. Conduit shall be securely fastened to all boxes and cabinets. Threads on metallic conduit shall 

project through the wall of the box to allow the bushing to butt against the end of the conduit. The 

locknuts both inside and outside shall then be tightened sufficiently to bond the conduit securely 

to the box. Conduit shall enter cabinets from the bottom and sides only. 

I. Install manual station with operating handle 48 inches above floor unless noted otherwise on 

drawings. 

J. Install ceiling mounted initiating devices in areas with exposed structure tight to underside of 

floor/roof deck. 





K. Install ceiling mounted visible and audible/visible notification appliances in areas with exposed 

structure to bottom of floor/roof structure or at 30 ft AFF, whichever is lower. 

L. Install ceiling mounted visible and audible/visible notification appliances in areas with finished 

ceilings flush with bottom of ceiling or at 30 ft AFF, whichever is lower. 

M. Install wall mounted visible and audible/visible notification appliances with visible element (strobe) 

between 80 inches and 96 inches above finished floor unless noted otherwise on drawings. 

N. Install wall mounted audible devices with the top of the device at least 90 inches above finished 

floor or 6 inches below the ceiling, whichever is lower, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. If 

combination devices are installed, they shall be installed per the visible signal device 

requirements. 

O. Mount outlet box for electric door holder to withstand 80 pounds (36.4 kg) pulling force. 

P. Make conduit and wiring connections to equipment provided by others. 

Q. Provide strobe synchronization as required per NFPA 72. 


A. Systems shall be checked and tested in accordance with the instructions provided by the 

manufacturer to insure that the system functions as required and is free of grounds, opens, and 

shorts. Each device shall be tested. Smoke detectors shall be tested with products of 

combustion. 

B. Upon completion of the system installation and before the Date of Final Acceptance, a factorytrained 

technician shall perform all necessary tests and adjustments and shall then file a Letter of 

Certification and a Certificate of Completion (NFPA 72) with the Owner indicating that the system 

functions and conforms to the Fire Alarm System Specifications. 

C. Test in accordance with NFPA 72 and local fire department requirements. 

3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES 

A. Include services of factory trained and certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, 

final connections, and system testing as performed by the fire alarm contractor’s factory-trained 

technicians. 


A. The equipment supplier's factory trained technician shall train the Owner's personnel in the proper 

use and maintenance of the system. Training sessions shall be conducted as needed, not to 

exceed a total of 2 sessions, with each session lasting a maximum of 4 hours each. 

B. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required responses to each. 

3.6 ACCEPTANCE TESTING 

A. Upon completion of the system installation, a factory-trained technician shall perform all 

necessary tests and adjustments in the presence of the Owner’s designated personnel.

INVITATION FOR BID - University of Central Missouri

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?